CH2000使用手冊_cover_Eng DELTA_IA MDS_VFD CH2000_UM_EN_20130530 DELTA IA MDS VFD CH2000 UM EN 20130530
User Manual: DELTA_IA-MDS_VFD-CH2000_UM_EN_20130530
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .Page Count: 638
IABU Headquarters
CH2000 Series User Manual
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan3
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 330, Taiwan, R.O.C.
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province,
People's Republic of China (Post code: 215200)
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.
238 Min-Xia Road, Cao-Lu Industry Zone,Pudong, Shanghai,
People's Republic of China
Post code : 201209
TEL: 021-58635678 / FAX: 021-58630003
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.
Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
234-9, Duck Soo Building 7F, Nonhyun-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea 135-010
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd
4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Plot No. 43, Sector – 35, HSIIDC,
Gurgaon122001, Haryana, India
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 91-124-403-6045
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080
Delta Heavy Load Application
Field Oriented Control Drive
CH2000 Series User Manual
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A
Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26-30 Andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-Sao Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: +55 11 3568-3850/FAX: +55 11 3568-3865
Europe
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 15, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851
5012614201
2013-05
C
* We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice.
H
E
1
www.delta.com.tw/ia
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive
is made.
DANGER
Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Please do
not touch the internal circuit and components.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards.
These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Please do not
touch these components or the circuit boards before taking anti-static
measures. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
Ground the AC motor drive using the ground terminal. The grounding method
must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be
installed.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature,
direct sunlight and inflammables.
Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3
CAU TION
directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor
drives.
Even if the 3-phase AC motor is stop, a charge may still remain in the main
circuit terminals of the AC motor drive with hazardous voltages.
The performance of electrolytic capacitor will degrade if it is not charged for a
long time. It is recommended to charge the driver which is stored in no charge
condition every 2 years for 3~4 hours.
Please use adjustable AC power source (ex: AC autotransformer) to charge the
driver gradually to rated voltage, and should not charge it directly with rated
voltage.
Pay attention to the following when transporting and installing this package
(including wooden crate, wood stave and carton box)
1.
If you need to sterilize, deworm the wooden crate or carton box, please
do not use steamed smoking sterilization or you will damage the VFD.
2.
Please use other ways to sterilize or deworm.
3.
You may use high temperature to sterilize or deworm. Leave the
packaging materials in an environment of over 56℃ for 30 minutes.
It is strictly forbidden to use steamed smoking sterilization.
The warranty does
not covered VFD damaged by steamed smoking sterilization.
NOTE
The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most
updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 1-1
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 2-1
CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ............................................................................................................ 3-1
CHAPTER 4 WIRING .................................................................................................................... 4-1
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ................................................................................. 5-1
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS .......................................................................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................. 7-1
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ...................................................................................................... 8-1
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ...................................................................................................... 9-1
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ................................................................................................ 10-1
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS ..........................................................................11-1
CHPAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS .................................................. 12-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES .............................................................................................. 13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................ 14-1
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 15-1
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION................................................................................................... 16-1
CHAPTER 17 HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT AC MOTOR DIRVE ........................................... 17-1
CHAPTER 18 SUGGESTIONS AND ERROR CORRECTIONS FOR STANDARD AC MOTOR
DRIVES........................................................................................................................................ 18-1
CHAPTER 19 APPLICATION OF CH2000………………...………………………………………… 19-1
APPENDIX
EMC STANDARD INSTALLATION GUIDE……...…………………………………APP-I
Application
Control BD V1.10;
Keypad
V1.03;
Publication History
Please include the Issue Edition and the Firmware Version, both shown below, when
contacting technical support regarding this publication.
Issue Edition: 01
Firmware Version: 01.10
Keypad Version: 01.03
Issue date: May 2013
Publication History
Ch01, add information about RFI jumper, IT power and corner grounded TN system.
Ch02, add information about frame D0.
Ch04, add SGND terminal in the wiring diagram of Frame A ~C, Frame D0 and above.
Ch05, add information about frame D0 and main circuit diagram 3
Ch06, add SGND terminal to the removable terminal block
Ch09, add Derating of ambient temperature and altitude
Ch10, add the required time (6 minutes) to charge keypad before using it, maximum RJ45
extension (5m or 16 ft) to use keypad.
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr00-00, add 49: 460V, 425HP, 51: 460V, 475HP ,55: 460V, 600HP,
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr00-04, 40: Torque Command, unit %(L); 41: KWH, unit KWH(J)
42: PID Reference, unit % (h.); 43: PID offset (%) (o.); 44: PID Output Fcmd(Hz) (b.)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr00-05, change factory setting to 1
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr00-25, add more user defined characteristics
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr00-51 ~ Pr00-61 are reserved
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr02-32, change to Brake Delay Time
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr02-34, change to Speed Area Set and change factory setting to 3Hz.
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-56, Release Brake Check
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr02-57, change to FWD Brake Current
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr02-48, change to FWD Brake Frequency
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-59, REV Release Current
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-60, REV Brake Current
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-61, REV Release Frequency
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-62, REV Brake Frequency
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-63, Speed Area Band (P02-34)
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-64, LLACC Mode
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-65, LLACC Active Frequency
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-66, LLACC FWD Active Current
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-67, LLACC REV Active Current
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-68, LLACC Delay Time
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr02-69, LLACC Target Frequency
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr03-35 AFM1 filter output time, add Pr03-36 AFM2 filter output time,
change Pr03-37~Pr003-49 to reserved
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-63, change to Fault Record 1 (Day)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-64, change to Fault Record 1 (Min)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-65, change to Fault Record 2 (Day)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-66, change to Fault Record 2 (Min)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-67, change to Fault Record 3 (Day)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-68, change to Fault Record 3 (Min)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-69, change to Fault Record 4 (Day)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr06-70, change to Fault Record 4 (Min)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr07-00, change to Software Brake Level
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr08-01, change the factory setting to 1.0
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr08-10, change to Sleep Reference Point
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr08-11, change to Wakeup Reference Point
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr08-22, Wakeup Delay Time
Ch11 & Ch12, add Pr08-23, PID Control Flag
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr09-38, change to reserved
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr10-35, change to AMR(Kp)
Ch11 & Ch12, Pr10-26, change to AMR(Ki)
Ch11 & Ch12, add, Pr10-43, PG card version
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1 Receiving and Inspection
After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
1.
Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that
the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2.
Make sure that the voltage for the wiring lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate. Please
install the AC motor drive according to this manual.
3.
Before applying the power, please make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4.
When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2, T/L3”
and output terminals”U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” are correct to prevent drive damage.
5.
When power is applied, select the language and set parameter groups via the digital keypad
(KPC-CC01). When executes trial run, please begin with a low speed and then gradually increases
the speed until the desired speed is reached.
1-2 Nameplate Information
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3 Model Name
1-4 Serial Number
1-2
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-5 RFI Jumper
RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the
interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.
Frame A~C
Screw Torque: 8~10kg-cm (6.9-8.7 lb -in.)
Loosen the screws and remove the RFI-jumper. Fasten the screws back to the original position after
RFI-jumper is removed.
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame D0~H
Remove the RFI-jumper by hands; no screws need to be loosened.
Main power isolated from earth:
If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then
the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage (according
to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.
CAUTION!
1.
When power is applied to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper.
2.
Make sure main power is switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.
3.
The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides,
electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper.
4.
Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.
5.
The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be
separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high.
6.
To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is
installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power
system or a corner grounded TN system.
1-4
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-6 Dimensions
Frame A
VFD007CH23A-21, VFD015CH23A-21, VFD022CH23A-21, VFD037CH23A-21
VFD007CH43A-21, VFD015CH43A-21, VFD022CH43A-21, VFD037CH43A-21, VFD055CH43A-21
VFD007CH4EA-21,VFD015CH4EA-21, VFD022CH4EA-21, VFD037CH4EA-21, VFD055CH4EA-21
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
A1
W
H
D
W1
H1
D1*
S1
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
130.0
250.0
170.0
116.0
236.0
45.8
6.2
22.2
34.0
28.0
[5.12]
[9.84]
[6.69]
[4.57]
[9.29]
[1.80]
[0.24]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame B
VFD055CH23A-21,VFD075CH23A-21,VFD110CH23A-21,
VFD075CH43A-21,VFD110CH43A-21, VFD150CH43A-21,
VFD075CH4EA-21,VFD110CH4EA-21,VFD150CH4EA-21,
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
B1
W
H
D
W1
H1
D1*
S1
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
190.0
320.0
190.0
173.0
303.0
77.9
8.5
22.2
34.0
28.0
[7.48]
[12.60]
[7.48]
[6.81]
[11.93]
[3.07]
[0.33]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-6
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame C
VFD150CH23A-21,VFD185CH23A-21
VFD185CH43A-21, VFD220CH43A-21,VFD300CH43A-21
VFD185CH4EA-21,VFD220CH4EA-21,VFD300CH4EA-21
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
C1
W
H
D
W1
H1
D1*
S1
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
250.0
400.0
210.0
231.0
381.0
92.9
8.5
22.2
34.0
50.0
[9.84]
[15.75]
[8.27]
[9.09]
[15.00]
[3.66]
[0.33]
[0.87]
[1.34]
[1.97]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame D0:
D0: VFD370CH43S-21
D
W
W1
D1
D2
H3
H1
H2
SEE DETAIL A
S2
SEE DETAIL B
Frame
D0-1
S1
S1
DETAIL A
(MOUNTING HOLE)
DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE)
W
H1
D
W1
H2
H3
D1*
D2
S1
S2
280.0
500.0
255.0
235.0
475.0
442.0
94.2
16.0
11.0
18.0
[11.02]
[19.69]
[10.04]
[9.25]
[18.70]
[17.40]
[3.71]
[0.63]
[0.43]
[0.71]
D1*：Flange Mounting
1-8
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame D
D1:
VFD220CH23A-00, VFD300CH23A-00, VFD370CH23A-00
VFD370CH43A-00, VFD450CH43A-00, VFD550CH43A-00, VFD750CH43A-00
D
W
W1
D1
D2
H3
H1
H2
SEE DETAIL A
S2
SEE DETAIL B
S1
S1
DETAIL A
(MOUNTING HOLE)
DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
D1
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
D1*
D2
S1
S2
330.0
-
275.0
285.0
550.0
525.0
492.0
107.2
16.0
11.0
18.0
[10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22]
[0.63]
[0.43]
[0.71]
[12.99]
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
-
-
-
D1*: Flange mounting
1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame D
D2:
VFD220CH23A-21, VFD300CH23A-21,VFD370CH23A-21
VFD370CH43A-21, VFD450CH43A-21,VFD550CH43A-21, VFD750CH43A-21
D
W
W1
D1
H3
H1
D2
H
H2
SEE DETAIL A
S2
SEE DETAIL B
1
1
3
3
2
2
S1
S1
DETAIL A
(MOUNTING HOLE)
DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
D2
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
D1*
D2
S1
S2
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
330.0
688.3
275.0
285.0
550.0
525.0
492.0
107.2
16.0
11.0
18.0
76.2
34.0
22.0
[12.99]
[27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65]
[20.67] [19.37]
[4.22]
[0.63]
[0.43]
[0.71]
[3.00]
[1.34]
[0.87]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-10
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame E
E1: VFD450CH23A-00, VFD550CH23A-00, VFD900CH43A-00, VFD1100CH43A-00
W
D
W1
H3
H1
H2
D1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
E1
W
370.0
[14.57]
H
-
D
W1
300.0 335.0
H1
589
H2
H3
D1*
560.0 528.0 143.0
D2
S1, S2
S3
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
18.0
13.0
18.0
-
-
-
[11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame E
E2: VFD450CH23A-21, VFD550CH23A-21, VFD900CH43A-21, VFD1100CH43A-21
W
D
W1
H3
H1
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
H
H2
D1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
E2
W
H
D
W1
370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0
H1
589
H2
H3
D1*
560.0 528.0 143.0
D2
S1, S2
S3
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
18.0
13.0
18.0
22.0
34.0
92.0
[14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71] [0.87] [1.34] [3.62]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-12
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame F
F1: VFD750CH23A-00, VFD1320CH43A-00
W
W1
D
D1
H3
H2
H1
See Detail A
See Detail B
S3
D2
S1
S2
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
S1
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
W
H
F1
420.0
[16.54]
-
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0
[11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23]
D1*
D2
S1
S2
S3
124.0
[4.88]
18.0
[0.71]
13.0
[0.51]
25.0
[0.98]
18.0
[0.71]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame F
F2: VFD750CH23A-21, VFD1320CH43A-21
W
W1
D
D1
H3
H
H2
H1
See Detail A
S3
See Detail B
D2
1
3
3
2
2
1
2
2
S1
S2
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
S1
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
F2
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0
[16.54] [37.00] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23]
Frame
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
F2
92.0
[3.62]
35.0
[1.38]
22.0
[0.87]
D1*
D2
S1
S2
S3
124.0
[4.88]
18.0
[0.71]
13.0
[0.51]
25.0
[0.98]
18.0
[0.71]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-14
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame G
G1: VFD1600CH43A-00, VFD1850CH43A-00, VFD2200CH43A-00
W
D
H3
H1
H2
W1
S3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
W
H
G1
500.0
[19.69]
-
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
S1
397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0
[15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51]
1-15
S2
S3
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
26.5
[1.04]
27.0
[1.06]
-
-
-
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame G
G2: VFD1600CH43A-21, VFD1850CH43A-21, VFD2200CH43A-21
W
D
H3
H1
H
H2
W1
S3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
G2
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
H3
S1
500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0
[19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51]
1-16
S2
S3
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
26.5
[1.04]
27.0
[1.06]
22.0
[0.87]
34.0
[1.34]
117.5
[4.63]
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame H
H1: VFD2800CH43A-00
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
H1
Frame
H1
W
H
D
W1
W2
700.0 1435.0 398.0 630.0 290.0
[27.56] [56.5] [15.67] [24.8] [11.42]
H5
-
D1
45.0
[1.77]
W3
W4
-
-
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
-
-
-
-
-
1-17
W5
-
W6
-
H1
H2
H3
H4
-
-
ψ1
ψ2
ψ3
-
-
-
1403.0 1346.6
[55.24] [53.02]
S1
S2
S3
13.0 26.5 25.0
[0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame H
H2: VFD2800CH43C-00
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
H2
Frame
H2
W
H
D
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5]
H5
-
W6
-
H1
H2
1729.0 1701.6
[68.07] [66.99]
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
S1
S2
S3
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-18
H3
H4
-
-
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
-
-
-
Chapter 1 Introduction
Frame H
H3 VFD2800CH43C-21
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
H3
Frame
H3
W
H
D
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5]
H5
-
W6
-
H1
H2
1729.0 1701.6
[68.07] [66.99]
H3
H4
-
-
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
S1
S2
S3
Φ1
Φ2
Φ3
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-19
Chapter 1 Introduction
Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01
1-20
Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter 2 Installation
2-1 Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation
NOTE
Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from
adhering to the heat sink
Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one,
use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to
prevent the risk of fire accident.
Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only: normally only
nonconductive pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by condensation is
expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction:
(Blue arrow) inflow
(Red arrow) outflow
Single drive installation
Side-by-side installation(Frame A-C)
(Frame A-H)
Multiple drives, side-by-side installation（Frame A,B,C, G, H）
2-1
Chapter 2 Installation
Multiple drives, side-by-side installation (Frame D0, D, E, F) Install metal separation between the drives.
Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows (Frame A,B,C )
Ta: Frame A~G
Ta*: Frame H
When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation
between the drives to prevent mutual heating. The temperature measured at the fan’s inflow side must be
lower than the temperature measured at the operation side. If the fan’s inflow temperature is higher, use
a thicker or larger size of metal seperature. Operation temperature is the temperature measured at 50mm
away from the fan’s inflow side. (As shown in the figure below)
2-2 Minimum mounting clearance
Frame
A (mm)
B (mm)
C (mm)
D (mm)
A~C
60
30
10
0
D0, D, E, F
100
50
-
0
G
200
100
-
0
H
350
0
0
200 (100, Ta=40℃)
Frame A
Frame B
Frame C
Frame D0
VFD007CH23A-21, VFD015CH23A-21, VFD022CH23A-21, VFD037CH23A-21
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21, VFD015CH43A/4EA-21, VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21, VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
VFD055CH23A-21 ,VFD075CH23A-21, VFD110CH23A-21
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21, VFD110CH43A/4EA-21, VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
VFD150CH23A-21,VFD185CH23A-21
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21, VFD220CH43A/4EA-21, VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
D0: VFD370CH43S-21
2-2
Chapter 2 Installation
Frame D
Frame E
Frame F
Frame G
Frame H
VFD220CH23A-00/21, VFD300CH23A-00/21, VFD370CH23A-00/21
VFD370CH43A-00/21, VFD450CH43A-00/21, VFD550CH43A-00/21, VFD750CH43A-00/21
VFD450CH23A-00/21, VFD550CH23A-00/21, VFD900CH43A-00/21, VFD1100CH43A-00/21
VFD750CH23A-00/21, VFD1320CH43A-00/21
VFD1600CH43A-00/21, VFD1850CH43A-00/21, VFD2200CH43A-00/21
VFD2800CH43A-00, VFD2800CH43C-00, VFD2800CH43C-21
NOTE
1. The minimum mounting clearances stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives frame A to D. A drive fails
to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problem.
NOT E
※
The mounting clearances stated in the figure are for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or
electric box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum
mounting clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air conditioner
to keep surrounding temperature lower than operation temperature. (3)
Refer to parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17, and Pr. 06-55.
※
The following table shows the heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied
by the number the drives.
※
Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment
design and selection.
※
Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.
Power dissipation of AC
motor drive
3
Flow Rate (cfm)
Flow Rate (m /hr)
Power Dissipation
Loss
External
External Internal Total External Internal Total (Heat Internal Total
Air flow rate for cooling
Model No.
VFD007CH23A-21
VFD015CH23A-21
VFD022CH23A-21
VFD037CH23A-21
VFD055CH23A-21
VFD075CH23A-21
VFD110CH23A-21
VFD150CH23A-21
VFD185CH23A-21
VFD220CH23A-21
VFD300CH23A-21
VFD370CH23A-00/23A-21
VFD450CH23A-00/23A-21
VFD550CH23A-00/23A-21
VFD750CH23A-00/23A-21
14
14
10
40
66
58
166
166
179
179
179
228
246
224
_-
14
14
14
12
12
30
30
30
73
73
112
14
14
10
54
80
72
178
178
209
209
209
301
319
346
2-3
24
24
17
68
112
99
282
282
304
304
304
387
418
381
24
24
24
20
20
51
51
51
124
124
190
24
24
17
92
136
136
302
302
355
355
355
511
542
571
sink)
38
59
80
127
223
306
432
499
589
737
1001
1064
1238
1505
1758
27
31
36
46
67
86
121
161
184
216
186
220
267
308
369
-
65
90
116
173
290
392
553
660
773
953
1187
1284
1505
1813
2127
Chapter 2 Installation
Power dissipation of
AC motor drive
3
Flow Rate (cfm)
Flow Rate (m /hr)
Power Dissipation
Loss
External
External Internal Total External Internal Total (Heat Internal Total
Air flow rate for cooling
Model No.
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21
VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21
VFD220CH43A/4EA-21
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
VFD370CH43A/4EA-21
VFD450CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD550CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD750CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD900CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD1100CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD1320CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD1600CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD1850CH43A-00/43A-21
VFD2200CH43A-00/43A-21
14
14
10
14
40
58
58
99
99
99
147
179
186
186
257
223
224
14
14
14
21
21
21
30
30
30
30
73
73
112
14
14
10
14
54
72
72
120
120
120
177
209
216
216
330
296
336
454
454
454
24
24
17
24
68
99
99
168
168
168
248
304
316
316
437
379
381
24
24
24
36
36
36
21
51
51
51
124
124
190
sink)
43
59
76
118
152
260
348
469
445
509
655
863
1162
1384
1878
1878
2336
2680
24
24
17
24
92
124
124
204
204
204
269
355
367
367
561
503
571
771
771
771
VFD2800CH43A-00/43C-00/43C-21
769
1307
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing single drive in a confined
space.
※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should be the
required air volume for single drive X the number of the drives.
68
88
109
160
198
336
441
591
583
667
866
1047
1380
1641
2212
2277
2827
3259
4179
5011
6168
7059
※
※
※
2-4
25
29
33
42
46
76
93
122
138
158
211
184
218
257
334
399
491
579
The heat
dissipation shown
in the chart is for
installing single
drive in a confined
space.
When installing the
multiple drives,
volume of heat
dissipation should
be the heat
dissipated for
single drive X the
number of the
drives.
Heat dissipation for
each model is
calculated by rated
voltage, current
and default carrier.
Chapter 2 Installation
Derating Curve Diagram (Pr.00-16=0)
007~037CH23
105%
055~750CH23
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
007~055CH43
075~300CH43
370~750CH43
900~1100CH43
1320~2800CH43
105%
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
4
5
6
7
8
9
2-5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Chapter 3 Unpacking
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an
extended period of time.
The AC motor drive is packed in the crate. Follows the following step for unpack:
Frame D
Crate 1 (VFDXXXCHXXA-00)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXCHXXA-21)
Loosen the 12 cover screws to open the crate.
Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are 4
iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
Remove the EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and
manual.
Loosen the 8 screws that fastened on the pallet
and remove the wooden plate.
3-1
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet, remove the
wooden plate.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Frame E
Crate 1 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-00)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-21)
Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are 4 Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are
iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
4 iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
3-2
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and
manual.
Loosen the 8 screws on the pallet as shown in the
following figure.
Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet and remove the
wooden plate.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
3-3
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Frame F
Crate 1 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-00)
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-21)
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
6
6
5
5
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and
manual.
Loosen the 5 screws on the pallet
as shown in the following figure.
Loosen the 9 screws on the pallet and remove the
wooden plate.
5
9
4
3
wood plate2
2
wood plate1
1
3-4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
.
Frame G
Crate 1 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-00)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-21)
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
2
2
3
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual.
3
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
3-5
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Loosen the 5 screws as shown in following figure:
Loosen the 9 screws and remove the wooden plate.
3
11 5 4
6
4
12
5
wood plate5
wood plate4
1
98
10
3
7
wood plate1
wood plate2
wood plate3
1
2
2
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Frame H
Crate 1 (VFDXXXXCHXXA-00)
Crate 2 (VFDXXXXCHXXC-00)
Remove the 8 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 8 clips on the side of the crate with a
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
3-6
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual.
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and
manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6
metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in
figure below.
Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6
metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in
figure below.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and remove
the 2 plates, as shown in below. The removed
screws and plates can be used to secure the AC
motor drive from the external.
3-7
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the
next step if this situation does not apply to you.)
Loosen 8 of M8 screws on the both sides and place
the 2 plates that were removed from the last step.
Fix the plates to AC motor drive by fasten 8 of the
M8 screws. (As shown in below)
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation.
Frame H
Crate 3 (VFDXXXCHXXC-21)
Use flathead screwdriver to remove the clips on the side of the crate, 8 clips in total.
3-8
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the cover, remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in below:
Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and removes the 2 plates, as shown in following figure. The
removed screws and plates can be used to secure AC motor drive from the external.
3-9
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Secure the drive from the internal.
Loosen 18 of the M6 screws and remove the top
cover as shown in figure 2. Mount the cover (figure
1) back to the drive by fasten the M6 screws to the
two sides of the drive, as shown in figure 2.
Torque: 35~45kg-cm (30.38~39.06lb-in.)
Secure the drive from the external.
Loosen 8 of the M8 screws on the both sides and
place the 2 plates that were removed from the last
step. Fix the plates to rive by fasten 8 of the M8
screws. (As shown in figure below).
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)
Figure 1
Top cover (Use M12 screws)
Figure 2
Fasten 6 of the M6 screws back to the original position where it was removed. As shown in the figure:
3-10
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
Frame H Secure the drive
(VFDXXXXCHXXA-00)
Screw: M12*6
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-11
Chapter 3 Unpacking
(VFDXXXXCHXXC-00)
Secure the drive from the internal.
Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
(VFDXXXXCHXXC-21)
Secure the drive from the external.
Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-12
Chapter 3 Unpacking
The Lifting Hook
The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below:
E
D
Figure 1
F
Figure 2
G
Figure 4
Figure 5
3-13
Figure 3
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the
lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram.
(Applicable to Frame D~G)
Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the
lifting device is within the specification, as shown
in the following figure. (Applicable to Frame D~G)
(Applicable to Frame H)
(Applicable to Frame H)
3-14
Chapter 3 Unpacking
Weight
VFDXXXXCHXXA-00
VFDXXXXCHXX-00
85kg(187.2 Ibs.)
VFDXXXCHXXA-21
130kg(286.5 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCHXX-21
G1:
VFD1600CH43A-00
VFD1850CH43A-00
VFD2200CH43A-00
G2:
VFD1600CH43A-21
VFD1850CH43A-21
VFD2200CH43A-21
3-15
88kg(193.8 Ibs.)
138kg(303.9 lbs)
Chapter 3 Unpacking
H1: VFD2800CH43A-00
235kg (518.1lbs)
H2: VFD2800CH43C-00;
257kg (566.6lbs)
H3: VFD2800CH43C-21;
263kg (579.8lbs)
3-16
Chapter 4 Wiring
Chapter 4 Wiring
After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read
following precautions before wiring.
Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result
in damage to the equipments. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on the
nameplate (Chapter 1-1).
All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or
electric shock.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made
by the loose screws due to vibration
It is crucial to turn off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation is
made. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages
DANGER
even if the power has been turned off therefore it is suggested for users to measure
the remaining voltage before wiring. For your personnel safety, please do not
perform any wiring before the voltage drops to a safe level < 25 Vdc. Wiring
installation with remaining voltage condition may cause sparks and short circuit.
Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.
When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complies with local
regulation for your personnel safety.
Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1.
Are all connections correct?
2.
Any loosen wires?
3.
Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?
4-1
Chapter 4 Wiring
SGND
4-2
Chapter 4 Wiring
* It provides 3-phase power
Please refer to figure 3
+/D C+
Fuse/NFB( No Fuse Breaker)
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
T(L3)
T(L3)
SA
MC
ON
OFF
-/DCMotor
U(T1)
IM
3~
V(T2)
W(T3)
RB 1
RC 1
MC
Factory setting: NPN (SINK) Mode
Please refer to
FWD/STOP
Figure 2 for wiring
REV/STOP
of NPN mode and
Multi-step 1
PNP mode.
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Factory
Multi-step 4
setting
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Digital Signal Common
NOTE
* MI8 can input 33kHz pulses
* Do NOT apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
power removal safety function
for emergency stop
Digital Signal Common
+24V
RA1
COM
RB1
FWD
Multi-function output terminals
250 Vac/5A (N.O.)
250 Vac/3A (N.C.)
250 Vac/2A (N.O.)
Estimate at COS (0.4 )
REV
RC1
MI1
RA2
250 Vac/1.2A (N.C.)
Estimate at COS (0.4 )
MI3
RB2
MI4
RC2
30V dc/5A (N.O.)
30V dc/3A (N.C.)
MI2
MI5
MI6
DFMMulti-function output
MI7
frequency terminals
30V30mA 100kHz
MI8
DCM
DCM
Multi-function output
MO1 frequency terminals
S1
48V/50mA
Multi-function output
MO2 frequency terminals
48V/50mA
SCM
MCM Multi-function
Photocoupler Output
+10V
5K
3
2
1
0~10 V/ 0~20mA
4~20 mA/0~1 0V
-10~+10 V
Analog Signal Common
-10V /20mA
Modbus RS-485
SGND
CAN BUS
Pin 1~2, 7, 8: reserved
SG+
Pin 3, 6:SGND
Pin 4:SGSG－
Pin 5:SG+
Main circuit (power) terminals
AVI
ACI
AUI
ACM
-10V
8
1
8
1
Option
Slot 1
IO exte nsion ca rd
Option
Slot 2
PG exten sion ca rd
Option
Slot 3
IO &RELA Y
exten sion ca rd
Control terminals
4-3
Shielded leads & Cable
Chapter 4 Wiring
Figure 1
Motor Drive
Power
Adaptor
Power
R/ L 11
R
S/ L 12
S
T/ L 13
T
DC+
R/ L 21
S/ L 22
T/ L 23
DC-
Figure 2
SINK（NPN）/SOURCE（PNP）Mode
Sourc e Mode
w ith internal power (+24VD C)
MI1
MI1
MI2
MI2
~
2
~
1 Sink Mode
with internal power (+24VDC )
MI8
MI8
+2 4V
DCM
COM
COM
DCM
internal c irc ui t
3 Sink Mode
with external power
+2 4V
4 Sourc e Mode
with external power
MI2
MI2
~
MI1
~
MI1
MI8
MI8
+2 4V
+2 4V
COM
COM
DCM
external power +24V
internal c irc ui t
DCM
internal c irc ui t
external pow er +24V
4-4
internal c irc ui t
Chapter 4 Wiring
Figure 3
Function of DC Link
Applicable to Frame E~H
Operation Instruction
1. When RST power is off, please disconnect terminal r and terminal s. (As circled in dotted line,
uninstall the gray section and properly store cable r and cable s. Cable r and cable s are not
available in optional accessories, do not dispose them.)
After terminal r and terminal s are cleared, user may now connect new power source to terminal r
and terminal s. Please connect 220Vac for 220V model and 440 Vac for 440V model.
When the drive power is on, if terminal r and terminal s are not connected to new power source
(220 Vac for 220V model and 440Vac for 440 V model), the digital keypad will display an error
message “ryF”.
2. When DC Link is used as a DC Bus connection (RST power is applied), it is not required to
remove terminal r and terminal s.
NOTE
Common DC Bus can only be applied to the drives with same power range. If in your case the
drives are in different power range, please contact with us (Delta Industrial Automation Business
Unit).
r s
4-5
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Diagram 1
For frame A~C
* Provid e 3-ph ase inpu t power
Brake resis tor
(optio nal)
Jumper
Fus e/NFB(No F use Bre aker)
-
+1
+2
B1
B2
U(T1)
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T3)
For frame A~C
* Provide 3-phase i nput power
F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker)
DC choke
(optional)
J umper
-
+1
+2
R(L1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
Mo tor
IM
3~
Br ak e r es istor
(optional)
B1
B2
U(T 1)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T 3)
Motor
IM
3~
Main Circuit Diagram 2
For frame D0 and above
* Provide 3-phase input power
Fuse/NFB( No Fuse Breaker)
U(T1)
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
Motor
+1/DC+
R(L1)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
W(T3)
5-1
IM
3~
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Diagram 3
Power
Adaptor
Power
Motor Drive
R/ L 11
R
S/ L 12
S
T/ L 13
T
DC+
R/ L 21
S/ L 22
T/ L 23
DC-
Terminals
Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Applicable to frame A~C
+1, +2
Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
jumper for installation.
Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
+1/DC+, -/DC-
(for 230V models: ≦22kW, built-in brake unit)
(for 460V models: ≦30kW, built-in brake unit)
Common DC Bus
B1, B2
Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Main power terminals
Do not connect 3-phase model to one-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3
has no phase-sequence requirement, it can be used upon random
selection.
It is recommend adding a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input
wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating
the protection function of the AC motor drive. Both ends of the MC
should have an R-C surge absorber.
Fasten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks condition
made by the loose screws due to vibration.
Please use voltage and current within the specification.
When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a
current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than
5-2
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping.
Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the
two ends of the shield wire or tube.
Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF.
Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals
or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC motor drives by turning power
ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
Output terminals for main circuit
When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not
use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or
R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta.
DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at
the output terminals of AC motor drives.
Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external
brake resistor and DC circuit
This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the
power factor. For the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object.
Please remove this short-circuit object before connecting to the DC
reactor.
DC rea ct or (o ption al)
+1
+2
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power
transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is
switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit due
to the load changes and the converter section may be damaged. To
avoid this, it is recommend using a serial connected AC input reactor
(6%) at the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current and
improve the input power efficiency.
Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent
deceleration ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or
requiring increased brake torque.
Brak e re sistor
(opt ional)
Brak e re sistor
(optional)
BR
Brak e un it
(o ption al)
VFDB
B2
B1
5-3
+
-
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
The external brake resistor should connect to the terminals (B1, B2) of
AC motor drives.
For those models without built-in brake resistor, please connect external
brake unit and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase
brake torque.
When the terminals +1, +2 and - are not used, please leave the terminals
open.
DO NOT connect [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] or brake resistor directly
to prevent drive damage.
DC+ and DC- are connected by common DC bus, please refer to
Chapter 5-1(Main Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal specification
and the wire gauge information.
Please refer to the VFDB manual for more information on wire gauge
when installing the brake unit.
5-4
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
5-1 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame A
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
VFD007CH23A-21
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD015CH23A-21
12 AWG (3.3mm2)
VFD022CH23A-21
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD037CH23A-21
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD007CH43A-21
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD007CH4EA-21
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
M4
VFD015CH43A-21
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
8 AWG
20kg-cm
2
(17.4 lb-in.)
VFD015CH4EA-21 (8.4mm )
14 AWG (2.1mm2)
2
(1.962Nm)
VFD022CH43A-21
14 AWG (2.1mm )
2
VFD022CH4EA-21
14 AWG (2.1mm )
VFD037CH43A-21
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD037CH4EA-21
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055CH43A-21
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055CH4EA-21
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire
only.
1. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
2. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 2
Figure 1
5-5
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame B
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
VFD055CH23A-21
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD075CH23A-21
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
VFD110CH23A-21
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
M5
35kg-cm
VFD075CH43A-21
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
4 AWG
(30.4 lb-in.)
VFD075CH4EA-21
10 AWG (5.3mm2)
(21.2mm2)
(3.434Nm)
VFD110CH43A-21
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
2
VFD110CH4EA-21
8 AWG (8.4mm )
VFD150CH43A-21
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD150CH4EA-21
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 45 kg-cm [39.0lb-in.] (4.415Nm) (±10%)
1. VFD110CH23A must use 600V, 90℃ wire when surrounding
temperature exceeds 45℃.
2. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
3. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-6
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame C
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
, B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
VFD150CH23A
1 AWG (42.4mm2)
VFD185CH23A
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD185CH43A
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
M8
1/0 AWG
VFD185CH43E
6 AWG (13.3mm2)
80kg-cm
(53.5mm2)
(69.4 lb-in.)
VFD220CH43A
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
(7.85Nm)
VFD220CH43E
4 AWG (21.2mm2)
VFD300CH43A
2 AWG (33.6mm2)
VFD300CH43E
3 AWG (26.7mm2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 90 kg-cm [78.2lb-in.] (8.83Nm) (±10%)
1. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
2. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-7
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Main circuit terminals：
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Max. Wire
Gauge
, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Torque
(±10%)
M8
80kg-cm
VFD370CH43S-21 2/0 AWG 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
(67.4mm2)
(70 lb-in.)
(7.85Nm)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire
only.
Specification of grounding wire: 2AWG*2(33.6mm2*2)
Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Models
Min. Wire Gauge
11 Max.
Figure 1
+0
-2
22 Max.
8.2 Min.
8.2 Min.
Ring lug
32 Max.
Ring lug
13±1.5
Figure 2
13 Min.
13 Min.
Frame D0
Heat Shrink Tube
WIRE
5-8
Heat Shrink Tube
WIRE
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame D
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Max. Wire
Gauge
Models
, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
VFD220CH23A-00
1/0 AWG(53.5mm2)
VFD300CH23A-00
4/0 AWG (107mm2)
VFD370CH23A-00
250MCM (127mm2)
300MCM
VFD370CH43A-00
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
(152mm2)
VFD450CH43A-00
2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
VFD550CH43A-00
3/0 AWG (85mm2)
M8
300MCM (152mm2)
VFD750CH43A-00
200kg-cm
(173 lb-in.)
VFD220CH23A-21
1/0 AWG(53.5mm2)
(19.62Nm)
VFD300CH23A-21
3/0 AWG (85mm2)
2
VFD370CH23A-21
4/0 AWG (107mm )
4/0 AWG.
VFD370CH43A-21
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
2
(107mm )
VFD450CH43A-21
1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD550CH43A-21
2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
4/0 AWG (107mm2)
VFD750CH43A-21
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper
wire only.
2. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
3. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing
that comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-9
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame E
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
Max. Wire
Gauge
Models
, +1/DC+, -/DCTorque
(±10%)
Min. Wire Gauge
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD450CH23A-00
VFD550CH23A-00 300MCM*2 3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
2
VFD900CH43A-00 (152mm *2) 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD1100CH43A-21
2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper
wire only.
2. Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM [152 mm2]
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as shown in
Figure 2.
3. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
4. Figure 3 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
E
Figure 1
Figure 2
17.0MAX.
31MAX.
8. 2M I
26.5MAX.
Figure 3
5-10
28.0MAX.
N.
65.0MAX.
+0
1.
16-4
警
告
錯誤的安裝將會導
致變頻器及選配品
損壞，安裝前請務
必參閱使用手冊後
才進行裝配。
M8
200kg-cm
VFD450CH23A-21
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2) (173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
VFD550CH23A-21 4/0 AWG*2 2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
2
VFD900CH43A-21 (107mm *2) 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD1100CH43A-00
70MAX.
Incorrect installation may
result in damage to option
or inverter.Please refer to
operation manual for
installation instructions.
8.2MIN
.
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCMax. Wire
Gauge
Models
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
3/0AWG*2
(85mm2*2)
M8
4/0 AWG*2
VFD1320CH43A-00
200kg-cm
(107mm2*2)
(173 lb-in.)
4/0 AWG*2
VFD750CH23A-21
(19.62Nm)
(107mm2*2)
4/0 AWG*2
(107mm2*2)
3/0AWG*2
VFD1320CH43A-21
(85mm2*2)
1. VFD750CH23-00/21 installations must use 90℃ wire.
2. For other model, UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃
wire. Use copper wire only.
VFD750CH23A-00
300MCM*2
(152mm2*2)
Specification of grounding wire
：300MCM*2 [152 mm2*2]
Torque: M8 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.) (19.62Nm) (±10%)
5. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
4. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing
that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 2
Figure 1
16-4
+0
3.
31MAX.
70MAX.
Frame F
8.2MI
N.
26.5MAX.
5-11
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Main circuit terminals:
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32
Models
Max. Wire
Gauge
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
VFD1600CH43A-00
300MCM*2 (152mm2*2)
VFD1850CH43A-00
2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)
M8
2
300MCM*4
200kg-cm
VFD2200CH43A-00
3/0AWG*4 (85mm *4)
2
VFD1600CH43A-21 (152mm *4) 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2) (173 lb-in.)
VFD1850CH43A-21
1/0AWG*4 (53.5mm2*4) (19.62Nm)
2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)
VFD2200CH43A-21
Main circuit terminals:
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCMax. Wire
Models
Gauge
VFD1600CH43A-00
VFD1850CH43A-00
VFD2200CH43A-00 500MCM*2
2
VFD1600CH43A-21 (253mm *2)
VFD1850CH43A-21
VFD2200CH43A-21
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
300MCM*2 (152mm2*2)
400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
M12
500MCM*2 (253mm2*2) 408kg-cm
4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2) (354lb-in.)
300MCM*2 (152mm2*2) ( 40Nm)
400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper
wire only.
Use 600V, 90℃wire for VFD2200CH43A-00/21 when the
surrounding temperature is over 45℃.
Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the specification for using ring lug.
1.
2.
3.
Specification for grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*2]
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as shown
in Figure 1
5. Figure 3 and Figure 4 shows the specification of insulated heat
shrink tubing that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure2
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DCT/L31, T/L32,
31MAX.
8.2MI
N.
42.0(MAX.)
12.2(MIN.)
42.0(MAX.)
70.0(MAX.)
26.5MAX.
21.0(MAX.)
16-4
+0
4.
54MAX.
Frame G
Figure 3
Figure 4
5-12
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame H
Main circuit terminals:
R/11,R12,S/21,S/22,T/31,T/32, U/T1,V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+,
-/DCMax. Wire
Gauge
Models
VFD2800CH43A-00
300MCM*4
VFD2800CH43C-00
(152mm2*4)
VFD2800CH43C-21
1.
2.
3.
4.
Min. Wire Gauge
Torque
(±10%)
4/0 AWG*4
(107mm2*4)
3/0 AWG*4
(85mm2*4)
3/0 AWG*4
(85mm2*4)
M8
200kg-cm
(173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper
wire only.
Figure 1 shows the specification for using the ring lug.
Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*4],
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as
shown in figure 1.
Figure 2 shows the specification of heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1
Figure 2
5-13
Chapter 6 Control Terminal
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals,
The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different.
Remove the cover for wiring. Frame A~H
Frame C&D
Frame A&B
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
to remove the cover.
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame E
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward.
Frame F
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
6-1
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
Frame G
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
Frame H
Screw torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
6-2
Chapter 6 Control Terminal
6-1 Specifications of Control Terminal
0-10V
AFM1
0-10V
AFM2
-10-10V
0-20mA
0-10V
AVI
0-20mA
0-20mA
Open
ACI
RC2 RB2 RA2 RC1 RB1 RA1
A
485
0-10V
120
AFM1 +10V AVI ACI MO1 MO2 MCM +24V COM FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7 SGND
B
AFM2 -10V AUI ACM S1 SCM DFM DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 MI8 SG+ SG-
Removable Terminal Block
Wire Gauge: 26~16AWG（0.1281-1.318mm2）,
Torque: (A) 5kg-cm [4.31Ib-in.] (0.49Nm) (As shown in figure above)
(B) 8kg-cm [6.94Ib-in.] (0.78Nm) (As shown in figure above)
Wiring precautions:
Reserves 5mm and properly install the wire into the terminal; fasten the installation by a
slotted screwdriver. If the wire is stripped, sort the wire before install into the terminal.
Flathead screwdriver: blade width 3.5mm, tip thickness 0.6mm
In the figure above, the factory setting for S1-SCM is short circuit. The factory setting for
+24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for more
detail.
Terminals
Terminal Function
Factory Setting (NPN mode)
+24V
COM
Digital control signal common
(Source)
Digital control signal common
Common for multi-function input terminals
(Sink)
FWD
Forward-Stop command
REV
Reverse-Stop command
MI1
~
MI8
+24V5% 200mA
FWD-DCM:
ON forward running
OFF deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
ON reverse running
OFF deceleration to stop
Refer to parameters 02-01~02-08 to program the
multi-function inputs MI1~MI8.
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA≧11Vdc
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA≦11Vdc
Multi-function input 1~8
Digital frequency meter
DFM
DCM
MO1
Regard the pulse voltage as the output monitor signal
Duty-cycle: 50%
Min. load impedance: 1kΩ/100pf
DCM
Max. current: 30mA
Digital frequency signal common Max. voltage: 30Vdc
The AC motor drive releases various monitor signals,
such as drive in operation, frequency attained and
Multi-function Output 1
overload indication, via transistor (open collector).
(photocoupler)
DFM
6-3
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
Terminals
Terminal Function
Factory Setting (NPN mode)
MO1
MO2
Multi-function Output 2
MO2
(photocoupler)
MCM
MCM
RA1
RB1
RC1
RA2
RB2
Multi-function Output Common
Max 48Vdc 50mA
Multi-function relay output 1
(N.O.) a
Multi-function relay output 1
(N.C.) b
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC
Multi-function relay common
Multi-function relay output 2
(N.O.) a
Multi-function relay output 2
(N.C.) b
Inductive Load (COS 0.4):
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 250VAC
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 30VDC
These terminals are to output monitoring signals, such
as drive in operation, frequency attained or overload
indication.
Note: RA1 and RA2 have N.O. and N.C..
RC2
Multi-function relay common
+10V
Potentiometer power supply
Analog frequency setting: +10Vdc 20mA
-10V
Potentiometer power supply
Analog frequency setting: -10Vdc 20mA
Analog voltage input
+10V AVI circuit
AVI
Impedance: 20kΩ
Range: 0~20mA/4~20mA/0~10V =0~Max. Output
AVI
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI switch, factory setting is 0~10V
ACM
internal circuit
Analog current input
ACI
ACI circuit
Impedance: 250Ω
Range: 0~20mA/4~20mA/0~10V= 0 ~ Max. Output
ACI
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
ACI Switch, factory setting is 4~20mA
internal circuit
ACM
Auxiliary analog voltage input
+10
~
- 10V
AUI
AU I cir cuit
Impedance: 20kΩ
Range: -10~+10VDC=0 ~ Max. Output
AUI
Frequency(Pr.01-00)
ACM
internal cir cuit
AFM1
0~10V Max. output current 2mA, Max. load 5kΩ
-10~10V maximum output current 2mA, maximum load 5kΩ
Output current: 2mA max
Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
6-4
Chapter 6 Control Terminal
Terminals
Terminal Function
Factory Setting (NPN mode)
frequency
Range: 0~10V -10~+10V
AFM 1 Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
0~10V Max. output current 2mA, Max. load 5kΩ
0~20mA Max. load 500Ω
Output current: 20mA max
Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V 0/4~20mA
AFM 2 Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
Common for analog terminals
AFM2
ACM
S1
SCM
Analog Signal Common
Power removal safety function for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508
SG+
SG-
Modbus RS-485
SGND
RJ-45
PIN 1,2,7,8 :Reserved
PIN 3, 6: SGND
PIN 4: SG-
PIN 5: SG+
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire
6-2 Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, and ACM)
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as
short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to
terminal ACM can bring improvement.
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
AC M
ferrite core
Wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI8, COM)
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality components
to avoid contact bounce.
Transistor outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)
Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity.
When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber across the coil and
check the polarity.
6-5
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block
1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below).
2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6~8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control
board upward (as 2 in the figure).
6-6
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional accessories
to your drive would substantially improve the drive’s performance. Please select an applicable accessory
according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
230V
Applicable
Motor
HP
kW
1 0.7
2 1.5
3 2.2
5 3.7
7.5 5.5
10 7.5
15 11
20 15
25 18
30 22
40 30
50 37
60 45
75 55
100 75
*1 125%Braking Torque 10%ED
Braking
Torque
(kg-m)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.1
7.5
10.2
12.2
14.9
20.3
25.1
30.5
37.2
50.8
Brake
Unit
*4VFDB
2015*2
2022*2
2022*2
2022*3
2022*4
2022*4
*2 Max. Brake Torque
Resistor value
Total
Min.
Max. Total Peak
*3Braking Resistor series
spec. for each Braking Resistor Braking
Power
for each Brake Unit
AC motor Drive Current (A) Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
80W200Ω
BR080W200*1
1.9
63.3
6
2.3
300W70Ω
BR300W070*1
5.4
47.5
8
3.0
400W40Ω
BR400W040*1
9.5
38.0
10
3.8
1000W20Ω
BR1K0W020*1
19
19.0
20
7.6
1000W20Ω
BR1K0W020*1
19
14.6
26
9.9
1500W13Ω
BR1K5W013*1
29
14.6
26
9.9
BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W8.6Ω
44
13.6
28
10.6
44
8.3
46
17.5
BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W8.6Ω
58
8.3
46
17.5
BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 3000W6.6Ω
75
5.8
66
25.1
BR1K0W5P1*2 2 series 4000W5.1Ω
4800W3.9Ω
97
4.8
80
30.4
BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series
118
3.2
120
45.6
BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 6000W3.3Ω
145
3.2
120
45.6
BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 7200W2.6Ω
9600W2Ω
190
2.1
180
68.4
BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series
BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 12000W1.65Ω
230
1.6
240
91.2
7-1
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
460V
Applicabl
e
Motor
*1 125%Braking Torque 10%ED
*2 Max. Brake Torque
1
2
3
5
7.5
Braking Brake
Torque Unit *3Braking Resistor series for
kW
(kg-m) *4VFD
each Brake Unit
B
0.7
0.5
BR080W750*1
1.5
1.0
BR200W360*1
2.2
1.5
BR400W150*1
3.7
2.5
BR1K0W075*1
5.5
3.7
BR1K0W075*1
Resistor
value spec.
for each AC
motor Drive
80W750Ω
200W360Ω
400W150Ω
1000W75Ω
1000W75Ω
Total
Braking
Current
(A)
1
2.1
5.1
10.2
10.2
10
15
20
25
7.5
11
15
18
5.1
7.5
10.2
12.2
-
1500W43Ω
BR1K0W016*2
BR1K0W016*2
BR1K5W013*2
30
22
14.9
-
BR1K0W016*4
40
30
20.3
-
BR1K0W016*4
50
37
25.1
4045*1
BR1K5W013*4
60
45
55
4030*2
4045*2
BR1K0W5P1*4
75
30.5
37.2
100
75
4045*2
BR1K5W013*4
125
90
60.9
4110*1 BR1K2W015*10
150
110
74.5
4160*1 BR1K5W012*12
175
132
89.4
4160*1 BR1K5W012*12
215
160
108.3
4185*1
BR1K5W012*14
250
185
125.3
4110*2
BR1K2W015*10
300
220
148.9
4160*2
BR1K5W012*12
375
280
189.6
4160*2
BR1K5W012*12
HP
*
1
*2
*3
*4
50.8
BR1K5W043*1
BR1K2W015*4
2000W32Ω
2 series
2000W32Ω
2 series
3000W26Ω
2 series
2 parallel, 4000W16Ω
2 series
2 parallel, 4000W16Ω
2 series
2 parallel, 6000W13Ω
2 series
4 parallel 8000W10.2Ω
2 parallel, 9600W7.5Ω
2 series
2 parallel, 12000W6.5Ω
2 series
5 parallel, 12000W6Ω
2 series
6 parallel, 18000W4Ω
2 series
6 parallel, 18000W4Ω
2 series
7 parallel, 21000W3.4Ω
2 series
5 parallel, 24000W3Ω
2 series
6 parallel, 36000W2Ω
2 series
6 parallel, 36000W2Ω
2 series
Min.
Max. Total Peak
Resistor Braking
Power
Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
190.0
126.7
108.6
84.4
54.3
4
6
7
9
14
3.0
4.6
5.3
6.8
10.6
17.6
24
24
29
47.5
42.2
26.2
23.0
16
18
29
33
12.2
13.7
22.0
25.1
47.5
23.0
33
25.1
47.5
14.1
54
41.0
59
12.7
60
45.6
76
12.7
60
45.6
100
9.5
80
60.8
117
6.3
120
91.2
126
6.3
120
91.2
190
6.0
126
95.8
190
4.0
190
144.4
225
4.0
190
144.4
252
3.4
225
172.1
380
3.0
252
190.5
380
2.0
380
288.8
Calculation for 125% brake toque: (kw)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because there is a resistor limit of power consumption, the longest operation time for 10%ED is 10sec (on: 10sec/ off: 90sec).
Please refer to the Brake Performance Curve for “Operation Duration & ED” vs. “Braking Current”.
For heat dissipation, a resistor of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
50℃; a resistor of 1000W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350℃.
Please refer to VFDB series Braking Module Instruction for more detail on braking resistor.
NOTE
1.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the brake usage ED (%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor to
dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with
temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Recommended cycle time is one minute.
For safety concern, install an overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the
7-2
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive for abnormal protection. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to
protect the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating resulted from unusual
high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to prevent damaging the brake resistor.
NFB
V FD
MC
R/L1
MOTOR
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
S/L2
T/L3
O.L.
MC
+(P)
SA
- (N)
Varistor
IM
+ (P) (N)
T hermal relay
B1
+ (P)
(N)
Brake
O.L.
Resistor
Brake unit
VFDB
XXXX
B2
MASTER
T hermal relay
O.L.
Brake unit
VFDB
XXXX
B2
MASTER
M1 M2
Temperature
switch
M1 M2
Thermal relay
or Temperature Switch
Trip Contact
B1
Brake
Resistor
22Parallel /Serie
Temperature switch
When AC Drive is equipped with a DC reactor, please read user manual to know th
wiring method of input
。 circuit of brake unit +(P).
Do Not connect input circuit -(N) to the neutral point of the power system.
2.
If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not
provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
3.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is
to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.
4.
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the value in the
column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the right-most column in the table). Please read the wiring
information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to operation
5.
This chart is for normal usage; if the AC motor drive is applied for frequent braking, it is suggested to enlarge 2~3 times of
the Watts.
Thermal Relay:
Thermal relay selection is basing on its overload capability. A standard braking capacity for CH2000 is 10%ED (Tripping
time=10s). The figure below is an example of 406V, 110kw AC motor drive. It requires the thermal relay to take 260%
overload capacity in 10s (Host starting) and the braking current is 126A. In this case, user should select a rated 50A thermal
relay. The property of each thermal relay may vary among different manufacturer, please carefully read specification.
60
40
30
20
Tripping time
Second
6.
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.8
1
1.5
2
3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10
Multiple of current setting
7-3
xln (A)
15
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a,
The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC
motor drive.
3-phase 230V
Recommended
Model
non-fuse breaker
(A)
VFD007CH23A-21
VFD015CH23A-21
VFD022CH23A-21
VFD037CH23A-21
VFD055CH23A-21
VFD075CH23A-21
VFD110CH23A-21
VFD150CH23A-21
VFD185CH23A-21
VFD220CH23A-00/21
VFD300CH23A-00/21
VFD370CH23A-00/21
VFD450CH23A-00/21
VFD550CH23A-00/21
VFD750CH23A-00/21
15
20
30
40
50
60
100
125
150
200
225
250
300
400
450
3-phase 460V
Recommended
Model
non-fuse
breaker(A)
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21
VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21
VFD220CH43A/4EA-21
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
VFD370CH43A-00/21
VFD450CH43A-00/21
VFD550CH43A-00/21
VFD750CH43A-00/21
VFD900CH43A-00/21
VFD1100CH43A-00/21
VFD1320CH43A-00/21
VFD1600CH43A-00/21
VFD1850CH43A-00/21
VFD2200CH43A-00/21
VFD2800CH43A-00
VFD2800CH43C-00/21
7-4
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
800
1000
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart
Use only the fuses comply with UL certificated.
Use only the fuses comply with local regulations.
230V Model
VFD007CH23A-21
VFD015CH23A-21
VFD022CH23A-21
VFD037CH23A-21
VFD055CH23A-21
VFD075CH23A-21
VFD110CH23A-21
VFD150CH23A-21
VFD185CH23A-21
VFD220CH23A-00/21
VFD300CH23A-00/21
VFD370CH23A-00/21
VFD450CH23A-00/21
VFD550CH23A-00/21
VFD750CH23A-00/21
460V Model
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21
VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21
VFD220CH43A/4EA-21
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
VFD370CH43A-00/21
VFD370CH43S-21
VFD450CH43A-00/21
VFD550CH43A-00/21
VFD750CH43A-00/21
VFD900CH43A-00/21
VFD1100CH43A-00/21
VFD1320CH43A-00/21
VFD1600CH43A-00/21
VFD1850CH43A-00/21
VFD2200CH43A-00/21
VFD2800CH43A-00
VFD2800CH43C-00/21
Input Current
I (A)
Super Heavy
Duty
6.4
12
16
20
28
36
52
72
83
99
124
143
171
206
245
Input Current I
(A)
Super Heavy
Duty
4.3
5.9
8.7
14
17
20
26
35
40
47
63
74
74
101
114
157
167
207
240
300
380
400
494
Line Fuse
I (A)
Bussmann P/N
15
20
30
50
50
60
110
125
150
200
225
300
300
400
500
JJN-15
JJN-20
JJN-30
JJN-50
JJN-50
JJN-60
JJN-110
JJN-125
JJN-150
JJN-200
JJN-225
JJN-300
JJN-300
JJN-400
JJN-500
Line Fuse
I (A)
Bussmann P/N
10
10
15
20
40
40
50
70
80
100
150
150
150
175
250
300
300
400
500
600
600
800
JJS-10
JJS-10
JJS-15
JJS-20
JJS-40
JJS-40
JJS-50
JJS-70
JJS-80
JJS-100
JJS-150
JJS-150
JJS-150
JJS-175
JJS-250
JJS-300
JJS-300
JJS-400
JJS-500
JJS-600
JJS-600
JJS-800
1000
KTU-1000
7-5
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-4 Line & Load AC Reactors (Chokes)
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may
occur in the power input circuit due to the load changes and the converter section may be
damaged. To avoid this, it is recommend using a serial connected AC input reactor (6%) at
the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current and improve the input power
efficiency.
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase
kW
HP
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
Rated Amps of AC
Reactor
4
8
12
18
25
35
45
55
80
100
130
160
200
250
320
Max. continuous
Amps
6
12
18
27
37.5
52.5
67.5
82.5
120
150
195
240
300
375
480
Inductance（mh）
3% impedance 5% impedance
3
6.5
1.5
3
1.25
2.5
0.8
1.5
0.5
1.2
0.4
0.8
0.3
0.7
0.25
0.5
0.2
0.4
0.15
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.075
0.15
0.055
0.110
0.090
0.150
0.040
0.075
Rated Amps of AC
Reactor
4
4
8
12
18
18
25
35
45
45
80
80
100
130
160
200
250
320
400
400
500
600
Max. continuous
Amps
6
6
12
18
27
27
37.5
52.5
67.5
67.5
120
120
150
195
240
300
375
480
600
600
750
900
Inductance（mh）
3% impedance 5% impedance
9
12
6.5
9
5
7.5
2.5
4.2
1.5
2.5
1.5
2.5
1.2
2
0.8
1.2
0.7
1.2
0.7
1.2
0.4
0.7
0.4
0.7
0.3
0.45
0.2
0.3
0.15
0.23
0.110
0.185
0.090
0.150
0.075
0.125
0.03
0.06
0.03
0.06
0.025
0.05
0.02
0.04
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase
kW
HP
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
280
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
175
215
250
300
375
7-6
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Applications of Line & Load AC Reactors (Chokes)
Connected in input circuit
Application 1
When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power and one of them
is ON during operation.
Problem: When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the
capacitors may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive may be damaged when over
current occurs during operation.
Correct wiring:
M1
reactor
AC motor drive
motor
AC motor drive
motor
AC motor drive
motor
M2
Mn
Application 2
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power.
Problem: Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches ON/OFF.
These spikes may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring:
silicon rectifier
power
reactor
DC
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
Application 3
When the power supply capacity exceeds 10 times of the inverter capacity.
Problem: When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the
charge current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher
rectifier temperature.
Correct wiring
large-capacity
power
reactor
small-capacity
AC motor drive
motor
7-7
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-5 Zero Phase Reactors (Chokes)
RF220X00A
Cable
type
(Note)
Singlecore
Threecore
UNIT: mm (inch)
Recommended
Wire Size (mm2)
AWG mm2
Nominal
(mm2)
Qty.
≤10
≤5.3
≤5.5
1
≤2
≤33.6
≤38
4
≤12
≤3.3
≤3.5
1
≤1
≤42.4
≤50
4
Diagram A
Wiring Wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The reactor
Method must be placed at the AC motor drive output side as
close as possible.
Diagram
A
Diagram
B
Diagram
A
Diagram
B
NOTE
600V insulated cable wire
1. The table above gives approximate wire size for
Diagram B
Put the wires/cables through the middle of the 4 cores
that line in parallel.
the zero phase reactors but the selection is
ultimately governed by the type and the
diameter of the cable, i.e. the cable diameter
must small enough to go through the center of
the zero phase reactor.
2. When wiring, do not goes through the earth
core. It only needs to pass through the motor
cable or the power cable.
3. When a long motor cable for output is used, a
zero phase reactor may be necessary to reduce
the radiated emission.
7-8
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-6 DC Reactors (Chokes)
230V DC Choke
Input Voltage
kW
HP
Nominal
Saturation
Amperes (rms) Current (rms)
230Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
5.65
9.04
12.43
19.21
28.25
37.29
55.37
73.45
84.75
101.7
11.3
18.08
24.86
38.42
56.5
74.58
110.74
146.9
169.5
203.4
kW
HP
Nominal
Saturation
Inductance 3% Inductance 5%
（mh）
（mh）
3.660
2.288
1.664
1.077
0.732
0.555
0.374
0.282
0.244
0.203
6.10
3.81
2.77
1.80
1.22
0.93
0.62
0.47
0.41
0.34
460V DC Choke
Input Voltage
Amperes (rms) Current (rms)
460Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
Inductance 3% Inductance 5%
（mh）
（mh）
0.75
1
3.39
6.78
12.202
20.34
1.5
2
4.52
9.04
9.151
15.25
2.2
3
6.78
13.56
6.101
10.17
3.7
5
10.17
20.34
4.067
6.78
4
5
11.865
23.73
3.486
5.81
5.5
7.5
13.56
27.12
3.050
5.08
7.5
10
20.34
40.68
2.034
3.39
11
15
27.12
54.24
1.525
2.54
15
20
36.16
72.32
1.144
1.91
18.5
25
42.94
85.88
0.963
1.61
22
30
50.85
101.7
0.813
1.36
30
40
67.8
135.6
0.610
1.02
7-9
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-7 EMI Filter
Model
VFD007CH23A-21;
VFD015CH23A-21;
VFD022CH23A-21;
VFD037CH23A-21;
VFD055CH23A-21;
VFD075CH23A-21;
VFD110CH23A-21;
VFD150CH23A-21;
VFD185CH23A-21;
VFD220CH23A-21;
VFD300CH23A-21;
VFD370CH23A-21;
VFD370CH43S-21
VFD450CH23A-21;
VFD550CH23A-21;
VFD750CH23A-21;
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21
VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21
VFD220CH43A/4EA-21
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
VFD370CH43A-00/21
VFD450CH43A-00/21
VFD550CH43A-00/21
VFD750CH43A-00/21
VFD900CH43A-00/21
VFD1100CH43A-00/21
VFD1320CH43A-00/21
VFD1600CH43A-00/21
Applicable
Reference Website
EMI Filter
KMF325A
KMF370A
KMF3100A
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF325A.pdf
KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 25 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF370A.pdf
KMF370A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 70 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF3100A.pdf
KMF3100A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 100 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3150.pdf
MIF3150
MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance
150 Amps
MIF3400B
KMF318A
KMF350A
KMF370A
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3400.pdf
MIF3400 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 340 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF318.pdf
KMF318A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 18 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF350.pdf
KMF350A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 50 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/KMF370A.pdf
KMF370A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 70 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3150.pdf
MIF3150
MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance
150 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3400.pdf
MIF3400B MIF3400B Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High
Performance 400 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3800curves.pdf
VFD1850CH43A-00/21 MIF3800 &
MIF3800 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 800 Amps
VFD2200CH43A-00/21 Ring Cores *3
Ring Core Part No. : T102-15
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/Data/Product_Downloads/MIF3800curves.pdf
MIF3800 &
VFD2800CH43A-00
MIF3800 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 800 Amps
VFD2800CH43C-00/21 Ring Cores *2
Ring Core Part No. : T102-15
7-10
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
EMI Filter Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will
interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct
installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best
interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired
according to user manual:
EN61000-6-4
EN61800-3: 1996
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.
Please wire as short as possible.
Metal plate should be grounded.
The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area
should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to observe the
following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum
contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle
the plate with grounding
Figure 1
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2
7-11
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
The length of motor cable
1. Cable length suggestion for Drive in full load
a. Non-shielded cables:
For 5.5kW (7.5HP) model and below, max. cable length between the drive and motor is 328ft
(100m). For 7.5kW (10HP) model and above is 656ft (200m).
b. Shielded cables:
For 5.5kW (7.5HP) model and below, max. cable length between the drive and motor is 164ft
(50m). For 7.5kW (10HP) model and above is 328ft (100m).
If cable length is longer than the suggested above, 3-phase load reactor is required.
2. Effect of Surge voltages for motor and suggestion
When motor is driven by an AC motor drive with PWM control, the motor terminals will experience
surge voltages easily due to power transistors operation of AC motor drive and cable capacitance.
When the motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce
insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
a. Use a motor with enhanced insulation (Please refer to following charts)
b. Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
c. The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as
possible (10 to 20 m or less)
For drive power range≧7.5kW (10HP)
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20m)
1312 ft (400m)
328 ft (100m)
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m)
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20m)
328 ft (400m)
165 ft (100m)
328 ft (400m)
165 ft (400m)
328 ft (400m)
Motor Insulation level
Input 460VAC
Input 230VAC
For drive power range≦5.5kW (7.5HP)
Motor Insulation level
Input 460VAC
Input 230VAC
7-12
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-8 Digital Keypad
7-8-1 KPC-CE01
A : LED Disp lay
D ispla y freq uen cy, cu rre nt, vo ltag e and erro r etc.
: Status Indi cator
F: Fre que ncy C omma nd
H: Outp ut Frequ ency
U: User De fine d Uni ts
ERR: CAN Erro r Ind icator
RU N: CAN Ru n Indi ca tor
C : Function
(Re fer to the chart foll ow s for deta il de scripti on )
Key
Description
ESC
ESC Key
Press ESC key to return to the previous page. It also functions as a return to last category key in the sub-menu.
Menu Key
Press MENU key under any condition will return to the main MENU.
Menu content:
1. Parameter Detail
3. Keypad locked
2. Copy Parameter
4. PLC Function
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
HAND ON Key
1. HAND key will operates according to the parameter settings when the source of HAND master frequency
command and the source of HAND operation command is properly set,. The factory setting of the source
command for frequency and operation are from the digital keypad .
2. Press HAND key in stop status, the drive setting switches to the parametr setting of HAND. Press HAND key
in during operation, the drive will come to stop then switches to the parameter setting of HAND.
3. When process complete: H/A LED ON.
Auto Operation Key
1. AUTO function executes according to the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and AUTO
operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is 4-20mA).
2. Press the ATUO key in stop status, the drivel switches to auto-setting. Press the auto key during operation
status, the drivel will come to stop and switch to auto-setting.
3. When process complete: H/A LED is OFF
Operation Direction Key
1. FWD/REV key controls the operation direction but will NOT activate the drive. FWD: forward, REV: reverse.
2. The drive operates in the direction as shown by the LED light.
Start Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. Press the RUN key, the drive will accord the start-up setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. RUN key can be pressed for many times when the drive is in stop status.
4. “HAND” mode is enabled only when the source of operation command is by keypad.
Stop Key.
1. STOP key has the highest priority in command.
2. Press STOP key, the drive will come to stop under any condition.
3. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive when faults occur. If the RESET key is not responding, check
MENU Fault Records and check the most recent fault.
MENU
ENTER
HAND
AUTO
FWD/REV
RUN
STOP
7-13
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-8-2 Dimension
7-8-3 RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad
Part #
Description
CBC-K3FT
3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT
5 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K7FT
7 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 2.1 m)
CBC-K10FT
10 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 3 m)
CBC-K16FT
16 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 4.9 m)
7-14
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-9 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)
For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01).
Wall Mounting
Embedded Mounting
accessories*1
accessories*2
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
Normal cutout dimension
Panel
1.2mm
1.6mm
2.0mm
thickness
A
66.4 [2.614]
B
110.2 [4.339] 111.3 [4.382] 112.5 [4.429]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP56)
Panel
1.2mm
1.6mm
2.0mm
thickness
A
66.4 [2.614]
B
110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
7-15
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-16
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-10 Conduit Box Kit
Appearance
Frame D0
Frame D
Applicable model:
Applicable models:
VFD370CH43S-21
VFD220CH23A-00/21; VFD300CH23A-00/21; VFD370CH23A-00/21;
VFD370CH43A-00/21; VFD450CH43A-00/21; VFD550CH43A-00/21;
VFD750CH43A-00/21;
Model number『MKC-D0N1CB』
Model number『MKC-DN1CB』
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Rubber 28
3 Rubber 44
4 Rubber 73
5 Conduit box cover
6 Conduit box base
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Rubber 28
3 Rubber 44
4 Rubber 88
5 Conduit box cover
6 Conduit box base
Qty.
4
2
2
2
1
1
Qty.
4
2
2
2
1
1
Frame E
Frame F
Applicable models:
Applicable models:
VFD450CH23A-00/21; VFD550CH23A-00/21;
VFD900CH43A-00/21; VFD1100CH43A-00/21;
VFD750CH23A-00/21;
VFD1320CH43A-00/21;
Model number『MKC-EN1CB』
Model number『MKC-FN1CB』
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Bushing Rubber 28
3 Bushing Rubber 44
4 Bushing Rubber 100
5 Conduit box cover
6 Conduit box base
Qty.
6
2
4
2
1
1
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Bushing Rubber 28
3 Bushing Rubber 44
4 Bushing Rubber 100
5 Conduit box cover
6 Conduit box base
7-17
Qty.
8
2
4
2
1
1
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame G
Applicable models:
VFD1600CH43A-00/21; VFD1850CH43A-00/21;
VFD2200CH43A-00/21
Model number『MKC-GN1CB』
ITEM
Description
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L
2 Bushing Rubber 28
3 Bushing Rubber 44
4 Bushing Rubber 130
5 Conduit box base
6 Conduit box cover
Qty.
12
2
2
3
1
1
7-18
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Conduit Box Installation
Frame D
1.
Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in)
2.
Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3.
Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
4.
Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in).
7-19
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame E
1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12~ 15 kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw
torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque:12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)』
7-20
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame F
1.
Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in).
4
1
2
3
2.
Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
5
7
8
6
7-21
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
3.
Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
12
15
9
10
13
14
16
11
Frame G
1.
On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover
screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
4
1
2
3
Remove the top cover and loosen the screws. Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
7-22
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
2.
Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in); Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)
Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in).
7-23
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure).
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
5
7-24
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-11 Fan Kit
Frame A
Model『MKC-AFKM』
Applicable Model:
VFD015CH23A-21; VFD022CH23A-21; VFD037CH23A-21;
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21; VFD022CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
Frame A
Model『MKCH-AFKM』
Applicable Model:
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
Frame B
Model『MKC-BFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD055CH23A-21; VFD075CH43A/43E-21
Frame B
Model 『MKC-BFKM2』
Applicable Model:
VFD075CH23A-21; VFD110CH23A-21; VFD110CH43A/43E-21;
VFD150CH43A/43E-21
Frame B
Model 『MKC-BFKB』
Applicable Model:
VFD055CH23A-21; VFD075CH23A-21; VFD110CH23A-21;
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21; VFD110CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
7-25
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame C
Model 『MKC-CFKB1』
Applicable Model
VFD150CH23A-21; VFD185CH23A-21
Frame C
Model 『MKC-CFKB2』
Applicable Model:
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21; VFD220CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
Frame D0
Model『MKC-D0FKM』
Model 『MKC-DFKB』
Model 『MKC-DFKM』
Model 『MKC-DFKB』
Applicable Model:
VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U;
Frame D
Applicable Model:
VFD220CH23A-00/21;VFD300CH23A-00/21;
VFD370CH23A-00/21
VFD370CH43A-00/21;VFD450CH43A-00/21;
VFD550CH43A-00/21;VFD750CH43A-00/21
Frame E
Model 『MKC-EFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD450CH23A-00/21; VFD550CH23A-00/21
7-26
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame E
Model『MKC-EFKM2』
Applicable Model:
VFD900CH43A-00/21; VFD1100CH43A-00/21
Frame E
Model 『MKC-EFKB』
Applicable Model:
VFD450CH23A-00/21; VFD550CH23A-00/21
VFD900CH43A-00/21; VFD1100CH43A-00/21
Frame F
Model 『MKC-FFKM』
Applicable Model:
VFD750CH23A-00/21; VFD1320CH43A-00/21
Frame F
Model 『MKC-FFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD750CH23A-00/21; VFD1320CH43A-00/21
7-27
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame G
Model 『MKC-GFKM』
Applicable Model:
VFD1600CH43A-00/21; VFD1850CH43A-00/21;
VFD2200CH43A-00/21
Frame H
Model 『MKC-HFKM』
Applicable Model:
VFD2800CH43A-00; VFD2800CH43C-00/21
7-28
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Fan Removal
Frame A
Applicable model:
VFD015CH23A-21;VFD022CH23A-21;VFD037CH23A-21;VFD015CH43A/4EA-21;VFD022CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21; VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
1.
Press the tabs on both side of the fan to successfully
remove the fan. (The arrow)
2.
Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.
(As shown below.)
Frame B
Applicable model:
VFD055CH23A-21; VFD075CH23A-21; VFD110CH23A-21; VFD075CH43A/43E-21; VFD110CH43A/43E-21;
VFD150CH43A/43E-21
1.
Press the tab on both side of the fan to successfully
remove the fan.
2.
Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.
Frame B&C
Applicable model:
VFD055CH23A-21; VFD075CH23A-21; VFD110CH23A-21; VFD150CH23A-21; VFD185CH23A-21; VFD075CH43A/4 EA -21;
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21; VFD150CH43A/4 EA -21; VFD185CH43A/4 EA -21; VFD220CH43A/4 EA -21; VFD300CH43A/4 EA -21
Disconnect the power terminal by slotted screwdriver to remove the fan cover.
7-29
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame C
Applicable model
Single fan applicable model: VFD185CH43A/4EA; VFD220CH43A/4EA; VFD300CH43A
Dual fans applicable model: VFD150CH23A; VFD185CH23A; VFD220CH23A; VFD300CH43EA
Step 1. (Figure 1) Use slotted screwdriver to remove cover
Figure 1
Step 2. (Figure 2) Disconnect the fan power，pull out the fan after loosening screws. The label of fan should face towards drive inside. Screw
torque 10~12kgf-cm (8.7~10.4in-lbf)
Figure 2
7-30
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame D0
Applicable model
VFD370CH43S-21
1.
(Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and 2, press the on the right
2.
and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction the
arrows indicate. Press on top of digital keypad KPC-CE01
to properly remove the keypad. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm
(8.6~10.4in-lbf)』
(Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tab on the right and
the left to remove the cover. Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm
(5.2~6.9in-lbf).
3
1
2
3.
Figure 1
Loosen screw 4 and disconnect the fan power. Screw
torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
Figure 2
For heat sink fan:
Step1. (Figure 4) Loosen the screws. Screw
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Step2. Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan.
(As shown in the larger picture)
4
1
2
3
4
Figure 3
Figure 4
7-31
torque:
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD220CH23A-00/21;VFD300CH23A-00/21;VFD370CH23A-00/21;VFD370CH43A-00/21;VFD450CH43A-00/21;
VFD550CH43A-00/21;VFD750CH43A-00/21
4.
(Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the on the
right and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction
the arrows indicate. Press on top of digital keypad
KPC-CE01 to properly remove the keypad. Screw torque:
10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
5.
(Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 and screw 4, press the tab on
the right and the left to remove the cover. Screw torque:
6~8kg-cm (5.2~6.9in-lbf).
3
4
1
2
Figure 2
6.
Figure 1
(Figure 3) Loosen screw 5 and disconnect the fan power.
Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
5
For heat sink fan
Step1. (Figure 4) Loosen the screws. Screw
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Step2. Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan.
(As shown in the larger picture)
1
2
Figure 3
3
4
Figure 4
7-32
torque:
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame E
Applicable model:
VFD450CH23A-00/21; VFD550CH23A-00/21; VFD900CH43A-00/21; VFD1100CH43A-00/21
Loosen screw 1~4 (as shown in the figure below), and
disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Loosen screw 1~4(as shown in the figure below), and
disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Loosen screw 1 and screw 2 (as shown in the figure below), and disconnect fan power before removing the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
1
2
Frame F
Applicable model
VFD750CH23A-00/21; VFD1320CH43A-00/21
Fan model『MKC-FFKM』
Loosen the screws and removes the fan (as shown in figure below). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in』
1
4
3
2
7-33
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Fan model 『MKC-FFKB』
(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes (2) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes
the cover. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
the cover. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in).
7
5
8
4
6
1
3
2
(3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (As shown in the figure below)
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
11
10
9
9
10
11
Frame G
Applicable model
VFD1600CH43A-00/21; VFD1850CH43A-00/21; VFD2200CH43A-00/21
Fan model『MKC-GFKM』
(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and remove
the cover. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
(2) For 1~8 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws
Screw torque:35~40kg-cm (30.4~34.7lb-in)
For 9~10 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws and
removes the cover.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
9
4
10
1
6
3
7
8
2
1
4
2
3
5
7-34
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
(3) Loosen screw 1, 2, 3 and remove the protective ring (as
shown in figure below) Screw torque: 15~20kg-cm
(12.2~13.9Ib-in).
(4) Lift the fan by putting your finger through the protective
holes, as indicates in 1 and 2 on the figure.
4
1
5
2
1
3
2
.
Frame H
Applicable model
VFD2800CH43A-00; VFD2800CH43C-00/21
Fan model 『MKC-HFKM』
(1) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.
Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in)
(2) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
4
6
3
1
2
7-35
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
(3) Disconnect the fan.
(4) Loosen the screw and remove the fan. Make sure fan power
is properly disconnected before removal. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
15
15
14
13
7-36
18
17
16
14
13
18
17
16
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-12 Flange Mounting Kit
Applicable Models, Frame A~F
Frame A
『MKC-AFM1』
Applicable model
VFD015CH23A-21; VFD022CH23A-21; VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
Screw 1 *4
M3*P 0.5; L=6mm
Screw 2*8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 1*1
Accessories
Accessories 3*2
2*2
『MKC-AFM』
Applicable model
VFD007CH23A-21; VFD007CH43A/4EA-21; VFD015CH43A/4EA-21; VFD037CH23A-21; VFD037CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD055CH43A/4EA-2
Screw *8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 2*2
Accessories t 3*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-37
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
『MKC-AFM1』Installation
1.
Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
2.
Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
3.
Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
4.
Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 2&3 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
7-38
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
『MKC-AFM』 Installation
1.
Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
(As shown in following figure)
2.
Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
(As shown in following figure)
3.
Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in following figure)
7-39
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame B
『MKC-BFM』
Applicable model
VFD055CH23A-21;VFD075CH23A-21;VFD110CH23A-21;VFD075CH43A/4EA-21;VFD110CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25;
Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2
Accessories
2*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-40
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
『MKC-BFM』Installation
1.
Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 40~45kg-cm (34.7~39.0Ib-in).
(As shown in the following figure)
2.
Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-41
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame C
『MKC-CFM』
Applicable model
VFD150CH23A-21; VFD185CH23A-21; VFD185CH43A/4EA-21; VFD220CH43A/4EA-21; VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25;
Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2
Accessories 2*2
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-42
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
『MKC-CFM』Installation
1.
Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 50~55kg-cm (43.4~47.7Ib-in).
(As shown in the following figure)
2.
Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessories 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-43
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD220CH23A-00/21; VFD300CH23A-00/21; VFD370CH23A-00/21; VFD370CH43A-00/21;
VFD450CH43A-00/21; VFD550CH43A-00/21; VFD750CH43A-00/21
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-44
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame D0&D&E
1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown
in the following figure).
the following figure).
3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 30~32kg-cm (26.0~27.8Ib-in).
4. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 30~32kg-cm (26.0~27.8Ib-in).
5. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
6. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
7.
Place 4 screws (M10) through Fixture 1&2 and the
plate then fasten the screws. (as shown in the
following figure)
Screw torque: 200~240kg-cm (173.6~208.3Ib-in).
7-45
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame E
Applicable model
VFD450CH23A-00/21; VFD550CH23A-00/21; VFD900CH43A-00/21; VFD1100CH43A-00/21
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-46
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame F
Applicable model
VFD750CH23A-00/21; VFD1320CH43A-00/21
Cutout dimension
Unit: mm [inch]
7-47
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
Frame F
1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
1
1
6
5
6
5
4
3
2
12
7
4
3
2
12
7
8
FIXTURE 2
8
9
FIXTURE2
10
9
11
10
11
3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1.
4.
Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
13
19
18
17
13
19
18
17
20
20
26
16
26
14
16
14
15
25
15
25
24
24
FIXTURE1
FIXTURE1
23
23
21
22
5.
Place 4 of the M12 screws through Fixture 1&2 and
plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 300~400kg-cm (260~347Ib-in).
Screws M12*4
7-48
21
22
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-13 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530
Warning
Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/control/cm/control_cm_main.asp
1. Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and complex
setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2kbps and auto switching direction of data transmission. In
addition, it adopts RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of
plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABU products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
(Application & Dimension)
2. Specifications
Power supply
No external power is needed
Power consumption
1.5W
Isolated voltage
2,500VDC
Baud rate
75, 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
RS-485 connector
RJ-45
USB connector
A type (plug)
Compatibility
Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length
RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission
7-49
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
RJ-45
PIN
Description
PIN
Description
1
Reserved
5
SG+
2
Reserved
6
GND
3
GND
7
Reserved
4
SG-
8
+9V
3. Preparations before Driver Installation
Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file
(IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530.
Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
You should have a folder marked SiLabs under drive C. c:\ SiLabs
7-50
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
4. Driver Installation
After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps.
7-51
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
5. LED Display
1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
7-52
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Chapter 8 Option Cards
Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion.
To prevent drive damage during installation, please removes the digital keypad and the cover before
wiring. Refer to the following instruction.
8-1 Removed key cover
Frame A&B&C
Screw Torque: 8~10Kg-cm [6.9~8.7lb-in.]
Frame D
Screw Torque: 8~10Kg-cm [6.9~8.7lb-in.]
Frame E
Slightly lift the cover then pull to remove. Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
8-1
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Frame F
Screw Torque: 12~ 15 Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame G
Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame H
Screw Torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.]
8-2
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
1
RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad
KPC-CC01; KPC-CE01
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on
KPC-CE01.
1
3
4
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on
optional accessory RJ45 extension cable.
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
2
2 Communication extension card (Slot 1)
CMC-MOD01;
CMC-PD01;
CMC-DN01;
CMC-EIP01;
EMC-COP01;
3 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A;
EMC-D611A;
EMC-R6AA;
EMC-BPS01;
4 PG Card (Slot 2)
EMC-PG01L;
EMC-PG01O;
EMC-PG01U;
EMC-PG01R;
8-2 Screws Speciation for option card terminals:
EMC-D42A
EMC-D611A
EMC-BPS01
EMC-R6AA
2
Wire gauge 24~12AWG（0.205~3.31mm ）
Torque
4Kg-cm [3.47Ib-in]
2
Wire gauge 24~16AWG（0.205~1.31mm ）
Torque
6Kg-cm [5.21Ib-in]
EMC-PG01L
EMC-PG01O
EMC-PG01R
2
Wire gauge 30~16AWG（0.0509~1.31mm ）
Torque
2Kg-cm [1.74Ib-in]
EMC-PG01U
8-3
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-3 EMC-D42A
Terminals
COM
MI10~ MI13
I/O Extension
Card
MO10~MO11
MXM
Descriptions
Common for Multi-function input terminals
Select SINK（NPN）/SOURCE（PNP）in J1 jumper / external power
supply
Refer to parameters 02-26~02-29 to program the multi-function
inputs MI10~MI13.
Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24Vdc±5% 200mA,
5W
External power +24VDC: max. voltage 30VDC, min. voltage
19VDC, 30W
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA
Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
Duty-cycle: 50%
Max. output frequency: 100Hz
Max. current: 50mA
Max. voltage: 48Vdc
Common for multi-function output terminals MO10,
MO11(photocoupler)
Max 48VDC 50mA
8-4 EMC-D611A
Terminals
AC
Descriptions
AC power Common for multi-function input terminal (Neutral)
Refer to Pr. 02.26~ Pr. 02.31 for multi-function input selection
Input voltage: 100~130VAC
I/O Extension
Card
Input frequency: 47~63Hz
MI10~ MI15
Input impedance: 27Kohm
Terminal response time:
ON: 10ms
OFF: 20ms
8-5 EMC-R6AA
Terminals
Descriptions
Refer to Pr. 02.36~ Pr. 02.41 for multi-function input selection
Resistive load:
5A(N.O.) /250Vac
Relay Extension
Card
RA10~RA15
RC10~RC15
5A(N.O.) /30Vdc
Inductive load (COSPHI 0.4)
2.0A(N.O.) /250Vac
2.0A(N.O.) /30Vdc
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive is in
operation, frequency attained or overload indication.
8-4
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-6 EMC-BPS01
Terminals
Input
Voltage
DC 24V±5%
Input
Current
Below 0.5A
Install at the Slot 3 on the control board. Insert directly to the slot as
External
24V
Power Supply
GND
Installation
shown in the image on the left
Function
1) Read and write the parameters.
2) Display keypad’s screen. Buttons on the keypad are functional
except the RUN button.
3) Display warnings on the keypad’s screen.
4) Enable analog input. (But the RUN signal is disable)
5) Keep network communication
6) Multi-input (FWD,REV,MI1~MI8) requires external power supply 24V
to wok.
7) Multi-output RY1, RY2 are disable. .
Terminals
24V-GND
Input power: 24V±5%
Maximum input current:0.5A
Note:
1.
Do not connect control terminal +24V (Digital control signal
common: SOURCE) directly to the EMC-BPS01input terminal
24V.
2.
Do not connect control terminal GND directly to the EMC-BPS01
input terminal GND.
8-5
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-7 EMC-PG01L
Terminal description
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
VP
PG1
DCM
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to
switch +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
Common for power and signal
Encoder input signal (Line Driver)
A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A2, /A2,
Open Collector input voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
PG2
B2, /B2
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function:
1~255 times
AO, /AO,
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
BO,
/BO,
Max. output current: 50mA
PG OUT
ZO, /ZO,
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
SG,
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine or
PLC to make the output signal to be the common pivot point.
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5~15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
5V
Recommended pull-up resistor: above100~220,
1/2W
12V
Recommended pull-up resistor: above 510~1.35k,
1/2W
24V
Recommended pull-up resistor, above1.8k~3.3k,
1/2W
PG2 Wiring Diagram
Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
AB2
8-6
Ext Ground
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Wiring Diagram
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage
AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
Cable length: Less than 100m
2
Jumper
Braking resistor(optional)
No-Fuse Breaker
NFB
-
B2
U
R/L1
U/T1
S
S/L2
V/T2
V
T
T/L3
W/T3
W
R
Motor
M
3~
VP
A1
B1
Z1
DCM
PG
A1
B1
Z1
LIne driver
Reflective Encoders
EH-PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Phase difference 90
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
SG
A2
A2
B2
B2
EMC-PG01L
8-7
AO
AO
BO
BO
Phase difference 90
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-8 EMC-PG01O
Terminal descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
VP
DCM
Common for power and signal
PG1
Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A1, /A1, B1,
/B1, Z1, /Z1
Open Collector Input Voltage: +5V/+12V
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
Pulse Input Signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
PG2
A2, /A2,
B2, /B2
V+, V+
V-
Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
Needs external power source for PG OUT circuit.
Input voltage of power:+12V ~ +24V
Input voltage for the negative side
PG Card Output signals has division frequency function: 1~255 times.
On the open collector’s output signal, add a high-pull resistor on the external
A/O, B/O, Z/O power V+ ~ V- (e.g. power of PLC) to prevent the interference of the receiving
signal. Max. 。[Three pull-up resistor are included in the package (1.8kW/1W)]
Max. output frequency: 300KP/Sec
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5~15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
PG OUT
5V
12V
24V
Recommended pull-up resistor: above100~220, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor: above 510~1.35k, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor, above1.8k~3.3k, 1/2W
PG1 Wiring Diagram
Vp
Vp
Ext Pull
high RES
ABZ1
4.7kΩ
ABZ1
ABZ1
DCM
Vp
4.7kΩ
ABZ1
DCM
When wiring in this way, if there a signal on EMC-PG01's
A1, B1 and Z1,LED lights is OFF.
if A1, B1 and Z1 have no signals, LED lights is ON.
8-8
DCM
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
PG2 Wiring Diagram
Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
Ext Ground
AB2
Wiring Diagram
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage
AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
Cable length: Less than 100m
2
Jumper
Braking resistor (optional)
R
No - Fuse Breaker
NFB
S
T
- +1 +/2 B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
U
S/L2
V/T2
V
T/L3
W/T3
W
VP
A1
B1
Z1
DCM
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
V+
V+
A/O
B/O
Z/O
V-
A2
A2
B2
B2
EMC - PG01O
8-9
M
3~
PG
Line driver/
Open Collector
A1
B1
Z1
EH-PLC
-
Motor
Reflective Encoders
EH-PLC
R
R
R
+24V
X0
X1
X2
S/S
24G
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-9 EMC-PG01U
FJMP1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
VP
PG1
DCM
Descriptions
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to
switch +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
Common for power and signal
Encoder input signal (Line Driver)
A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
U1, /U1, V1, /V1, W1, /W1 Encoder input signal
PG2
A2, /A2,
B2, /B2
PG OUT
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO,
/ZO, SG
Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
PG Card Output signals.
It has division frequency function: 1~255 times
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5Vdc
Max. output current: 50mA
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position
machine or PLC to make the output signal to be the common
pivot point.
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5~15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
5V
12V
24V
Recommended pull-up resistor: above100~220, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor: above 510~1.35k, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor, above1.8k~3.3k, 1/2W
PG2 Wiring Diagram
Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
AB2
8-10
Ext Ground
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Wiring Diagram
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage
AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
Cable length: Less than 100m
2
Jumper
No-F use Breaker
R
NFB
Braking resistor (optional)
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
U
S
S/L2
V/T2
V
T
T/L3
W/T3
W
Motor
M
3~
VP
DCM
A1
A1
B1
B1
Z1
Z1
PG
Line driv er
U1
U1
V1
V1
W1
W1
EH-PLC
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y1
Phas e differenc e90
A2
A2
B2
B2
o
EMC-PG01U
8-11
Encoder
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
SG
AO
AO
BO
BO
Phas e differenc e90
o
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-10 EMC-PG01R
Terminal Descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Terminals
PG1
PG2
PG OUT
Descriptions
Resolver Output Power
7Vrms, 10kHz
Resolver Input Signal
S1,S2, S3, S4,
3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz
Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A2, /A2,
Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
B2, /B2
It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function: 1~255
times
AO, /AO,
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
BO, /BO,
Max. output current: 50mA
ZO, /ZO,
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
R1- R2
SG,
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine or PLC to
make the output signal to be the common pivot point.
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5~15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
5V
12V
24V
Recommended pull-up resistor: above100~220, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor: above 510~1.35k, 1/2W
Recommended pull-up resistor, above1.8k~3.3k, 1/2W
PG2 Wiring Diagram
Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
AB2
8-12
Ext Ground
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Wiring Diagram
Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage
AC power line (200 V and above).
Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
Cable length: Less than 100m
2
Jumper
No-F use Breaker
R
NFB
S
T
Braking resistor (optional)
- +1 +2/B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
U
S/L2
V/T2
V
T/L3
W/T3
W
Motor
M
3~
R1
R2
S2
PG
S4
R e so l ve r
En co d e r
S1
S3
EH-PLC
Y0
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y0
Y1
Y1
Phas e differenc e90
Y1
AO
AO
BO
BO
ZO
ZO
SG
A2
A2
B2
B2
o
8-13
AO
AO
BO
BO
Phas e differenc e90
o
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-11 CMC-MOD01
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Supports Modbus TCP protocol
MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
E-mail alarm
AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
Virtual serial port.
Product File
I/O CARD & Relay Card
PG Card
Comm. Card
RJ-45 connection port
Removable control circuit
terminal
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface
Number of ports
Transmission method
RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
1 Port
IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable
Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed
10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP,
Delta Configuration
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage
5VDC (supply by the AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage
2KV
Power consumption
0.8W
Weight
25g
8-14
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation/storage
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock immunity
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC
61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
Install CMC-MOD01 to VFD-CH2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power supply of VFD-CH2000.
Open the front cover of VFD-CH2000.
Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (shown
in Figure 4).
Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes
(shown in Figure 5).
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 4]
[Figure 3]
[Figure 5]
8-15
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Communication Parameters for VFD-CH2000 Connected to Ethernet
When VFD-CH2000 is link to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters base on the
table below. Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency word and control word of
VFD-CH2000 after communication parameters setup.
Parameter
P00-20
P00-21
P09-30
P09-75
P09-76
P09-77
P09-78
P09-79
P09-80
P09-81
P09-82
P09-83
P09-84
P09-85
P09-86
P09-87
Function
Source of frequency
command setting
Source of operation
command setting
Decoding method for
communication
IP setting
IP address -1
IP address -2
IP address -3
IP address -4
Netmask -1
Netmask -2
Netmask -3
Netmask -4
Default gateway -1
Default gateway -2
Default gateway -3
Default gateway -4
Set value (Dec)
8
5
0
0
192
168
1
5
255
255
255
0
192
168
1
1
Explanation
The frequency command is controlled by
communication card.
The operation command is controlled by
communication card.
Decoding method for Delta AC motor
drive
Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
IP address 192.168.1.5
IP address 192.168.1.5
IP address 192.168.1.5
IP address 192.168.1.5
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Disconnecting CMC- MOD01 from VFD-CH2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power supply of VFD-CH2000.
Remove the two screws (shown in Figure 6).
Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off
the card clip (shown in Figure 7).
Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (shown in Figure 8).
[Figure 6]
[Figure 7]
[Figure 8]
8-16
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Basic Registers
BR#
R/W
Content
#0
R
#1
R
#2
R
#11
R/W
Modbus Timeout Pre-defined setting: 500 (ms)
#13
R/W
Keep Alive Time Pre-defined setting: 30 (s)
Model name
Explanation
Set up by the system; read only. The model code of
CMC-MOD01=H’0203
Firmware
version
Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. H’0100 indicates the
firmware version V1.00.
Displaying the data in decimal form. 10,000s digit and 1,000s digit are for
Release date of
“month”; 100s digit and 10s digit are for “day”.
the version
For 1 digit: 0 = morning; 1 = afternoon.
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting
LED Indicators
LED
POWER
LINK
Status
Green
Green
Indication
How to correct it?
On
Power supply in normal status
--
Off
No power supply
Check the power supply
On
Network connection in normal status
--
Network in operation
--
Network not connected
Check if the network cable is
connected
Flashes
Off
Troubleshooting
Abnormality
Cause
How to correct it?
CMC-MOD01 not connected
to AC motor drive
CMC-MOD01 not connected
to network
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
power supply is normal.
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to AC motor
drive.
Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network.
Poor contact to RJ-45
connector
Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
Ethernet port.
CMC-MOD01 not connected
to network
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to network.
AC motor drive not powered
POWER LED off
LINK LED off
No module found
Fail to open
CMC-MOD01
setup page
Able to open
CMC-MOD01
setup page but fail
to utilize webpage
PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and
blocked by network firewall.
CMC-MOD01 not connected
to network
Incorrect communication
setting in DCISoft
PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and
blocked by network firewall.
Incorrect network setting in
CMC-MOD01
8-17
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
motor drive keypad.
Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to the
network.
Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
set to Ethernet.
Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
in your home, please refer to the network setting
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Abnormality
Cause
How to correct it?
monitoring
Fail to send e-mail
instruction provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in
CMC-MOD01
Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
correct.
Incorrect mail server setting
Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-18
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-12 CMC-PD01
Features
1.
2.
3.
4.
Supports PZD control data exchange.
Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
Supports user diagnosis function.
Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps.
Product Profile
1. NET indicator
2. POWER indicator
3. Positioning hole
4. AC motor drive connection
port
5. PROFIBUS DP connection
port
6. Screw fixing hole
7. Fool-proof groove
Specifications
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface
DB9 connector
Transmission method
High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable
Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation
500VDC
Communication
Message type
Cyclic data exchange
Module name
CMC-PD01
GSD document
DELA08DB.GSD
Company ID
08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission
speed supported
(auto-detection)
9.6kbps; 19.2kbps; 93.75kbps; 187.5kbps; 125kbps; 250kbps; 500kbps; 1.5Mbps;
3Mbps; 6Mbps; 12Mbps (bit per second)
Electrical Specification
Power supply
5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Power consumption
1W
8-19
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Weight
28g
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation /storage
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration
resistance
International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 & IEC
68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Installation
PROFIBUS DP Connector
PIN
PIN name
Definition
1
-
Not defined
2
-
Not defined
3
Rxd/Txd-P
Sending/receiving data P(B)
4
-
Not defined
5
DGND
Data reference ground
6
VP
Power voltage – positive
7
-
Not defined
8
Rxd/Txd-N
Sending/receiving data N(A)
9
-
Not defined
9
5
6
1
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting
There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-PD01. POWER LED displays the status of the working power.
NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status
How to correct it?
Indication
Green light on
Power supply in normal status.
--
Off
No power
Check if the connection between CMC-PD01 and AC
motor drive is normal.
NET LED
LED status
How to correct it?
Indication
Green light on
Normal status
--
Red light on
CMC-PD01 is not connected to
PROFIBUS DP bus.
Connect CMC-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light
flashes
Invalid PROFIBUS communication
address
Set the PROFIBUS address of CMC-PD01 between 1 ~
125 (decimal)
Orange light
flashes
CMC-PD01 fails to communication
with AC motor drive.
Switch off the power and check whether CMC-PD01 is
correctly and normally connected to AC motor drive.
8-20
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-13 CMC-DN01
Functions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct
immediate control to AC motor drive.
Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration software.
Supports all baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial
transmission speed mode.
Node address and serial transmission speed can be set up on AC motor drive.
Power supplied from AC motor drive.
Product Profile
1. NS indicator
2. MS indicator
3. POWER indicator
4. Positioning hole
5. DeviceNet connection port
6. Screw fixing hole
7. Fool-proof groove
8. AC motor drive connection
port
Specifications
DeviceNet Connector
Interface
5-PIN open removable connector. Of 5.08mm PIN interval
Transmission
th d
Transmission cable
CAN
Transmission speed
Network protocol
Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)
125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial transmission speed
d
DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port
Interface
50 PIN communication terminal
Transmission method
SPI communication
Terminal function
1. Communicating with AC motor drive
2. Transmitting power supply from AC motor drive
Communication
t
l
Delta HSSP protocol
8-21
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage
5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Communication wire
power consumption
0.85W
Power consumption
1W
Weight
23g
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation /storage
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration
resistance
International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 &
IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
DeviceNet Connector
PIN
Signal
Color
Definition
1
V+
Red
DC24V
2
H
White
Signal+
3
S
-
Earth
4
L
Blue
Signal-
5
V-
Black
0V
1
2
3
4
5
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting
There are 3 LED indicators on CMC-DN01. POWER LED displays the status of power supply. MS
LED and NS LED are dual-color LED, displaying the connection status of the communication and
error messages.
POWER LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct it?
On
Power supply in abnormal status.
Check the power supply of CMC-DN01.
Off
Power supply in normal status
--
8-22
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
NS LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct it?
Off
No power supply or CMC-DN01 has
not completed MAC ID test yet.
1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the
connection is normal.
2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the
bus.
3. Check if the serial transmission speed of
CMC-DN01 is the same as that of other nodes.
Green light
flashes
CMC-DN01 is on-line but has not
established connection to the master.
1. Configure CMC-DN01 to the scan list of the
master.
2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
Green light on
CMC-DN01 is on-line and is normally
connected to the master
--
Red light
flashes
CMC-DN01 is on-line, but I/O
connection is timed-out.
1. Check if the network connection is normal.
2. Check if the master operates normally.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1. Make sure all the MAC IDs on the network are
not repeated.
2. Check if the network installation is normal.
3. Check if the baud rate of CMC-DN01 is
consistent with that of other nodes.
4. Check if the node address of CMC-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
Red light on
The communication is down.
MAC ID test failure.
No network power supply.
CMC-DN01 is off-line.
MS LED
LED status
Indication
How to correct it?
Off
No power supply or being off-line
Check the power supply of CMC-DN01 and see of
the connection is normal.
Green light
flashes
Waiting for I/O data
Switch the master PLC to RUN status
Green light on
I/O data are normal
--
Red light
flashes
Mapping error
1. Reconfigure CMC-DN01
2. Re-power AC motor drive
Red light on
Hardware error
1. See the error code displayed on AC motor drive.
2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
Orange light
flashes
If the flashing lasts for a long time, check if
CMC-DN01 is establishing connection
CMC-DN01 and AC motor drive are correctly
with AC motor drive.
installed and normally connected to each other.
8-23
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-14 CMC-EIP01
Features
1.
Supports Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocol
2.
MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
3.
Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
4.
AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
5.
Virtual serial port
Product Profile
[Figure1]
1. Screw fixing hole
2. Positioning hole
3. AC motor drive connection
port
4. LINK indicator
5. RJ-45 connection port
6. POWER indicator
7. Fool-proof groove
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface
RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
Number of ports
1 Port
Transmission method
IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable
Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed
10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta
Configuration
Electrical Specification
Weight
25g
Insulation voltage
500VDC
Power consumption
0.8W
Power supply voltage
5VDC
8-24
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Environment
Noise immunity
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4)
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation/storage
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock
immunity
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
Installation
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to Network
1. Turn off the power of AC motor drive.
2. Open the cover of AC motor drive.
3. Connect CAT-5e network cable to RJ-45 port on
CMC-EIP01 (See Figure 2).
[Figure 2]
RJ-45 PIN Definition
PIN
Signal
Definition
PIN
Signal
Definition
1
Tx+
Positive pole for
data transmission
5
--
N/C
2
Tx-
Negative pole for
data transmission
6
Rx-
Negative pole for
data receiving
3
Rx+
Positive pole for
data receiving
7
--
N/C
4
--
N/C
8
--
N/C
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to VFD-CH2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
Switch off the power of AC motor drive.
Open the front cover of AC motor drive.
Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (see
Figure 4).
Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes (see
Figure 5).
8-25
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 3]
[Figure 4]
[Figure 5]
Communication Parameters for VFD-CH2000 Connected to Ethernet
When VFD-CH2000 is connected to Ethernet network, please set up the communication parameters
for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word
and control word of VFD-CH2000 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter
(Dec)
Function
Set value (Dec)
Explanation
P00-20
Source of frequency
command setting
8
The frequency command is controlled by
communication card.
P00-21
Source of operation
command setting
5
The operation command is controlled by
communication card.
P09-30
Decoding method for
communication
0
The decoding method for Delta AC motor
drive
P09-75
IP setting
0
Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
P09-76
IP address -1
192
IP address 192.168.1.5
P09-77
IP address -2
168
IP address 192.168.1.5
P09-78
IP address -3
1
IP address 192.168.1.5
P09-79
IP address -4
5
IP address 192.168.1.5
P09-80
Netmask -1
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-81
Netmask -2
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-82
Netmask -3
255
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-83
Netmask -4
0
Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-84
Default gateway -1
192
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
P09-85
Default gateway -2
168
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
P09-86
Default gateway -3
1
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
P09-87
Default gateway -4
1
Default gateway 192.168.1.1
8-26
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Disconnecting CMC- EIP01 from VFD-CH2000
1. Switch off the power supply of VFD-CH2000.
2. Remove the two screws (see Figure 6).
3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off the
card clip (see Figure 7).
4. Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (see Figure 8).
[Figure 6]
[Figure 7]
[Figure 8]
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting
There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-EIP01. The POWER LED displays the status of power supply,
and the LINK LED displays the connection status of the communication.
LED Indicators
LED
POWER
LINK
Status
Green
Green
Indication
How to correct it?
On
Power supply in normal status
--
Off
No power supply
Check the power supply.
On
Network connection in normal
status
--
Network in operation
--
Network not connected
Check if the network cable is
connected.
Cause
How to correct it?
Flashes
Off
Troubleshooting
Abnormality
AC motor drive not powered
POWER LED off
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
AC motor drive
8-27
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
power supply is normal.
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to AC motor
drive.
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
Abnormality
LINK LED off
No communication
card found
Fail to open
CMC-EIP01 setup
page
Able to open
CMC-EIP01 setup
page but fail to
utilize webpage
monitoring
Fail to send e-mail
Cause
How to correct it?
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
network
Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network.
Poor contact to RJ-45
connector
Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
Ethernet port.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
network
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network.
PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked
by network firewall.
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
motor drive keypad.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
network
Incorrect communication
setting in DCISoft
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to the
network.
Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
set to Ethernet.
PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked
by network firewall.
Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
Incorrect network setting in
CMC-EIP01
Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
in your home, please refer to the network setting
instruction provided by your ISP.
Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
correct.
Incorrect mail server setting
Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
Incorrect network setting in
CMC-EIP01
8-28
Chapter 8 Optional Cards
8-15 EMC-COP01
Built-in EMC-COP01 card are available in VFDXXXC23E/VFDXXXC43E series.
RJ-45 Pin definition
Pin
1
2
3
7
RS485 socket
Pin name
CAN_H
Definition
CAN_H bus line (dominant
high)
CAN_L
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
CAN_GND Ground/0V/VCAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
Specifications
Interface
RJ-45
Number of ports
1 Port
Transmission method
CAN
Transmission cable
CAN standard cable
Transmission speed
1M 500k 250k 125k 100k 50k
Communication protocol
CANopen
CANopen Communication Cable
Model: TAP-CB05, TAP-CB10
Title
Part No.
1
2
TAP-CB05
TAP-CB10
L
mm
500 10
1000 10
inch
19 0.4
39 0.4
CANopen Dimension
Model: TAP-CN03
NOTE
For more information on CANopen, please refer to Chapter 15 CANopen Overview or CANopen user
manual can also be downloaded on Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
8-29
Chapter 9 Specifications
Chapter 9 Specification
230V Series
Frame Size
A
Super Heavy
DUTY
Input
Rating
Output
Rating
Model VFD□□□CH23A-21
Applicable Motor Output (kW)
Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rate Output
Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Overload Tolerance
Input Current (A)
Super Heavy Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Operating Voltage Range
Frequency Tolerance
AC Drive Weight
Cooling method
015
1.5
2
022
2.2
3
037
3.7
5
055
5.5
7.5
075
7.5
10
110
11
15
150
15
20
185
18.5
25
2.0
3.2
4.4
6.8
10
13
20
26
30
5
8
11
17
25
33
49
65
75
5~15kHz
Rated output current is 150 % for 60 seconds；200% for 3 seconds
6.4
Super Heavy DUTY
Output Rating
Input
Rating
16
20
28
Natural
cooling
Overload Tolerance
AC Drive Weight
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
36
52
72
Fan cooling
Frame A to C (built-in); Frame D and above (optional)
Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (built-in)
Optional
Optional
D
Input Current (A)
Super Heavy
Duty
Rated
Voltage/Frequency
Operating Voltage Range
Frequency Tolerance
EMI Filter
EMC-COP01
12
83
3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz
170~265Vac
47~63Hz
2.6± 0.3Kg
5.4± 1Kg
9.8± 1.5Kg
Frame Size
Model VFD□□□CH23A-21
Applicable Motor Output (kW)
Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rate Output
Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output
Current (A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
C
007
0.75
1
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
EMI Filter
EMC-COP01
DC reactor
B
E
F
220
22
30
300
22
40
370
30
50
450
37
60
550
45
75
750
55
100
36
48
58
72
86
102
90
120
146
180
215
255
5~15kHz
Rated output current is 150 % for 60 seconds；
200% for 3 seconds
93
124
143
171
206
245
3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz
170~265Vac
47~63Hz
86.5±
38.5± 1.5Kg
64.8± 1.5Kg
1.5Kg
Fan Cooling
Frame A to C (built-in);
Frame D and above (optional)
Frame A to C (optional);
Frame D and above (built-in)
Optional
Optional
9-1
Chapter 9 Specifications
460V Series
A
Frame Size
Super Heavy
DUTY
Input
Rating
Output Rating
Model
VFD□□□CH43A-21
007
VFD□□□CH4EA-21
0.75
Applicable Motor Output (kW)
1
Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rate Output
2.4
Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output
3.0
Current (A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Overload
Tolerance
Input Current (A)
4.3
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Operating Voltage Range
Frequency Tolerance
AC Drive Weight
Natural
Cooling method
cooling
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
022
037
055
075
110
150
185
220
300
1.5
2
2.2
3
3.7
5
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
11
15
15
20
18.5
25
22
30
30
40
3.2
4.8
7.2
9.6
14
19
25
30
36
48
4.0
6.0
9.0
12
18
24
32
38
45
60
5~15kHz
Rated output current is 150 % for 60 seconds；200% for 3 seconds
5.9
8.7
Super Heavy
DUTY
Output Rating
Input
Rating
17
20
26
35
40
47
63
9.8± 2Kg
Fan cooling
Frame A to C (built-in); Frame D and above (optional)
Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (built-in)
Frame A ~ C, VFD□□□□CH4EA-21, EMI filter built-in
Frame A ~ C, VFD□□□□CH43A-21, No EMI filter
Optional
Frame Size
Cooling method
Braking Chopper
DC reactor
EMI Filter
EMC-COP01
14
3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz
323~528Vac
47~63Hz
2.6± 0.3Kg
5.4± 1Kg
EMC-COP01
AC Drive Weight
C
015
EMI Filter
Model
370
VFD□□□□CH43A-□□
VFD2800CH43C-00/-21
37
Applicable Motor Output (kW)
50
Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rate Output
58
Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output
73
Current (A)
Carrier Frequency
(kHz)
Overload Tolerance
Input Current (A)
74
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Operating Voltage Range
Frequency Tolerance
B
D
E
F
G
H
450
550
750
900
1100
1320
1600
1850
2200
2800
45
60
55
75
75
100
90
125
110
150
132
175
160
215
185
250
220
300
280
375
73
88
120
143
175
207
247
295
359
438
91
110
150
180
220
250
310
370
450
550
5~15kHz
4~10kHz
Rated output current is 150 % for 60 seconds；200% for 3 seconds
101
114
157
167
207
240
300
380
3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz
323~528Vac
47~63Hz
86.5±
38.5± 1.5Kg
64.8± 1.5Kg
134± 4Kg
1.5Kg
Fan cooling
Frame D and above (optional)
Frame D and above (built-in)
Frame D and above (optional)
Optional
9-2
400
494
228Kg
Chapter 9 Specifications
General Specifications
Control Method
Control Characteristics
Starting Torque
V/F Curve
Speed Response
Ability
Torque Limit
Torque Accuracy
Max. Output
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency Output
Accuracy
Output Frequency
Resolution
Overload Tolerance
Frequency Setting
Signal
Accel./decel. Time
Main control function
Fan Control
Protection Characteristics
Motor Protection
Over-current
Protection
Over-voltage
Protection
Over-temperature
Protection
Stall Prevention
Restart After
Instantaneous Power
Failure
Grounding Leakage
Current Protection
Certifications
1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQC+PG,
Reach up to 200% or above at 0.5Hz.
Under FOC+PG mode, starting torque can reach 200% at 0Hz.
4 point adjustable V/F curve and square curve
5Hz (vector control can reach up to 40Hz)
Max. 220% torque current
5%
Super Heavy Duty: 0.00~600.00Hz
Digital command:0.01%, -10℃~+40℃, Analog command: 0.1%, 2510℃
Digital command: 0.01Hz, Analog command: 0.03 X max. output frequency/60 Hz
(11 bit)
Rated output current is 150 % for 60 seconds；200% for 3 seconds
+10V~-10, 0~+10V, 4~20mA, 0~20mA, Pulse input
0.00~600.00/0.0~6000.0 seconds
Torque control, Droop control, Speed/torque control switching, Feed forward control,
Zero-servo control, Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search, Over-torque
detection, Torque limit, 17-step speed (max), Accel/decel time switch, S-curve
accel/decel, 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning (rotational, stationary), Dwell, Cooling fan
on/off switch, Slip compensation, Torque compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency
upper/lower limit settings, DC injection braking at start/stop, High slip braking, PID
control (with sleep function),Energy saving control, MODOBUS communication
(RS-485 RJ45, max. 115.2 kbps), Fault restart, Parameter copy
230V model
VFD150CH23A-21(include) and series above: PMW control;
VFD110CH23A-21(include) and series below: on/off switch control
460V model
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21(include) and series above: PMW control;
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21(include) and series below: on/off switch control
Electronic thermal relay protection
For drive model 230V and 440V
Over-current protection for 300% rated current
current clamp『Super heavy duty: 220%』
230: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 410V
460: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 820V
Built-in temperature sensor
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Parameter setting up to 20 seconds
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
,
, GB/T12668-2,
9-3
(certification in progress)
Chapter 9 Specifications
Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation
DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable
gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm2 every year.
Installation IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
Storage
-25 oC ~ +70 oC
Surrounding
Transportation -25 oC ~ +70 oC
Temperature
Non-condensation, non-frozen
Operation
Max. 90%
Storage/
Rated
Max. 95%
Transportation
Humidity
No condense water
Operation/
86 to 106 kPa
Storage
Air Pressure
Transportation 70 to 106 kPa
Environment
IEC721-3-3
Operation
Class 3C2; Class 3S2
Pollution
Storage
Class 2C2; Class 2S2
Level
Transportation Class 1C2; Class 1S2
No concentrate
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal
operation restriction. If it is install at altitude 1000~3000m, decrease
2%
of rated current or lower 0.5℃ of temeperature for every 100m
Operation
Altitude
increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is
2000m.
Package
Drop
Vibration
Impact
Operation
Position
Storage
ISTA procedure 1A(according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G~1.0G range from 13.2Hz to 55Hz;
1.0G range from 55Hz to 512 Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Max. allowed offset angle 10o (under normal
installation position)
10
10
Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level
Model
VFDxxxxCH23A-21
VFDxxxxCH43A-21
VFDxxxxCH4EA-21
VFD2800CH43C-21
Frame
Frame A~C
230V: 0.75~18.5kW
460V: 0.75~30kW
Top cover
Top cover
Removed
Standard with
Conduit
Box
Protection Level
Operation
Temperature
Standard
IP20/UL Open Type
-10~50℃
conduit
plate
top cover
Frame D~H
230V: >22kW
IP20/UL
-10~40℃
Type1/NEMA1
Standard
N/A
conduit
460V: >30kW
IP20/UL
Type1/NEMA1
-10~50℃
box
IP00
VFDxxxxCH23A-00
Frame D~H
VFDxxxxCH43A-00
230V: >22kW
VFD2800CH43C-00
460V: >30kW
Standard
N/A
conduit
box
9-4
IP20/UL Open Type
Only the circled are
Other parts are IP20
-10~50℃
Chapter 9 Specifications
Derating of ambient temperature and altitude
UL Open- Type/ IP20
Derating for ambient temperature
UL TYPE1/ IP20
UL OPEN TYPE/ IP20_side by side
100%
Output Current Rating(A)
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Ambient Temperature(degree C)
Derating for Altitude
Ta at Rating= 100%
Rating (%) at Stardard Ambient Temperature*
100
50 40
90
45 35
80
40 30
60
50
40
0
500
1000
1500
2000
Altitude (m)
2500
3000
* Stardard Ambient Temperature= 50 degC for UL Open Type / IP20
Stardard Ambient Temperature= 40 degC for UL Type I /IP 20 & UL Open Type / IP20 Side by Side
9-5
UL Open Type / IP20 Side by Side
UL Type I / IP20
UL Open Type / IP20
70
Chapter 9 Specifications
Protection Level
UL Type I / IP20
UL Open Type /
IP20
High Altitude
Operating Environment
When the AC motor drive is operating at the rated
current and the ambient temperature has to be
between 10℃ ~ +40℃. When the temperature is
over 40℃, for every increase by 1℃, decrease 2%
of the rated current. The minimum allowable
temperature is 60℃.
When the AC motor drive is operating at the rated
current and the ambient temperature has to be
between -10℃ ~ +50℃. When the temperature is
over 50℃, for every increase by 1℃, decrease 2%
of the rated current. The minimum allowable
temperature is 60℃.
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m,
follow normal operation restriction. If it is install at
altitude 1000~3000m, decrease 2% of rated current
or lower 0.5℃ of temperature for every 100m
increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner
Grounded is 2000m.
9-6
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01
KPC-CE01(Option)
Communication Interface
RJ-45 (socket)、RS-485 interface;
Installation Method
Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface
of the control box. The front cover is water proof.
Charge the digital keypad for 6 minutes
before you use it to program Delta’s AC
Motor Drive.
The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m
(16ft)
What's new at KPC-CC01 keypad?
-It supports calendar function of PLC (See
Chapter 17 for more information about PLC.)
-The available editing pages reach the maximum
number of pages supported by TP Editor.
-TP Editor v.140.1 is required
-It supports VFDSoft to read parameters. Please
go to http://www.delta.com.tw/ to download
VFDSoft v1.45.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions
Descriptions
Key
Start Operation Key
1.
It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2.
It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3.
It can be pressed again and again at stop process.
4.
When enabling “HAND” mode, it is only valid when the source of operation command is
from the keypad.
Stop Command Key. This key has the highest processing priority in any situation.
1.
When it receives STOP command, no matter the AC motor drive is in operation or stop
status, the AC motor drive needs to execute “STOP” command.
2.
The RESET key can be used to reset the drive after the fault occurs. For those faults that
can’t be reset by the RESET key, see the fault records after pressing MENU key for
10-1
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
details.
Operation Direction Key
1.
This key is only control the operation direction NOT for activate the drive. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2.
Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
ESC Key
ESC key function is to leave current menu and return to the last menu. It is also functioned as a
return key in the sub-menu.
Press menu to return to main menu.
Menu content:
KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13.
1. Detail Parameter
7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link
2. Copy Parameter
8. Display Setup
3. Keypad Locked
9. Time Setup
4. PLC Function
10. Language Setup
5. Copy PLC
11. Startup Menu
6. Fault Record
12. Main Page
Direction: Left/Right/Up/Down
1.
In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric
value.
2.
In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection.
Function Key
1.
It has the factory setting function and the function can be set by the user. The present
factory setting: F1 is JOG function.
2.
Other functions must be defined by TPEditor first. TPEditor software V1.30.6 is available
for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=1&cid=1&tp
id=3
3.
Installation Instruction for TPEditor is on page 10-15 of this chapter.
HAND ON Key
1.
This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand
operation. The factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are
the digital keypad.
2.
Press HAND ON key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and
hand operation source. Press HAND ON key at operation status, it stops the AC motor
drive first (display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source.
3.
Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be on; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen.
1.
This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and
AUTO operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is
4-20mA).
2.
Press Auto key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press Auto key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand operation source.
3.
Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be off; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen
Descriptions of LED Functions
LED
Descriptions
Steady ON: operation indicator of the AC motor drive, including DC brake, zero speed,
standby, restart after fault and speed search.
Blinking: drive is decelerating to stop or in the status of base block.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute the operation command
10-2
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Steady ON: stop indicator of the AC motor drive.
Blinking: drive is in the standby status.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED
1. Green light is on, the drive is running forward.
2. Red light is on, the drive is running backward.
3. Twinkling light: the drive is changing direction.
(Only KPC-CE01 support this function)
Setting can be done during operation.
HAND LED: When HAND LED is on (HAND mode); when HAND LED is off (AUTO mode).
(Only KPC-CE01Support this function )
Setting can be done during operation.
AUTO LED: when AUTO LED is on (AUTO mode); when AUTO LED is off (HAND mode).
RUN LED:
LED
status
OFF
CANopen at initial
Condition/State
No LED
Blinking CANopen at pre-operation
CANopen ~”RUN”
Single
flash
ON
CANopen at stopped
CANopen at operation status
No LED
ERR LED:
LED
status
OFF
Single One message fail
flash
CANopen ~”ERR”
Double
flash
Triple
flash
Condition/ State
No Error
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail
SYNC fail
ON
Bus off
10-3
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
POWER ON
1)The default Start-up page is Delta Logo.(Default 1and 2)
2) User can customize their start-up page through the edited function.
(Need to purchase the optional accessories)
Start-up
Skip to main page
afer 3sec.
The top line of LCD displays the status of drive.
AU TO
F
H
A
J OG
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
After main menu is selected, the start-up page will display in
the format user defined. The page shown on the left is display
as Delta default setting.
The button lin e of LCD disp lays time and JOG.
14 ：35 :3 6
P res s
onc e
P res s
aga in
AU TO
F
H
A
JOG
P res s
aga in
AU TO
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
F
H
A
14 ：35 :3 6
J OG
AU TO
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
14 ：35 :3 6
H
A
A
J OG
0.00Hz
0.00
0.00 Amp
14 ：35 :3 6
Press MENU
MENU
1.Detail Paramete r
2.Copy Paramete r
3.Keypad Locked
1.
2.
MENU
1. Detail Paramete r
2.Copy Paramete r
3.Keypad Locked
4.PLC Function
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Item 1~4 are the
10.
common items for
11.
KPC-CC01 &KPC-C E01
12.
Copy PLC
Fault Record
Quick/Simple Setup
Display Setup
Time Setup
Language Setup
Start-up
Main page
NOTE
Startup page can only display pictures, no flash.
When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U,
the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to
switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
10-4
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Display Icon
Start-up
1.Default 1
2.Default 2
3.User define
Pr setup
00:System Pr
01:Basic Pr
02:DI/DO Pr
: prese nt se tting
: roll down the page for more options
Press
for more options.
: show complete se ntence
Press
for complete information
Display item
MENU
1.Detail Parameter
2.Copy Parameter
3.Keypad Locked
MENU
1.Detail Parameter
2.Copy Parameter
3.Keypad Locked
4.PLC Function
Item 1~4 are the common items for
KPC-C C01 &KPC-CE01
1.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Copy PLC
Fault Record
Quick/Simple Setup
Displa y Setup
Time Setup
Language Setup
Start-up
Main page
PC Link
Detail Parameter
00 System Pr Content
00- System Pr
01 ID code
02 Rated curre
03 Pr reset
Pr setup
00:System Pr
01:Basic Pr
02:DI/DO Pr
Press
ENTER to select.
00-08 Password Set
00-08
0000
Password set
0000~9999
MY MODE
01-00 The maximum output freq.
01-00
Hz
600.00
Max. output freq.
0.00~600.00
10-5
MY MODE
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
2.
Copy Parameter
Copy pr
1.
2.
3.
Copy parameters (Pr)
1.
4 sets of parameters duplication.
2.
When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the copy
parameters (Pr) page.
Copy pr
1.2009/05/04
2.
3.
Press ENTER
File 1
1.SAVE
2.LOAD
Press
to save or load
After selecting save and pressing "ENTER", the parameter
setting will be saved in the keypad.
3.
Keypad locked
Keypad Locked
Keypad locked
Press "ENTER"
to lock
This function is used to lock the keypad. The main page would not display
“keypad locked” when the keypad is locked, however it will display the
message”please press ESC and then ENTER to unlock the keypad” when any
key is pressed.
HAND
Press ENTER to lock
Keypad locked
Press "ESC" for
3 seconds to unlock
JOG
14：35:56
Press any key.
4.
PLC Function
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
When activate and stop PLC function, the PLC status will be displayed on
main page of Delta default setting.
F 600.00Hz
H 600.00Hz
A 23.5A
PLC function
1. Disable
2. PLC run
3. PLC stop
The PLC function of KPC-CE01 can only displays:
1.
PLC0
2.
PLC1
3.
PLC2
10-6
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
5.
Copy PLC
Copy PLC
Copy PLC
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Duplicate 4 sets of parameters.
When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the Copy
PLC page.
Copy PLC
1.2010/03/14
2.
3.
Press
File 1
1. Save to the drive
2. Save to the
digital display
ENTER
Press
Press
to s etting me nu.
to s ele ct where to save the file
ENTER
execute filesaving process.
If select save to the drive and press enter, the file will be saved to the drive.
NOTE
If password protection for WPLSoft editor was set, it is required to enter the
password before the file can successfully be saved onto the digital display.
File 1
P a s s w o r d 0000
Input Times
6.
0
Fault record
Fault Record
Fault record
1:GFF
2:ocA
3:oH
Press
ENTER to select.
It can accumulate 6 sets of recent fault records with keypad V1.02 and below;
20 sets of recent fault records with keypad V1.03 and above
The first fault code displays in the record is the latest fault. Select the fault
code for details on time, date, frequency, current, voltage and DC BUS Volt.
Fault record
1:GFF
2:ocA
3:oH
KPC-CE01 does not support
this function.
Press
ENTER
to view the
current and voltage of the fa ult
2: ocA
Time: 19:47:00
Frequency: 0.00
Current:
0.00
NOTE
Fault actions of AC motor drive are record and save to KPC-CC01. When
KPC-CC01 is removed and apply to another AC motor drive, the previous
fault records will not be deleted. The new fault records of the present AC
motor drive will accumulate to KPC-CC01.
10-7
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
7.
Quick/Simple Setting
Quick Setting:
Quick setting
1: V/F mode
2: VFPG mode
3: SVC mode
Press
1.
V/F Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input
02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
ENTER to select.
00-07
0
Password Input
0~ 65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Quick Setting:
1. VF Mode
2. VFPG Mode
3. SVC Mode
4. FOCPG Mode
5. TQCPG Mode
6. My Mode
2.
Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Load Selection (P00-16)
Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
Stop Method (P00-22)
Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32)
Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1 (P01-03)
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1 (P01-04)
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1 (P01-05)
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1 (P01-06)
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07)
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (P01-08)
Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
Derating Protection (P06-55)
Software Brake Level (P07-00)
Speed Search during Start-up (P07-12)
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20)
Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24)
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25)
Torque Compensation Gain (P07-26)
Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27)
VFPG Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input
02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~ 65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Load Selection (P00-16)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
10-8
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
3.
Stop Method (P00-22)
Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32)
Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07)
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (P01-08)
Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
Software Brake Level (P07-00)
Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24)
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25)
Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27)
Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
ASR Control ( P) 1 (P11-06)
ASR Control (I) 1 (P11-07)
ASR Control ( P) 2 (P11-08)
ASR Control (I) 2 (P11-09)
P Gain of Zero Speed (P11-10)
I Gain of Zero Speed (P11-11)
SVCPG Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input
02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~ 65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Load Selection (P00-16)
Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
Stop Method (P00-22)
Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32)
Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07)
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (P01-08)
Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
Derating Protection (P06-55)
Software Brake Level (P07-00)
10-9
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
29.
30.
31.
32.
4.
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20)
Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24)
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25)
Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27)
FOCPG Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input
02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
00-07
0
Password Input
0~ 65535
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
5.
Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO)
(P00-20)
Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
Stop Method (P00-22)
Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
Derating Protection (P06-55)
Software Brake Level (P07-00)
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20)
Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
System Control (P11-00)
Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
TQCPG Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode
P00-07
01. Password Input
(Decode)
02. Password Setting
03. Control Mode
Items
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
00-07
0
Password Input
0~ 65535
Password Input (Decode) (P00-07)
Password Setting (P00-08)
Control Mode (P00-10)
Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
Source of the Master Frequency Command (P00-20)
10-10
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
6. Source of the Operation Command (P00-21)
7. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
8. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
9. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
10. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
11. Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
12. Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
13. Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
14. No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
15. Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
16. Software Brake Level (P07-00)
17. Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
18. Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
19. Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
20. System Control (P11-00)
21. Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
22. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
23. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
24. Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
25. Max. Torque Command (P11-27)
26. Source of Torque Offset (P11-28)
27. Torque Offset Setting (P11-29)
28. Source of Torque Command (P11-33)
29. Torque Command (P11-34)
30. Speed Limit Selection (P11-36)
31. Forward Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-37)
32. Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-38)
6.My Mode
My mode
01:
02:
03:
My mode:
It can save 01~32 sets of
parameters (Pr).
1
05-02
Amps
05-02
motor current
Click F4 in parameter setting
page, the parameter will save
0.00~ 600.00
MY MODE
to My Mode. To delete or
correct the parameter, enter
Press F4 and save to my mode.
this parameter and click the
2
“DEL” on the bottom right
corner.
My mode
01: motor current
02:
03:
The parameter (Pr) will be displayed
in My mode if it is properly saved.
To correct or to delete this Pr. clicks
DEL.
05-02
Amps
05-02
motor current
0.00~ 600.00
DEL
Press F4 to delete this Pr. setting
in My Mode.
10-11
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
8.
Display setup
1. Contrast Adjustment
Disp setup
1.Contrast Ad
2.BKLT time
Contrast adjust
Adjust setting value
6
0
10
2. Back-lighted Time
Press
ENTER
BKLT Time
to
Min
0
9.
Adjust setting value
5
enter the setting menu.
10
Time setting
Time setup
Enter time setup page, "9" will continue to blink
move to left / right
2009/01/01
_ _ : _ _ :_ _
increase / decrease the value
Press
ENTER
to confirm.
NOTE
When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting will be in standby
status for 7 days. After this period, the time needs to be reset.
10. Language setup
Language selection.
Language
1:English
2:繁體中文
3:簡體中文
11. Startup Page Setting
Start-up
1.Default 1
2.Default 2
3.User define
1. Default picture 1
DELTA LOGO
2. Default picture 2
DELTA Text
3. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page. If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will display
a blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.03.6 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act
=3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3
10-12
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
12. Main page
Main Page
1.Default
2.User define
Press
ENTER to select.
1. Default page
Default picture and editable picture are available upon selection.
F
H
A
60.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00
F 600.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (circulate)
2. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page. If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will display
a blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.30.6 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act
=3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3
13. PC Link
PC Link
Press "ENTER"
to link
The function of PC Link is to establish a connection with computer to
download the page for user defined editing. After enter to PC Link page,
check if the connection of KPC-CC01 and computer is successfully establish,
then press enter to go to next page and wait for communication response.
1.
If the connection failed, the screen will show “Time Out”.
PC Link
Time Out
Press "ESC"back
to MENU
Select 1 and press ENTER
PC Link
Waiting
2.
If the connection succeeds, the screen page will show “Downloading”.
When the download is done, it returns to MENU page.
PC Link
Downloading
28 %
Select 2 and press ENTER
28 %
3.
In order to set the start-up page and main page in the format user
defined, user must check the user define option for start-up page and
main page. If the user define page for editing has not yet downloaded to
KPC-CC01, the start-up page and main page will display as blank.
10-13
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Other display
When fault occur, the menu will display:
Fault
Warning
ocA
CE01
Comm. Error 1
Oc at accel
1. Press ENTER and start RESET. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory. To
view the fault DC BUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press “MENU”“Fault Record”.
2. Press ENTER again, if the screen returns to main page, the fault is clear.
3. When fault or warning message appears, backlight LED will blinks until the fault or the warning is cleared.
Optional accessory: RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad
Part No.
Description
CBC-K3FT
RJ45 extension lead, 3 feet (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT
RJ45 extension lead, 5 feet (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K7FT
RJ45 extension lead, 7 feet (approximately 2.1 m)
CBC-K10FT
RJ45 extension lead, 10 feet (approximately 3 m)
CBC-K16FT
RJ45 extension lead, 16 feet (approximately 4.9 m)
10-14
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction
TP functions can edit up to 256 pages (keypad), total capacity is 256KB. 50 normal objects and 10 communication
objects can be edited per page.
1)
TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions
1. Run TPEditor version 1.30
2. Go to File (F) Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down
menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C
Keypad. As for File Name, enter TPE0. Now click on OK.
3. You are now at the designing page. Go to Edit (E) Click on Add a New Page (A) or go to the TP page on
the upper right side, right click once on TP page and choose Add to increase one more page for editing. The
current firmware of Keypad is version1.00 and can support up to 4 pages.
4. Download setting, Go to Tool Communication settings (C) to set up the PC Com Port and Baud Rate. The
supporting speeds of Baud rate are 9600bps, 19200bps and 38400bps. The default setting of TP address is
1, please do not modify.
2)
Edit Startup Page
1. Click once on the Boot Page on the right hand side of your computer screen or click on View (V) click on
Boot Page (B). Then a blank Boot Page window will pop up. Use the circled items to design your Startup page.
10-15
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
2.
Static Text
. Open a blank page, click once on this button
page. The following windows will pop up.
, and then double click on that blank
On the right hand side of the Static Text Setting, you can adjust the frame setting, the text direction, the
alignment and the font setting. Once you finish all the adjustments that you need.
You can continue to input your text in the blank space of Static Text Setting window. When you finish
inputting your text, click on OK to continue your next step or click cancel to abort the current step.
3.
Open a blank page, then click once on this button
Static Bitmap
blank page. The following window will pop up.
and then double click on that
Please note that Static Bitmap setting support only images in BMP format. Now choose an image that you
need and click open, then that image will appear in the Static Bitmap window.
4.
Geometric Bitmap
As shown in the picture on the left side, there
are 11 kinds of geometric bitmap to choose. Open a new blank page then click once on a geometric bitmap
10-16
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page. For
example, if you drag this icon
5.
to a blank page, you will see the following window.
Download---Take the image below as an example. The sentence “Boot page” is static text, the 11 images
below are geometric bitmaps. The image on the right hand side is a Static Bitmap. To upload a start up
page, double click to activate “Boot page. Make sure that you have followed the instruction on page 3 to
choose the right com port. Then go to “Communication (M)” Click on “Write Boot Page TP (B).” When
you see the pop up message below
Go to the CH2000 Keypad, press Menu then keep on pressing the Upward key until you see “PC Link,”
then press ENTER once, when you see “Press Enter to PC Link” on the keypad, press the ENTER again.
Then click the YES button to begin the upload.
10-17
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
3)
Edit Main Page
1.
Click on a page under the TP Page to edit or go to View click on Boot Page to begin to edit main page.
The objects available for you to use are in the red circles below.
From left to right: Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button, Clock Display, Units,
Numeric Input, 11 geometric bitmaps and different width of lines. The application of Static Text, Static
Bitmap, and geometric bitmap is the same as the editing startup page.
2.
Numeric/ASCII Display A): Go to Objects (O)Click once on the Numeric/ASCII Display(A)
Drag to enlarge to reach the size that you need to add objects in the
screen where you want to create an object Double click on the object to set up Related Devices, Frame
Setting , Fonts and Alignment.
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need, if you want to read output
frequency (H), set the VFD Communication Port to $2202. For other values, please refer to ACMD
ModBus Comm Address List.
3.
Scale Setting
: On the Tool Bar, click on this
for Scale Setting. You can also edit Scale Setting in
the Property Window on the right hand side of your computer screen.
a.
b.
c.
Scale Position: Click on the drop down list to choose which position that you need to place a scale.
Scale Side: Click on the drop down list to choose if you want to number your scale from smaller
number to bigger number or from big to small. Click OK to accept this setting or click Cancel to
abort.
Font Setting: Click on the drop down list to choose the Font setting that you need then click OK to
accept the setting or click Cancel to abort.
10-18
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Bar Graph setting
a.
b.
c.
5.
Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the
setting or click Cancel to abort.
Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of
your choices for main scale and sub scale.
Maximum value & Minimum Value are the numbers on the two ends of a scale. They can be
negative numbers but the input numbers are limited by value.
Follow the Scale setting mentioned above; you will have a scale as shown below.
:
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need.
Direction Setting: Click on the drop down menu to choose one of the following directions: From
Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left to Right or From Right to Left.
Maximum Value & Minimum Value: They define the range covered by the maximum value and
minimum value. If a value is smaller than or equal to the minimum value, then the bar graph will be
blank. If a value is bigger or equal to the maximum value, then the bar graph will be full. If a value is
between minimum and maximum value, then the bar graph will be filled proportionally.
: Currently this function only allows the Keypad to switch pages, other functions are not yet
Button
available. Text input function and Image inserted functions are not yet supported.
Double click on
a.
b.
c.
to open set up window.
allows you set up buttons’ functions. But Page Jump is the only supported function
currently.
Page Jump setting: After you choose the Page Jump function in the drop down list, you will see this
Page Jump Setting Menu
allows you to assign functions to the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1,
F2, F3, F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Please note that the Up and Down keys are locked by
TPEditor. These two keys cannot be programmed. If you want to program Up and Down keys, go to
ToolFunction Key Settings (F)Re-Define Up/Down Key(R).
10-19
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
d. There are no supported functions other than the setting mentioned above.
6.
Clock Display Setting
: Click once on this button
.
Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following
In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad. To adjust time,
go to #9 on the Keypad’s menu. You can also adjust Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
7.
Unit Measurement
: Click once on this Button:
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following
Choose from the drop down list the Metrology and the Unity Name that you need.
As for Metrology, you have the following choices Length, Square Measure, Volume/Solid Measure,
Weight, Speed, Time and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically when you change
metrology type.
8.
Numeric Input Setting
:
This menu allows you to provide parameters or communication ports and to input numbers.
Click once on this button
.
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following:
10-20
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
9.
Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is and another one is .
Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that
of a communication port. For example, input 012C to Read and Write Parameter P01-44.
OutLine Setting: The Frame setting, Font setting, Vertical Alignment and Horizontal Alignment are
the same as mentioned before. Click on the drop down menu and choose the setting that you need.
Function key: The setting here allows you to program keys on the keypad. Press the key on the
menu then the corresponding key on the keypad will start to blink, then press Enter to confirm the
setting.
Value Type & Value Length: These two factors influence the range of the Minimum and Maximum
Value of the Limit Setting. Please note that the corresponding supporting values for CH2000 have
to be 16bits. The 32bits values are not supported.
Value Setting: This part is set automatically by the keypad itself.
Limit Setting: Input the range the security setting here.
For example, if you set Function Key as F1, Minimum Value as 0 and Maximum Value is 4, then
press F1 on Keypad Then you can press Up and Down key on the keypad to increase or decrease
the value. Press Enter Key on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also go to parameter
table 01-44 to verify if your input correctly the value.
Download TP Page
: Press Up or Down key on the keypad until you reach #13 PC
Link.
Then press Enter on the keypad and you will see the word “Waiting” on keypad’s screen. Now choose a
page that you have created then go to Communication (M)Write to TP(W) to start downloading the
page to the keypad
.
When you see the word Completed on the keypad’s screen, that means the download is done.
Then you can press ESC on the keypad to go back to the menu of the keypad.
10-21
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions
Following fault codes and description are for digital keypad KPC-CC01 with version V1.01 and version
higher.
LCM Display
Description
Fault
FrEr
Keypad flash memory read error
kpdFlash Read Er
Fault
FSEr
Keypad flash memory save error
kpdFlash Save Er
Fault
FPEr
Keypad flash memory parameter error
kpdFlash Pr Er
Fault
VFDr
Keypad flash memory when read AC drive data error
Read VFD Info Er
LCM Display
Description
Warning
CE01
Modbus function code error
Comm Command Er
Warning
CE02
Modbus data address error
Comm Address Er
Warning
CE03
Modbus data value error
Comm Data Error
Warning
CE04
Modbus slave drive error
Comm Slave Error
Warning
CE10
Modbus transmission time-Out
KpdCom m Time O ut
Warning
TPNO
Object not supported by TP Editor
TP No Object
10-22
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
Fault Description of File Copy and Setting Errors
LCM Display
Description
File 1
Err
Parameter and rile are read only
Read Only
File 1
Err
Fail to write parameter and file
Write Fail
File 1
Err
AC drive is in operating status
VFD Running
File 1
Err
AC drive parameter is locked
Pr Lock
File 1
Err
AC drive parameter changing
Pr Changing
File 1
Err
Fault code
Fault Code
File 1
Err
Warning code
Warning Code
File 1
Err
File type dismatch
Type Dismatch
File 1
Err
File is locked with password
Password Lock
File 1
Err
File version dismatch
Version Fail
File 1
Err
AC drive copy function time-out
VFD Time Out
File 1
Err
Other keypad error
Keypad Issue
10-23
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
LCM Display
Description
File 1
Err
Other AC drive error
VFD Issue
10-24
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings
This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges,
factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
NOTE
1） : the parameter can be set during operation
2） For more detail on parameters, please refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
00 Drive Parameters
NOTE
Pr.
IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Settings
Explanation
00-00
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
00-01
Display AC Motor Drive Rated
Current
4: 230V, 1HP
5: 460 V, 1HP
6: 230V,2HP
7: 460 V, 2HP
8: 230V, 3HP
9: 460 V, 3HP
10: 230V, 5HP
11: 460 V, 5HP
12: 230V, 7.5HP
13: 460 V, 7.5HP
14: 230V, 10HP
15: 460V, 10HP
16: 230V, 15HP
17: 460V, 15HP
18: 230V, 20HP
19: 460V, 20HP
20: 230V, 25HP
21: 460V, 25HP
22: 230V, 30HP
23: 460V, 30HP
24: 230V, 40HP
25: 460V, 40HP
26: 230V, 50HP
27: 460V, 50HP
28: 230V, 60HP
29: 460V, 60HP
30: 230V, 75HP
31: 460V, 75HP
32: 230V, 100HP
33: 460V, 100HP
34: 230V, 125HP
35: 460V, 125HP
37: 460V, 150HP
39: 460V, 175HP
41: 460V, 215HP
43: 460V, 250HP
45: 460V, 300HP
47: 460V, 375HP
49: 460V, 425HP
51: 460V, 475HP
55: 460V, 600HP
Display by models
11-1
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
00-02
Parameter Reset
00-03
Start-up Display Selection
00-04
Content of Multi-function Display
0: No function
1: Read only
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base
frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base
frequency is 60Hz)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Pr.10-00,10-01)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.)
12: Display ACI in % (2.)
13: Display AUI in % (3.)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC
(c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
input (d)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
output (0.)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload count (0.00~100.00%) (o.)
26: Ground Fault GFF (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
28: Display PLC data D1043 (C)
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U
application) (4.)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: Display Pr.00-05 user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during
operation (PG card plug in and Z phase signal
input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG
card is connected)(q)
34: Operation speed of fan (%) (F.)
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode
(SPD), 1= torque control mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz)
(J.)
37: Reserved
38: Display drive status (6.)
39: Display estimated output torque, positive and
11-2
0
0
3
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: positive
torque; -0.0: negative torque (C.)
40: Torque Command, unit %(L)
41: KWH, unit KWH(J)
42: PID Reference, unit % (h.)
43: PID offset (%) (o.)
44: PID Output Fcmd(Hz) (b.)
00-05
Coefficient Gain in Actual Output
Frequency
0~160.00
1
00-06
Software Version
Read only
#.#
00-07
Parameter Protection Password
Input
00-08
Parameter Protection Password
Setting
0～65535
0~3: the times of password attempts
0 ~ 65535
0: No password protection / password is entered
correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Parameter is locked
00-09
Reserved
00-10
Control Mode
00-11
Control of Speed Mode
00-12
Point-to-Point Position mode
00-13
Torque Mode Control
00-14
Reserved
00-15
Reserved
00-16
Duty Selection
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM Sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
4: FOCPG（PM FOC vector control + Encoder）
5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless
vector control)
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless
vector control)
0: Relative position
1: Absolute position
0: TQCPG（IM Torque control + Encoder）
1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
3: Super Heavy Duty
Super Heavy Duty 230V
1-15HP
5~15KHz
20-100HP
5~15KHz
00-17
0
0
0
0
0
3
8
6
Carrier Frequency
Super Heavy Duty 460V
1-20HP
5~15KHz
20-100HP
5~15KHz
125-375HP
4~10KHz
00-18
0
8
6
5
Reserved
00-19
PLC Command Mask
00-20
Source of Master Frequency
Command（AUTO）
Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control
Bit 2: Position command by PLC force control
Bit 3: Torque command by PLC force control
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
11-3
Read
only
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
disabled.
3: CANopen communication card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (no CANopen card)
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward/reverse
1: Reverse disable
2: Forward disable
00-21
Source of the Operation Command
（AUTO）
00-22
Stop Method
00-23
Control of Motor Direction
00-24
Memory of Frequency Command
Read only
User Defined Characteristics
Bit 0~3: user defined decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
Bit 4~15: user define on unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: M/S
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: PPM
008xh: l / m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: M
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: Psi
01Dxh: Atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
00-25
11-4
0
0
0
Read
only
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
00-26
Max. User Defined Value
0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place)
0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place)
00-27
User Defined Value
Read only
00-28
Reserved
00-29
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
00-30
Source of the Master Frequency
Command（HAND）
00-31
Source of the Operation Command
（HAND）
00-32
Digital Keypad STOP Function
00-33
~
00-39
Reserved
00-40
0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the
REMOTE setting for frequency and operation
status
3: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the
LOCAL setting for frequency and operation
status
4: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as
LOCAL setting when switch to Local and runs as
REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for
frequency and operation status.
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
disabled.
3: CANopen communication card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card)
0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable
Homing mode
0
Read
Only
0
0
0
0
0000
X
Note: Forward run = clockwise (CW)
Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as
check point.
1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse
limit (CCWL) as check point.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG: OFF→ON
as check point.
3:
Reverse
to home. Set ORG: OFF→ON as
11-5
check point.
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
5: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check
point.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF
as check point.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF
as check point.
8: Define current position as home.
Y
Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 first.
0: reverse run to Z pulse
1: continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5,
Z
6, 7 first.
0: display the error
1: reverse the direction
00-41
Homing by frequency 1
0.00~600.00Hz
8.00
00-42
00-43
~
00-47
Homing by frequency 2
0.00~600.00Hz
2.00
00-48
Display Filter Time (Current)
0.001~65.535 sec
0.100
00-49
Display Filter Time (Keypad)
0.001~65.535 sec
0.100
00-50
Software Version (date)
Read only
#####
00-51
~
00-61
Reserved
Reserved
11-6
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
01 Basic Parameters
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
01-00
Max. Operation Frequency
50.00~600.00Hz
01-01
Output Frequency of Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
01-02
Output Voltage of Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~255.0V
460V: 0.0V~510.0V
200.0
400.0
01-03
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
3.00
01-04
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
11.0
22.0
01-05
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1
0.50
01-06
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
01-07
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1
0.00
01-08
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
0.00~600.00Hz
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
01-09
Start-Up Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.50
01-10
Output Frequency Upper Limit
0.00~600.00Hz
600.00
01-11
Output Frequency Lower Limit
0.00~600.00Hz
0
01-12
Accel. Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-13
Decel Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-14
Accel Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-15
Decel Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-16
Accel Time 3
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-17
Decel Time 3
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-18
Accel Time 4
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-19
Decel Time 4
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-20
JOG Acceleration Time
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
01-21
JOG Deceleration Time
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
10.00
10.0
11-7
2.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
01-22
JOG Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
6.00
01-23
1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-24
S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-25
S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-26
S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-27
S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second
0.20
0.2
01-28
Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-29
Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-30
Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-31
Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-32
Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-33
Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit)
0.00
01-34
Zero-speed Mode
0.00~600.00Hz
0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr.01-07, 01-41)
01-35
Output Frequency of Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
01-36
Output Voltage of Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~255.0V
460V: 0.0V~510.0V
200.0
400.0
01-37
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
3.00
01-38
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
11.0
22.0
01-39
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
0.50
01-40
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
2.0
4.0
01-41
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
01-42
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
230V: 0.0V~240.0V
460V: 0.0V~480.0V
0.0
0.0
01-43
V/f Curve Selection
01-44
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration
Setting
01-45
Time Unit for Accel. /Decel. and S
Curve
01-46
CANopen Quick Stop Time
0: V/f curve determined by Pr.01-00~01-08
1: Curve to the power of 1.5
2: Curve to the power of 2
0: Linear accel. /decel.
1: Auto accel.; linear decel.
2: Linear accel.; auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel.
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limit
by Pr.01-12~01-21)
0: Unit: 0.01 sec
1: Unit: 0.1sec
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
11-8
0
0
0
0
1.00
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
02 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Pr.
02-00
02-01
02-02
02-03
02-04
02-05
02-06
02-07
02-08
02-26
02-27
02-28
02-29
02-30
02-31
Explanation
2-wire/3-wire Operation Control
Multi-function Input Command 1
(MI1)
Multi-function Input Command 2
(MI2)
Multi-function Input Command 3
(MI3)
Multi-function Input Command 4
(MI4)
Multi-function Input Command 5
(MI5)
Multi-function Input Command 6
(MI6)
Multi-function Input Command 7
(MI7)
Multi-function Input Command 8
(MI8)
Input terminal of I/O
extension card (MI10)
Input terminal of I/O extension
card (MI11)
Input terminal of I/O extension
card (MI12)
Input terminal of I/O extension
card (MI13)
Input terminal of I/O extension
card (MI14)
Input terminal of I/O extension
card (MI15)
Settings
Factory
Setting
0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control
1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control
2: 3-wire, power on for operation control
0
0: No function
1
1: Multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
command 1
2: Multi-step speed command 2/multi-step position
command 2
3: Multi-step speed command 3/multi-step position
command 3
4: Multi-step speed command 4/multi-step position
command 4
2
3
4
0
5: Reset
0
6: JOG command（By KPC-CC01 or external control）
0
7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
0
8: The 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
0
9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
0
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
0
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
0
12: Output stop
0
13: Cancel the setting of optimal accel. /decel. time
0
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: Operation speed command from AVI
16: Operation speed command from ACI
17: Operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC/FOCmodel selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and
multi-speed control
35: Enable single point position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid
at stop)
37: Full position control pulse command input enable
38: Disable EEPROM write function
11-9
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)
44: Reversed direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Homing function enable
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb action input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
52: Selection for PLC mode bit1
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~55: Reserved
56: Local/Remote Selection
57~70: Reserved
02-09
UP/DOWN key mode
0: up/down by the accel. /decel. time
1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
02-10
Constant speed. The Accel.
/Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN
Key
0.01~1.00Hz/ms
0.01
02-11
Digital Input Response Time
0.000~30.000 second
0.005
02-12
Digital Input Mode Selection
0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.）
0000
02-13
Multi-function Output 1 RY1
0: No function
11
02-14
Multi-function Output 2 RY2
1: Operation Indication
1
02-16
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
2: Operation speed attained
0
02-17
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
0
02-36
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
0
02-37
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
0
02-38
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command)
0
02-39
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
0
02-40
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
0
02-41
9: Drive is ready
0
02-42
10: Low voltage warning（LV）(Pr.06-00)
0
02-43
11: Malfunction indication
0
02-44
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
0
02-45
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
0
02-46
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
0
Output terminal of the I/O
extension card (MO10)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO11)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO12)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO13)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO14)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO15)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO16)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO17)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO18)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO19)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
Card (MO20)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained, does not return to 0
(Pr.02-20)
11-10
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0
(Pr.02-19)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33(<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2(Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3(Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4(Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71~06-73)
45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve Switch
46: Master dEb warning output
47: Closed brake output
48: Reserved
49: Homing action complete
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
02-18
02-19
02-20
02-21
Multi-function output direction
Terminal counting value attained
(returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value
attained (not return to 0)
Digital Output Gain (DFM)
0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.）
0000
0~65500
0
0~65500
0
1～166
1
02-22
Desired Frequency Attained 1
0.00～600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
02-23
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 1
0.00～600.00Hz
2.00
02-24
Desired Frequency Attained 2
0.00～600.00Hz
60.00/
50.00
02-25
The Width of the Desired
Frequency Attained 2
0.00～600.00Hz
2.00
02-32
Brake Delay Time
0.000~65.000 sec.
0.000
02-33
Current Detect
0~100%
02-34
Speed Area Set
0.00~600.00Hz（Motor speed when using PG Card）
11-11
0
3.00
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
02-35
External Operation Control
Selection after Reset and
Activate
0: Disable
1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
0
02-47
Zero-speed Level of Motor
0~65535 rpm
0
02-48
02-49
02-50
02-51
02-52
02-53
02-54
Max. Frequency of Resolution
Switch
Switch the delay time of Max.
output frequency
Status of Multi-function Input
Terminal
Status of Multi-function Output
Terminal
Display External Output terminal
occupied by PLC
Display Analog Input Terminal
occupied by PLC
Display the Frequency
Command Executed by External
Terminal
0.01~600.00Hz
60.00
0.000~65.000 sec.
0.000
Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
Monitor the status of multi-function output terminals
Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read only
Read
only
0.000
sec
02-55
Reserved
02-56
Release Brake Check
0.000~65.000 sec
02-57
FWD Brake Current
0~100%
02-58
FWD Brake Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
02-59
REV Release Current
0~100%
0
02-60
REV Brake Current
0~100%
0
02-61
REV Release Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
02-62
REV Brake Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
02-63
Speed Area Band (P02-34)
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
02-64
LLACC Mode
02-65
LLACC Active Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
02-66
LLACC FWD Active Current
0~100%
0
02-67
LLACC REV Active Current
0~100%
0
02-68
LLACC Delay Time
0.000~65.000 sec
0.000
02-69
LLACC Target Frequency
0.00~01-00 Hz
0.00H
0: Disable
1: Enable
11-12
0
0.00
0
0.00
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
03 Analog Input/Output Parameters
Pr.
03-00
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
Analog Input Selection (AVI)
0: No function
1
0
0
03-01
Analog Input Selection (ACI)
1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque
control mode)
03-02
Analog Input Selection (AUI)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12: Reserved
13: PID Offset (%) (h.)
14~17: Reserved
03-03
Analog Input Bias (AVI)
-100.0~100.0%
0
03-04
Analog Input Bias (ACI)
-100.0~100.0%
0
03-05
Analog Positive Voltage Input
Bias (AUI)
-100.0~100.0%
0
03-06
Reserved
03-07
03-08
03-09
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(AVI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(AUI)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and
reverse run is controlled by digital keypad or
external terminal.
1: Negative frequency is valid. Positive frequency =
forward run; negative frequency = reverse run.
Direction can not be switched by digital keypad or
external terminal control.
0
03-10
Analog Frequency Command
for Reverse Run
03-11
Analog Input Gain (AVI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-12
Analog Input Gain (ACI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-13
Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-14
Analog Negative Input Gain
(AUI)
-500.0~500.0%
100.0
03-15
Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)
0.00~20.00 sec.
0.01
03-16
Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
0.00~20.00 sec.
0.01
03-17
Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)
0.01
03-18
Addition Function of the Analog
Input
0.00~20.00 sec.
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
11-13
0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
03-19
ACI Signal Loss
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
03-20
Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)
0: Output frequency (Hz)
0
03-23
Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
0
0
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: Iq current
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current
15: Id feedback value
16: Vq-axis voltage
17: Vd-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage/current output
03-21
Gain of Analog Output 1 (AFM1)
100.0
Analog Output 1 when in REV
Direction (AFM1)
0~500.0%
0: Absolute output voltage
1: Reverse output 0V; Positive output 0-10V
2: Reverse output 5-0V; Positive output 5-10V
03-22
03-24
Gain of Analog Output 2 (AFM2)
0~500.0%
100.0
0: Absolute output voltage
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD
direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD
direction
0
03-25
Analog Output 2 when in REV
Direction (AFM2)
03-26
Reserved
03-27
AFM2 Output Bias
-100.00~100.00%
03-28
AVI Selection
0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
0
03-29
ACI Selection
0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
0
03-30
Status of PLC Output Terminal
Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
03-31
AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection
0: 0-20mA Output
1: 4-20mA Output
03-32
AFM1 DC output setting level
0.00~100.00%
0.00
03-33
AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
0.00~100.00%
0.00
03-34
Reserved
11-14
0
0.00
Read
only
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
03-35
AFM1 filter output time
0.00 ~ 20.00 Seconds
0.01
03-36
AFM2 filter output time
0.00 ~ 20.00 Seconds
0.01
03-37
~
03-49
Reserved
03-50
Analog Input Curve Selection
0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI
2: 3 point curve of ACI
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
03-51
AVI Low Point
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
0.00
03-52
AVI Proportional Low Point
0.00~100.00%
0.00
03-53
AVI Mid Point
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
5.00
03-54
AVI Proportional Mid Point
0.00~100.00%
50.00
03-55
AVI High Point
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
10.00
03-56
AVI Proportional High Point
0.00~100.00%
100.00
03-57
ACI Low Point
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
4.00
03-58
ACI Proportional Low Point
0.00~100.00%
0.00
03-59
ACI Mid Point
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
12.00
03-60
ACI Proportional Mid Point
0.00~100.00%
50.00
03-61
ACI High Point
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
20.00
03-62
ACI Proportional High Point
0.00~100.00%
100.00
03-63
Positive AUI Voltage Low Point
0.00~10.00V
0.00
03-64
Positive AUI Voltage
Proportional Low Point
0.00~100.00%
0.00
03-65
Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point
0.00~10.00V
5.00
03-66
Positive AUI Voltage
Proportional Mid Point
0.00~100.00%
50.00
03-67
Positive AUI Voltage High Point
0.00~10.00V
10.00
03-68
Positive AUI Voltage
Proportional High Point
0.00~100.00%
100.00
03-69
Negative AUI Voltage Low Point
0.00~ -10.00V
0.00
03-70
Negative AUI Voltage
Proportional Low Point
0.00~ -100.00%
0.00
03-71
Negative AUI Voltage Mid Point
0.00~ -10.00V
-5.00
03-72
Negative AUI Voltage
Proportional Mid Point
0.00~ -100.00%
-50.00
03-73
Negative AUI Voltage High Point
0.00~ -10.00V
-10.00
03-74
Negative AUI Voltage
Proportional High Point
0.00~ -100.00%
-100.00
11-15
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
04-00
1st Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-01
2nd Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-02
3rd Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-03
4th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-04
5th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-05
6th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-06
7th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-07
8th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-08
9th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-09
10th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-10
11th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-11
12th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-12
13th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-13
14th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~600.00Hz
0
04-14
15th Step Speed Frequency
0
04-15
Position command 1 (revolution)
0.00~600.00Hz
-30000~30000
04-16
Position command 1 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-17
Position command 2 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-18
Position command 2 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-19
Position command 3 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-20
Position command 3 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-21
Position command 4 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-22
Position command 4 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-23
Position command 5 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-24
Position command 5 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-25
Position command 6 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-26
Position command 6 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-27
Position command 7 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-28
Position command 7 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-29
Position command 8 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-30
Position command 8 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-31
Position command 9 (revolution)
-30000~30000
0
04-32
Position command 9 (pulse)
-32767~32767
0
04-33
Position command 10
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-34
Position command 10 (pulse)
-32767~32767
04-35
Position command 11
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-36
Position command 11 (pulse)
-32767~32767
11-16
0
0
0
0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
04-37
Position command 12
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-38
Position command 12 (pulse)
-32767~32767
04-39
Position command 13
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-40
Position command 13 (pulse)
-32767~32767
04-41
Position command 14
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-42
Position command 14 (pulse)
-32767~32767
04-43
Position command 15
(revolution)
-30000~30000
04-44
Position command 15 (pulse)
-32767~32767
11-17
Factory
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
05 Motor Parameters
Pr.
05-00
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
05-05
05-06
05-07
05-08
05-09
05-10
~
05-12
05-13
05-14
05-15
05-16
05-17
05-18
05-19
05-20
05-21
Explanation
Motor Auto Tuning
Full-load Current of Induction
Motor 1(A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor
1(kW)
Settings
0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor(IM) (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx,
no-load current)
2: Static test for induction motor(IM)
3: No function
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor
10~120% of drive’s rated current
Factory
Setting
0
#.##
0~655.35kW
#.##
Rated Speed of Induction Motor
1 (rpm)
0~65535
1710(60Hz 4poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
1710
Pole Number of Induction Motor
1
No-load Current of Induction
Motor 1 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
Induction Motor 1
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of
Induction Motor 1
Stator Inductance (Lx) of
Induction Motor 1
2~20
4
0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
#.##
0~65.535
#.###
0~65.535
#.###
0~6553.5mH
#.#
0~6553.5mH
#.#
Full-load Current of Induction
Motor 2 (A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor
2 (kW)
10~120%
#.##
0~655.35kW
#.##
Rated Speed of Induction Motor
2 (rpm)
0~65535
1710(60Hz 4 poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
1710
Pole Number of Induction Motor
2
No-load Current of Induction
Motor 2 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
Induction Motor 2
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of
Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of
Induction Motor 2
2~20
Reserved
4
0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
#.##
0~65.535
#.###
0~65.535
#.###
0~6553.5mH
#.#
0~6553.5mH
#.#
05-22
Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection
1: motor 1
2: motor 2
05-23
Frequency for
Y-connection/△-connection
Switch of Induction Motor
0.00~600.00Hz
05-24
Y-connection/△-connection
Switch of Induction Motor
0: Disable
1: Enable
11-18
1
60.00
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
05-25
05-26
05-27
05-28
05-29
05-30
05-31
05-32
05-33
05-34
05-35
05-36
05-37
05-38
Delay Time for
Y-connection/△-connection
Switch of Induction Motor
Accumulative Watt-second of
Motor in Low Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-second of
Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor
(W-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor
in Low Word (KW-Hour)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor
in High Word (KW-Hour)
Accumulative Motor Operation
Time (Min)
Accumulative Motor Operation
Time (day)
Induction Motor and Permanent
Magnet Motor Selection
Full-load current of Permanent
Magnet Motor
Rated Power of Permanent
Magnet Motor
Rated speed of Permanent
Magnet Motor
Pole number of Permanent
Magnet Motor
Inertia of Permanent Magnet
Motor
0.000~60.000 sec.
0.200
Read only
#.#
Read only
#.#
Read only
#.#
Read only
#.#
Read only
#.#
00~1439
0
00~65535
0
0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor
0.00~655.35Amps
0.00~655.35kW
0
0.00
0.00
0~65535rpm
2000
0~65535
10
2
0.0~6553.5 kg.cm
0.0
05-39
Stator Resistance of PM Motor
0.000~65.535
0.000
05-40
Permanent Magnet Motor Ld
0.00~655.35mH
0.000
05-41
Permanent Magnet Motor Lq
0.00~655.35mH
0.000
05-42
PG Offset angle of PM Motor
0.0~360.0°
05-43
Ke parameter of PM Motor
0~65535 (Unit: V/1000rpm)
11-19
0.0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
06 Protection Parameters
Pr.
06-00
Explanation
Low Voltage Level
Settings
230V:
Frame A to D: 150.0~220.0Vdc
Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V
460V:
Frame A to D: 300.0~440.0Vdc
Frame E and frames above E: 380.0~440.0V
Factory
Setting
180.0
200.0
360.0
400.0
06-01
Over-voltage Stall Prevention
06-02
Selection for Over-voltage Stall
Prevention
0: Disabled
230V: 0.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 0.0~900.0Vdc
0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage prevention
06-03
Over-current Stall Prevention
during Acceleration
Supper Heavy Duty: 0~180%(100%: drive’s rated
current)
150
06-04
Over-current Stall Prevention
during Operation
120
150
06-05
Accel. /Decel. Time Selection of
Stall Prevention at Constant
Speed
Super Heavy Duty: 0~200%(100%: drive’s rated
current)
0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
06-06
06-07
06-08
06-09
06-10
06-11
Over-torque Detection Selection
(OT1)
Over-torque Detection Level
(OT1)
Over-torque Detection Time
(OT1)
Over-torque Detection Selection
(OT2)
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
380.0
760.0
0
0
0
10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
120
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.1
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, stop operation after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operation after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
0
Over-torque Detection Level
(OT2)
Over-torque Detection Time
(OT2)
10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
120
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.1
06-12
Current Limit
0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current）
150
06-13
Electronic Thermal Relay
Selection (Motor 1)
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
06-14
06-15
Electronic Thermal Characteristic
for Motor 1
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH)
Warning
2
30.0~600.0 sec.
60.0
0.0~110.0℃
85.0
11-20
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
06-16
Stall Prevention Limit Level
0～100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
50
06-17
Present Fault Record
0: No fault record
0
06-18
Second Most Recent Fault
Record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
0
06-19
Third Most Recent Fault Record
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
0
06-20
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
0
06-21
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
4: Ground fault (GFF)
0
06-22
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
0
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
24: Motor overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref loss (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
11-21
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
55: Communication error (CE2)
56: Communication error (CE3)
57: Communication error (CE4)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: PU Time-out (CP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85: PG-02U ABZ hardware disconnection
86: PG-02U UVW hardware disconnection
87~89: Reserved
90: Inner PLC function is forced to stop
100: Reserved
101: CANopen software disconnect1 (CGdE)
102: CAN open software disconnect2 (CHbE)
103: CANopen synchronous error (CSYE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: Internal communication overtime error(InrCOM)
06-23
Fault Output Option 1
0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code)
0
06-24
Fault Output Option 2
0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code)
0
06-25
Fault Output Option 3
0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code)
0
06-26
Fault Output Option 4
0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code)
0
06-27
Electronic Thermal Relay
Selection 2 (Motor 2)
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
2
06-28
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic for Motor 2
30.0~600.0 sec
06-29
PTC Detection Selection
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
06-30
PTC Level
0.0～100.0%
06-31
Frequency Command for
Malfunction
0.00~655.35 Hz
06-32
Output Frequency at Malfunction
0.00~655.35 Hz
06-33
Output Voltage at Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 V
11-22
60.0
0
50.0
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
06-34
DC Voltage at Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 V
06-35
Output Current at Malfunction
0.00~655.35 Amp
06-36
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 ℃
06-37
06-38
06-39
06-40
06-41
Capacitance Temperature at
Malfunction
Motor Speed in rpm at
Malfunction
Torque Command at Malfunction
Status of Multi-function Input
Terminal at Malfunction
Status of Multi-function Output
Terminal at Malfunction
0.0~6553.5 ℃
0~65535
0~65535
0000h~FFFFh
0000h~FFFFh
0000h~FFFFh
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
06-42
Drive Status at Malfunction
06-43
Reserved
06-44
Reserved
06-45
Treatment to Output Phase Loss
Detection (OPHL)
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
06-46
Deceleration Time of Output
Phase Loss
0.000~65.535 sec
0.500
06-47
Current Bandwidth
0.00~655.35%
1.00
06-48
DC Brake Time of Output Phase
Loss
0.000~65.535sec
0.100
06-49
Reserved
06-50
Reserved
06-51
Reserved
06-52
Reserved
06-53
Treatment for the detected Input
Phase Loss (OrP)
06-54
Reserved
3
0: warn and ramp to stop
1: warn and coast to stop
0
0
06-55
Derating Protection
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by
load current and temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current
by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but
close current limit
06-56
PT100 Detected Level 1
0.000~10.000V
5.000
06-57
PT100 Detected Level 2
0.000~10.000V
7.000
06-58
PT100 Level 1 Frequency
Protect
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
06-59
Reserved
0.0~6553.5 %
60.0
0.0~6553.5 %
0.10
06-60
06-61
06-62
Software Detection GFF Current
Level
Software Detection GFF Filter
Time
Disable Level of dEb
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vdc
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vdc
11-23
180.0
/360.0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
06-63
Fault Record 1 (Day)
0~65535 days
06-64
Fault Record 1 (Min)
0~1439 min
06-65
Fault Record 2 (Day)
0~65535 days
06-66
Fault Record 2 (Min)
0~1439 min
06-67
Fault Record 3 (Day)
0~65535 days
06-68
Fault Record 3 (Min)
0~1439 min
06-69
Fault Record 4 (Day)
0~65535 days
06-70
Fault Record 4 (Min)
0~1439 min
06-71
Low Current Setting Level
0.0 ~ 6553.5 %
0.0
06-72
Low Current Detection Time
0.00 ~ 655.35sec
0.00
Treatment for low current
0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue
06-73
11-24
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
07 Special Parameters
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
380.0
760.0
07-00
Software Brake Level
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc
07-01
DC Brake Current Level
0~100%
07-02
DC Brake Time at Start-up
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.0
07-03
DC Brake Time at Stop
0.0~60.0 sec.
0.0
07-04
Startup Frequency for DC Brake
0.00~600.00Hz
0.00
07-05
Maximum Power Loss Duration
1~200%
100
07-06
Restart after Momentary Power
Loss
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for minimum output frequency
07-07
Maximum Power Loss Duration
0.1~20.0 sec.
2.0
07-08
Base Block Time
0.1~5.0 sec.
0.5
07-09
Current Limit for Speed Search
20~200%
50
07-10
Treatment to Restart After Fault
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
0
07-11
Number of Times of Auto
Restart After Fault
0~10
0
Speed Search during Start-up
0: Disable
1: Speed search for maximum output frequency
2: Speed search for start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search for minimum output frequency
0
0
07-12
0
0
07-13
Decel. Time to Momentary
Power Loss
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
07-14
DEB Return Time
0.0~25.0sec
0.0
07-15
Dwell Time at Accel.
0.00 ~ 600.00sec
0.00
07-16
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
07-17
Dwell Time at Decel.
0.00 ~ 600.00sec
0.00
07-18
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
07-19
Fan Cooling Control
07-20
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to
Stop Selection
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be
OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When
the AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink
temperature (around 60oC) is attained.
4: Fan always OFF
0: Coast stop
1: By deceleration Time 1
2: By deceleration Time 2
3: By deceleration Time 3
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
11-25
0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
07-21
Auto Energy-saving Operation
0: Disable
1: Enable
07-22
Energy-saving Gain
10～1000%
07-23
Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR)
Function
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
07-24
07-25
07-26
07-27
07-28
Reserved
07-29
Filter Time of Torque
Compensation (V/F and SVC
control mode)
Filter Time of Slip
Compensation (V/F and SVC
control mode)
Torque Compensation Gain (V/F
and SVC control mode)
Slip Compensation Gain (V/F
and SVC control mode)
Factory
Setting
0
100
0
0.001~10.000 sec
0.020
0.001~10.000 sec
0.100
0
0~10
0.00~10.00
0.00
Slip Deviation Level
0.0~100.0%
0
07-30
Detection Time of Slip Deviation
07-31
Over Slip Treatment
0.0~10.0 sec
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
07-32
Motor Hunting Gain
0~10000
1000
07-33
Auto Reset Time for Restart
after Fault
0.0~6000.0 sec
60.0
11-26
1.0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
08 High-function PID Parameters
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
0
08-00
Input Terminal for PID Feedback
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: on analogue input acc. To
setting 5 of Pr. 03-00 to Pr.03-02.
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
7: Negative PID feedback from communication
protocol
8: Positive PID feedback from communication protocol
08-01
Proportional Gain (P)
0.0~500.0%
1.0
08-02
Integral Time (I)
0.00~100.00sec
1.00
08-03
Derivative Control (D)
0.00~1.00sec
0.00
08-04
Upper Limit of Integral Control
0.0~100.0%
100.0
08-05
PID Output Frequency Limit
0.0~110.0%
100.0
08-06
PID feedback value by
communication protocol
0.00~200.00%
0.00
08-07
PID Delay Time
0.0~2.5 sec
0.0
08-08
Feedback Signal Detection Time
0.0~3600.0 sec
0.0
08-09
Feedback Signal Fault
Treatment
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
08-10
Sleep Reference Point
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
08-11
Wakeup Reference Point
0.00 ~ 600.00Hz
0.00
08-12
Sleep Time
0.0 ~ 6000.0sec
0.0
08-13
PID Deviation Level
1.0 ~ 50.0%
10.0
08-14
PID Deviation Time
0.1~300.0sec
5.0
08-15
Filter Time for PID Feedback
0.1~300.0sec
5.0
08-16
PID Compensation Selection
0: Parameter setting
1: Reserved
0
08-17
PID Compensation
-100.0~+100.0%
0
08-18
Setting of Sleep Mode Function
0: Follow PID output command
1: Follow PID feedback signal
0
08-19
Wakeup Integral Limit
0.0~200.0%
08-20
PID Mode Selection
0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
0
08-21
Enable PID to Change
Operation Direction
0: Operation direction can be changed
1: Operation direction can not be changed
0
08-22
Wakeup Delay Time
0.00~600.00 Seconds
0.00
PID Control Flag
Bit 0 = 1, PID reverse running must follow the setting of
Pr00-23.
Bit 0 = 0, PID reverse running follow PID’s calculated
value.
0.00
08-23
11-27
0
50.0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
09 Communication Parameters
Settings
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
09-00
COM1 Communication Address
1~254
09-01
COM1 Transmission Speed
4.8～115.2Kbps
09-02
COM1 Transmission Fault
Treatment
0: Warn and continue operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and continue operation
09-03
COM1 Time-out Detection
0.0～100.0 sec.
0.0
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
1
1
9.6
3
09-04
COM1 Communication Protocol
09-05
~
09-08
Reserved
09-09
Response Delay Time
0.0~200.0ms
09-10
Main Frequency of the
Communication
0.00~600.00Hz
09-11
Block Transfer 1
0~65535
0
09-12
Block Transfer 2
0~65535
0
09-13
Block Transfer 3
0~65535
0
09-14
Block Transfer 4
0~65535
0
09-15
Block Transfer 5
0~65535
0
09-16
Block Transfer 6
0~65535
0
09-17
Block Transfer 7
0~65535
0
09-18
Block Transfer 8
0~65535
0
09-19
Block Transfer 9
0~65535
0
09-20
Block Transfer 10
0~65535
0
09-21
Block Transfer 11
0~65535
0
09-22
Block Transfer 12
0~65535
0
09-23
Block Transfer 13
0~65535
0
09-24
Block Transfer 14
0~65535
0
09-25
Block Transfer 15
0~65535
0
09-26
Block Transfer 16
0~65535
0
11-28
2.0
60.00
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
09-27
~
09-29
Reserved
09-30
Communication Decoding
Method
09-31
Internal Communication
Protocol
09-32
~
09-34
Reserved
09-35
PLC Address
1~254
2
09-36
CANopen Slave Address
0: Disable
1~127
0
09-37
CANopen Speed
0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
0
09-38
Reserved
09-39
CANopen Warning Record
09-40
CANopen Decoding Method
09-41
CANopen Communication
Status
09-42
CANopen Control Status
09-43
Reset CANopen Index
0: Decoding Method 1
1: Decoding Method 2
0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal Communication Slave 1
-2: Internal Communication Slave 2
-3: Internal Communication Slave 3
-4: Internal Communication Slave 4
-5: Internal Communication Slave 5
-6: Internal Communication Slave 6
-7: Internal Communication Slave 7
-8: Internal Communication Slave 8
-9: Reserved
-10: Internal Communication Master
-11: Reserve
-12: Internal PLC Control
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANopen
0: Delta defined decoding method
1: CANopen DS402 Standard
0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick Stop Active state
13: Err Reaction Activation state
14: Error state
bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
11-29
1
0
0
1
Read
Only
Read
Only
65535
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
09-44
Reserved
09-45
CANopen Master Function
0: Disable
1: Enable
09-46
CANopen Master Address
1~127
100
09-47
~
09-59
Reserved
##
0
09-60
Identifications for
Communication Card
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave/Master
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: Ethernet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
09-61
Firmware Version of
Communication Card
Read only
##
09-62
Product Code
Read only
##
09-63
Error Code
Read only
##
09-64
~
09-69
Reserved
09-70
Address of Communication Card
DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
1
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
09-71
Setting of DeviceNet Speed
09-72
Other Setting of DeviceNet
Speed
09-73
Reserved
09-74
Reserved
09-75
09-76
09-77
09-78
09-79
IP Configuration of the
Communication Card
IP Address 1 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 2 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 3 of the
Communication Card
IP Address 4 of the
Communication Card
Non standard DeviceNet: (Delta Only)
0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
0: Disable
In this mode, baud rate can only be 0,1,2,3 in
standard DeviceNet speed
1: Enable
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be
same as CANopen (0-8).
2
0
0: Static IP
1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
11-30
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
09-80
09-81
09-82
09-83
09-84
09-85
09-86
09-87
09-88
Explanation
Address Mask 1 of the
Communication Card
Address Mask 2 of the
Communication Card
Address Mask 3 of the
Communication Card
Address Mask 4 of the
Communication Card
Getway Address 1 of the
Communication Card
Getway Address 2 of the
Communication Card
Getway Address 3 of the
Communication Card
Getway Address 4 of the
Communication Card
Password for Communication
Card (Low word)
09-89
Password for Communication
Card (High word)
09-90
Reset Communication Card
09-91
Additional Setting for
Communication Card
09-92
Status of Communication Card
Settings
0~255
Factory
Setting
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0~255
0
0: No function
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Bit0: Enable IP filter
Bit 1: Enable to write internet parameters (1bit). This bit
will change to disable when it finishes saving the
internet parameter updates.
Bit 2: Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be
changed to disable when it finishes saving the
internet parameter updates.
Bit 0: password enable
When the communication card is set with
password, this bit is enabled. When the password
is clear, this bit is disabled.
11-31
0
0
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
NOTE
Pr.
IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
10-00
Encoder Type Selection
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta Encoder for Delta servo motor)
3: Resolver
4: ABZ/UVW
5: MI8 single phase pulse input
10-01
Encoder Pulse
1~20000
Encoder Input Type Setting
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
0
10-03
Output Setting for Frequency
Division (denominator)
1~255
1
10-04
Electrical Gear at Load Side A1
1~65535
100
10-05
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
1~65535
100
10-06
Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
1~65535
100
10-07
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
1~65535
100
10-08
Treatment for Encoder
Feedback Fault
10-09
Detection Time of Encoder
Feedback Fault
10-10
Encoder Stall Level
10-02
600
2
1.0
115
Detection Time of Encoder Stall
0.0 ~ 2.0sec
10-12
Treatment for Encoder Stall
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
2
10-13
Encoder Slip Range
0~50% (0: disable)
50
10-14
Detection Time of Encoder Slip
0.0~10.0sec
0.5
10-11
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
0.0~10.0sec
0: No function
0~120%
0: No function
0
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (L=reverse direction, H=forward direction).
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
input. (L=forward direction, H=reverse direction).
0.1
10-15
Treatment for Encoder Stall and
Slip Error
10-16
Pulse Input Type Setting
10-17
Electrical Gear A
1~65535
100
10-18
Electrical Gear B
1~65535
100
11-32
2
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
10-19
Positioning for Encoder Position
0~65535pulse
0
10-20
Range for Encoder Position
Attained
0~65535pulse
10
10-21
Filter Time (PG2)
0~65.535 sec
0.100
10-22
Speed Mode (PG2)
0: Electronic Frequency
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
0
10-23
Reserved
10-24
FOC&TQC Function Control
0~65535
0
10-25
FOC Bandwidth of
Speed Observer
1.0~100.0Hz
40.0
10-26
FOC Minimum Stator Frequency
0.0~2.0%fN
2.0
1~1000ms
50
33~100%Tr
100
10-27
10-28
FOC Low-pass Filter Time
Constant
FOC Excitation Current Rise
Time
10-29
Top Limit of Frequency Deviation
0.00~100.00Hz
10-30
Resolver Pole Pair
1~50
1
10-31
I/F Mode, current command
0~150%Irated (Rated current % of the drive)
40
10-32
PM Sensorless Observer
Bandwidth for High Speed Zone
0.00~600.00Hz
5.00
10-33
Reserved
10-34
PM Sensorless Observer
Low-pass Filter Gain
0.00~655.35 Hz
1.00
10-35
ARM(Kp)
1~3
1
10-36
ARM(Ki)
1~3
1
10-37
PM Sensorless Control Word
0000~FFFFh
0000
10-38
Reserved
0.00~600.00Hz
20.00
0.00~600.00Hz
20.00
10-39
10-40
Frequency when switch from I/F
Mode to PM sensorless mode.
Frequency when switch from PM
sensorless observer mode to
V/F mode.
10-41
I/F mode, low pass-filter time
0.0~6.0sec
10-42
Initial Angle Detection Time
0~20ms
10-43
PG card version
0~655.35
11-33
20.00
0.2
5
Read
only
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings CH2000 Series
11 Advanced Parameters
NOTE
Pr.
IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
0
11-00
System Control
bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
bit 2: Zero servo
bit 3: Dead Time compensation closed
Bit 7: Selection to save or not save the frequency
Bit 8: Maximum speed of point to point position control
11-01
Per Unit of System Inertia
1~65535（256=1PU）
400
11-02
ASR1/ASR2 Switch
Frequency
5.00~600.00Hz
7.00
11-03
ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-04
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-05
Zero-speed Bandwidth
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-06
ASR Control ( P) 1
0~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
10
11-07
ASR Control (I) 1
0.000~10.000 sec
11-08
ASR Control ( P) 2
0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
11-09
ASR Control (I) 2
0.000~10.000 sec
11-10
P Gain of Zero Speed
0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
11-11
I Gain of Zero Speed
0.000~10.000 sec
11-12
Gain for ASR Speed Feed
Forward
0~100%
0
11-13
PDFF Gain
0~200%
30
11-14
Low-pass Filter Time of ASR
Output
0.000~0.350 sec
11-15
Notch Filter Depth
0~20db
11-16
Notch Filter Frequency
0.00~200.00Hz
0.0
11-17
Forward Motor Torque Limit
0~500%
200
11-18
Forward Regenerative Torque
Limit
0~500%
200
11-19
Reverse Motor Torque Limit
0~500%
200
11-20
0~500%
200
11-21
0~200%
90
11-22
0~200%
90
11-23
0~150%
65
11-24
APR Gain
0.00~40.00Hz (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM)
11-25
Gain Value of APR Feed
Forward
0~100
11-26
APR Curve Time
0.00~655.35 sec
3.00
11-27
Max. Torque Command
0~500%
100
Source of Torque Offset
0: No function
1: Analog signal input (Pr.03-00)
2: RS485 communication (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (Pr.11-30~11-32)
11-28
Reverse Regenerative Torque
Limit
Gain Value of Flux Weakening
Curve for Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux Weakening
Curve for Motor 2
Speed Response of Flux
Weakening Area
11-34
0.100
10
0.100
10
0.100
0.008
0
10.00
30
0
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory
Setting
11-29
Torque Offset Setting
0~100%
0.0
11-30
High Torque Offset
0~100%
30.0
11-31
Middle Torque Offset
0~100%
20.0
11-32
Low Torque Offset
0~100%
10.0
0
0
11-33
Source of Torque Command
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34)
2: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
5: Communication extension card
11-34
Torque Command
-100.0~+100.0% (Pr.11-27*11-34)
11-35
Filter Time of Torque
Command
0.000~1.000sec
0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38
(Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of
Master Frequency Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command).
0
0~120%
10
0~120%
10
0: Torque mode
1: Speed mode
0: External terminal
1: Reserved
2: RS485
3: CAN
4: PLC
5: Communication card
0
11-36
Speed Limit Selection
11-37
11-38
Forward Speed Limit (torque
mode)
Reverse Speed Limit (torque
mode)
0.000
11-39
Zero Torque Command Mode
11-40
Command Source of
Point-to-Point Position Control
11-41
Reserved
11-42
System Control Flags
0000~FFFFh
0000
11-43
Max. Frequency of Pointto-Point Position Control
Accel. Time of Point-to Point
Position Control
Decel. Time of Point-to Point
Position Control
0.00~327.67Hz
10.00
0.00~655.35 sec
1.00
0.00~655.35 sec
3.00
11-44
11-45
11-35
0
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings
00 Drive Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Using the following table to check if
Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the identity
code Pr.00-00.
230V Series
Frame
A
B
C
kW
0.75
HP
1.0
Pr.00-00
4
Rated Current for
5
Super Heavy Duty
(A)
1.5
2.0
6
2.2
3.0
8
3.7
5.0
10
5.5
7.5
12
7.5
10
14
11
15
16
15
20
18
18.5
25
20
8
11
17
25
33
49
65
75
Frame
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current for
Super Heavy Duty
(A)
22
30
22
D
30
40
24
37
50
26
45
60
28
50
75
30
F
75
100
32
90
120
146
180
215
255
E
460V Series
A
Frame
kW
0.75
HP
1
Pr.00-00
5
Rated Current for
Super Heavy Duty 3.0
(A)
Frame
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
Rated Current for
Super Heavy Duty
(A)
B
C
1.5
2
7
2.2
3
9
3.7
5
11
5.5
7.5
13
7. 5
10
15
11
15
17
15
20
19
18.5
25
21
22
30
23
30
40
25
4.0
6.0
9.0
12
18
24
32
38
45
60
D
E
F
G
H
37
50
27
45
60
29
55
75
31
75
100
33
90
125
35
110
150
37
132
175
39
160
215
41
185
250
43
220
300
45
280
375
47
73
91
110
150
180
220
250
310
370
450
550
Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
12-1
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 60Hz)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-02~00-08 and it can be used with
password setting for password protection. It needs to set Pr.00-02 to 0 before changing other
parameter settings.
When it is set to 9 or 10: all parameters are reset to factory settings. If password is set in Pr.00-08,
input the password set in Pr.00-07 to reset to factory settings.
When it is set to 5, KWH display value can be reset to 0 even when the drive is operating. Pr. 05-26,
05-27, 05-28, 05-29, 05-30 reset to 0.
When it is set to 6: clear internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal
CANopen master)
When it is set to 7: reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
Start-up Display Selection
Factory setting:
Settings
0: Display the frequency command (F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (H)
2: Display User define (U)
3: Output current ( A)
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. User
defined choice display according to the setting in Pr.00-04.
Content of Multi-function Display
Factory setting: 3
Settings
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r = 00: positive speed; -00 negative
speed)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative
torque) (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Note 1)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
12-2
0
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100%
(Refer to Note 2)
12: Display ACI in % (2.),
4~20mA/0~10V/0-20mA corresponds to
0~100%（Refer to Note 2）
13: Display AUI in % (3.),
-10V~10V corresponds to -100~100%(Refer to
Note 2)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) refer to Pr.02-12 (i) (Refer to
Note3)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (Pr.02-18) (o) (refer to NOTE 4)
18: Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d) (refer to NOTE 3)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.) (refer to NOTE
4)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card). When the motor direction
changes or the drive stops, the counter will start from 0 (display value
restarts counting from 0) (Max. 65535) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (max. 65535) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00%) (o.) (Refer to Note 6)
26: GFF Ground Fault (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc)(r.)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C) display in hexadecimal
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.)
30 : Display output of user defined (U)
31 : H page x 00-05 Display user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during operation (PG card plug in
and Z phase signal input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG card is connected)(q)
34: Operation speed of fan(%) (F.)
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD), 1= torque control
mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)
37: Reserved
38: Display drive status (6.) (Refer to Note 7)
40: Torque command, unit: %(L.)
41: KWH display, unit: KWH(J)
42: PID reference, unit: %(h.)
43: PID offset, unit: %(o.)
12-3
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
44: PID output frequency, unit: Hz(b.)
NOTE
1. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will be from 0
to 4000.
When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 3/4/5, the display range for PG feedback will be from
0 to 1000.
Home position: If it has Z phase, Z phase will be regarded as home position. Otherwise, home position
will be the encoder start up position.
2. It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03~03-10).
Example: assume that AVI input voltage is 0V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-07 is 4 (Serve bias as the
center).
3. Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Terminal MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
1
0
Status
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
MI10~MI15 are the terminals for extension cards (Pr.02-26~02-31).
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086h in HEX. When
Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086h” with LED U is ON on the keypad KPC-CE01. The
setting 16 is the status of digital input by Pr.02-12 setting and the setting 19 is the corresponding CPU
pin status of digital input, the FWD/REV action and the three-wire MI are not controlled by Pr.02-12. User
can set to 16 to monitor digital input status and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.
4. Assume that RY1: Pr.02-13 is set to 9 (Drive ready). After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if
there is no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be shown as follows.
N.O. switch status:
Terminal
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Status 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED U is ON
on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output by Pr.02-18 setting and the setting 20 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital output status and
then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal.
5. Setting 8: 100% means the motor rated torque. Motor rated torque = (motor rated power x60/2π)/motor
rated speed
6. If Pr.00-04 = 25, when display value reaches 100.00%, the drive will show “oL” as an overload warning.
7. If Pr.00-04 = 38,
Bit 0: The drive is running forward.
Bit 1: The drive is running backward.
Bit 2: The drive is ready.
Bit 3: Errors occurred on the drive.
Bit 4: The drive is running.
Bit 5: Warnings on the drive.
12-4
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0~160.00
This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr.00-04= 31 to display the
calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr.00-05).
Software Version
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
Read only
Parameter Protection Password Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
1~9998, 10000~65535
Display
0~3 (the times of password attempts)
This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 are used to prevent the personal misoperation.
When the user have forgotten the password, clear the setting by input 9999 and press ENTER key,
then input 9999 again and press Enter within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings will return
to factory setting.
Parameter Protection Password Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
1~9998, 10000~65535
0: No password protection / password is entered correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings. If the display shows 0, no password is set
nor password has been correctly entered in Pr.00-07. All parameters can then be changed,
including Pr.00-08. The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of
password the display will show 1. Be sure to write down the password for later use. To cancel the
parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr. 00-07.
How to retrieve parameter protection after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-enter the password to Pr.00-08 (input the password once).
Method 2: After reboots, password function will be recovered.
Method 3: Input any value into Pr.00-07 (Do not enter the password).
.
12-5
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Password Decode Flow Chart
Pass word Forgotten
Pass word Setting
Pass word Incorrect
00-07
00-08
Displays 01 after
correct password is
entered to Pr.00-08.
00-07
Enter 9999 and press ENTER,
then ente r 9999 aga in withi n 10
se cond s an d pre ss ENTER.
Then all pa ra meters will re set
to factory se ttings .
3 chan ces of p assword inpu t:
Incorre ct p ass word 1: d ispl ays "01"
Incorre ct p ass word 2: disp lays "02 "
Incorre ct p ass word 3: "Pcode "(blin king)
Keyp ad will be loc ked after 3 wrong attemp ted
pas swords. To re-activate t he k eypa d, pl ease
reboo t the drive an d in put t he c orrect
pas sword.
Decode Flow Char t
00-08
Password Set
00-07
Password Input
Pr.00-08=0
Yes
Shut down th drive
and re-app ly power
No
Re-apply power.
(The password is still valid)
Reserved
Control Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
This parameter determines the control mode of CH2000 series AC motor drive.
Control of Speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
4: FOCPG（PM FOC vector control + Encoder）
5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless vector control)
6 : PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)
12-6
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
0: (IM V/f control): user can design proportion of V/f as required and can control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: (IM V/f control + Encoder): user can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop
speed control.
2: (IM Sensorless vector control): get the optimal control by the auto-tuning of motor
parameters.
3: (IM FOC vector control+ encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be more
accurate (1:1000).
4: (PM FOC vector control + Encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be more
accurate (1:1000).
5: FOC Sensorless: IM field oriented sensorless vector control
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)
When setting Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd
Pr00-20
accel/decel time
DC BUS
Voltage
Detect
DC BUS Voltage
Protection
Current Detection
2/3
e->s
V/F
table
01-00,01-01
01-02,01-03
01-04,01-05
01-06,01-07
01-08
AVR
07-23
IGBT
PWM
01-00
01-01
01-02
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
Top Limit F:01-10
Lower Limit F:01-11
Filter
Time
Torque
Compe nsate
07-24
07-26
Vcmd
M
3/2
s->e
When setting Pr.00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd
00- 20
Frequ en cy
Ina ccura cy
V/F
table
Vol tage
Co mman d
Cu rren t
D etect
Frequ en cy
Ina ccura cy
IGBT
PWM
Vol tage Compe nsate
+
+
Fcmd
X
Filter
Time
Vol tage
cmd
07-24
Filter Time
M
Slip
com p.
Powe r
Factor
Irm s
07-26
Real Speed
12-7
Real Speed
EN
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows.
DC BUS
DC BUS Voltage
Voltage
Detection
Protection
Current
Detection
Fcmd
Pr00-20
2/3
e->s
V/F
table
Accel/decel
time
AVR
07-23
01-00,01-01Top limit F:01-10
01-02,01-03Lower limit F:01-11
01-04,01-05
01-06,01-07
01-08
Filter
Time
Fcmd
07-25
Slip
Compensate
IGBT
PWM
3/2
s->e
M
01-00
01-01
01-02
05-01
05-02
05-03
05-04
07-27
When setting Pr.00-11 to 3, the FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows.
11-12
Gain for ASR Speed
Feed Forward
00-20
+
-
+
ASR
+
+
11-00 Bit 0=0
11-06~11-11,
11-00 Bit 0=1
11-03~11-05,
Torque Limit
11-17~11-20
no offset
TqBias
11-28
Flux weakening
curve
11-14
by 03-00
by 11-29
by multi - function input
Torque command
Iq command
Current
control
11-21/11-22
Id command
current
measure
actual frequency
12-8
IGBT
&
PWM
IM
Encoder
10-00
~
10-02
motor 1 motor 2
01-01 01-35
01-02 01-36
05-01 05-13
~
~
current feedback 05-09 05-21
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When setting Pr.00-11 to 4, the FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows.
11-12
Gain for ASR Speed
Feed Forward
00-20
+
-
+
ASR
11-00 Bit 0=0
11-06~11-11,
11-00 Bit 0=1
11-03~11-05,
+
+
Torque Limit
11-17~11-20
no offset
TqBias
11-28
Flux weakening
curve
11-14
by 03-00
by 11-29
by multi - function input
Torque command
Iq command
Current
control
11-21/11-22
Id command
current
measure
actual frequency
IGBT
&
PWM
IM
Encoder
10-00
~
10-02
motor
01-01, 01-02
01-35, 01-36
05-33~05-43
current feedback
When setting Pr.00-11 to 5, FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows.
12-9
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When setting Pr.00-11 to 6, PM FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows:
10- 39
07-01
Id
command
AMR
ACRd
Id
feedback
dq2abc
Iq
command
Wr_cmd
Wr_est
ACRq
10-35
11-01~11-05
_est
Iq feedback
10-31~10-33
10-36
dq2abc
10-34
Point to Point Position control
Factory Settings: 0
Settings: 0: Incremental Type
1: Absolute Type
Pr. 00-12 = 0 is incremental type P2P; Pr.00-12 = 1 is absolute type P2P
Control of Torque Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: TQCPG（IM Torque control + Encoder）
1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
TQCPG control diagram is shown in the diagram below:
12-10
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
no offset
by P r.03- 00
by P r.11- 29
by multi -function input
Tor que command
11- 34
+
11- 36 or 00- 20
Speed li mit or command
+
-
+
06-12
11-35
s peed/torque
mode switc h
ASR
11-00 B it 0=0
11-06~11- 11
11-00 B it 0=1
11-03~11- 05
flux weakening curve
11-21/11-22
T orque l imit
11- 17~ 11- 20
11-14
lq
command
ld command
Cu rr en t
con tro l
Cur re nt
me asu re
actual fr equency
IGBT
&
PWM
Reserved
12-11
0 1- 0 2 0 1- 3 6
0 5- 0 1 0 5- 1 3
~
~
0 5- 0 9 0 5- 2 1
Current feedback
TQC Sensorless control diagram is shown in the following diagram:
Reserved
En cod er
10-00
Moto r 1 Moto r1
~
0 1- 0 1 0 1- 3 5
10-02
M
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Load Selection
Factory Setting: 3
Settings
3: Super Heavy Duty
Super Heavy Duty: over load, rated output current 200% in 3 second (150%, 1 minute). Refer to
Pr.00-17 for the setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated
current.
Carrier Frequency
Factory setting: Table below
Settings
2～15kHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V Series
Models
1-15HP [0.75-11kW]
20-100HP [15-75kW]
Setting Range
05~15kHz
05~15kHz
Super Heavy Duty
8kHz
6kHz
Factory Setting
460V Series
Models
1-20HP [0.75-15kW]
25-100HP [18.5-75kW] 125-375HP [90-280kW]
Setting Range
05~15kHz
05~15kHz
04~10kHz
Super Heavy Duty
8kHz
6kHz
5kHz
Factory Setting
Heat
Dissipation
Significant
Electromagnetic
Noise or Leakage
Current
Minimal
Minimal
Significant
Significant
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
1kH z
Current
Wave
Minimal
8kH z
15kHz
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if the
surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is good to reduce the
temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, the entire wiring and
interference resistance should be considerate.
When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, it needs to protect by decreasing the
carrier frequency. See Pr.06-55 for the related setting and details.
12-12
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Reserved
PLC Command Mask
Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings
Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control
Bit 2: Position command by PLC force control
Bit 3: Torque command by PLC force control
This parameter determines if frequency command or control command is occupied by PLC
Source of the Master Frequency Command（AUTO）
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to AUTO
mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used to
switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.
Source of the Operation Command （AUTO）
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not includes CANopen card)
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.
When the operation command is controlled by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.
12-13
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Ramp to stop
1:Coast to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop
command.
Freq uen cy
Output
Frequenc y
Moto r
Ro tatio n
Spe ed
Oper atio n
Co mmand
RUN
Freq uen cy
Output
Frequenc y
Moto r
Ro tatio n
Spe ed
Stops acc ording t o
deceler ation time
STOP
Fr ee r unning
to stop
Time
Oper atio n
Co mmand
RUN
Time
STOP
Ra mp to Stop and Co ast to Sto p
Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the setting of deceleration time to 0 or
minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) and then stop (by Pr.01-07).
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and the
motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from
being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The
deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select
“coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps
The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.
Control of Motor Direction
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Enable forward/ reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward/reverse Direction. It may be used
to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure the user or damage
the equipment.
Memory of Frequency Command
Factory Setting:
Settings
Read Only
Read only
If keypad is the source of frequency command, when Lv or Fault occurs the present frequency
command will be saved in this parameter.
12-14
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
User Defined Characteristics
Factory Setting: 0
Bit 0~3: user defined decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
Bit 4~15: user defined unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: M/S
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: PPM
008xh: l / m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: M
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: Psi
01Dxh: Atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
Bit 0~3: Control F page, unit of user defined value (Pr00-04 =d10, PID feedback) and the decimal
point of Pr00-26 which supports up to 3 decimal points.
Bit 4~15: Control F page, unit of user defined value (Pr00-04=d10, PID feedback) and the display
units of Pr00-26 which supports up to 4 units
Settings
0 0 0 0 h
u se r d e fin e d d e cima l p la ce
0:no decimal place
1:one decimal place
2:two decimal place
3:three decimal place
u se r d e fin e d u n it
0: Hz
1: rpm
2: %
3: kg
12-15
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Max. User Defined Value
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place)
0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place)
When Pr.00-26 is NOT set to 0.
The user defined value is enabled.
The value of this parameter
should correspond to the frequency setting at Pr.01-00.
Example:
When the frequency at Pr. 01-00=60.00Hz, the max. user defined value at Pr. 00-26 is 100.0%.
That also means Pr.00-25 is set at 0021h to select % as the unit.
NOTE
The drive will display as Pr.00-25 setting when Pr.00-25 is properly set and Pr.00-26 is not 0.
User Defined Value
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
Read only
Pr.00-27 will show user defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0.
User defined function is valid when:
1. Pr.00-20 is set to digital keypad control
2. RS-285 communication input control.
3. PID function enabled
Reserved
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for
frequency and operation status
3: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL setting for frequency
and operation status
4: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as LOCAL setting when switch to
Local and runs as REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for frequency
and operation status.
The factory setting of Pr.00-29 is 0 (standard Hand-Off-Auto function). The AUTO frequency and
source of operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the HAND frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. AUTO/HAND mode can be selected or switched by
using digital keypad (KPC-CC01) or setting multi-function input terminal MI= 41, 42.
When external terminal MI is set to 41 and 42 (AUTO/HAND mode), the settings Pr.00-29=1,2,3,4
will be disabled. The external terminal has the highest priority among all command, Pr.00-29 will
always function as Pr.00-29=0, standard HOA mode.
12-16
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, Local/Remote function is enabled, the top right corner of digital
keypad (KPC-CC01) will display “LOC” or “REM” (the display is available when KPC-CC01 is
installed with firmware version higher than version 1.021). The LOCAL frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the REMOTE frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Local/Remote function can be selected or switched
by using digital keypad (KPC-CC01) or setting external terminal MI=56. The AUTO key of the digital
keypad now controls for the REMOTE function and HAND key now controls for the LOCAL function.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is set to 0, then the external terminal is
disabled.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the external terminal has the
highest priority of command and the ATUO/HAND keys will be disabled.
Source of the Master Frequency Command（HAND）
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.
Source of the Operation Command (HAND)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen communication card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in HAND mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to AUTO
mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used to
switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
12-17
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.
Digital Keypad STOP Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable
~
Reserved
Homing mode
Factory Setting: 0000h
Settings:
Note: Forward run = clockwise (CW)
Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
X
0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as check point.
1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check
point.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as check point.
3: Reverse to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as check point.
4: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check point.
5: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check point.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF as check point.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG : ON→OFF as check point.
8: Define current position as home.
Y
Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 .
0: reverse run to Z pulse
1: continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
Z
When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 first.
0: display error
1: reverse the direction
Homing action is control by Pr. 00-40, 00-41, 00-42 and 02-01~02-08.
1. When Y=0, X=0 or Y=0, X=2
12-18
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CCWL /ORGP
2. When Y=0, X=1 or Y=0, X=3
Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CWL/ORGP
3. When Y=1, X=2
Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
ORGP
4. When Y=1, X=3
Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
ORGP
5. When Y=2, X=2
12-19
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Speed
Posi tion
ORGP
6. When Y=2, X=3
Speed
Position
ORGP
7. When Y=2, X=4
Speed
Position
Z pulse
8. When Y=2, X=5
Speed
Position
Z pulse
Homing by Frequency 1
Factory Setting: 8.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Homing by Frequency 2
Factory Setting: 2.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Control by Multi-function Input Terminal Pr. 02-01~02-08 (44~47).
44: Reverse direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Homing function enabled
If the drive is not control by CAN or PLC, set Pr.00-10 =1 (Control mode = P2P position control) and
12-20
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
set external output terminal to 47 (homing function enable) for homing.
When Pr.00-10 is set to 3, after homing is complete, user must set control mode setting Pr.00-10 to
1 in order to perform P2P position control.
~
Reserved
Display Filter Time (Current)
Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Display Filter Time (Keypad)
Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Software Version (date)
Factory Settings: ####
Settings: Read only
This parameter displays the drive’s software version by date.
~
Reserved
12-21
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Group 1 Basic Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Maximum Output Frequency
Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings
50.00~600.00Hz
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor
drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand ±10V) are
scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
Output Frequency of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Output Frequency of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it should be set to
50Hz.
Output Voltage of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Output Voltage of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Factory Setting: 200.0/400.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~255.0V
460V series: 0.0~510.0V
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be set to
200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also difference.
The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC motor drive. There
is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can amplify the original
characteristic and life of the motor.
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 2
12-22
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
Factory Setting: 0.0/0.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
Factory Setting: 0.0/0.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~240.0V
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special attention
to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading characteristics
exceed the loading limit of the motor.
There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at low frequency may cause motor
damage, overheat, and stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low
voltage at the low frequency to prevent motor damage.
Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals
12-23
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as
the 2nd V/f curve.
The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be deduced
from it.
Vol tage
1s t Output
Voltage Setting 01-11 Output F requency Low er Limit
01-02
F requenc y output
2nd Output
ranges limitation
Voltage Setting
01-04
3r d Output
Voltage Setting
01-06
Output F requency
01-10U pper Limi t
R egul ar V /f Cur ve
Special V/f C urve
4th Output
Voltage Setting
01-08 01-07 01-09
01-05 01-03
01-01
2nd F req.1st F req.
4th F req. Start F req.
3rd Fr eq.
F requenc y
01-00
Maximum Output
F requenc y
V/f Curve
Common settings of V/f curve:
(1) General purpose
Motor spec. 60Hz
Motor spec. 50Hz
V
220
10
1.5
60.0
F
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
V
220
Setting
60.0
60.0
220.0
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
1.50
10.0
10
1.50
10.0
1.3
50.0
F
Setting
50.0
50.0
220.0
1.30
10.0
1.30
10.0
(2) Fan and hydraulic machinery
Motor spec. 60Hz
Motor spec. 50Hz
V
220
50
10
1.5
30
60.0
F
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
V
220
Setting
60.0
60.0
220.0
30.0
50
50.0
10
1.50
10.0
1.3
25
50.0
F
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Setting
50.0
50.0
220.0
25.0
50.0
1.30
10.0
(3) High starting torque
Motor spec. 60Hz
Motor spec. 50Hz
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
V
220
23
18
1.5 3
60.0
F
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Setting
60.0
60.0
220.0
V
220
3.00
Pr.
01-00
01-01
01-02
01-03
01-05
23
23.0
14
1.50
18.0
1.3 2.2
12-24
50.0
F
01-04
01-06
01-07
01-08
Setting
50.0
50.0
220.0
2.20
23.0
1.30
14.0
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Start-Up Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.50
Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)
Fcmd>Fmin and Fcmd=Fcmd, drive will run with Fcmd firstly, then, accelerate to Flow according to
acceleration time.
The drive’s output will stop immediately when output frequency has reach to Fmin during
deceleration.
F cmd>Fmi n
NO
by Pr.01- 34
Y ES
F star t>Fmin
NO
fstart=F min
F low= 0
Y ES
H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd
Y ES
F min
fstart=F star t
F star t
Time
operation after
start-up
NO
F low= 0
NO
F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES
by
Pr.01- 34
NO
F cmdFmi n
NO
Y ES
Y ES
H=Fc md
H=Fc md
60Hz
F star t
F min
Hz
Hz
Hz
F cmd
H=Fl ow
F cmd1
F min
F cmd2
Time F low
60Hz
H=Fc md1
F cmd1>Flow &
F cmd1>Fmin
Time
by Pr.01- 34
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2 Fcmd1
>F min
Time
by Pr.01- 34
F min>Fc md2
Output Frequency Upper Limit
Factory Setting: 600.00
Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
12-25
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Output Frequency Lower Limit
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.0~600.00Hz
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If output
frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than min.
frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to be higher
than the lower limit frequency.
Pr.01-10 setting must be ≥ Pr.01-11 setting.
Upper output frequency will limit the max. Output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher
than Pr.01-10, the output frequency will be limited by Pr.01-10 setting.
When the drive starts the function of slip compensation (Pr.07-27) or PID feedback control, drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but still be limited by this setting.
Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Max. Operation Frequency and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower
Limit
Voltage
01.02
M otor rated voltage
(Vbase)
01.04
Mid-point voltage
(Vmid)
01.06
M in. output voltage 01.05
setting (Vmin)
Min. output
frequency
(Fmin)
01.03
Mid-point
frequency
(Fm id)
01.01
Motor rated
frequency
(Fbase)
01.00
Frequency
Max. operation
frequency
Lower output frequency will limit the min. output frequency of drive. When drive frequency command
or feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, drive output frequency will limit by the lower
limit of frequency.
When the drive starts, it will operate from min. output frequency (Pr.01-05) and accelerate to the
setting frequency. It won’t limit by lower output frequency setting.
The setting of output frequency upper/lower limit is used to prevent personal misoperation, overheat
due to too low operation frequency or damage due to too high speed.
If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50Hz and frequency setting is 60Hz, max. output
frequency will be 50Hz.
If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10Hz and min. operation frequency setting (Pr.01-05) is
1.5Hz, it will operate by 10Hz when the frequency command is greater than Pr.01-05 and less than
10Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr.01-05, the drive will be in ready status and no
output.
If the frequency output upper limit is 60Hz and frequency setting is also 60Hz, it won’t exceed 60Hz
even after slip compensation. If the output frequency needs to exceed 60Hz, it can increase output
12-26
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
frequency upper limit or max. operation frequency.
Accel. Time 1
Decel. Time 1
Accel. Time 2
Decel. Time 2
Accel. Time 3
Decel. Time 3
Accel. Time 4
Decel. Time 4
JOG Acceleration Time
JOG Deceleration Time
Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0
Factory Setting for AC drive with power
greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
Settings
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.00 seconds
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from
0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to decelerate
from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.01-44 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. The factory settings are Accel./Decel. time 1.
When enabling torque limits and stalls prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will be longer
than the above action time.
Please note that it may trigger the protection function (Pr.06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention during
Acceleration or Pr.06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention) when the setting of accel./decel. time is too
short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
acceleration when the setting of acceleration time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
deceleration or over-voltage when the setting of deceleration time is too short.
It can use suitable brake resistor (see Chapter 06 Accessories) to decelerate in a short time and
prevent over-voltage.
When enabling Pr.01-24~Pr.01-27, the actual accel./decel. time will be longer than the setting.
12-27
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Frequency
01-00
Max. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time
decel. time
01-12,14,16,18,20
01-13,15,17,19,21
Accel./Decel. Time
JOG Frequency
Factory Setting: 6.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). When the
jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The Jog
Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21) is the time that accelerates from 0.0Hz to Pr.01-22 JOG
Frequency.
The JOG command can’t be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, when
the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except forward/reverse
commands and STOP key on the digital keypad.
It does not support JOG function in the optional keypad KPC-CE01.
1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may also be
enabled by the external terminals. The external terminal has priority over Pr. 01-23.
When using this function, please set S-curve acceleration time as 0 if 4th acceleration time is set too
short.
F reque nc y
1st Acceler ati on
Time
01-23
4th Dec eleration
T ime
1s t Dec eleration
T ime
4th A cceleration
Time
1st/4th A cceleration/Dec eleration F requenc y S witchi ng
12-28
Ti me
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1
S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Factory Setting: 0.20/0.2
Settings
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~250.0 seconds
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve can
adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different accel./decel.
curve by the accel./decel. time.
The S-curve function is disabled when accel./decel. time is set to 0.
When Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25,
The Actual Accel. Time = Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
When Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27,
The Actual Decel. Time = Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
Frequency
01-26
01-25
01-24
01-27
Time
Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)
Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit)
Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit)
Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit)
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. There is no limit for the setting of these six parameters and can be used as required.
The skip frequencies are useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By
skipping this frequency, the vibration will be avoided. It offers 3 zones for use.
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. The limit of these six parameters is 01-28≥01-29≥01-30≥01-31≥01-32≥01-33. This
function will be invalid when setting to 0.0.
The setting of frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequencies. In this
moment, the output frequency (H) will be limited by these settings.
12-29
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When accelerating/decelerating, the output frequency will still pass the range of skip frequencies.
01- 28
01- 29
fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy
Inter nal
01- 30
frequency
01- 31
command
01- 32
r isi ng fre qu en cy
01- 33
0
F requenc y s etting command
Zero-speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr.01-07, 01-41)
When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals
U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, FOC Sensorless,
and SVC modes. It executes zero-speed operation in VFPG and FOCPG mode.
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-08,
Pr.01-42) in V/F, VFPG, SVC, FOC Sensorless
and FOCPG modes.
In V/F, VFPG, SVC and FOC Sensorless modes
fout
01-34=1
01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07
0Hz
0Hz
stop waiting for output
01-34=2
0Hz oper ation
(D C br ake)
In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.
fout
01-34=1
01-34=0
fmin
01-07
frequency command
12-30
frequency command
01-34=2
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
V/f Curve Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: V/f curve determined by group 01
1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve
When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/f curve. For motor 2, please refer to
Pr.01-35~01-42.
When setting to 1 or 2, 2nd and 3rd voltage frequency setting are invalid.
If motor load is variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to speed, such as the load of fan or
pump), it can decrease input voltage to reduce flux loss and iron loss of the motor at low speed with
low load torque to raise the entire efficiency.
When setting higher power V/f curve, it is lower torque at low frequency and is not suitable for rapid
acceleration/deceleration. It is recommended NOT to use this parameter for the rapid
acceleration/deceleration.
01-02
Voltage %
100
90
80
70
1.5 power c urve
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Square curve
20
40
60
80
01-01
F requenc y%
100
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Linear accel./decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load)
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)
Setting 0 Linear accel./decel.: it will accelerate/decelerate according to the setting of
Pr.01-12~01-19.
Setting to Auto accel./decel.: it can reduce the mechanical vibration and prevent the complicated
auto-tuning processes. It won’t stall during acceleration and no need to use brake resistor. In
addition, it can improve the operation efficiency and save energy.
Setting 3 Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load): it can auto detect
the load torque and accelerate from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the
setting frequency. In the deceleration, it can auto detect the load re-generation and stop the motor
12-31
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
smoothly with the fastest decel. time.
Setting 4 Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21): if the
acceleration/deceleration is in the reasonable range, it will accelerate/decelerate by Pr.01-12~01-19.
If the accel./decel. time is too short, the actual accel./decel. time is greater than the setting of
accel./decel. time.
F requenc y
1
01-00
Max.
Fr equency
01- 07
Min.
Fr equency
2
accel. time
decel. time
01-12 01-14
01-16 01-18
01-13 01-15
01-17 01-19
T ime
Acc el./Decel. Time
1 When P r.01-44 is set to 0.
2 When P r.01-44 is set to 3.
Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Unit 0.01 sec
1: Unit 0.1 sec
Time for CANopen Quick Stop
Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
It is used to set the time that decelerates from the max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00Hz in
CANopen control
12-32
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
02 Digital Input/Output Parameter
This parameter can be set during operation.
2-wire/3-wire Operation Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 2 wire mode 1
1: 2 wire mode 2
2: 3 wire mode
It is used to set the operation control method:
Pr.02-00
0
2-wire mode 1
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Control Circuits of the External Terminal
1
2-wire mode 2
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
2
3-wire operation control
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1) (MI1= STOP command when in 3-wire operation
control)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Factory Setting: 2
Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3)
Factory Setting: 3
Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)
Factory Setting: 4
Multi-function Input Command 5 (MI5)
Multi-function Input Command 6 (MI6)
Multi-function Input Command 7 (MI7)
Multi-function Input Command 8 (MI8)
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI10)
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI11)
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI12)
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI13)
12-33
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI14)
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI15)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2/multi-step position command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3/multi-step position command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4/multi-step position command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG command（By KPC-CC01 or external control）
7: acceleration/deceleration speed not allow
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: cancel the setting of the optimal acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: operation speed command from AVI
16: operation speed command from ACI
17: operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: FOCG/TQC model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)
44: Reverse direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing ORG
47: Homing function enable
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb action input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
52: Selection for PLC mode bit1
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
12-34
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
54: Reserved
55: Brake Release
56: Local/Remote Selection
57~70: Reserve
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card
EMC-D42A. Pr.02-30~02-31 are virtual terminals.
When being used as a virtual terminal, it needs to change the status (0/1: ON/OFF) of bit 8-15 of
Pr.02-12 by digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication.
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is for STOP contact. Therefore, MI1 is not
allowed for any other operation.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings
Functions
0
No Function
Multi-step speed
1
command 1/multi-step
position command 1
Multi-step speed
2
command 2/ multi-step
position command 2
Multi-step speed
3
command 3/ multi-step
position command 3
Multi-step speed
command 4/ multi-step
4
position command 4
5
Reset
6
JOG Command
Descriptions
15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital status of the
4 terminals, and 16 in total if the master speed is included. (Refer to
Parameter set 4)
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to reset
the drive.
This function is valid when the source of operation command is
external terminals.
Before executing this function, it needs to wait for the drive stop
completely. During running, it can change the operation direction
and STOP key on the keypad is valid. Once the external terminal
receives OFF command, the motor will stop by the JOG
deceleration time. Refer to Pr.01-20~01-22 for details.
0 1- 22
JO G fr eq ue ncy
0 1- 07
Mi n. o utp ut fr eq ue ncy
o f moto r 1
MIx-G ND
7
JO G d ece l. ti me
01 -2 1
JO G a ccel . time
0 1- 20
ON
O FF
When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration is
Acceleration/deceleration
stopped. After this function is disabled, the AC motor drive starts
Speed Inhibit
to accel./decel. from the inhibit point.
12-35
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
A ccel . in hi bi t
a re a
De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ctua l o pe ra tio n
fr eq ue ncy
De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ccel . in hi bi t
a re a
A ctua l o pe ra tio n fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
ON
MIx- GND
8
9
10
11
The 1st, 2nd acceleration
or deceleration time
selection
The 3rd, 4th acceleration
or deceleration time
selection
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
ON
ON
ON
O FF
ON
The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be selected
from this function or the digital status of the terminals; there are 4
acceleration/deceleration speeds in total for selection.
For external fault input. Motor drive will decelerate by Pr.07-20
setting, keypad will show EF. (it will have fault record when external
fault occurs). Until the causes of fault are eliminated, the drive can
keep running after resetting.
When this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off
External B.B. Input (Base
immediately, and the motor will be free run and keypad will display
Block)
B.B. signal. Refer to Pr.07-08 for details.
If this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off immediately,
and the motor will then be free run. And once it is turned to OFF,
the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency.
EF Input (EF: External
fault)
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
12
Output Stop
(Output pause)
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
MI x - GND
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
13
14
15
16
17
18
O FF
ON
ON
ON
Before using this function, Pr.01-44 should be set to 01/02/03/04
Cancel the setting of the
first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode and ON
optimal accel./decel. time
is for linear accel./decel.
Switch between drive
When the contact is ON: use motor 2 parameters. OFF: use
settings 1 and 2
motor 1 parameters.
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed
AVI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI
command form AVI
at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed
ACI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI
command form ACI
at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
Operation speed
force to be AUI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI,
command form AUI
ACI and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When the contact is ON, the drive will ramp to stop by Pr.07-20
Emergency Stop (07-20)
setting.
12-36
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
19
Digital Up command
20
Digital Down command
21
PID function disabled
22
Clear counter
23
Input the counter value
(multi-function input
command 6)
24
FWD JOG command
25
REV JOG command
Descriptions
When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and
decreased. If this function is constantly ON, the frequency will be
increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10.
When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled.
When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and
display “0”. Only when this function is disabled, it will keep counting
upward.
The counter value will increase 1 once the contact is ON. It needs
to be used with Pr.02-19.
This function is valid when the source of operation command is
external terminals.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute forward Jog
command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done,
the drive will return to torque mode.
This function is valid when the source of operation command is
external terminals.
When the contact is ON the drive will execute reverse Jog
command.
When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done,
the drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON: TQCPG mode.
When the contact is OFF: FOCPG mode.
RU N/STOP
co mmand
Mul ti- func ti on i np ut
ter min al is set to 26
(to rqu e/spe ed
mode sw itch )
26
FOCPG/TQCPG mode
selection
RU N
OFF
sp eed speed limit
03 -0 0~02=1
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s
command
fr eq uen cy co mman d)
torque
03 -0 0~02=2
limit
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s
tor que co mman d)
co ntro l
mode
27
ASR1/ASR2 selection
28
Emergency stop (EF1)
ON
sp eed
co ntrol
torque
command
OFF
sp eed
command
torque
limit
STOP
ON
speed limit
torque
command
sp eed
co ntrol
sp eed
torque
co ntrol
control (decel. t o stop )
Sw itch timing for t orq ue/speed control
(00-10=0/4 , mu lt i-fu nct ion inpu t t erminal is set to 2 6)
torque
control
When the contact is ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting. Refer to Pr.11-02 for
details.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop and
display EF1 on the keypad. The motor won’t run and be in the free
run until the fault is cleared after pressing RESET” (EF: External
Fault)
12-37
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
V ol tag e
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
Ti me
MI x - GND
O FF
ON
Re set
29
30
31
32
33
Signal confirmation for
Y-connection
Signal confirmation for
-connection
High torque bias
Middle torque bias
Low torque bias
O FF
ON
O pe ra tio n
co mman d
ON
ON
When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
Refer to Pr.11-30~11-32 for details.
When the contact is ON, the corresponding 15-step speed for the
multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions. (Refer to Pr.04-16 to
Pr.04-44)
sp eed m ode
pos ition mod e
sp eed mode
Run
MI=d35
MI=d34
34
Switch between
multi-step position and
multi-speed control
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
MI=d3
1
1
1
1
MI=d4
1
1
1
1
MI=d1
MI=d2
outp ut
freque ncy
10-19
position
(Home)
12-38
04-40
mu ltipos ition
13
04-38
mu ltiposition
12
04-11
12th step
sp eed
freque ncy
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
position mod e
sp eed m ode
Run
MI=d34
MI=d35
MI=d1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
MI=d3
1
1
1
1
MI=4
1
1
1
1
MI=d2
Ma ster
freque ncy
Output
freque ncy
04-12
13th step
sp eed
freque ncy
04-40
mu ltiposition
13
04-38
mu ltiposition
12
When the contact is ON, the AC motor drive will execute internal
single-point position control according to the setting in Pr.10-19.
This function is valid in FOCPG mode only.
Output
frequency
PG
feedbac k
10-01
10-02
10-19
RUN
MI=d35
35
Enable single-point
position control
MO= d39
Time
O utp ut
fr eq ue ncy
PG
fe ed ba ck
10-19
10-01
10-02
RUN
RUN
RUN
MI=d35
MO= d39
36
Ti me
When the contact is ON/OFF, the drive will base the multi-function
Enable multi-step
position learning function inputs 1-4 ON/OFF status to find the corresponding multi-step
12-39
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
(valid at stop)
Descriptions
positions and write current motor position into such corresponding
multi-step position.
Run/Stop
1011 2=11
co rres pond s
to Pr.0 4-36
101 0 2=10
co rres pond s to
Pr.04-34
MI=d1
1
0
0
MI=d2
1
1
1
MI=d3
0
0
0
MI=d4
1
1
1
MI=d36
Writing the m otor p ositio n
in to the Pr.04-36
Writing the motor p ositio n
in to the Pr.04-34
When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5 and this contact is ON, the input
pulse of PG card is position command. When using this function, it
is recommended to set Pr.11-25 to 0.
Example: please refer to the following diagram when using this
faction with MI=d35 return to home position,.
RUN
MI=d35
37
Full position control
pulse command input
enable
MO= d39
MI=d37
pulse
command
internal
positioning
output
frequency
38
39
40
Disable EEPROM write
function
(Parameters written
disable)
Torque command
direction
Force coast to stop
Time
When this contact is ON, write to EEPROM is disabled. (Changed
parameters will not be saved after power off)
For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when torque command is AVI or
ACI, the contact is ON and it is negative torque.
When this contact is ON during the operation, the drive will free run
to stop.
12-40
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
41
HAND switch
42
AUTO switch
Descriptions
1. When MI is switched to off status, it executes a STOP
command. , If MI is switched to off during operation, the drive
will also stop.
2. Using keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between HAND/AUTO,
the drive will stop first then switch to the HAND or AUTO status.
3. On the digital keypad KPC-CC01, it will display current drive
status (HAND/OFF/AUTO).
OFF
AUTO
HAND
OFF
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Enable resolution
selection
Selection for PLC mode
bit0
52
Selection for PLC mode
bit1
54
55
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
Refer to Pr.02-48 for details.
Signal input for reverse direction limit switch. When this terminal is
ON, the drive will react to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
Reverse direction
accordingly to execute homing in a reverse direction (counter
NLhoming
clockwise).
Note: NL means input terminal detection is negative-edge triggered
or be regarded as NO(Normal Open)
Signal input for forward direction limit switch. When this terminal is
ON, the drive will react to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
Forward direction PL
accordingly to execute homing in a forward direction (clockwise).
homing
Note: PL means input terminal detection is positive-edge triggered
or be regarded as NC(Normal Close)
ORG point input. When this terminal is ON, the drive will refer to the
Homing ORG
setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 accordingly to execute homing.
Pr.00-10 = 3 (homing mode), if the external terminal MIx=47 is
Homing function enable OFF, the drive will ignore the home command and execute Point to
Point position control.
Mechanical gear ratio
When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will be
switch
the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-08 and Pr.10-09).
When drive=enable, RUN command is valid.
When drive= disable, RUN command is invalid.
Drive enable
When drive is in operation, motor coast to stop.
This function will interact with MO=51
Input the message setting in this parameter when dEb occurs to
Master dEb action input Master. This will ensure dEb also occurs to Slave, then Master and
Slave will stop simultaneously.
51
53
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Enable CANopen quick
stop
Reserved
Brake Release
PLC status
Disable PLC function (PLC 0)
Trigger PLC to operation (PLC 1)
Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2)
No function
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will
change to quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 for more details.
#MI=55 needs to be used with Pr02-56. After setting the value
(time) of Pr02-56, if there is no signal input, motor drive will show
error Brk, and mechanical brake will be enabled immediately.
#The default setting of Pr02-56 is 0. If the value is not 0, the brake
signal checking will be activated. If there is no signal input after
12-41
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
time setting (Pr02-56), motor drive will show Brk error, no matter if
there is any other setting about brake control
Run command
(output Freq.>=Pr02-34 and
output current>=Pr02-33)
Output Freq.
Pr02 - 32
Mechanical delay time
MI=55
if there is no brake release signal
Pr02 - 56
56
Use Pr.00-29 to select for LOCAL/REMOTE mode(refer to
Pr.00-29)
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 it
will display LOC/REM status. (It will display on the KPC-CC01 if the
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection firmware version is above version 1.021).
Bit 0
REM
0
LOC
1
57~70 Reserved
UP/DOWN Key Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Up/down by the accel/decel time
1: Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Constant speed. The Accel. /Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN Key
Factory Setting: 0.01
Settings
0.01~1.00Hz/ms
These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20. Refer to Pr.02-09 and
02-10 for the frequency up/down command.
Pr.02-09 set to 0: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the external terminal
UP/DOWN key as shown in the following diagram. In this mode, it also can be controlled by
UP/DOWN key on the digital keypad.
F requenc y
F requenc y c ommand
T ime
External ter minal
UP k ey
ON
OFF
12-42
UP
DOWN
Ml1~15
Ml1~15
DCM
VFD-C
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.02-09 set to 1: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the setting of
acceleration/deceleration (Pr.01-12~01-19) and only be valid during operation.
Fr eq ue ncy
Fr eq ue ncy
co mman d
In cre ase d b y acce le ra tio n ti me
Ti me
Mu lti -fu ncti on
i np ut te rmi na l
1 0 Fr eq ue ncy
i ncr ea sed comma nd
ON
OFF
Digital Input Response Time
Factory Setting: 0.005
Settings
0.000~30.000 sec
This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals FWD, REV and MI1~MI8.
It is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time is confirmation time
to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of the digital terminals.
Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve effectively, but the response
time will be somewhat delayed.
When using MI8 as encoder pulse feedback input, this parameter will not be referred
Digital Input Operation Setting
Factory Setting: 0000
Settings 0000h~FFFFh（0:N.O ; 1:N.C）
The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
This parameter is to set the status of multi-function input signal (0: Normal Open；1: Normal Close)
and it is not affected by the SINK/SOURCE status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Pr.02-12=9
needs to be set by communication to run forward with 2nd step speed. No need to wire any
multi-function terminal.
Bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)
Factory Setting: 11
Multi-function Output 2 (Relay2)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
12-43
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO10) or (RA10)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO11) or (RA11)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO12) or (RA12)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO13) or (RA13)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO14) or (RA14)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO15) or (RA15)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO16)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO17)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO18)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO19)
Output terminal of the I/O extension card (MO20)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Operation Indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command)
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning（LV）(Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained
(Pr.02-20; not return to 0)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
12-44
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
36: Error output selection 2(Pr.06-24)
37: Error output selection 3(Pr.06-25)
38: Error output selection 4(Pr.06-26)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (Pr.06-71 to Pr.06-73)
45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve On/Off Switch
46: Master dEb action output
47: Closed brake output
48: Reserved
49: Homing action complete
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
63: Advance Crane Output
This parameter is used for setting the function of multi-function terminals.
Pr.02-36~Pr.02-41 requires additional extension cards to display the parameters, the choices of
optional cards are EMC-D42A and EMC-R6AA.
The optional card EMC-D42A provides 2 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-37.
The optional card EMC-R6AA provides 6 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-41.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings
Functions
0
No Function
1
Operation Indication
Master Frequency
2
Attained
Desired Frequency
3
Attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
4
Desired Frequency
Descriptions
Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency
setting.
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is attained.
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-24) is attained.
12-45
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
5
6
Functions
Attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
Zero Speed (frequency
command)
Zero Speed with Stop
(frequency command)
7
Over Torque 1
8
Over Torque 2
9
Drive Ready
10
Low voltage warn (Lv)
11
Malfunction Indication
12
Mechanical Brake
Release (Pr.02-32)
13
Overheat
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Software Brake Signal
Indication
PID Feedback Error
Slip Error (oSL)
Terminal Count Value
Attained (Pr.02-20; not
return to 0)
Preliminary Counter
Value Attained
(Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
External Base Block
input (B.B.)
Warning Output
Over-voltage Warning
Over-current Stall
Prevention Warning
Over-voltage Stall
prevention Warning
Operation Mode
Indication
Forward Command
Reverse Command
Output when Current >=
Pr.02-33
Output when Current <=
Pr.02-33
Output when frequency
>= Pr.02-34
Output when Frequency
<= Pr.02-34
Y-connection for the
Motor Coil
Descriptions
Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at RUN
mode)
Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-07 (over-torque
detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection
time-OT1). Refer to Pr.06-06~06-08.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-10 (over-torque
detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection
time-OT2). Refer to Pr.06-09~06-11.
Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00 low
voltage level)
Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
When drive runs after Pr.02-32, it will be ON. This function should
be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use
contact ”b”(N.C).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn off
the drive. (refer to Pr.06-15)
Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr.07-00)
Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.
Active when the slip error is detected.
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value
(Pr.02-19). This contact won’t active when Pr.02-20>Pr.02-19.
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
(Pr.02-19).
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during
base block.
Active when the warning is detected.
Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
Active when the operation command is controlled by external
terminal. (Pr.00-20≠0)
Active when the operation direction is forward.
Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Active when current is
>= Pr.02-33.
Active when current is <= Pr.02-33
Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-34.
Active when frequency is <= Pr.02-34.
Active when PR.05-24 is less than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
Pr.05-25.
-connection
for the
Active when PR.05-24 is higher than Pr.05-23 and time is more
Motor Coil
than Pr.05-25.
Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should be
Zero Speed (actual
at RUN mode)
output frequency)
Zero Speed with Stop
Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.
(actual output frequency)
Error Output Selection 1 Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
12-46
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
36
37
38
39
40
Functions
(Pr.06-23)
Error Output Selection 2
(Pr.06-24)
Error Output Selection 3
(Pr.06-25)
Error Output Selection 4
(Pr.06-26)
Position Attained
(Pr.10-19)
Speed Attained
(including zero speed)
41
Multi-position Attained
42
Crane Function
43
44
45
Motor Zero-speed
Output (Pr.02-47)
Low Current Output
UVW Phase Magnet
Contractor ON/ OFF
Switch
Descriptions
Active when Pr.06-24 is ON.
Active when Pr.06-25 is ON.
Active when Pr.06-26 is ON.
Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19.
Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or
stop.
User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-36~02-38 to 41 and only the
multi-position of the second point has been done. Therefore,
current status is RA (ON), RA (OFF) and MO1 (OFF). In this way,
their status is 010. Bit0 is RA and so on.
MO2
MO1
RY2
RY1
Pr.02-17=41 Pr.02-16=41 Pr.02-14=41 Pr.02-13=41
Pr.04-16
0
0
0
1
Pr.04-18
0
0
1
0
Pr.04-20
0
0
1
1
Pr.04-22
0
1
0
0
Pr.04-24
0
1
0
1
Pr.04-26
0
1
1
0
Pr.04-28
0
1
1
1
Pr.04-30
1
0
0
0
Pr.04-32
1
0
0
1
Pr.04-34
1
0
1
0
Pr.04-36
1
0
1
1
Pr.04-38
1
1
0
0
Pr.04-40
1
1
0
1
Pr.04-42
1
1
1
0
Pr.04-44
1
1
1
1
This function needs to be used with Pr02-32, Pr02-33, Pr02-34,
Pr02-57 and Pr.02-58.
The brake will be released when output frequency and current
reach the setting level after brake delay time.
When output frequency>= Pr02-34 and output current>= Pr02-33,
MO=42 will be activated after time setting at Pr02-32
When output frequency< Pr02-58, or output current T1 and try to activate brake control during zero-speed
status.
12-47
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
MC
AC Driver
Motor
U(T1)
IM
3~
V(T2)
W(T3)
MOx=45
MIx=49
46
When dEb arises at Master, MO will send a dEb signal to Slave. Then
Master dEb signal output Slave will follow Master’s command and decelerate to stop
simultaneously.
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will
be ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-34. After it is ON, it will
be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-32.
Output Frequency
47
Output Frequency
< Pr.02-34
Brake Release at Stop
RUN
48
49
50
RUN
Multi-function
Output
MO=d47
02-32
Time
Reserved
Homing Action Complete Output when homing action complete.
Controlled by CANopen multi-output terminal
For example, if to control RY2, then the Pr02-14 = 50.
The mapping table of the CANopen DO is below:
Output for CANopen
control
physical
terminal
Setting of
related
parameters
Attribute
Corresponding Index
RY1
P2-13 = 50
RW
The bit 0 at 2026-41
RY2
P2-14 = 50
RW
The bit 1 at 2026-41
MO1
P2-16 = 50
RW
The bit 2 at 2026-41
MO2
P2-17 = 50
RW
The bit 3 at 2026-41
P2-36=50
RW
P2-37 = 50
RW
P2-38 = 50
RW
MO10
RY10
MO11
RY11
RY12
12-48
The bit 4 at 2026-41
The bit 5 at 2026-41
The bit 6 at 2026-41
The bit 7 at 2026-41
The bit 8 at 2026-41
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
RY13
P2-39 = 50
RW
The bit 9 at 2026-41
RY14
P2-40 = 50
RW
The bit 10 at 2026-41
RY15
P2-41= 50
RW
The bit 0 at 2026-41
Refer to Chapter 15-3-5 for more information
For communication output of communication cards
(CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01 and CMC-DN01)
Setting of
Corresponding
physical
related
Attribute
Address
terminal
parameters
51
Output for
communication card
52
Output for RS-485
53~62 Reserved
63
Advance Crane Output
RY1
P2-13 = 51
RW
The bit 0 2640
RY2
P2-14 = 51
RW
The bit 1 2640
P2-15 = 51
RW
The bit 2 2640
MO1
P2-16 = 51
RW
The bit 3 2640
MO2
P2-17 = 51
RW
The bit 4 2640
MO3
P2-18 = 51
RW
The bit 5 2640
MO4
P2-19 = 51
RW
The bit 6 2640
MO5
P2-20 = 51
RW
The bit 7 2640
MO6
P2-21 = 51
RW
The bit 8 2640
MO7
P2-22 = 51
RW
The bit 9 2640
MO8
P2-23 = 51
For RS-485 output
RW
The bit 10 2640
This function needs to be used with Pr02-32~Pr02-34,
Pr02-57~Pr02- 62.
The brake will be released when output frequency and current
reach the setting level after brake delay time.
This function separates the brake control conditions into eight
parameters, which is suitable for complicated application
Please check advance crane output time sequence chart for
reference
12-49
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Advance crane Output Time Sequence Chart:
Fwd run comm .
O utput f req . > = P02 - 34
and out put
c urrent > = P02 - 33
O utput f req . < P02 - 58
and out put c urrent < P02 - 57
Output freq .
Pr0 2 -3 2
MO = 63
Rev run comm .
Out put freq . > = P02 - 61
and out put
Ou t p u t f r e q . < P 0 2 - 6 2
and out put c urrent
= P02 - 62
Output freq .
Pr02 - 32
MO= 63
# Once the operating command is given, then when the output frequency and output current reach the
setting level, the brake will be released after brake delay time.
# During the operation, if the frequency command is less than the brake releasing frequency, reset manually
frequency command to MAX (brake releasing frequency, brake holding frequency) to operate.
# Once the brake is released, it will not be held unless a stop command is give or certain errors are
occurred.
# Once the stop operating command is given, then when the output frequency or output current is lower than
the setting level, the brake holding operation will hold immediately the brake without delay time.
#To FWD brake releasing: Send operating command then set output frequency >= Pr02-34 and set output
current >=Pr02-33, delay Pr02-32 to release brake.
#To REV brake releasing: Send operating command then set output frequency >= Pr02-61 and set output
current >=Pr02-59, delay Pr02-32 to release brake.
#To FWD brake holding: Send stop operating command and set output frequency < Pr02-58 or set
output current < Pr02-57, release immediately the brake.
12-50
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
#To REV brake holding: Send stop operating command and set output frequency < Pr02-62 or set
output currency < Pr02-60, release immediately the brake.
Crane Application:
Operating
Command
Output Frequency <02-58
or
Output Current <02-57
Output Frequency >=Pr02-34
&
Output Current >= Pr02-33
Output
Frequency
Multi-Function Output
MO=42
Pr02-32
Mechanical Brake
Operation
It is recommended to use Dwell function as shown in the following:
Operating
Command
07-16
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Output frequency >Pr02-34
=Pr07-16 and
Output current >Pr02-33
Output
Frequency
07-15
Dwell Time at Accel.
Multi-Function Output
MO=42
Pr02-32
Mechanical Brake
Operation
12-51
Output Frequency < Pr02-58
= Pr07-17 or
Output Current =02-33) and when output frequency is higher than the setting of Pr02-34 Pivot Point of the
Frequency (>= 02-34), choose #42 to set up Multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14, Pr02-16 and
Pr002-17 after the delay time set at Pr02-32.
When the Pivot Point of the Current 's setting 02-57≠0 and when the output current of the drive is
lower than the setting of Pr02-57 (<02-57), or when the output frequency is lower than the setting of
Pr02-58 (<02-58), the disable the setting #42 of the multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14,
Pr02-16, Pr02-17
When Pr02-57 = 0, the output current is lower than setting of Pr02-33 Pivot Point of the current
(<02-33) or when output frequency is lower than the setting of Pr02-58(<02-58), disable the setting
of #42 of the multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14, Pr02-16, Pr02-17.
02 - 59
REV Release Current
Factory setting: 0
Settings
02 - 60
0~100%
REV Brake Current
Factory setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
12-60
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
02 - 61
REV Release Frequency
Factory setting: 0.00
Settings
02 - 62
0.00~600.00Hz
REV Brake Frequency
Factory setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
See MO = 42 Crane Output and
02 - 63
MO = 63 Advance Crane Output sequence diagrams.
Speed Area Band (Pr02-34)
Factory setting: 0.00
設定範圍 0.00~600.00Hz
02 - 64
LLACC Mode
Factory setting: 0
Settings
02 - 65
0: Disable; 1: Enable
LLACC Active Frequency
Factory setting: 0.00
Settings
02 - 66
0.00~600.00Hz
LLACC FWD Active Current
Factory setting: 0
Settings
02 - 67
0~100%
LLACC REV Active Current
Factory setting: 0
Settings
02 - 68
0~100%
LLACC Delay Time
Factory setting:0.000
Settings
02 - 69
0.000~65.000 sec
LLACC Target Frequency
Factory setting:0.00
Settings
0.00~01.00 Hz
12-61
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
FWD Run Command
Accelerated Frequency Pr02 - 69
Frequency
Command
P02 - 65
Output Freq .
Pr02 - 66 or Pr 02 - 67
Output current
Counter
start
Pr02 - 68
Pr02-65 is to set the least action frequency of LLACC. When output frequency reaches frequency
command (which is higher than Pr02-65), if the current level is lower than Pr02-66, the counter will
start to count until the time set by Pr02-68. During counting, if the conditions above are met, the
speed will increase to Pr02-69；
During the counting, all conditions need to be met to enable LLACC, or it will be disabled until next
start.
In the setting of LLACC, if Pr02-69 is higher than Pr01-00 and Pr01-01, they are required to be
modified, and 01-12 (1st ACC time) also needs to be recalculated.
12-62
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
03 Analog Input/Output Parameter
This parameter can be set during operation.
Analog Input Selection (AVI)
Factory Setting: 1
Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
Analog Input Selection (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12: Reserved
13: PID compensation value
14~17: Reserved
When use analog input as PID reference value, Pr00-20 must set 2(analog input).
Setting method 1: Pr03-00~03-02 set 1 as PID reference input
Setting method 2: Pr03-00~03-02 set 4 as PID reference input
If the setting value 1 and set value 4 existed at the same time, AVI input has highest priority to
become PID reference input.
When use analog input as PID compensation value, Pr08-16 must set 1(Source of PID
compensation is analog input). The compensation value can be observed via Pr08-17.
When it is frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is
0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – max.
output torque (Pr.11-27).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated torque.
12- 63
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Positive torque
03-00~02=7
Positive torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
Reverse
Forward
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit
03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
Negative Torque
When Pr.03-00~Pr.03-02 have the same setting, then the AVI will be the prioritized selection.
Analog Input Bias (AVI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.
Analog Input Bias (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
Analog Voltage Input Bias (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.
The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency: 0~10V (4-20mA)
corresponds to 0-60Hz.
Reserved
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal toe
bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
12- 64
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
4: Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
In the diagram below: Black color line: Frequency. Gray color line: Voltage
Frequency
Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
Pr.03-03=10%
Frequency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
60Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI)=100%
Pr.03-03=10%
Frequency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
54Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
12- 65
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.03-03=10%
Frequency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
60Hz
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
Pr.03-03=10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
Pr.03-03=10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
12- 66
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
54Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
Pr.03-03=10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
54Hz
-V
-6Hz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
12- 67
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
-V
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
Pr.03-03=-10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
12- 68
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
-V
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 100%
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
12- 69
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
F requency
Pr.03-03=-10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI)= 1 11.1%
10/9=111.1%
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI)=111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
12- 70
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
6.66Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
Pr.03-03=10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
12- 71
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.03-03=10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6.66Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6.66Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
F requency
Pr.03-03=10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
-6.66Hz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
10/9 =111.1%
12- 72
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
10V
XV
9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias:
60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
10V
XV
9
1.11
Pr.03-03＝
× 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
60Hz
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
-V
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
10V
XV
1.11
Pr.03-03＝
× 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
12- 73
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
10V
XV
1.11
Pr.03-03＝
× 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
10V
XV
1.11
Pr.03-03＝
× 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
F requency
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
10V
XV
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
12- 74
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
6Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
10V
XV
1.11
Pr.03-03＝
× 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
F requency
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz
10V
XV
XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
12- 75
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
F requency
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
V
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
12- 76
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction )
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
12- 77
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
54Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction )
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction )
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 100%
F requency
-V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 100%
12- 78
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction )
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction )
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
F requency
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 100%
F requency
-V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 90.9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%
12- 79
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 90.9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%
V
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 90.9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%
12- 80
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad control and run in F WD direction)
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
F requency
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
60Hz
-V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V
60Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI) = 90.9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%
Analog Frequency Command for Reverse Run
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and reverse run is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminal.
1: Negative frequency is valid. Positive frequency = forward run; negative frequency =
reverse run. Run direction can not be switched by digital keypad or the external
terminal control.
Parameter 03-10 is used to enable reverse run command when a negative frequency (negative
bias and gain) is input to AVI or ACI analog signal input.
Analog Input Gain (AVI)
Analog Input Gain (ACI)
Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)
Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)
Factory Setting: 100.0
Settings
-500.0~500.0%
Parameters 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.
Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)
Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0.01
Settings
0.00~20.00 sec
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.
When the setting of the time constant is too large, the control will be stable but the control response
will be slow. When the setting of time constant is too small, the control response will be faster but
the control may be unstable. To find the optimal setting, please adjust the setting according to the
control stable or response status.
12- 81
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Addition Function of the Analog Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
When Pr.03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and AUI
are AVI>ACI>AUI.
F requ ency
Voltage
F co mmand= [(ay bias)*gain] * F max(01-00)
10V or 16mA
F comma nd: the co rresponding
frequen cy for 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr. 03-04, Pr.0 3-05
gain : Pr.03 -11 , Pr.03-12, Pr. 03-13, Pr.0 3-14
Treatment to 4-20mA Analog Input Signal Loss
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
This parameter determines the behavior when 4~20mA signal is loss, when AVIc(Pr.03-28=2) or
ACIc (03-29=0).
When Pr.03-28 is not set to 2, it means the voltage input to AVI terminal is 0-10V or 0-20mA. At this
moment, Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When Pr.03-29 is set to 1, it means the voltage input to ACI terminal is for 0-10V. At this moment,
Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When setting is 1 or 2, it will display warning code “AnL” on the keypad. It will be blinking until the
loss of the ACI signal is recovered or drive is stop.
Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)
Factory Setting: 0
Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~23
Function Chart
Settings Functions
Descriptions
0
Output frequency (Hz)
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
1
Frequency command (Hz)
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
2
Motor speed (Hz)
600Hz is regarded as 100%
3
Output current (rms)
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
4
Output voltage
(2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100%
5
DC Bus Voltage
450V (900V)=100%
12- 82
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
6
Power factor
-1.000~1.000=100%
7
Power
Rated power is regarded as 100%
8
Output torque
Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
9
AVI
0~10V=0~100%
10
ACI
0~20mA=0~100%
11
AUI
-10~10V=0~100%
12
q-axis current (Iq)
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
13
q-axis
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
14
d-axis current (Id)
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
15
d-axis
(2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
16
q-axis voltage (Vq)
250V (500V) =100%
17
d-axis voltage(Vd)
250V (500V) =100%
18
Torque command
Rated torque is regarded as 100%
19
PG2 frequency command
Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
20
Output for CANopen control
21
RS485 analog output
For CANopen analog output
For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
22
feedback value (Iq)
feedback value (Id)
Analog output for
communication card
For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Pr.03-32 and Pr.03-33 controls voltage/current output
23
Constant voltage/current output level
0~100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0~10V of AFM1.
Gain of Analog Output 1 (AFM1)
Factory Setting: 100.0
Gain of Analog Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 100.0
Settings
0~500.0%
It is used to adjust the analog voltage level (Pr.03-20) that terminal AFM outputs.
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
Analog Output 1 when in REV Direction (AFM1)
Factory Setting: 0
Analog Output 2 when in REV Direction (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD direction
12- 83
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
10V( 20mA)
0V
( 0mA)
10V( 20mA)
03-18
03-21
03-24
F requenc y
0V
( 0mA)
03-22=1
03-25=1
03-22=0
03-25=0
10V( 20mA)
F requenc y
5V
( 12mA)
03-22=2
03-25=2
Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on
Reserved
AFM2 Output Bias
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
-100.00~100.00%
Example 1, AFM2 0-10V is set output frequency, the output equation is
10V (
Output Frequency
) 03 - 24 10V 03 - 27
01 - 00
Example 2, AFM2 0-20mA is set output frequency, the output equation is
20mA (
Output Frequency
) 03 - 24 20mA 03 - 27
01 - 00
Example 3, AFM2 4-20mA is set output frequency, the output equation is
4mA 16mA (
Output Frequency
) 03 - 24 16mA 03 - 27
01 - 00
AVI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
ACI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
When changing the input mode, please check if the switch of external terminal (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting of Pr.03-28~03-29.
12- 84
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Status of PLC Output Terminal
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
0~65535
Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
P.03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
Weights
Bit
2
2
15
14
2
13
2
12
2
11
2
2
10
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
9
2
8
8
2
7
7
2
6
6
2
5
2
4
4
5
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
0
0
0=O N
1=O FF
AFM 1
AFM 2
NO TE
7
2 =1 28
6
2 =3 2
2 =6 4
4
2 =1 6
2 =8
2 =4
2 =2
2 =1
5
2
1
3
0
For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-30 displays 0002h(Hex), it means AFM1and AFM2 are used by PLC.
0 =N ot used by PLC
1 =U sed b y PLC
Weight s
B it
2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 21 2 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
D is p la y v a lu e
1
0
2 =1x 2 + 0 x 2
1
0
= bi t 1x 2 +bi t 0 x 2
A FM 1
A FM 2
AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 0-20mA output
1: 4-20mA output
AFM1 DC output setting level
AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
Reserved
AFM1 Filter Output Time
AFM2 Filter Output Time
Factory Setting: 0.01
Settings
0.00~20.00 Seconds
12- 85
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
~
Reserved
Analog Input Curve Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI
2: 3 point curve of ACI
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
AVI Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
AVI Mid Point
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings
03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
AVI High Point
Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings
03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-28 = 0, AVI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-28 ≠ 0, AVI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting analog input AVI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
12- 86
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
The 3 parameters (Pr03-51, Pr03-53 and Pr03-53) must meet the following argument: P03-51 <
P03-53 < P03-55. The 3 proportional points (Pr03-52, Pr03-54 and Pr03-56) doesn’t have any limit.
Between two points is a linear calculation. The ACI and AUI are same as AVI.
The output % will become 0% when the AVI input value is lower than low point setting.
For example:
P03-51 = 1V; P03-52 = 10%. The output will become 0% when AVI input is lower than 1V. If the AVI
input is swing between 1V and 1.1V, drive’s output frequency will beats between 0% and 10%
12- 87
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
ACI Low Point
Factory Setting: 4.00
Settings
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
ACI Mid Point
Factory Setting: 12.00
Settings
03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
ACI High Point
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings
03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-29=1, ACI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-29≠1, ACI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting analog input ACI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
The 3 parameters (Pr03-57, Pr03-59 and Pr03-61) must meet the following argument: P03-57 <
P03-59 < P03-61. The 3 proportional points (Pr03-58, Pr03-60 and Pr03-62) doesn’t have any limit.
Between two points is a linear calculation.
The output % will become 0% when the ACI input value is lower than low point setting.
For example:
P03-57 = 2mA; P03-58 = 10%. The output will become 0% when AVI input is lower than 2mA. If
the ACI input is swing between 2mA and 2.1mA, drive’s output frequency will beats between 0%
and 10%.
Positive AUI Voltage Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
12- 88
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings
0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: 50.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
Positive AUI Voltage High Point
Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings
0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: 100.00
Settings
0.00~100.00%
When setting positive voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in forward direction.
Three of the positive voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion, there is no setting limit for AUI points.
Negative AUI Voltage Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage Mid Point
Factory Setting: -5.00
Settings
0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Factory Setting: -50.00
Settings
0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage High Point
Factory Setting: -10.00
Settings
0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Factory Setting: -100.00
Settings
0.00~-100.00%
When setting negative voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in reverse direction.
Three of the negative voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion; there is no setting limit for AUI points.
12- 89
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
The 3 parameters (Pr03-69, Pr03-71 and Pr03-73) must meet the following argument: P03-69 <
P03-71 < P03-73. The 3 proportional points (Pr03-70, Pr03-72 and Pr03-74) doesn’t have any limit.
Between two points is a linear calculation.
The output % will become 0% when the negative AUI input value is lower than low point setting.
For example:
P03-63=-1V; P03-64 = 10%. The output will become 0% when AUI input is bigger than -1V. If the
AUI input is swing between -1V and -1.1V, drive’s output frequency will beats between 0% and
10%.
12- 90
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
1st Step Speed Frequency
2nd Step Speed Frequency
3rd Step Speed Frequency
4th Step Speed Frequency
5th Step Speed Frequency
6th Step Speed Frequency
7th Step Speed Frequency
8th Step Speed Frequency
9th Step Speed Frequency
10th Step Speed Frequency
11th Step Speed Frequency
12th Step Speed Frequency
13th Step Speed Frequency
14th Step Speed Frequency
15th Step Speed Frequency
This parameter can be set during operation.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr.02-01~02-08 and 02-26~02-31) are
used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds (max. 15 speeds). The speeds
(frequencies) are determined by Pr.04-00 to 04-14 as shown in the following.
The run/stop command can be controlled by the external terminal/digital keypad/communication via
Pr.00-21.
Each one of multi-step speeds can be set within 0.0~600.0Hz during operation.
Explanation for the timing diagram for multi-step speeds and external terminals
The Related parameter settings are:
1. Pr.04-00~04-14: setting multi-step speeds (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr.02-01~02-08, 02-26~02-31: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed 1~4)
Related parameters: 01-22 JOG Frequency, 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1),
02-02 Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2), 02-03 Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3),
02-04 Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)
12- 91
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
04-07
F requenc y
04-06
04-08
04-05
04-09
04-04
04-10
04-03
04-11
04-02
04-12
04-01
J OG Freq.
04-13
04-00
01-22
04-14
Master Spee d
1
Mul ti -functi on
terminals
MI1~MI4
02-0 1~02-08
Run/ Sto p
PU/ ext ernal t erminals
/c ommu nicat ion
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
ON
1st spee d
OFF ON
2nd sp eed
OFF
3rd spe ed
OFF
4t h speed
OFF
J og Freq.
2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Mu lt i- speed via Ext ernal Termin als
Position command 1 (pulse)
Position command 2 (pulse)
Position command 3 (pulse)
Position command 4 (pulse)
Position command 5 (pulse)
Position command 6 (pulse)
Position command 7 (pulse)
Position command 8 (pulse)
Position command 9 (pulse)
Position command 10 (pulse)
Position command 11 (pulse)
Position command 12 (pulse)
Position command 13 (pulse)
Position command 14 (pulse)
Position command 15 (pulse)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
-32767~32767
Please refer to Pr.02-01~02-08 (Multi-function Input Command) for description on setting 34
(Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control) and setting 36 (Enable multi-step
position learning function).
Multi-step position corresponding MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
Multi-step speed corresponding
10-19
0
0
0
0
Positioning for Encoder Position
04-16 Position command 1 (pulse)
0
0
0
1
04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-18 Position command 2 (pulse)
0
0
1
0
04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-20 Position command 3 (pulse)
0
0
1
1
04-02 3rd step speed frequency
12- 92
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
04-22 Position command 4 (pulse)
0
1
0
0
04-03 4th step speed frequency
04-24 Position command 5 (pulse)
0
1
0
1
04-04 5th step speed frequency
04-26 Position command 6 (pulse)
0
1
1
0
04-05 6th step speed frequency
04-28 Position command 7 (pulse)
0
1
1
1
04-06 7th step speed frequency
04-30 Position command 8 (pulse)
1
0
0
0
04-07 8th step speed frequency
04-32 Position command 9 (pulse)
1
0
0
1
04-08 9th step speed frequency
04-34 Position command 10 (pulse)
1
0
1
0
04-09 10th step speed frequency
04-36 Position command 11 (pulse)
1
0
1
1
04-10 11th step speed frequency
04-38 Position command 12 (pulse)
1
1
0
0
04-11 12th step speed frequency
04-40 Position command 13 (pulse)
1
1
0
1
04-12 13th step speed frequency
04-42 Position command 14 (pulse)
1
1
1
0
04-13 14th step speed frequency
04-44 Position command 15 (pulse)
1
1
1
1
04-14 15th step speed frequency
Position command 1 (revolution)
Position command 2 (revolution)
Position command 3 (revolution)
Position command 4 (revolution)
Position command 5 (revolution)
Position command 6 (revolution)
Position command 7 (revolution)
Position command 8 (revolution)
Position command 9 (revolution)
Position command 10 (revolution)
Position command 11 (revolution)
Position command 12 (revolution)
Position command 13 (revolution)
Position command 14 (revolution)
Position command 15 (revolution)
To switch the target position of the external terminal, set external terminal parameters to
Pr.02-01=1, Pr.02-02=2, Pr.02-03=3, Pr.02-04= 4 by selecting the P2P target position via multi-step
speed.
Setting: Target Position = 04-15 × (10-01*4) + 04-16
Multi-step
Target Position of P2P
Speed Status
0000
0
0001
Position 1
04-15
04-16
0010
Position 2
04-17
04-18
0011
Position 3
04-19
04-20
0100
Position 4
04-21
04-22
0101
Position 5
04-23
04-24
0110
Position 6
04-25
04-26
0111
Position 7
04-27
04-28
1000
Position 8
04-29
04-30
12- 93
Maximum Speed of P2P
11-00 bit8=0
11-43
11-43
11-00 bit8=1
04-00
04-01
04-02
04-03
04-04
04-05
04-06
04-07
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Multi-step
Speed Status
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Target Position of P2P
Position 9
Position 10
Position 11
Position 12
Position 13
Position 14
Position 15
PLC Buffer 1
PLC Buffer 2
PLC Buffer 3
PLC Buffer 4
PLC Buffer 5
PLC Buffer 6
PLC Buffer 7
PLC Buffer 8
PLC Buffer 9
PLC Buffer 10
04-31
04-33
04-35
04-37
04-39
04-41
04-43
04-32
04-34
04-36
04-38
04-40
04-42
04-44
Maximum Speed of P2P
04-08
04-09
04-10
04-11
04-12
04-13
04-14
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
The Pr 04-50~Pr04-59 can be combined with PLC or HMI programming for variety application.
The Pr04-50~Pr04-59 will record last data before power off.
12- 94
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
05 Motor Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Motor Auto Tuning
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Rolling test for induction motor
3: No function
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor parameter
Induction Motor
Press 【Run】to begin auto tuning. The measured value will be written into motor 1 (Pr.05-05
~05-09, Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21) automatically.
To begin AUTO-Tuning in rolling test:
1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.
2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected
to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 if the motor can’t separate from the
load.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Motor 1 Parameter
Motor 2 Parameter
Motor Rated Frequency
01-01
01-35
Motor Rated Voltage
01-02
01-36
Motor Full-load Current
05-01
05-13
Motor Rated Power
05-02
05-14
Motor Rated Speed
05-03
05-15
Motor Pole Numbers
05-04
05-16
Set Pr.05-00=1 and press【Run】, the drive will begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the
motor that it starts spinning as【Run】 is pressed.
When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into motor 1
(Pr.05-05 ~05-09) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 ~05-21) automatically.
Mechanical equivalent circuit
I
VS
Rs
P r.0 5- 06
P r.0 5- 18
Lx
P r.0 5- 09
P r.0 5- 21
Lm
P r.0 5- 08
P r.0 5- 20
Rr
P r.0 5- 07
P r.0 5- 19
※ If Pr.05-00 is set to 2 (static test), user needs to input the no-load current value of motor
into Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.
12- 95
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Set Pr.05-00=6 to begin rolling test for IM motor flux curve. This function is available
when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin auto-tuning after
setting up the motor information.
Set up Pr.01-01, 01-02, 05-01~05-04 according to the motor nameplate information。
Set Pr.05-00=6 and press【Run】, make sure no loading is applied to the motor
before setting Pr.05-00 to 6 and before performing auto-tuning.
When Pr.05-00=12, the drive begins FOC Sensorless inertia estimation for IM motor. This
function is available when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin
auto-tuning after setting up the motor information.
Note: Make sure the motor parameters (no-load current, Rs, Rr, Lm and Lx) of the
drive are set before performing Pr.05-00=12 (auto-tuning for FOC Sensorless
interior estimation for IM motor).
1. Set Pr.00-10=2 (torque mode)
2. Set Pr. 00-13=2 (TQCPG, Open-loop torque mode)
3. Set Pr. 05-00=12 and press【Run】to begin FOC Sensorless inertia measure
4. When the process of inertia estimation is completed, check Pr.11-01 (unit: PU Q8) and
see if the measured value is acceptable.
Set up Sensorless FOC Mode
1. Set Pr.00-10 = 0 (speed mode)
2. Set Pr.00-11 = 5 (FOC sensorless mode)
3. Set bit0 of Pr.11-00 to 1 (use ASR gain function to automatically adjust the ASR
bandwidth in Pr.11-03,11-04,11-05)
NOTE
In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds
the rated power of the AC motor drive.
When auto-tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals (setting 14) or
change Pr.05-22 for motor 1/motor 2 selection.
The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
The rated speed can not be greater than or equal to 120f/p (f = rated frequency
Pr.01-01/01-35; P: number of motor poles Pr.05-04/05-16).
Permanent Magnet Motor (PM)
Set Pr.05-00= 5 or 13 and press 【Run】 to begin auto tuning for PM motor. The
measured values will be written into Pr.05-39（Rs）, Pr.05-40 & 41（Ld & Lq） and
Pr.05-43（PM motor’s Ke parameter）.
To begin AUTO-Tuning for PM motor in rolling test:
1.
Make sure all the parameters are reset to factory setting and the motor wiring installation is
12- 96
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
correct.
2.
For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete the following settings according to your motor
specifications, Pr.05-34 rated current, Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and Pr.
05-37 pole number. The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set according to
your motor capacity.
3.
Set Pr.05-00 to 5 and press 【Run】 to begin auto tuning for PM motor. Please be aware of
the motor that it starts spinning as【Run】 is pressed.
4.
When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into
Pr.05-39~05-41 and Pr.05-43 automatically.
Set Pr.05-00=4 and press【Run】to begin auto-tuning for PM motor PG offset angle. The
measured value will be written into Pr.05-42 automatically.
Note 1: When execute auto-tuning for PM motor PG origin, please make sure the
encoder setting are correct (Pr.10-00, 10-01, 10-02), otherwise the PG origin measure
error and motor stall may occur.
Note 2: If PM motor runs in an opposite direction of the drive’s command, switch any
two of the UVW cable and re-connect, then execute PG origin search again. It is crucial
to execute auto-tuning after the switch otherwise PG origin measure error and motor
stall may occur.
Auto-tuning process for measuring PG offset angle of PM motor:
1.
Set Pr.05-00=5 and press RUN, or manually input the values into Pr. 01-01, 05-34~-541 and
Pr.05-43.
2.
It is strongly suggested to remove the motor and unload before beings auto-tuning.
3.
Set Pr.05-00=4 and press【Run】 to begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the motor that it
starts spinning as 【Run】is pressed.
4.
When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the PG offset angle is written into Pr.05-42
automatically.
NOTE
When auto-tuning for PM motor is completed and the control mode setting is done, it is
recommend to turn the drive’s power off and restart again to ensure the drive operates according
to the motor parameter settings.
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1（A）
Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
10 to 120% of drive’s rated current
This value should be set according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
12- 97
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW)
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm)
Factory Setting:
1710（60Hz 4 poles）
1410（50Hz 4 poles）
Settings
0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Before set up this parameter, you need to set up Pr05-04.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: 4
Settings
2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
Set up Pr.05-04 before you set up Pr.05-03.
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)
Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
Stator Resistance(Rs) of Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings
0~65.535Ω
Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Induction Motor 1
Stator inductance(Lx) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
~
0~6553.5mH
Reserved
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 2（A）
Unit: Amper
Factory Setting:#.##
12- 98
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
10~120%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 2 (kW)
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 2 (rpm)
Factory Setting: 1710
Settings
0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: 4
Settings
2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
No-load Current of Induction Motor 2 (A)
Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings
0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-13
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
Stator Resistance (Rs) of Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings
0~65.535Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.#
Settings
0~6553.5 mH
Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.
12- 99
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Frequency for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor
Factory Setting: 60.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor
Factory Setting: 0.200
Settings
0.000~60.000 sec
P.05-23 and Pr.05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the
switch of Y-connection/-connection as required. (The wide range motors has relation with the
motor design. In general, it has higher torque at low speed and Y-connection and it has higher
speed at high speed and connection.
Pr.05-24 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/-connection Switch.
When Pr.05-24 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-23 setting and current motor frequency to
switch motor to Y-connection or -connection. At the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters.
Pr.05-25 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/-connection.
When output frequency reaches Y-connection/-connection switch frequency, drive will delay by
Pr.05-25 before multi-function output terminals are active.
-con necti on is fin ishe d
Pr.02-01 ~08 =30
U
MI1
V
W
Y-connec tion is finished
Pr.02-01 ~08 =29
MI2
RA
MRA
-con necti on control
Pr.02-13 ~14 =32
W
V
IM
Y-connection con tro l
Pr.02-11~14=31
X
Y
Yconnection switch: can be used for wide range motor
Y -connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
-con necti on fo r high spe ed: h igher torque can be u sed for hig h-spee d dril ling
12- 100
U
Z
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
If switch poi nt is 60Hz,
the accel . switch point i s 62Hz
Pr.05-23
Y-△ switch
frequency
Decel. switch point is 58Hz
Bandwidth is 2Hz
In this area, motor i s i n free
run status . AC motor driv e
stops outputti ng.
Motor s peed/
frequency
Motor s peed will
decrease
by load inertia.
Pr. 05-25 Delay Time for Y-c onnection
/D -c onnec tion( Min. is 0.2 seconds)
Y-connection output
ON
Pr.02-13~14=31
ON
Y-conenction
confirmation input
ON
Pr.02-13~14=29
ON
△-connection output
Pr.02-13~14=32
ON
△-connection
confirmation input
Pr.02-13~14=30
ON
: mechanical
bounc e time
f ree run status
output
frequency
Y-c onnect ion output
Pr. 02-13~14=31
Y-c onnection
confir mation input
Pr.02-01~08=29
△-connec ti on output
Pr.02-13~14=32
△-connection
confir mation input
Pr.02-01~08=30
Y-△ s witch err or
frequency
ON
ON
ON
ON
delay ti me
Pr.05-25
2 seconds
Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in Low Word (W-sec)
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
Read only
Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor (W-Hour)
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in Low Word (KW-Hour)
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in High Word (KW-Hour)
Factory Setting: 0.0
12- 101
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Settings
Read only
Pr.05-26~05-29 records the amount of power consumed by motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The amount of
consumed watts will continue to accumulate when the drive activate again. To clear the
accumulation, set Pr.00-02 to 5 then the accumulation record will return to 0.
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
00~1439
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (day)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
00~65535
Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set
Pr.05-31 and Pr.05-32 to 00. Operation time shorter than 60 seconds will not be recorded.
Induction Motor (IM) and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor
Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~655.35 Amps
Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~655.35 kW
Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory Setting: 2000
Settings
0~65535 rpm
Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~65535
Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
2
2
0.0~6553.5 kg.cm (0.0001kg.m )
This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm2 . If this measure is not familiar to you, please refer to
the chart below. (Delta’s motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.)
12- 102
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Delta Motor (Low inertia model)
Rated Power(kW)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.75
1
2
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04
Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model)
Rated Power(kW)
0.5
1
1.5
2
2
0.3
0.6
0.9
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03
※ For more information on motor inertia value, please refer to Pr.11-01.
Stator Resistance of PM Motor
Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings
0.000~65.535
Permanent Magnet Motor Ld
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~655.35 mH
Permanent Magnet Motor Lq
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~655.35 mH
PG Offset angle of PM Motor
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0.0~360.0°
When Pr.05-00 is set to 4, the drive will detect offset angle and write into Pr.05-42.
Ke parameter of PM Motor
Unit: V/1000rpm
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
12- 103
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
06 Protection Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Low Voltage Level
Factory Setting:
Settings 230V Series:
Frame A to D: 150.o~ 220.0 Vdc
180.0
Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V
200.0
Frame A to D:
460V Series: 300.0~440.0V
360.0
Frame E and frames above E: 380.0~440.0V
400.0
It is used to set the level. When the DC BUS voltage is lower than Pr06-00 Low voltage level, drive
will stop output and free to stop.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
Over-voltage Stall Prevention
Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0
Settings
230V Series: 0.0~450.0V
460V Series:0.0~900.0V
0: Disabled
When Pr.06-01 is set to 0.0, the over-voltage stall prevention function is disabled. When braking
units or resistors are connected to the drive, this setting is suggested.
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor
regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and
keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again.
This function is used for the occasion that the load inertia is unsure. When it stops in the usual load,
the over-voltage won’t occur during deceleration and fulfill the setting of deceleration time.
Sometimes, it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to stop when increasing the
load regenerative inertia. At this moment, the AC drive will auto add the deceleration time until drive
stop.
When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When there is any problem as using deceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Add the suitable deceleration time.
2. Add brake resistor (refer to appendix B-1 for details) to consume the electrical energy that
12- 104
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
regenerated from the motor with heat type.
Related parameters: Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 (settings of decel. time 1~4), Pr.02-13~02-14
(Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
High-voltage
at DC si de
Ov er-v ol tage
detec ti on
level
Time
Output
frequency
F requenc y Held
Deceleration c har acteristic
when Ov er-Voltage Stall
Pr ev ention enabled
Time
previous deceleration time
requir ed time for decelerating to 0Hz when over- voltage
stall prevention is enabled.
Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage prevention
When Pr.06-02 is set to 1, the drive will maintain DCbus voltage when decelerating and prevent
OV.
60Hz
Output Frequency
DCBUS Voltage
370Vdc
310Vdc
0
230V Series
12- 105
Time
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Settings
Super Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Factory Setting: 150
Only functional under VF, VFPG and SVC mode
If the motor load is too large or drive acceleration time is too short, the AC drive output current may
increase abruptly during acceleration and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (OL or OC). This parameter is used to prevent this situation.
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function
is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the
current drops below the maximum value.
When the over-current stall prevention is enabled, drive acceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When the Over-Current Stall Prevention occurs due to too small motor capacity or in the factory
setting, please decrease Pr.06-03 setting.
When there is any problem by using acceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
Related parameters: Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 (settings of accel. time 1~4), Pr.01-44
1. Add the suitable acceleration time.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto accel.)
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting, Pr.02-13~02-14 (Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr.
02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
Output current
06-03
Setting frequency
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output frequency
Over-Current Stall p revention during
Acceleration,frequ ency held
Time
Original setting of acceleration time
actual acceleratio n time when over-current stall
prevention is ena bled
Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Settings
Super Heavy Duty: 0~200% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Factory Setting: 150
Only functional under VF, VFPG and SVC mode
It is a protection for drive to auto decrease output frequency when the motor is over-load abruptly
during motor constant operation.
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
12- 106
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
will decrease its output frequency (according to Pr.06-05) to prevent the motor stall. If the output
current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate (according to
Pr.06-05) again to catch up with the set frequency command value.
Ov er-Curr ent
Detec tion Level
06-04
Current
Pr . 06-04 s etting
Ov er-Curr ent Stall P revention
during Operation, output
frequency dec reases
Decreases by
deceleration time
over- curr ent stall pr eventi on during oper ation
Pr . 06-04 s ettingrated dr ive c urrent X 5%
Output
F requenc y
T ime
Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
It is used to set the accel./decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
12- 107
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operation after
detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t have an
abnormal record.
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an
abnormal record.
Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)
Factory Setting: 120
Settings
10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)
Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings
0.0~60.0 sec
Over-torque Detection Level (OT2)
Factory Setting: 120
Settings
10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings
0.0~60.0 sec
NOTE 01: Over torque detection is determined by the following method.
if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr06-07, factory setting: 150%)
and also exceeds Pr06-08, the Over Torque Detection will follow the setting of Pr06-06 and
Pr06-09.
NOTE02: When Pr06-06 or Pr06-09 is set to 1 or 3, the motor drive will have the ot1/ot2 warning
after Over Torque Detection. But the motor drive will keep running but only until the output current
is smaller than the 5% of the rated current, the warning will be off.
Current
5%
06-07, 06-10
Output Current
Over Torque
Warning
ON
5%
ON
06-08, 06-11
NOTE03: When Pr06-06 or Pr06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the motor drive will have the ot1/ot2 fault after Over
Torque Detection.
Then the motor drive stop running until it is manually reset.
Current Limit
Factory Setting: 170
Settings
0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Pr.06-12 sets the maximum output current of the drive. Pr.06-12 and Pr.11-17 ~ Pr.11-20 are used
12- 108
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
to set the drive’s output current limit. When the drive is in VF, SVC or VFPG control mode, output
frequency will decreases as the output current reaches current limit. It is a current stall prevention.
Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)
Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0: Constant torque output motor
1: Variable torque output motor
2: Disable
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal
relay to limit driver’s output power.
Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1
Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2
Factory Setting: 60.0
Settings
30.0~600.0 sec
The parameter is set by the 150% of motor rated current and the setting of Pr.06-14 and Pr.06-28 to
prevent the motor damaged from overheating. When it reaches the setting, it will display
“EoL1/EoL2” and the motor will be in free running.
Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
3
10Hz
5Hz
2
1
Load
0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 factor (%)
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning
Factory Setting: 85.0
Settings
0.0~110.0℃
Pr.06-15 sets the heatsink temperature level of the drive. The drive will output an overheating
warning when the temperature exceeds the setting of Pr.06-15. If the setting of Pr.06-15 is higher
than the default setting of the drive, the drive will use the default setting level for warning output.
Capacitor (CAP) overheating level is set by the drive’s default setting, it can not be adjusted.
12- 109
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Over-heating Level (℃)
Over-heating Level (℃)
Model
IGBT OH1
CAP OH 2
Model
IGBT OH1
CAP OH 2
VFD007CH23A-21
VFD015CH23A-21
VFD022CH23A-21
VFD037CH23A-21
VFD055CH23A-21
VFD075CH23A-21
100
100
100
100
100
100
90
90
90
95
75
75
95
95
95
95
95
100
75
75
75
80
80
80
VFD110CH23A-21
VFD150CH23A-21
VFD185CH23A-21
VFD220CH23A-00/21
VFD300CH23A-00/21
VFD370CH23A-00/21
VFD450CH23A-00/21
VFD550CH23A-00/21
VFD750CH23A-00/21
VFD007CH43A-21
VFD015CH43A-21
VFD022CH43A-21
VFD037CH43A-21
VFD055CH43A-21
100
95
95
95
95
95
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
75
70
70
70
60
60
60
60
60
90
90
95
100
95
VFD075CH43A-21
VFD110CH43A-21
VFD150CH43A-21
VFD185CH43A-21
VFD220CH43A-21
VFD300CH43A-21
VFD370CH43A-00/21;
VFD370CH43S-21
VFD450CH43A-00/21
VFD550CH43A-00/21
VFD750CH43A-00/21
VFD900CH43A-00/21
VFD1100CH43A-00/21
VFD1320CH43A-00/21
VFD1600CH43A-00/21
VFD1850CH43A-00/21
VFD2200CH43A-00/21
VFD2800CH43A-00
VFD2800CH43C-00/21
95
60
95
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
65
65
65
65
Stall Prevention Limit Level (Flux weakening area current stall prevention level)
Factory Setting: 50
Settings
0~100% (Refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01; e.g. Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-16=80%:
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level during acceleration: Pr.06-03 * Pr.06-16=150x80%=120%.
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level at constant speed: Pr.06-04 * Pr.06-16=100x80%=80%.
Present Fault Record
Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings
Can auto-reset
after fault
V (P07-10≠0 &
0: No fault record
P07-11≠0)
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
12- 110
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
V (P07-10≠0 &
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
P07-11≠0)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) (for 40hp above)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
12- 111
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
V (P07-10≠0 &
P07-11≠0)
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref loss (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: External Base Block (bb)
V (P07-10≠0)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
55: Communication error (CE2)
56: Communication error (CE3)
57: Communication error (CE4)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: PU Time-out (CP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
63: Slip error (oSL)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
74~78: Reserved
79: Uocc U phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
80: Vocc V phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
81: Wocc W phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
85~100: Reserved
12- 112
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime error
When the fault occurs and force stopping, it will record in this parameter.
At stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warn, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage Lv (LvA,
Lvd, Lvn error, will record).
Setting 62: when dEb function is enabled, the drive will execute dEb and record to the Pr.06-17 to
Pr.06-22 simultaneously.
Fault Output Option 1
Fault Output Option 2
Fault Output Option 3
Fault Output Option 4
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set to 35-38) for the specific
requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (It needs
to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Fault Code
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
current
Volt.
OL
SYS
FBK
EXI
CE
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
●
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
●
4: Ground fault (GFF)
●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
●
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
●
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
●
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS )
●
12- 113
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Fault Code
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
current
Volt.
OL
SYS
FBK
EXI
CE
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
●
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
●
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
●
18: tH1o (TH1 open)
●
19: tH2o (TH2 open)
●
20: Reserved
21:
Drive over-load (oL)
●
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
●
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
●
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
●
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2)
●
28: Low current (uC)
●
●
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
●
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
●
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
●
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
●
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
●
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
●
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
●
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
●
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
●
46: PG ref loss (PGr1)
●
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
●
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
●
49: External fault input (EF)
●
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
●
51: External Base Block (bb)
●
52: Password error (PcodE)
●
12- 114
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Fault Code
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
current
Volt.
OL
SYS
FBK
EXI
CE
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
●
55: Communication error (CE2)
●
56: Communication error (CE3)
●
57: Communication error (CE4)
●
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
●
59: PU Time-out (CP10)
●
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
●
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error
●
(ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
●
63: Slip error (oSL)
●
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
●
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
●
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
●
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
●
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
●
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
●
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
●
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
●
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
●
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
●
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
●
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
●
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
●
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number
setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime
error
●
12- 115
●
●
●
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Pr.06-29 setting defines how the will drive operate after PTC detection. 再補充 03-00 d6
PTC Level
Factory Setting: 50.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
It needs to set AVI/ACI/AUI analog input function Pr.03-00~03-02 to 6 (P.T.C. thermistor input
value).
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input value.
Frequency Command for Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the frequency command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Output Frequency at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.00~655.35Hz
When malfunction occurs, use can check the current frequency command. If it happens
again, it will overwrite the previous record.
Output Voltage at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
DC Voltage at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.0~6553.5V
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current DC voltage. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
12- 116
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Output Current at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.00~655.35Amp
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current output current. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again,
it will overwrite the previous record.
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0.0~6553.5℃
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Torque Command at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0~65535
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current torque command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0000h~FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0000h~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, user can check the status of multi-function input/output terminals. If it
happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0000H~FFFFh
12- 117
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When malfunction occurs, please check the drive status (communication address 2119H). If
malfunction happens again, the previous record will be overwritten by this parameter.
Reserved
Reserved
Treatment to Output Phase Loss (OPHL)
Factory Setting: 3
Settings
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Pr.06-45 defines how the drive will operates when output phase loss occur.
Deceleration Time of Output Phase Loss
Factory Setting:0.500
Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
Current detection level of output phase loss
Factory Setting:1.00
Settings
0.00~655.35%
Output phase loss detection function executing time before run
Factory Setting:0.000
Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
During the run: Any output phase current is smaller than the level of Pr06-47 and starts to count
time to surpass Pr06-46
Before the run:
01 When performing output phase loss detection, if any output phase is smaller than the level of
Pr06-47 and starts to count time to surpass Pr06-46 that means the motor drive has an output phase
loss and the motor drive will follow the setting of Pr06-45.
02 When Pr06-48 = 0, output phase loss detection before the run is disable.
03 The setting value of Pr06-48 must be larger than the setting of Pr06-46.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
12- 118
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Treatment for the detected Input Phase Loss （OrP）
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: warn, ramp to stop
1: warn, coast to stop
Over ripple protection
When the DC BUS ripple is bigger than protection level, drive will trip up OrP and depending on
how the parameter 06-53 is set to stop.
Reserved
Derating Protection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but close current limit
Setting 0:
When the rated current is constant, carrier frequency (Fc) outputted by PWM will auto decrease
according to surrounding temperature, overload output current and time. If overload situation is
not frequent and only cares the carrier frequency operated with the rated current for a long time
and carrier wave changes during short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.
Refer to the following diagram for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD007CH43A in super
heavy duty as example, surrounding temperature 50℃ with independent installation and UL
open-type. When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to 72% rated output current.
When it outputs higher than the value, it will auto decrease the carrier frequency. If the output is
83% rated current and the carrier frequency will decrease to 12kHz. In addition, it will also
decrease the carrier frequency when overload. When the carrier frequency is 15kHz and the
current is 120%*72%=86% for a minute, the carrier frequency will decrease to the factory setting.
Setting 1:
It is used for the fixed carrier frequency and prevents the carrier wave changes and motor noise
caused by the surrounding temperature and frequent overload.
Refer to the following for the derating level of rated current. Take VFD007CH43A in super heavy
duty as example, when the carrier frequency keeps in 15kHz and the rated current is decreased to
72%, it will have OL protection when the current is 120%*72%=86% for a minute. Therefore, it
needs to operate by the curve to keep the carrier frequency.
Setting 2:
It sets the protection method and action to 0 and disables the current limit for the Ratio*160% of
output current in the normal duty and Ratio*180% of output current in the heavy duty. The
advantage is that it can provide higher output current when the setting is higher than the factory
setting of carrier frequency. The disadvantage is that it decreases carrier wave easily when
overload.
12- 119
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
007~037CH23
105%
055~750CH23
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
007~055CH43
075~300CH43
370~750CH43
900~1100CH43
1320~2800CH43
105%
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12- 120
12
13
14
15
15
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
It should be used with Pr. 00-16 and Pr.00-17 for setting.
NOTE
The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or electric
box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum mounting
clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air conditioner to keep
surrounding temperature lower than operation temperature. (3) Refer to
parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17, and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows heat dissipation and the required air volume when
installing a single drive in a confined space. When installing multiple drives,
the required air volume shall be multiplied by the number the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment design
and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and selection.
Minimum mounting clearances:
Frame
A (mm)
B (mm)
C (mm)
D (mm)
A~C
60
30
10
0
D~F
100
50
0
G
200
100
0
H
350
0
0
200 (100, Ta=40℃)
※
Air flow rate for cooling
Flow Rate (cfm)
Model No.
VFD007CH23A-21
Power Dissipation
Flow Rate (m /hr)
Power Dissipation (watt)
Loss
External
ExternalInternal Total External Internal Total
Internal Total
(Heat
sink)
38
27
65
3
VFD015CH23A-21
14
-
14
24
-
24
59
31
90
VFD022CH23A-21
14
-
14
24
-
24
80
36
116
VFD037CH23A-21
10
-
10
17
-
17
127
46
173
VFD055CH23A-21
40
14
54
68
24
92
223
67
290
VFD075CH23A-21
66
14
80
112
24
136
306
86
392
VFD110CH23A-21
58
14
72
99
24
136
432
121
553
VFD150CH23A-21
166
12
178
282
20
302
499
161
660
VFD185CH23A-21
166
12
178
282
20
302
589
184
773
VFD220CH23A-21
179
30
209
304
51
355
737
216
953
VFD300CH23A-21
179
30
209
304
51
355
1001
186
1187
VFD370CH23A-00/23A-21
179
30
209
304
51
355
1064
220
1284
VFD450CH23A-00/23A-21
228
73
301
387
124
511
1238
267
1505
VFD550CH23A-00/23A-21
246
73
319
418
124
542
1505
308
1813
VFD750CH23A-00/23A-21
224
112
346
381
190
571
1758
369
2127
VFD007CH43A/4EA-21
-
-
-
-
-
-
43
25
68
VFD015CH43A/4EA-21
14
-
14
24
-
24
59
29
88
VFD022CH43A/4EA-21
14
-
14
24
-
24
76
33
109
VFD037CH43A/4EA-21
10
-
10
17
-
17
118
42
160
VFD055CH43A/4EA-21
14
-
14
24
-
24
152
46
198
12- 121
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
VFD075CH43A/4EA-21
Air flow rate for cooling
40
14
54
Power Dissipation
68
24
92
260
76
336
VFD110CH43A/4EA-21
58
14
72
99
24
124
348
93
441
VFD150CH43A/4EA-21
58
14
72
99
24
124
469
122
591
VFD185CH43A/4EA-21
99
21
120
168
36
204
445
138
583
VFD220CH43A/4EA-21
99
21
120
168
36
204
509
158
667
VFD300CH43A/4EA-21
99
21
120
168
36
204
655
211
866
VFD370CH43A/4EA-21;
VFD370CH43S-21
VFD450CH43A-00/43A-21
147
30
177
248
21
269
863
184
1047
179
30
209
304
51
355
1162
218
1380
VFD550CH43A-00/43A-21
186
30
216
316
51
367
1384
257
1641
VFD750CH43A-00/43A-21
186
30
216
316
51
367
1878
334
2212
VFD900CH43A-00/43A-21
257
73
330
437
124
561
1878
399
2277
VFD1100CH43A-00/43A-21
223
73
296
379
124
503
2336
491
2827
VFD1320CH43A-00/43A-21
224
112
336
381
190
571
2680
579
3259
VFD1600CH43A-00/43A-21
771
4179
VFD1850CH43A-00/43A-21
454
454
771
5011
VFD2200CH43A-00/43A-21
454
771
6168
VFD2800CH43A-00/43C-00/43C-21
769
1307
7059
※
※
The required airflow shown in chart is for installing one drive in confined space.
※
The heat dissipation shown
When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should be the required air volume
in the chart is for installing
for single drive X the number of the drives.
single drive in a confined
space.
※
When installing multiple
drives, volume of heat
dissipation should be the
heat dissipated for single
drive X the number of the
drives.
※
Heat dissipation for each
model is calculated by
rated voltage, current and
default carrier.
12- 122
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PT100 Detection Level 1
Factory Setting:5.000
Settings
0.000~10.000V
PT100 Detection Level 2
Factory Setting: 7.000
Settings
0.000~10.000V
Make sure Pr. 06-57 > Pr.06-56.
PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00 Hz
PT100 operation
(1) Use AVI, AUI or ACI(set to 0-10V) for analog voltage input and select PT100 mode.
(2) Choose one of the analog voltage input type: (a)AVI (Pr.03-00=11), (b) AUI (Pr.03-02=11), or
(c) ACI (Pr.03-01=11 and Pr.03-29=1).
(3) When using ACI as analog voltage input, set Pr.03-01=11 and Pr.03-29=1. Then switch SW2
to 0-10V on the I/O control terminal block.
(4) Set Pr.03-23=23 and AFM2 to constant current output. Switch AFM2 (SW2) to 0-20mA on the
I/O control terminal block and set constant current output to 9mA by setting Pr.03-33=45. The
AFM2 constant output current is 20mA * 45% = 9mA.
(5) Pr.03-33 is for adjusting the constant voltage or constant current of AFM2, the setting range is
0~100.00%.
(6) There are two types of action level for PT100. The diagram of PT protecting action is shown
as below:
L e ve l 2= 0 6 -5 7
Se tti n g ra n g e: 0 .0 0 0~ 1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto ry se tti n g : 7 .0 0 0 V
L e ve l 1= 0 6 -5 6
Se tti n g ra n g e : 0 .0 0 0~ 1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto ry se tti n g : 5 .0 0 0 V
Fre q u e n cy
C o mma n d
When voltage of PT 100 reaches level 1,
the drive passed the delay time set at Pr06-59 ,
the frequency command goes back to Pr.06-58.
Pr.06- 59 D e l a y ti me
When voltage of PT 100 reaches level 2, the drive activate
protecting action by following the setting of Pr.06-29.
(7) PT100 wiring diagram:
12- 123
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
0-10V
AFM1
0-10V
AFM2
-10-10V
0-20mA
0-10V
AVI
0-20mA
0-20mA
ACI
Open
RC2 RB2 RA2 RC1 RB1 RA1
485
0-10V
120
AFM1 +10V AVI ACI MO1 MO2 MCM +24V COM FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7 SGND
AFM2 -10V AUI ACM S1 SCM DFM DCM REV MI2 MI4 MI6 MI8 SG+ SG-
Removable Terminal Block
PT100
Figure 1
When Pr.06-58=0.00Hz, PT100 function is disabled.
Example:
A PT100 is installed to the drive. If motor temperature reaches 135℃ (275°F) or higher, the drive
will decrease motor frequency to the setting of Pr.06-58. Motor will operate at this frequency
(Pr.06-58) till the motor temperature decreases to 135℃(275°F) or lower. If motor temperature
exceeds 150℃(302°F), the motor will decelerate to stop and outputs an ‘OH3’ warning.
Set up process:
1. Switch AFM2 (SW2) to 0-20mA on the I/O control terminal block. (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring
diagram)
2. Wiring (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring diagram):
Connect external terminal AFM2 to (+)
Connect external terminal ACM to (-)
Connect external terminals AFM2 and AVI to short-circuit
3. Set Pr.03-00=11 or Pr.03-23=23 or Pr.03-33=45%(9mA)
4. Refer to RTD temperature and resistance comparison table
Temperature=135℃, resistance=151.71; Input current: 9mA, Voltage: approximately: 1.37Vdc
Temperature=150℃, resistance=157.33; Input current:9mA, Voltage: approximately: 1.42Vdc
5. Set Pr.06=56=1.37 and Pr.06-58=10Hz. When RTD temperature increases to 135℃ or higher,
the drive will decelerate to the selected frequency. When Pr.06-58=0, the drive will not run.
6. Set Pr.06-57=1.42 and Pr.06-29=1 (warning and decelerate to stop). When RTD temperature
increases to 150℃ or higher, the drive will decelerate to stop and outputs an ‘OH3’ warning.
Reserved
Software Detection GFF Current Level
Factory Setting: 60.0
Settings
0.0~6553.5 %
Software Detection GFF Filter Time
Factory Setting: 0.10
Settings
0.0~6553.5 %
When the motor drive detects the unbalanced three-phase out current is higher than the setting of
Pr06-60, GFF protection will be activated. Then the motor drive will stop outputting.
12- 124
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When 3-phase current output unbalance value has exceeds Pr06-60 setting, drive will trip up GFF
and stop output immediately.
Disable Level of dEb
Factory Setting: 180.0/360.0
Settings
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vic
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vic
Fault Record 1 (day)
Fault Record 2 (day)
Fault Record 3 (day)
Fault Record 4 (day)
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0~65535 days
Fault Record 1 (min)
Fault Record 2 (min)
Fault Record 3 (min)
Fault Record 4 (min)
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0~1439 min
Pr.06-63 to Pr.06-68 are used to record the operation time for 6 malfunctions and it can also check
if there is any wrong with the drive according to the internal time.
When the malfunction occurs during operation, it records fault in Pr.06-17~06-22 and operation
time is recorded in Pr.06-63~06-68.
For example: When the first fault ovA occurs after operation 3000 min., second fault ovd occurs at
3482 min., third fault ovA occurs at 4051 min., fourth fault ocA at 5003 min., fifth fault ocA at 5824
min., sixth fault ocd occurs at 6402 min. and seven fault ocS at 6951 min..
It’ll be recorded as the following table:
12- 125
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
It will be recorded as the following table:
First fault
Pr.06-17
ovA
Pr.06-63
3000 ovA occurs at the 3000 min
after operating.
Second fault
Pr.06-17
ovd
Pr.06-63
3482
Pr.06-18
ovA
Pr.06-64
3000
Pr.06-17
ovA
Pr.06-63
4051
Pr.06-18
Pr.06-19
ovd
ovA
Pr.06-64
Pr.06-65
3482
3000
Pr.06-17
ocS
Pr.06-63
12
Pr.06-18
Pr.06-19
Pr.06-20
Pr.06-21
Pr.06-22
ocA
ocA
ovA
ovd
ovA
Pr.06-64
Pr.06-65
Pr.06-66
Pr.06-67
Pr.06-68
5824
5003
4051
3482
3000
Third fault
Seven fault
3482-3000=482 min
ovd occurs at 482 min after
last fault (ovA)
4051-3482=569 min
ovA occurs at 569 min after
last fault (ovd)
(12-5824)+64800=58988 min
ocS occurs at 58988 min after
last fault (ocA)
Low Current Setting Level
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0 ~ 6553.5 %
Low Current Detection Time
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00 ~ 655.35 sec
Treatment for low current
Factory Setting: 0
0 : No function
1 : warn and coast to stop
2 : warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : warn and operation continue
The drive will operate as the setting of Pr.06-73 when output current is lower than the setting of
Settings
Pr.06-71 and when low current continues for a period longer than the setting of Pr.06-72. This
parameter can also be used with external multi-function output terminal 44 (MO44) for low current
output.
The low current detection function will not be executed when drive is at sleep or standby status.
12- 126
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
07 Special Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Software Brake Level
Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0
Settings
230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose
the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Accessories for the
information of the brake resistor.
It is only valid for the models below 30kW of 460 series and 22kW of 230 series.
DC Brake Current Level
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping.
When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to
start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been
attained.
When it is in FOCPG control mode, DC brake is zero-speed operation. It can enable DC brake
function by setting to any value. The drive will output an appropriate current to meet the actual
need.
DC Brake Time at Start-up
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.00~60.0 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status due to external force or itself inertia. If the drive is used with
the motor at this moment, it may cause motor damage or drive protection due to over current. This
parameter can be used to output DC current before motor operation to stop the motor and get a
stable start. This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command.
When it is set to 0.0, it is invalid.
DC Brake Time at Stop
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~60.00 sec
The motor may be in the rotation status after drive stop outputting due to external force or itself
inertia and can’t stop accurately. This parameter can output DC current to force the motor drive
stop after drive stops to make sure that the motor is stop.
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. To DC brake at
stop, this function will be valid when Pr.00-22 is set to 0 or 2. When setting to 0.0, it is invalid.
Related parameters: Pr.00-22 Stop Method, Pr.07-04 Start-point for DC Brake
12-127
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Start-Point for DC Brake
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When
this setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the
min. frequency.
Output frequen cy
01-09
Minimum
out put
frequen cy
Run /Stop
DC Brak Time
07-04
Start-point for during St opping
DC brake
time during
stopping
OFF
ON
Time
DC Brake Time
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
Voltage Increasing Gain
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
1~200%
When the user is using speed tracking, adjust Pr07-05 to slow down the increasing of voltage if
there are errors such as oL or ocv.
Restart after Momentary Power Loss
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for the minimum output frequency
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
The power connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This function
allows the drive to keep outputting after power is on again after power off and won’t cause drive
stops.
12-128
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Setting 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master
Frequency reference value after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the
equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesn’t need to wait to execute operation command until
wheel is complete stop after re-start to save time.
Setting 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the master
frequency after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous. The motor has
the characteristics of small inertia and bigger obstruction.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
Maximum Power Loss Duration
Factory Setting: 2.0
Settings
0.1~20.0 sec
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume
operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is
then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is 5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “LU”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is 5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
Base block Time
Factory Setting: 0.5
Settings
0.1~5.0 sec
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
7 Frequency command before B.B.
Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
07-09
Current Limit for
Speed Search
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart
12-129
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Output voltage
(V)
Waiting time 08.07
output current A
07-09 Current Limit
for Speed Search Speed
Speed Search
Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Input B.B. signal
Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
Output frequency(H)
Output voltage(V)
Output current A
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel.
FWD Run
Time
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Current Limit for Speed Search
Factory Setting: 50
Settings
20~200%
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if
the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.07-09.
When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum current
for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.
The speed search level will affect the synchronous time. It will get the synchronization faster when
this parameter is set to larger value. But too large value may activate overload protection.
Treatment after Fault
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
12-130
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0.
Auto Restart Time after Fault
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~10
After fault (oc, ov, occ) occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10
times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault.
If the drive execute reset/restart after fault more than the numbers of time set in Pr.07-11 and the
limit is reached within the time period in Pr.07-33, the drive will stop execute reset/restart after
fault function. User will be needed to input RESET manually for the drive to continue operation.
Speed Search during Start-up
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Speed search from maximum output frequency
2: Speed search from start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search from minimum output frequency
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with a high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take 2-5 minutes or longer to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does
not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency. The
output current is set by the Pr.07-09.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
Decel. Time at Momentary Power Loss (dEb function)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.
dEb Return Time
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~25.0 sec
12-131
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the
momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with
deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.
(has applied on high-speed spindle)
Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
DCBUS voltage
dEb activation level
Level for soft start relay to be ON
Soft start relay
at power side
dEb function
activated
Output frequency
Pr07-13 Decel. time at momentary
power loss (dEb function)
0Hz
07-14
dEb return time
NO
Note (1)When Pr07-14 is set to 0, the motor drive will stop and will not accelerate to the frequency before dEb even
the power is on again. But when Pr07-14 is NOT set to 0, then a command of zero speed will be sent to wait for power
on.
Note (2) dEb activation level is when DCBUS voltage level is lower than (230V series: Lv level +20Vdc)
(460V series: Lv level +40Vdc)
Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss
DCBUS voltage
Level for soft start relay to be ON
Lv level
Soft start relay
at power side
dEb function activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection at
momentary power loss
07-14
dEb return time
NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to prevent broken stitching
when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the AC motor drive to use dEb function with
deceleration time via EF.
12-132
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Dwell Time at Accel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Dwell Time at Decel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00 Hz
In the super heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as
crane or elevator.
Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency
07-16
Dwell
Frequency
07-15
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel.
07-17
Dwell Time
at Decel.
07-18
Dwell
Frequency
at Decel.
Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
Fan Cooling Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When the AC motor drive
stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink temperature (around 60oC) is
attained.
4: Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.
Setting 0: Fan will be ON as the drive’s power is turned ON.
Setting 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
Setting 2: AC motor drive runs and fan will be ON. AC motor drive stops and fan will be OFF.
Setting 3: Fan run according to IGBT and capacitance temperature. Fan will be ON when
preliminary capacitance temperature is higher than 60oC. Fan will be OFF, when capacitance
temperature is lower than 40oC.
Setting 4: Fan is always OFF
12-133
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force Stop
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by 4th deceleration time
5: System Deceleration (According to original deceleration time)
6: Automatic Deceleration ( Pr01-46)
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10(EF) or 18(Emergency stop) and is activated,
the drive will stop according to the setting in Pr.07-20.
Auto Energy-saving Operation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
When Pr.07-21 is set to 1, the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage. During
constant speed operation, it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the
load. This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or near full-load during operation.
When the output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will auto
decrease by the load reduction. Therefore, the drive will operate with min. power, multiplication of
voltage and current.
Output
voltage
100 %
75%
save up to 25%
output voltage
Auto energy- saving
Fr equenc y
FOCPG(IM) control mode:
When drive is running at constant speed and torque current is lower than 35% of drive rated
current, drive will start to count. After 5 seconds, power save function will enable (can max. reduce
30% of output voltage). Return conditions: torque higher than 50% of drive rated current.
VF, VFPG, SVC control mode:
When drive is running at constant speed and the U, V, W output power factor angle
cos(phi)>=65.0° (Pr00-04 set 5 for monitor power factor angle cos(phi)), drive will start to do
“Power saving enable time counting”. After 5 seconds, power save function will enable.
Return conditions: (cos(phi)<60.0°) or drive is operating at acceleration or deceleration status.
12-134
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When drive is at FOCPM or FOC sensor-less control mode, this function will be disable.
Frequency command=
Frequency output
Output voltage
Output current
Output current <( 0 . 35 *
Drive rated current )
5sec
Energy-saving Gain
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
10~1000%
When Pr. 07-21 is set to 1, this parameter can be used to adjust the gain of energy-saving. The
factory setting is 100%. If the result is not good, it can adjust by decreasing the setting. If the
motor oscillates, it should increase the setting value.
At some special application such as High speed spindle, the motor temperature rise is been
highly concern. Thus, when the motor is not working with load, the motor current will requested to
reduce to a lower level. To Lowering this parameter setting can meet this requirement.
Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 220V/200VAC 60Hz/50Hz and the input voltage of the
AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor
drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When
the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter
and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the motor rated voltage.
For instance, if V/f curve is set at 200 VAC/50Hz and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then
the motor Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC/50Hz. If the
input voltage is at 180V to 200VAC, output voltage to motor and input power will be in direct
proportion.
Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual
12-135
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
DC-bus voltage. The output voltage won’t be changed by DC bus voltage.
Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus
voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over
current.
Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration, such as operated from high speed to
low speed.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2
with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
When it is in FOCPG or TQCPG, it is recommended to set to 0 (enable AVR).
Filter Time of Torque Command (V/F and SVC control mode)
Factory Setting: 0.020
Settings
0.001~10.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control may be unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (V/F and SVC control mode)
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings
0.001~10.000 sec
It can set Pr.05-22 and 05-23 to change the response time of compensation.
If Pr.05-22 and 05-23 are set to 10seconds, the response time of compensation is the slowest. But
the system may be unstable when the setting is too short.
Torque Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~10
When the motor load is large, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the resistor of stator
winding and causes insufficient voltage at motor induction and result in over output current and
insufficient output torque. It can auto adjust output voltage by the load and keep the air gap
magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
In the V/F control, the voltage will be decreased in direct proportion when the frequency is
decreased. It’ll cause decrease torque at low speed due to small AC resistor and the same DC
resistor. Therefore, Auto torque compensation function will increase the output voltage in the low
frequency to get higher start torque.
When Pr.07-26 is set to large, it may cause motor overflux and result in too large output current,
motor overheat or triggers protection function.
Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~10.00
The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the
higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3% slip.
In the operation with variable frequency, the slip and the synchronous frequency will be in reverse
12-136
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
proportion to produce the same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction
of synchronous frequency. The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency is decreased to
a specific value. Therefore, the slip serious affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
In another situation, when the drive uses with induction motor, the slip will be increased by the
increasing load. It also affects the accuracy of motor speed.
This parameter can be used to set compensation frequency and reduce the slip to close the
synchronous speed when the motor runs in the rated current to raise the drive accuracy. When
the drive output current is larger than Pr.05-05 No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A), the drive
will compensation the frequency by this parameter.
When the control method (Pr.00-11) is changed from V/f mode to vector mode, this parameter will
auto be set to 1.00. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.00. Please do the compensation of slip after
overload and acceleration. The compensation value should be increased from small to large
gradually. That is to add the output frequency with motor rated slip X Pr.07-27 Slip Compensation
Gain when the motor is rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slow than expectation, please
increase the setting. Otherwise, decrease the setting.
Reserved
Slip Deviation Level
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100.0%
0: No detection
Detection Time of Slip Deviation
Factory Setting:1.0
Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
Over Slip Treatment
Factory Setting:0
Settings
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
The Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31 are to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the drive
is running.
Motor Hunting Gain
Factory Setting:1000
Settings
0~10000
0: Disable
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, it can be set to 0. when the
current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.07-32.)
12-137
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Recovery Time to Pr.07-11 (# of automatic reboots after fault)
Factory Setting:60.0
Settings
00~6000.0 sec
When a reset/restart after fault occurs, the drive will regards Pr.07-33 as a time boundary and
begin counting the numbers of faults occur within this time period. Within the period, if numbers of
faults occurred did not exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, the counting will be cleared and starts from
0 when next fault occurs. However, if the numbers of faults occurred within this time period have
exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, user will need to press RESET key manually for the drive to
operate again.
12-138
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
08 High-function PID Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
Input Terminal for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: on analogue input acc. To setting 5 of Pr. 03-00 to
Pr.03-02.
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
7: Negative PID feedback from communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback from communication protocol
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
When Pr.03-00 to Pr.03-02 have the same setting, then the AVI will be the prioritized selection.
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
When Pr08-00≠7 neither ≠8, input value is disabled. The value of the setting remain the same
after the derive is off.
Common applications for PID control
Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and performs accurate flow
control.
Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and performs
precise pressure control.
Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have
excellent air volume regulation.
Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave
operation. Pr.10.00 sets the PID set point source (target value).
PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr.10.01 either 0~+10V voltage or
4-20mA current.
12-139
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PID control loop:
drive execute PID control
¨
Setpoint +
K p (1
-
1
Ti S
feedback signal
K p: Proportional gain(P)
Td S )
output value
¿¥
IM
sensor
Ti : Integral time(I) Td: Derivative control(D)
: O perator
Concept of PID control
1.
Proportional gain(P):
the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control,
there will always be
a steady-state error.
2.
Integral time(I):
the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the
steady-state error, an “integral part” needs to be added to the controller. The integral time
decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by
time even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the
error until it is 0. In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional
gain control and integral time control.
3.
Differential control(D):
the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During
elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can be
used to suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0,
the differential control should be 0. Proportional gain (P) + differential control (D) can be
used to improve the system state during PID adjustment.
When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:
Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The pressure
sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set point and
PID feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the output by
using proportional gain (P), integral time (I) and differential time (D) to control the pump. It controls
the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4-20mA
signal corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.
12-140
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
no fuse breaker
(NFB)
water pump
R(L1)
R(L1)
U(T 1)
S(L2)
S(L2)
V(T2)
T(L3)
T(L3)
IM
3~
W(T 3)
throttle
F eedback 4-20mA
cor responds
0-10bar
ACI/A VI
(4- 20mA /0- 10V )
ACM
analog si gnal common
pressure
sensor
DC
- +
1. Pr.00-04 is set to 10 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))
2. Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time will be set as required
3. Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time will be set as required
4. Pr.00-21=0 to operate from the digital keypad
5. Pr.00-20=0, the set point is controlled by the digital keypad
6. Pr.08-00=1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
7. ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 set to 5, PID feedback signal.
8. Pr.08-01-08-03 will be set as required
8.1 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-01(Proportional Gain (P))
8.2 If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.08-02(Integral Time (I))
8.3 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-03(Differential Time (D))
Refer to Pr.08-00 to 08-21 for PID parameters settings.
Proportional Gain (P)
Factory Setting:1.0
Settings
0.0~500.0%
It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster
response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.08-01, it may cause the system oscillation and
instability.
If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.
Integral Time (I)
Factory Setting:1.00
Settings
0.00~100.00 sec
0.00: Disable
The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control
doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral
time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to
make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is
often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.
This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will
have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral
time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.
12-141
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.
If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.
Derivative Control (D)
Factory Setting:0.00
Settings
0.00~1.00 sec
The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview
the change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve
system state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment
time. However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference.
Please note that
too large differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change
and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change. Therefore, the differential
control can’t be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD
controller or PID controller.
This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change.
The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the
oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system oscillation.
The differential controller acts for the change of error and can’t reduce the interference. It is not
recommended to use this function in the serious interference.
Upper limit of Integral Control
Factory Setting:100.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
x (Pr.08-04 %).
Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it
may cause motor stall or machine damage.
PID Output Frequency Limit
Factory Setting:100.0
Settings
0.0~110.0%
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula
is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.
PID feedback value by communication protocol
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~200.00%
PID Delay Time
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~35.0 sec
12-142
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PID Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
When setting is 0, it uses conventional PID control structure.
When setting is 1, proportional gain, integral gain and derivative gain are independent. The P, I
and D can be customized to fit users’ demand.
Pr.08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the response rate of drive.
Output frequency of PID control will filter by primary low pass function. This function could filter a
mix frequency. A long primary low pass time means filter degree is high and vice versa.
Inappropriate setting of delay time may cause system error.
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control is
utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the constant
external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the responding
toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system that
possesses the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load
that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of
the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the
P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P action’s vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with
loadings of no brake functions over the processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration,
thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could
obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
12-143
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Serial connection
Input Selection of the
PID Target Value
00-20:KPC-CC01/
RS485
03-00~02:4 PID target
value
1
PID Cancelled
08-00=0
or 02-01~06=21(disable)
Frequency
command
2
PID
Compensation
Selection
08-16
P
+
Proportion
gain
-
Display of the PID feedback
00-04=10 display of the
PID feedback
D
+
Differential
Time
08-01
PID
Delay
Time
08-07
+
+
08-03
PID
direction
I
Input Selection
of the PID Feedback
08-00:AVI/ACI
AUI/PG
+
08-05
PID Freq.
output
command
limit
08-21
08-02
08-04
Integral Time upper
limit
for
Integral
08-09
Treatment of the
Feedback Signal Fault
If Hz>08-05
time exceeds 08-08
Parallel connection
Input Selection of the
PID Target Value
00-20:KPC-CC01/RS485
03-00~02:4 PID target value
PID Cancelled
08-00=0
or 02-01~06=21(disable)
Frequency
command
1
2
P
PID
compensation
selection
08-16
Proportion gain
08-01
+
Display of the PID feedback
00-04=10 display of the
PID feedback
-
D
+
08-03
+
Differential
Time
I
08-02
Input Selection
of the PID Feedback
08-00:AVI/ACI
AUI/PG
Integral Time
08-05
08-21
08-04
upper limit
for
Integral
+
PID Delay Time
08-07
PID F req.
output
command limit
08-09
Treatment of the Feedback Signal Fault
If Hz>08-05, time exceeds 08-08
Feedback Signal Detection Time
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~3600.0 sec
Pr.08-08 is valid only for ACI 4-20mA.
This parameter sets the detection time of abnormal PID derative. If detection time is set to 0.0,
detection function is disabled.
12-144
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Feedback Signal Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
This parameter is valid only for ACI 4-20mA.
AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals analog PID feedback is abnormal.
Sleep Reference Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Setting value of Pr08-10 determines if sleep reference and wake-up reference is enable or disable.
When Pr08-10 = 0, it means disable. When 08-10 ≠ 0, it means enable.
Wakeup Reference Point
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
When Pr08-18 = 0, the unit of Pr08-10 and that of Pr08-11 become frequency. The settings then
become 0 ~ 600.0 Hz.
When Pr08-18=1, the unit of Pr08-10 and that of Pr08-11 switch to percentage. The settings then
switch to 0~200.00%.
And the percentage is based on the input command not maximum. E.g. If the maximum is 100 Kg,
the command now is 30kg, if 08-11=40%, it is 12kg.
The same to 08-10.
Sleep Time
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.00~6000.0 sec
When the frequency command is smaller than the sleep frequency and less than the sleep time,
the frequency command is equal to the sleep frequency. However the frequency command
remains at 0.00Hz until the frequency command becomes equal to or bigger than the wake-up
frequency.
PID Deviation Level
Factory Setting: 10.0
Settings
1.0~50.0%
PID Deviation Time
Factory Setting: 5.0
Settings
0.1~300.0 sec
Filter Time for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 5.0
Settings
0.1~300.0 sec
When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to the
12-145
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
target value.
Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr.08-14
setting, the PID control fault occurs. The treatment will be done as Pr.08-09 setting.
PID Compensation Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-17)
1: Reserved
Pr08-16=0: PID compensation value is given via Pr08-17 setting.
Pr08-16=1: The PID compensation value is given via analog input (Pr03-00~03-02=13) and display
at Pr08-17(at this moment, Pr08-17 become read only).
PID Compensation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~+100.0%
The PID compensation value=Max. PID target value×Pr08-17. For example, the max. output
frequency Pr01-00=60Hz, Pr08-17=10.0%, PID compensation value will increase output
frequency 6.00Hz. 60.00Hz × 100.00% × 10.0% = 6.00Hz
Setting of Sleep Mode Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Follow PID output command
1: Follow PID feedback signal
When Pr08-18=0, the unit of Pr08-10 and that of Pr08-11 becomes frequency. The settings then
become 0~600.00Hz.
When Pr08-19=1, the unit of Pr08-10 and that of Pr08-11 switches to percentage. The settings
then switch to 0~200.00%.
Wake-up Integral Limit
Factory Setting: 50.0
Settings
0.0~200.0%
The wake-up integral limit of the VFD is to prevent sudden high speed running when the VFD
wakes up.
The wake-up integral frequency limit= (01-00×08-19%)
The Pr08-19 is used to reduce the reaction time from sleep to wake-up.
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable change of direction
1: Enable change of direction
12-146
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Wake-up delay time
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec.
Refer to Pr08-18 for more information.
PID Control Bit
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
Bit0 =1, PID reverse running must follow the setting of Pr00-23
Bit0 = 0, PID reverse running follows PID’s calculated value
Bit0, When Pr08-21 = 1, PID reverse running is enable.
Bit0 = 0, if the PID calculated value is positive, it will be forward running. If the PID calculated value
is negative, it will be reverse running.
There are three scenarios for sleep and wake-up frequency.
1) Frequency Command (PID is not in use, Pr08-=00
When the output frequency ≦ the sleep frequency and the VFD reaches the preset sleep time, then
the VFD will be at the sleep mode.
When the frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the VFD will start to count the
wake-up delay time. Then when the VFD reaches the wake-up delay time, the VFD will begin
acceleration time to reach the frequency command.
frequency command
actual output frequency
Pr08-11
Wake -up
R eference Point
Frequency
Command
ActualOutputFrequency
Pr08-10
Sleep
Reference Point
Pr08-12
Sleep Time
0Hz
Pr08-22
Wake-up
Delay
Time
2) Frequency Command Calculation of the Internal PID
When the PID calculation reaches the sleep frequency, the VFD will start to count the sleep time
and the output frequency will start to decrease. If the VFD exceeds the preset sleep time, it will
directly go to sleep mode which is 0 Hz. But if the VFD doesn’t reach the sleep time, it will remain at
the lower limit (if there is a preset of lower limit.). Or it will remain at the lowest output frequency set
at Pr01-07 and wait to reach the sleep time then go to sleep mode (0 Hz).
When the calculated frequency command reaches the wake-up frequency, the VFD will start to
count the wake-up delay time. Once reaching the wake-up delay time, the VFD will start the
acceleration time to reach the PID frequency command.
12-147
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
frequency command
output frequency
Acceleration
Time Limit
Pr08-22
Wake-up
Delay Time
3) PID Feedback Rate Percentage (Use PID, Pr08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr08-18=1)
When the PID feedback rate reaches the sleep level percentage, the VFD starts to count the sleep
time. The output frequency will also decrease. If the VFD exceeds the preset sleep time, it will go to
sleep mode which is 0 Hz. But if the VFD doesn’t reach the sleep time, it will remain at the lower limit
(if there is a preset of lower limit.). Or it will remain at the lowest output frequency set at Pr01-07 and
wait to reach the sleep time then go to sleep mode (0 Hz).
When PID feedback value reaches the wake up percentage the motor drive will start to count the
wake up delay time. Once reaches the wake up delay time, the motor drives starts the accelerating
time to reach PID frequency command
Output
Frequency
PID
Feedback
Setpoint
Pr08-10
Sleep Reference Point
Pr08-11
Wake-up Reference Point
Pr01-11
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
Pr01-07/Pr01-41
Pr08-12
Sleep Time
12-148
Pr08-22
Wake-up
Delay Time
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
09 Communication Parameters
The parameter can be set during the operation.
COM1 Communication Address
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address
for this drive must be set via this parameter and each AC motor drive’s communication address
must be different.
COM1 Transmission Speed
Factory Setting: 9.6
Settings
4.8~115.2Kbits/s
This parameter is for set up the RS485 communication transmission speed.
COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 3
Settings
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and continue operation
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
COM1 Time-out Detection
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~100.0 sec
0.0: Disable
It is used to set the communication transmission time-out.
COM1 Communication Protocol
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1: 7, N, 2 for ASCII
2: 7, E, 1 for ASCII
3: 7, O, 1 for ASCII
4: 7, E, 2 for ASCII
5: 7, O, 2 for ASCII
6: 8, N, 1 for ASCII
7: 8, N, 2 for ASCII
8: 8, E, 1 for ASCII
9: 8, O, 1 for ASCII
12-149
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
10: 8, E, 2 for ASCII
11: 8, O, 2 for ASCII
12: 8, N, 1 for RTU
13: 8, N, 2 for RTU
14: 8, E, 1 for RTU
15: 8, O, 1 for RTU
16: 8, E, 2 for RTU
17: 8, O, 2 for RTU
Control by PC or PLC (Computer Link)
A VFD-CH2000 can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit).Users can select the desired mode along with the RS-485 serial port communication
protocol in Pr.09-00.
MODBUS ASCII（American Standard Code for Information Interchange）: Each byte data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII,
consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
Communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0”, “9”, “A”, “F”, every 16 hexadecimal
represent ASCII code. For example:
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
‘8’
‘9’
‘A’
‘B’
‘C’
‘D’
‘E’
‘F’
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
（7, N , 2）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
（7 , E , 1）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
12-150
Even
parity
Stop
bit
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
（7 , O , 1）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
5
6
7
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
6
7
Even
parity
Stop
bit
6
7
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
11-bit character frame (For RTU):
（8 , N , 2）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
（8 , E , 1）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
（8 , O , 1）
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
3. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame: ASCII mode
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
…….
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
END Lo
Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
Communication Data Frame: RTU mode
START
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address
Communication address: 8-bit address
Function
Command code: 8-bit command
12-151
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
DATA (n-1)
…….
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=16
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single data to register
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message:
Response Message
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘0’
Address
Address
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Function
Function
‘3’
‘3’
‘2’
‘0’
Number of data
(count by byte)
‘1’
‘4’
Starting address
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘7’
Content of starting
address
2102H
‘0’
‘7’
Number of data
‘0’
‘0’
(count by word)
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
Content of address 2103H
‘D’
‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’
‘0’
CR
‘7’
END
LRC Check
LF
‘1’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message:
Address
01H
Function
03H
21H
Starting data address
02H
Number of data
00H
(count by world)
02H
Response Message
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of data
address 2102H
12-152
01H
03H
04H
17H
70H
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
6FH
F7H
Content of data
address 2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
06H: write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message:
Response Message
STX
‘:’
STX
‘0’
Address
Address
‘1’
‘0’
Function
Function
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
Data address
Data address
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
Data content
Data content
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
LRC Check
LRC Check
‘1’
CR
END
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message:
Address
01H
Function
06H
01H
Data address
00H
17H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low
86H
CRC CHK High
22H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Response Message
Address
01H
Function
06H
01H
Data address
00H
17H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low
86H
CRC CHK High
22H
10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers) (up to 20 sets of data can be written
simultaneously)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.04-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode
Command Message:
STX
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Starting data address
Number of data
(count by word)
Response Message
STX
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Starting data address
Number of data
(count by word)
12-153
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data content
The second data content
LRC Check
END
‘2’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
‘3’
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
‘A’
CR
LF
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command Message:
ADR
01H
CMD
10H
05H
Starting data address
00H
Number of data
00H
(count by word)
02H
Number of data
04
(count by byte)
13H
The first data content
88H
The second data content
0FH
A0H
CRC Check Low
‘9’
CRC Check High
‘A’
‘2’
‘E’
‘8’
CR
LF
Response Message
ADR
01H
CMD 1
10H
05H
Starting data address
00H
00H
Number of data
(count by word)
02H
41H
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
04H
Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, and the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example,
01H+03H+21H+02H+00H+02H=29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1:
Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2:
Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC
register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3:
Examine the LSB of CRC register.
12-154
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Step 4:
If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then
repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB
zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5:
Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit
byte will have been processed.
Step 6:
Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all
bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When
transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be
swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while (length--) {
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){
/* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
// return register CRC
12-155
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
4. Address list
Content
Address
Function
AC drive parameters GGnnH GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H.
Command write only 2000H
Bit1~0 00B：No function
01B：Stop
10B：Run
11B：JOG+RUN
Bit3~2 Reserved
Bit5~4 00B：No function
01B：FWD
10B：REV
11B：Change direction
Bit7~6 00B：1st accel/decel.
01B：2nd accel/decel
10B：3rd accel/decel
11B：4th accel/decel
Bit11~8 000B: master speed
0001B: 1st Step Speed Frequency
0010B: 2nd Step Speed Frequency
0011B: 3rd Step Speed Frequency
0100B: 4th Step Speed Frequency
0101B: 5th Step Speed Frequency
0110B: 6th Step Speed Frequency
0111B: 7th Step Speed Frequency
1000B: 8th Step Speed Frequency
1001B: 9th Step Speed Frequency
1010B: 10th Step Speed Frequency
1011B: 11th Step Speed Frequency
1100B: 12th Step Speed Frequency
1101B: 13th Step Speed Frequency
1110B: 14th Step Speed Frequency
1111B: 15th Step Speed Frequency
Bit12 1: Enable bit06-11 function
Bit14~13 00B：No function
01B：Operated by digital keypad
10B：Operated by Pr.00-21 setting
11B：Change operation source
Bit15 Reserved
2001H Frequency command
1：EF (external fault) on
2002H
Bit0
1：Reset
Bit1
1：B.B ON
Bit2
Bit15~3 Reserved
Status monitor read
2100H Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
only
2101H
Bit1~0 AC Drive Operation Status
00B: Drive stops
01B: Drive decelerating
10B: Drive standby
11B: Drive operating
Bit2
1：JOG Command
12-156
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Content
Address
Function
Operation Direction
00B: FWD run
01B: From REV run to FWD run
10B: REV run
11B: From FWD run to REV run
Bit8
1：Master frequency controlled by communication
interface
Bit9
1：Master frequency controlled by analog signal
Bit10 1：Operation command controlled by
communication interface
Bit11 1：Parameter locked
Bit12 1：Enable to copy parameters from keypad
Bit15~13 Reserved
Frequency command (F)
Output frequency (H)
Output current (AXX.X.X)
DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
Output voltage (EXXX.X)
Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
Reserved
Counter value
Power Factor Angle (XXX.X)
Bit4~3
2102H
2103H
2104H
2105H
2106H
2107H
2108H
2109H
210AH
210BH Output Torque (%)
210CH Actual motor speed (rpm)
210DH Number of PG feed back pulses
210EH Number of PG2 pulse commands
210FH Power output (X.XXX)
2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
211BH Max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00) or Max. user defined
value (Pr.00-26)
2200H Display output current (A)
2201H Display counter value (c)
2202H Actual output frequency (H)
2203H DC-BUS voltage (u)
2204H Output voltage
2205H Power angle
2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (P)
2207H Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder
feedback
2208H Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the
drive (t0.0: positive torque, -0.0: negative torque)
2209H Display PG feedback (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 1)
220AH PID feedback value after enabling PID function in % (b)
220BH Display signal of AVI analog input terminal, 0-10V corresponds
to 0-100% (1.) (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 2)
220CH Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4-V20mA/0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (2.) (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 2)
220DH Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10V~10V
corresponds to -100~100% (3.) (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 2)
220EH IGBT temperature of drive power module in oC
220FH The temperature of capacitance in oC
2210H The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12 (as Pr.
00-04 NOTE 3)
12-157
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Content
Address
Function
2211H The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18 (as Pr.
00-04 NOTE 4)
2212H The multi-step speed that is executing (S)
2213H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.) (as Pr.
00-04 NOTE 3)
2214H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.) (as Pr.
00-04 NOTE 4)
2215H Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (P.) it will
start from 9 when the actual operation direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0. Max. is 65535
2216H Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
2217H Pulse input position (PG card PG2), maximum setting is
65535.
2218H Position command tracing error
2219H Display times of counter overload (0.00~100.00%)
221AH GFF in % (G.)
221BH DCbus voltage ripples (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
221CH PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor
221EH User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH Output Value of Pr.00-05
2220H Number of motor turns when drive operates (keeping when
drive stops, and reset to zero when operation)
2221H Operation position of motor (keeping when drive stops, and
reset to zero when operation)
2222H Fan speed of the drive (%)
2223H Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode 1: torque mode
2224H Carrier frequency of the drive
Content
Address Function
AC drive Parameters GGnnH GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H.
2225H Carrier frequency of the drive
2226H Drive status
2227H Drive’s estimated output torque(positive or negative direction)
2228H Torque command
2229H KWH display
222AH PG2 pulse input in Low Word
222BH PG2 pulse input in High Word
222CH Motor actual position in Low Word
222DH Motor actual position in High Word
222EH PID reference
222FH PID offset
2230H PID output frequency
5. Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
12-158
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address
Function
Exception code
LRC CHK
END
RTU mode:
Address
Function
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
Explanation
code
1
2
Illegal data value:
The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC
motor drive.
3
Parameters are locked: parameters can’t be changed
4
Parameters can’t be changed during operation
10
Communication time-out.
~
Reserved
Response Delay Time
Factory Setting: 2.0
Settings
0.0~200.0ms
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as
shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
PC or PLC command
Handling time
of the AC drive
Response Delay Time
Pr.09-09
Response Message
of the AC Drive
Main Frequency of the Communication
Factory Setting: 60.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After reboots
the power, it will regards the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if no new frequency command is inputted.
12-159
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Block Transfer 1
Block Transfer 2
Block Transfer 3
Block Transfer 4
Block Transfer 5
Block Transfer 6
Block Transfer 7
Block Transfer 8
Block Transfer 9
Block Transfer 10
Block Transfer 11
Block Transfer 12
Block Transfer 13
Block Transfer 14
Block Transfer 15
Block Transfer 16
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-26).
Through communication code 03H, user can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-26) to save those
parameters that you want to read.
~
Reserved
Communication Decoding Method
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0: Decoding Method 1
1: Decoding Method 2
Decoding Method 1
Decoding Method 2
Source of Digital Keypad Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Operation
Control
External
Terminal
RS-485
External terminal controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Refer to address: 2000h~20FFh
Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
CANopen
Refer to index: 2020-01h~2020-FFh
Refer to index:2060-01h ~ 2060-FFh
Communication
Card
PLC
Refer to address: 2000h ~ 20FFh
Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
PLC commands the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
12-160
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Internal Communication Protocol
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal Communication Slave 1
-2: Internal Communication Slave 2
-3: Internal Communication Slave 3
-4: Internal Communication Slave 4
-5: Internal Communication Slave 5
-6: Internal Communication Slave 6
-7: Internal Communication Slave 7
-8: Internal Communication Slave 8
-9: Reserve
-10: Internal Communication Master
-11: Reserve
-12: Internal PLC Control
When it is defined as internal communication, see CH16-10 for information on Main Control
Terminal of Internal Communication.
When it is defined as internal PLC control, see CH16-12 for Remote IO control application ( by
using MODRW)
~
Reserved
PLC Address
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
1~254
CANopen Slave Address
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1~127
CANopen Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
12-161
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Reserved
CANopen Warning Record
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANOPEN
bit 8: The setting values of CANopen indexes are fail
bit 9: The setting value of CANopen address is fail
bit10: The checksum value of CANopen indexes is fail
CANopen Decoding Method
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0: Delta defined decoding method
1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol
CANopen Status
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
CANopen Control Status
Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Err reaction activation state
14: Error state
12-162
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Reset CANopen Index
Factory Setting: 65535
Settings: bit0: reset address 20XX to 0
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
Reserved
CANopen Master Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
CANopen Master Address
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
~
1~127
Reserved
Identifications for Communication Card
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave/Master
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Firmware Version of Communication Card
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
Product Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
Different communication cards have their own product codes with different value.
DeviceNet: As it connects to different kind of motor drive, it will have different product code.
12-163
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Profibus: ID number of a communication card. Each Profibus selling in the market must apply for
an ID number at the Profibus International to be a unique product.
Fault Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings
Read only
For more information about Fault codes, refer to Pr. 06-17~06-22 and Chapter 14.
~
Reserved
Address of Communication Card
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
Setting of DeviceNet Speed (according to Pr.09-72)
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
Non standard DeviceNet:
(Delta only)
0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
Other Setting of DeviceNet Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Enable
It needs to use with Pr.09-71.
Setting 0: the baud rate can only be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3.
Setting 1: setting of DeviceNet baud rate can be the same as CANopen (setting 0-8).
12-164
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Reserved
Reserved
IP Configuration of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Static IP
1: DynamicIP (DHCP)
Setting 0: it needs to set IP address manually.
Setting 1: IP address will be auto set by host controller.
IP Address 1 of the Communication Card
IP Address 2 of the Communication Card
IP Address 3 of the Communication Card
IP Address 4 of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Pr.09-76~09-79 needs to use with communication card.
Address Mask 1 of the Communication Card
Address Mask 2 of the Communication Card
Address Mask 3 of the Communication Card
Address Mask 4 of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Getway Address 1 of the Communication Card
Getway Address 2 of the Communication Card
Getway Address 3 of the Communication Card
Getway Address 4 of the Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
Password for Communication Card (Low word)
Password for Communication Card (High word)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~255
12-165
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Reset Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Additional Setting for Communication Card
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
Bit 0: Enable IP Filter
Bit 1: Internet parameters enable(1bit)
When IP address is set up, this bit need to be enabled to write down the
parameters. This bit will change to disable when it finishes saving the
update of internet parameters.
Bit 2: Login password enable(1bit)
Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be changed to disable when it
finishes saving the update of internet parameters.
Status of Communication Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Bit 0: password enable
When the communication card is set with password, this bit is enabled.
When the password is clear, this bit is disabled.
12-166
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
10 PID Control
This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the
abbreviation for Pulse Generator.
Encoder Type Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta encoder for Delta Servo motor)
3: Resolver
4: ABZ/UVW
5. MI8 single phase pulse input
For PG extension card EMC-PG01L and EMC-PG01O, set Pr.10-00=1. These extension cards
are for IM motor only.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=2 (Delta encoder) make sure SW1 is switched to D
(Delta type). If the setting for Pr.10-00, 10-01 and 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drive’s
power and reboots to prevent PM motor stall. This mode is suggested for PM motor.
For EMC-PG01R, when setting Pr.10-00=3 please also input 1024 ppr.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=4 (Standard ABZ/UVW Encoder) make sure SW1 is
switched to S (Standard Type). This mode is applicable for both IM and PM motor.
When using MI8 single phase pulse input as frequency command, the Pr10-02 must set “5:
Single-phase input”. This only can be use with VF, VFPG, SVC, IM FOC Sensor-less, IM TQC
Sensor-less control mode.
When using MI8 single phase pulse as speed feedback, the drive must at VFPG control mode
only.
Encoder Pulse
Factory Setting: 600
Settings
1~20000
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control, i.e.
the number of pulses for a cycle of A phase/B phase.
This setting is also the encoder resolution. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be
more accurate.
An incorrect input to Pr.10-00 may result drive over current, motor stall, PM motor magnetic pole
origin detection error. If Pr.10-00 setting has changed, please trace the magnetic pole again, set
Pr.05-00=4 (static test for PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin again).
12-167
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Encoder Input Type Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FWD
REV
A
B
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse
run command
FWD
REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L =reverse
direction, H=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward
direction, H=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B
5:
Single-phase input
A
Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator)
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~255
This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division (for PG card EMC-PG01L or
EMC-PG01O). For example, when it is set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be
1024/2=512ppr.
Electrical Gear at Load Side A1
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
1~65535
12-168
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Parameters 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch
to Pr.10-04~10-05 or Pr.10-06~10-07 as shown as follows
PG
car d
load
encoder is us ed
at load side
Gear
B1 or B2
Gear
A1 or A2
Driv er
Motor
gear ratio
MI=48 ON = A2: B2
OFF=A 1:B 1
Treatment for Encoder Feedback Fault
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and RAMP to stop
2: Warn and COAST to stop
Detection Time of Encoder Feedback Fault
Factory Setting: 1.0
Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
0: No function
When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-09), the encoder signal error will occur. Refer
to the Pr.10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
Encoder Stall Level
Factory Setting: 115
Settings
0~120%
0: No function
This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(Max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)
Detection Time of Encoder Stall
Factory Setting: 0.1
Settings
0.0~2.0 sec
Treatment for Encoder Stall
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
When the motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting and detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, it will
operate as Pr.10-12 setting.
12-169
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Encoder Slip Range
Factory Setting: 50
Settings
0~50%
0: Disable
Detection Time of Encoder Slip
Factory Setting: 0.5
Settings
0.0~10.0 sec
Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-13 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-14; it will start to accumulate time. If detection time exceeds Pr.10-14, the encoder
feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-15 encoder stall and slip error treatment.
Pulse Input Type Setting (PG card: PG2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FW D
REV
A
B
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse
run command
FW D
REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=reverse
direction, H=forward direction)
F WD
REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward
direction, H=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B
When this setting is different from Pr.10-02 setting and the source of the frequency command is
pulse input (Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5), it may have 4 times frequency problem.
Example: Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=3, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it
12-170
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.
Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 1024
pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.
Position control diagram
Position
command
d
dt
A
B
Electr ical
gear
10- 17
10- 18
Electrical Gear A
Electrical Gear B
kd
10- 21
+
kp
Position
feedbac k
11-25
+
+
Speed
command
11-00 bi t 0=0
11-24
11-00 bi t 0=1
11-05
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
1~65535
Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-01) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG Electrical
Gear B.
Positioning for Encoder Position
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the internal position in the position mode.
It needs to be used with multi-function input terminal setting =35 (enable position control).
When it is set to 0, it is the Z-phase position of encoder.
Range for Encoder Position Attained
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the range for internal positioning position attained.
For example:
When the position is set by Pr.10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position and Pr.10-20 is set to 1000, it
reaches the position if the position is within 990-1010 after finishing the positioning.
Filter Time (PG2)
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings
0.000~65.535 sec
When Pr.00-20 is set to 5 and multi-function input terminal is set to 37 (OFF), the pulse command
will be regarded as frequency command. This parameter can be used to suppress the jump of
speed command.
12-171
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Speed Mode (PG2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Electronic Frequency
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
Reserved
FOC&TQC Function Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~65535
Bit#
0
Description
ASR control at sensorless torque
0:use PI as ASR; 1:use P as ASR
1~10
NA
11
Activate DC braking when executing zero torque command
0:ON , 1:OFF
12
FOC Sensorless mode, cross zero means speed goes from negative to
positive or positive to negative (forward to reverse direction or reverse to
forward direction). 0: determine by stator frequency , 1: determine by speed
command
13
NA
14
NA
15
Direction control at open loop status
0: Switch ON direction control 1: Switch OFF direction control
Except Bit=0 set to be used in closed loop, other Bit settings are for open loop.
FOC Bandwidth of Speed Observer
Factory Setting:40.0
Settings
20.0~100.0Hz
Setting speed observer to higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but will create
greater noise interference during the speed observation.
.
FOC Minimum Stator Frequency
Factory Setting:2.0
Settings
0.0~10.0%fN
This parameter is used to set the minimum level of stator frequency at operation status. This
setting ensures the stability and accuracy of observer and avoid interferences from voltage,
current and motor parameter.
FOC Low-pass Filter Time Constant
Factory Setting:50
Settings
1~1000ms
This parameter sets the low-pass filter time constant of a flux observer at start up. If the motor can
not be activated during the high-speed operation, please lower the setting in this parameter.
12-172
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time
Factory Setting:100
Settings
33~100% Tr
(Tr: rotor time constant)
This parameter sets the drive’s excitation current rise time when activates at senslorless torque
mode. When the drive’s activation time is too long at torque mode, please adjust this parameter to
a shorter time constant.
Top Limit of Frequency Deviation
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings
0.00~100.00Hz
Pr.10-29 is for setting the maximum of frequency deviation.
When this parameter is set too large, resulting in abnormal PG feedback malfunction.
If customer application require a large Pr10-29 value, resulting in larger output slip, then it is tends
to be PG Error (PGF3, PGF4) in such a case. To prevent PGF3 and PGF4 error, set Pr10-10
Encoder Stall Level and to 10-13 Encoder Slip Range to be 0 "No function" (means removing
PGF3 and PGF4 detection). But this must only when the PG card connection and application are
correct, or prompt PG protection function will be disable. Too large Pr10-29 setting is not a
common set.
Resolver Pole Pair
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
1~50
To use Pr.10-30 function, user must set Pr.10-00=3(Resolver Encoder) first.
Reserved
ARM (Kp)
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0~3
ARM (Ki)
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0~3
Reserved
I/F Mode, current command
Factory Setting: 40
Settings
0~150%Irated
(Rated current % of the drive)
PM Sensorless Observer Bandwidth for High Speed Zone
Factory Setting: 5.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
12-173
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PM Sensorless Observer Low-pass Filter Gain
Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings
0.00~655.35Hz
PM Sensorless Control Word
Factory Setting: 0000
Settings
0000~FFFFh
Bit No.
Function
Description
0
Reserved
1
Reserved
2
Choose a control mode to start. 0 :Start by IF mode
1: Start by VF mode
3
Choose a mode to stop.
0 :Stop by IF mode
1 :Stop by VF mode
4
Reserved
5
Choose a control mode to stop 0 : When lower than Pr10-40, coast to stop
If lower than Pr10-40, decelerate to stop by VF mode.
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Frequency Point when switch from I/F mode to PM Sensorless mode
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
Frequency Point when switch from PM Sensorless Observation mode to I/F mode
Factory Setting: 20.00
Settings
0.00~600.00Hz
I/F mode, low pass-filter time
Factory Setting: 0.2
Settings
0.0~6.0 sec
Initial Angle Detection Time
Factory Setting: 5
Settings
0~20 ms
PM Sensorless Adjustment Procedure
1. When using high frequency standstill VFD parameter tuning, use VFD software to monitor
adjustment procedure. To download VFD Software go to:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3
2. Testing PM High Frequency Standstill VFD (calculation of Rs, Ld, Lg)
Procedures:
A.
Set control mode as VF mode (Pr00-10=0, Pr00-11=0
B.
Output Frequency of Motor 1 (Pr01-01)
C.
Output Voltage of Motor 1 (Pr01-02)
D.
Induction Motor and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection (Pr05-33=1)
E.
Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor(Pr05-34
F.
Set Moto Auto Tuning Pr 05-00 =13; High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor. Then
12-174
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
run the drive.
3. Set control mode as PM sensorless Mode (Parameters 00-10=0, 00-11=6)
4. Set VFD Parameters
Pr05-35 Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor
Pr05-36 Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor
Pr05-37 Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor
Pr05-38 Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor
5. Set ASR Parameters
Pr11-00 bit0=1: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
Pr11-02：ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency, it is recommended to set Pr10-39 higher than
10Hz.
Pr11-03: ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth and Pr11-03, ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth. Do not set
Low-speed Bandwidth too high to avoid dissipation of the estimator.
6. Set speed estimator and speed control’s parameter.
Pr10-39 Frequency when switch from I/F Mode to PM sensorless mode.
Pr10-32 PM Sensorless Observer Bandwidth for High Speed Zone
7. Zero-load test
Refer to switch point procedure of I/F and FOC as shown in the image below.
Set frequency command
(Higher than switching command)
Big variation of current or
OC while switching
Lower Per Unit of System
Inertia (Pr.11-01)/
Lower ASR1 Low-speed
Bandwidth (Pr.11-03)
NO
Big variation of output
frequency or dissipation
IncreasePM Sensorless
Observer Bandwidth for
High Speed Zone (Pr.10-32)/
Decrease Per Unit of
System Inertia (Pr.11-01)
NO
Perform RUN command
Can the drive run
normally until switching
to higher frequency?
Yes
Observe output current/
fequency via
commnucation intreface
When running at high
frequency, is the frequency
stable?
Observe output current/
fequency via
Yes
commnucation intreface
Increase load and Test
Procedure for switching between I/
F mode and FOC mode
12-175
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PG Card Version
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~655.35
12-176
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
11 Advanced Parameters
This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator
System Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
2: Zero servo
3: Dead time compensation closed
7: Selection to save or not save the frequency
8: Maximum speed of point to point position control
Bit 0=0: Pr.11-06 to 11-11 will be valid and Pr.11-03~11-05 are invalid.
Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting. At this moment, Pr.11-06~11-11 will be invalid and
Pr.11-03~11-05 are valid.
Bit 1=0: no function.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled. (Bit 1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, please set Pr.05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating)
Bit 2=0: no function.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.
Estimate i ner tia value
NO
YES
Setting auto gain adjustment
Pr.11-00=1
Adjust gai n value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 ( factor y setting)
Adjust Pr.11- 03, 11-04 and 11-05
separately by speed response
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-13 ( PDFF function)
Adjust Pr.11- 06, 11-07, 11- 08,
11-09, 11- 10 and 11- 11
separately by speed response
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-14 ( for general,
no need to adj us t)
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-02
(A SR1/ASR2 switch frequency)
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-17~20 ( tor que limit)
12-177
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PI
PI
11-06
11-07
Pr.11-05
use to adjus t the
stren gth o f ze ro se rvo lo ck
11-08
11-09
11-04
11-10
11-11
5Hz
0Hz
11-05
5Hz
11-02
Hz
1. Pr. 11-01 valu e
2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1
5Hz
0Hz
PI ad justm ent-ma nual gain
5Hz
11-02
PI ad justm ent-auto gai n
Hz
Bit 7=0: frequency is saved before power turns off. When power turns on again, the display
frequency will be the memorized frequency.
Bit 7=1: frequency is not saved before power turns off. When power turns ON again, the display
frequency will be 0.00Hz.
Bit 8=0: maximum speed for point-to-point position control is control by the setting of Pr.11-43.
Bit 8=1: maximum speed for point-to-point position control is control by the multi-step speed
setting of the external terminal device. When multi-step speed of the external device is set to 0,
the maximum operation speed will bet the setting of Pr.11-43.
Per Unit of System Inertia
Factory Setting: 400
Settings
1~65535（256=1PU）
To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
Unit of induction motor system inertia is 0.001kg-m^2:
Power
Setting
Power
Setting
Power
Setting
1HP
2.3
20HP
95.3
100HP
1056.5
2HP
4.3
25HP
142.8
125HP
1275.3
3HP
8.3
30HP
176.5
150HP
1900.0
5HP
14.8
40HP
202.5
175HP
2150.0
7.5HP
26.0
50HP
355.5
215HP
2800.0
10HP
35.8
60HP
410.8
300HP
3550.0
15HP
74.3
75HP
494.8
The base value for induction motor system inertia is set by Pr.05-38 and the unit is in 0.001kg-m^2.
ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency
Factory Setting: 7.00
Settings
5.00~600.00Hz
ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
12-178
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters
Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.11-02 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (PI) 2
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~40 Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM)
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 0.100
Settings
0.000~10.000 sec
Gain for ASR Speed Feed Forward
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~100%
This parameter is used to improve speed response.
11- 12
G ain for ASR
speed feed for war d
00- 20
+
ASR
-
Speed feedback
+
+
+
Tq B ias
12-179
Tor que
command
Tor que limit
11- 17~11- 20
11- 14
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
PDFF Gain Value
Factory Setting: 30
Settings
0~200%
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce
overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-24 is set to 1.
frequency
PI
PDFF
T ime
Low-pass Filter Time of ASR Output
Factory Setting: 0.008
Settings
0.000~0.350 sec
It is used to set the filter time of ASR command.
Notch Filter Depth
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0~20db
Notch Filter Frequency
Factory Setting: 0.00
Settings
0.00~200.00Hz
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-15, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.
Forward Motor Torque Limit
Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque Limit
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Factory Setting: 500
Settings
0~500%
The motor drive rated current is 100%. The settings for Pr.11-17 to Pr.11-20 will compare with
Pr.03-00=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit. Please refer the
chart as below.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
12-180
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
T ( N .M )
Motor rated torque=
P(W )
(rad / s) ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
RPM 2
rad / s
60
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。
. FOCPG and FOC sensor-less control mode
The drive rated current=100%. The setting value of parameters Pr11-17~Pr11-20 will compare to
Pr03-00=7, 8, 9 and 10. The smallest value will become the torque limit value. Please refer to the
torque limit diagram.
TQCPG and TQC Sensor-less control mode
The drive rated current=100%. The setting value of parameters Pr11-17~Pr11-20 will compare to
Pr06-12. The smallest value will become the torque limit value.
VF, VFPG and SVC control mode
The Pr11-17~Pr11-20 are output current limit and its 100%=drive rated current. The smallest value
between the Pr11-17~Pr11-20 and Pr06-12 will become output current limit. If the output current
has reached this limit during acceleration or normal running, drive will enable “Over current Stall”
function. Until the output current drops to limit value, drive can run normally.
Po sitiv e
to rque
Rev ers e mot or mode
06-1 2 c urrent limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als
Pr. 03-00~ 02
7: pos itiv e to rque limit
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit
9: regen erativ e t orque limit
Pr. 11-19
Rev ers e rege nerat ive
to rque limit
s peed
E xt ernal an alog t erminals
P r. 03-00 ~02
7: po sitiv e t orque limit
10: pos itive/ne gativ e t orque limit
The level o f t orque limit will b e
th e min. va lu e of fo llowing thre e v alues
Pr. 11-17
Fo rwa rd moto r
t orque limit
s peed
Q ua dr an t II Q ua dr an t I
Q ua dr an t III Q ua dr an t IV
Pr. 11-20
Rev ers e mot or
to rque limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als
Pr. 03-00~ 03-0 2
8: nega tiv e to rque limit
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit
06-1 2 c urrent limit
Rev ers e mot or mode
Forward mo tor mo de
06-1 2 c urrent limit
Pr. 11-18
Forward re genera tive
t orque limit
E xt ernal an alog t erminals
Pr. 03-00~ 03-02
8 : ne gativ e t orque limit
10: pos itiv e/ne gativ e t orque limit
06-1 2 c urrent limit
Forward mo tor mo de
Nega tive
to rque
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1
Factory Setting: 90
Settings
0~200%
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2
Factory Setting: 90
Settings
0~200%
Pr.11-21 and 11-22 are used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
12-181
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach motor
rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.
output tor que
Fl ux w eakening cur ve
11-21
or
11-22
100%
90%
01-01
or
01-35
frequency
Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area
Factory Setting: 65
Settings
0: Disable
0~150%
It is used to control the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger value is set in Pr.11-23, the
faster acceleration/deceleration will generate. In general, it is not necessary to adjust this
parameter.
APR Gain
Factory Setting: 10.00
Settings
0.00~40.00 (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM)
Kip gain of internal position is determined by Pr.11-05.
Gain Value of APR Feed Forward
Factory Setting: 30
Settings
0~100
For the position control, if it set a larger value in Pr.11-25, it can shorten the pulse differential and
speed up the position response. But it may overshoot.
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 37(ON), this parameter can be set as required. If
this parameter is set to a non zero value and adjust Pr.10-21 (PG2 Filter Time) to reduce the
position overshoot and pulse differential. If it is set to 0, it won’t have overshoot problem in
position control but the pulse differential is decided by Pr.11-05 (KP gain).
APR Curve Time
Factory Setting: 3.00
Settings
0.00~655.35 sec
It is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35(ON). The larger it is set, the longer the
12-182
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
position time will be.
11-25
Output frequency
11-26
PG feedback
10-00
10-01
10-19
RUN
MI=d35
MO=d39
Time
Max. Torque Command
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
0~500%
The upper limit of torque command is 100%.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
motor rated torque: T ( N .M )
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。
P(W )
; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
(rad / s)
RPM 2
rad / s
60
Source of Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Disable
1: Analog input
(Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, source of torque offset would determine Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32 by
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30~11-32 by the multi-function
input terminals (MI) setting (31, 32 or 33).
N.O. switch status:
Pr. 11-32
ON= contact closed, OFF= contact open
Pr. 11-31
Pr. 11-30
MI=33(High)
MI=32(Mid)
MI=31(Low)
Torque Offset
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
None
11-30
11-31
11-30+11-31
11-32
11-30+11-32
11-31+11-32
11-30+11-31+11-32
12-183
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Torque Offset Setting
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
motor rated torque: T ( N .M )
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。
P(W )
; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
(rad / s)
RPM 2
rad / s
60
High Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 30.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
Middle Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 20.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
Low Torque Offset
Factory Setting: 10.0
Settings
0.0~100.0%
When Pr.11-28 is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30, Pr.11-31 and Pr.11-32
by the multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
motor rated torque: T ( N .M )
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。
P(W )
; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
(rad / s)
RPM 2
rad / s
60
Source of Torque Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Digital Keypad (Pr.11-34)
1: RS485 serial communication
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
5: Communication card
When Pr.11-33 is set to 0, torque command can be set in Pr.11-34.
When Pr.11-33 is set to 1 or 2, Pr.11-34 would only display the torque command
Torque Command
Factory Setting: 0.0
Settings
-100.0~100.0% (Pr.11-27=100%)
12-184
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
This parameter is for the torque command. When Pr.11-27 is set to 250% and Pr.11-34 is set to
100%, actual torque command=250X100%=250% motor rated torque.
The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off.
Low-pass Filter Time of Torque Command
Factory Setting: 0.000
Settings
0.000~1.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
Speed Limit Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38 (Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency Command).
Speed limit function: in TQCPG, when the motor speed is accelerated to speed limit value
(Pr.11-36, 11-37 and 11-38), it will switch to speed control mode to stop acceleration.
Pr11-36=1:
When the torque command is positive, the forward speed limit is Pr00-20 and reverse speed limit
is Pr11-38.
When the torque command is negative, the forward speed limit is Pr11-37 and reverse speed limit
is Pr00-20.
Unwind application, Torque command direction is different to motor operating direction, this
indicates that the motor is being load dragging. At this moment, the speed limit must be Pr11-37 or
Pr11-38. When the torque command direction and speed limit have same direction, the speed limit will
refer to the setting of Pr00-20. About the keypad display, please refer to the “LED function
Descriptions” in User manual chapter10 “Digital Keypad”.
Pr. 11-36= 0
Forward/re verse ru nning
direc tion are
limit ed b y Pr.11 -37
and Pr.1 1-38.
to rque
11-37
11-38
Pr. 11-36= 1
Whe n it is f orward runn in g,
runn in g direction is limited
by Pr. 00-20
reverse runn in g direction
is limit ed by P r.11-38 .
to rque
mot or
s peed
00-20
Pr. 11-36= 1
Whe n it is reverse runn in g,
runn in g direction is limited
by Pr. 11-37
revers e runn in g direc tion
is limit ed by P r.00-20 .
to rque
mot or
speed
11-38
mot or
speed
11-37
00-20
12-185
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~120%
Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0~120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)
Zero Torque Command Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: Torque mode
1: Speed mode
The drive is running at Torque control mode, Pr11-39 defines the operation mode when torque
command=0%.
When Pr.11-39 is set as 0 (the torque mode), if torque command is 0%, the motor will produce
excitation current but no torque current.
When Pr.11-39 is set as 1 (the speed mode), if torque command is 0% and speed limit is 0Hz, the
AC motor drive can still produce torque current through speed controller(at this moment, the
torque limit is Pr06-12) and the control mode will changed from TQCPG to become FOCPG
mode. The motor will have a holding torque.
Command Source of Point-to-Point Position Control
Factory Settings: 0
Settings
0: External terminal
1: Reserved
2: RS485
3: CAN
4: PLC
5: Communication card
Reserved
System control flag
Factory Settings: 0000
Settings
0000~FFFFh
Bit No.
Function
0
At torque mode, selection between
speed control and current control.
1
FWD/REV direction control
Description
0: Speed control at torque mode, the largest current
limit is the torque command.
1: Speed control at torque mode, P06-12 the largest
current limit is Pr06-12
0: FWD/REV cannot be controlled by 02-12 bit 0 & 1
1: FWD/REV can be controlled by 02-12 bit 0&1
2~15 Reserved
12-186
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Max. Frequency of Point- to-Point Position Control
Factory Settings:10.00
Settings
0.00~327.67Hz
Accel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control
Factory Settings:1.00
Settings
0.00~655.35sec
Decel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control
Factory Settings:3.00
Settings
0.00~655.35sec
Position
Max. Frequency
11-43
Speed
11-44
Accel. time
11-45
Decel. time
12-187
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
Chapter 13 Warning Codes
Di s p la y e rr o r si g n al
Warning
A b b r ev i a te e rr o r c o d e
T h e co d e is d is p l a y e d as s h ow n on K P C- C E 01 .
CE01
Comm. Error 1
ID No.
1
D i s p la y er r o r d e s c r i p ti o n
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
CE01
Modbus function code error
Comm. Error 1
2
Warning
CE02
Address of Modbus data is error
Comm. Error 2
3
Warning
CE03
Modbus data error
Comm. Error 3
4
Warning
CE04
Modbus communication error
Comm. Error 4
5
Warning
CE10
Modbus transmission time-out
Comm. Error 10
6
Warning
CP10
Keypad transmission time-out
Keypad time out
7
Warning
SE1
Save Error 1
Keypad COPY error 1
Keypad simulation error, including communication delays,
communication error (keypad received error FF86) and
parameter value error.
8
Warning
SE2
Keypad COPY error 2
Keypad simulation done, parameter write error
Save Error 2
9
Warning
oH1
IGBT over-heating warning
Over heat 1 warn
13-1
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
10
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
oH2
Capacity over-heating warning
Over heat 2 warn
11
Warning
PID
PID feedback error
PID FBK Error
12
Warning
ANL
ACI signal error
When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2.
Analog loss
13
Warning
uC
Low current
Under Current
14
Warning
AUE
Auto tuning error
Auto-tune error
15
Warning
PGFB
PG feedback error
PG FBK Warn
16
Warning
PGL
PG feedback loss
PG Loss Warn
17
Warning
oSPD
Over-speed warning
Over Speed Warn
18
Warning
DAvE
Over speed deviation warning
Deviation Warn
19
Warning
PHL
Phase loss
Phase Loss
20
Warning
ot1
Over torque 1
Over Torque 1
21
Warning
ot2
Over torque 2
Over Torque 2
13-2
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
22
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
oH3
Motor over-heating
Motor Over Heat
24
Warning
oSL
Over slip
Over Slip Warn
25
Warning
tUn
Auto tuning processing
Auto tuning
30
Warning
SE3
Keypad COPY error 3
Keypad copy between different power range drive
Copy Model E rr 3
36
Warning
CGdn
CAN guarding time-out 1
Guarding T-out
37
Warning
CHbn
CAN heartbeat time-out 2
Heartbeat T-out
38
Warning
CSYn
CAN synchrony time-out
SYNC T-out
39
Warning
CbFn
CAN bus off
Can Bus Off
40
Warning
CIdn
CAN index error
CAN/S Idx exceed
41
Warning
CAdn
CAN station address error
CAN/S Addres set
42
Warning
CFrn
CAN memory error
CAN/S FRAM fail
43
Warning
CSdn
CAN SDO transmission time-out
SDO T-out
13-3
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
44
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
CSbn
CAN SDO received register overflow
Buf Overflow
45
Warning
Cbtn
CAN boot up error
Boot up fault
46
Warning
CPtn
CAN format error
Error Protocol
47
Warning
Plra
Adjust RTC
RTC Adjust
50
Warning
PLod
PLC download error
Opposite Defect
51
Warning
PLSv
Save error of PLC download
Save mem defect
52
Warning
PLdA
Data error during PLC operation
Data defect
53
Warning
PLFn
Function code of PLC download error
Function defect
54
Warning
PLor
PLC register overflow
Buf overflow
55
Warning
PLFF
Function code of PLC operation error
Function defect
56
Warning
PLSn
PLC checksum error
Check sum error
57
Warning
PLEd
PLC end command is missing
No end command
13-4
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
58
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
PLCr
PLC MCR command error
PLC MCR error
59
Warning
PLdF
PLC download fail
Download fail
60
Warning
PLSF
PLC scan time exceed
Scane time fail
61
Warning
PCGd
CAN Master guarding error
CAN/M Guard err
62
Warning
PCbF
CAN Master bus off
CAN/M bus off
63
Warning
PCnL
CAN Master node error
CAN/M Node Lack
64
Warning
PCCt
CAN/M cycle time-out
65
Warning
PCSF
CAN/M SDOover
CAN/M SDO over
66
Warning
PCSd
CAN/M SDO time-out
CAN/M Sdo Tout
67
Warning
PCAd
CAN/M station address error
CAN/M Addres set
13-5
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
70
Display on LCM Keypad
Warning
ECid
Descriptions
Duplicate MAC ID error
Node address setting error
ExCom ID failed
71
Warning
ECLv
Low voltage of communication card
ExCom pwr loss
72
Warning
ECtt
Communication card in test mode
ExCom Test Mode
73
Warning
ECbF
DeviceNet bus-off
ExCom Bus off
74
Warning
ECnP
DeviceNet no power
ExCom No power
75
Warning
ECFF
Factory default setting error
ExCom Facty def
76
Warning
ECiF
Serious internal error
ExCom Inner err
77
Warning
ECio
IO connection break off
ExCom IONet brk
78
Warning
ECPP
Profibus parameter data error
ExCom Pr data
79
Warning
ECPi
Profibus configuration data error
ExCom Conf data
80
Warning
ECEF
Ethernet Link fail
ExCom Link fail
81
Warning
ECto
Communication time-out for communication card
and drive
ExCom Inr T-out
13-6
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCH2000 Series
ID No.
82
Display on LCM Keypad
Descriptions
Warning
ECCS
Check sum error for Communication card and drive
ExCom Inr CRC
83
Warning
ECrF
Communication card returns to default setting
ExCom Rtn def
84
Warning
ECo0
Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication
value
ExCom MTC P over
85
Warning
ECo1
EtherNet/IP exceed maximum communication value
ExCom EIP over
86
Warning
ECiP
IP fail
ExCom IP fail
87
Warning
EC3F
Mail fail
ExCom Mail fail
88
Warning
Ecby
Communication card busy
ExCom Busy
101
Warning
ictn
Internal communication is off
InrCOM Tim e Out
13-7
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions
Dis p la y e rro r sig n a l
Warning
A b b re v ia te e rro r c o d e
T h e co d e is d isp la ye d a s s h o wn o n K P C-CE 0 1 .
CE01
Comm. Error 1
Dis p la y e rro r d e s c rip tio n
* Refer to setting of Pr06-17~Pr06~22.
ID*
1
Fault Name
Fault
ocA
Oc at accel
2
Fault
ocd
Oc at decel
Fault
3
ocn
Oc at normal SPD
4
Fault
GFF
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Over-current during
acceleration
(Output current exceeds
triple rated current during
acceleration.)
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible
poor insulation at the output.
2. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace
the AC motor drive with the next higher power
model.
Over-current during
deceleration
(Output current exceeds
triple rated current during
deceleration.)
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible
poor insulation at the output.
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace
the AC motor drive with the next higher power
model.
Over-current during
steady state operation
(Output current exceeds
triple rated current during
constant speed.)
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible
poor insulation at the output.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
possible motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace
the AC motor drive with the next higher power
model.
Ground fault
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,
short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power module
may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC
motor drive protection, not for protecting the user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short circuits,
also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output.
Short-circuit is detected
between upper bridge
and lower bridge of the
IGBT module
Return to the factory
Ground fault
5
Fault
occ
Short Circuit
14-1
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
6
Fault Name
Fault
ocS
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Hardware failure in
current detection
Return to the factory
DC BUS over-voltage
during acceleration
(230V: DC 450V; 460V:
DC 900V)
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
voltage, please increase the acceleration time or
add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage
during deceleration
(230V: DC 450V; 460V:
DC 900V)
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time or
add an optional brake resistor.
DC BUS over-voltage at
constant speed (230V: DC
450V; 460V: DC 900V)
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time or
add an optional brake resistor.
Hardware failure in
voltage detection
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
DC BUS voltage is less
than Pr.06-00 during
acceleration
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less
than Pr.06-00 during
deceleration
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less
than Pr.06-00 in constant
speed
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less
than Pr.06-00 at stop
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
Oc at stop
7
Fault
ovA
Ov at accel
8
Fault
ovd
Ov at decel
9
Fault
ovn
Ov at normal SPD
10
Fault
ovS
Ov at stop
11
Fault
LvA
Lv at accel
12
Fault
Lvd
Lv at decel
13
Fault
Lvn
Lv at normal SPD
14
Fault
LvS
Lv at stop
14-2
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
15
Fault Name
Fault
OrP
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are
connected without loose contacts.
For models 40hp and above, please check if the fuse
for the AC input circuit is blown.
Phase Loss
Phase lacked
1.
16
Fault
oH1
2.
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature exceeds
3.
protection level
IGBT over heat
4.
5.
1.
17
Fault
oH2
Heat Sink oH
18
Fault
tH1o
Heatsink overheating
Capacitance temperature
exceeds cause heatsink
overheating.
2.
3.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within
the specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks
and check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within
the specified temperature range.
Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if
the fan is operating
Check if there is enough ventilation clearance for
AC motor drive.
IGBT Hardware Error
Return to the factory
Capacitor Hardware Error
Return to the factory
Overload
The AC motor drive
detects excessive drive
output current.
1.
2.
Thermo 1 open
19
Fault
tH2o
Thermo 2 open
21
Fault
oL
Over load
22
Fault
EoL1
Thermal relay 1
23
Fault
EoL2
Check if the motor is overloaded.
Take the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay
Electronics thermal relay 1
(Pr.06-14)
protection
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model
Electronics thermal relay
2 protection
Thermal relay 2
14-3
1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay
(Pr.06-28)
2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
24
Fault Name
Fault
oH3
Motor over heat
26
Fault
ot1
Over torque 1
27
Fault
ot2
Over torque 2
28
Fault
uC
Fault Descriptions
Motor overheating
The AC motor drive
detecting internal
temperature exceeds the
setting of Pr.06-30 (PTC
level) or Pr.06-57 (PT100
level 2).
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within
the specified temperature range.
Change to a higher power motor.
These two fault codes will
be displayed when output
current exceeds the
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
over-torque detection
2. Check whether motor rated current setting
level (Pr.06-07 or
(Pr.05-01) is suitable
Pr.06-10) and exceeds
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
over-torque detection
model.
(Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11)
and it is set to 2 or 4 in
Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
Check Pr.06-71, Pr.06-72, Pr.06-73.
Low current detection
Under torque
29
Fault
LMIT
Limit error
Limit Error
30
Fault
cF1
Internal EEPROM can not 1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
be programmed.
2. Return to the factory.
EEPROM write err
31
Fault
cF2
Internal EEPROM can not 1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
be read.
2. Return to the factory.
EEPROM read err
33
Fault
cd1
U-phase error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
V-phase error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
W-phase error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
Ias sensor err
34
Fault
cd2
Ibs sensor err
35
Fault
cd3
Ics sensor err
14-4
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
36
Fault Name
Fault
Hd0
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
CC (current clamp)
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
OC hardware error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
OV hardware error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
Occ hardware error
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad please return to the factory
Auto tuning error
1. Check cabling between drive and motor
2. Try again.
PID loss (ACI)
1.
2.
cc HW error
37
Fault
Hd1
Oc HW error
Fault
38
Hd2
Ov HW error
Fault
39
Hd3
occ HW error
40
Fault
AUE
Auto tuning err
41
Fault
AFE
Check the wiring of the PID feedback
Check the PID parameters settings
PID Fbk error
42
Fault
PG feedback error
Check if encoder parameter setting is accurate when it
is PG feedback control.
PG feedback loss
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PG feedback stall
1.
2.
PGF1
PG Fbk error
43
Fault
PGF2
PG Fbk loss
44
45
Fault
PGF3
PG Fbk over SPD
3.
Fault
1.
2.
PGF4
PG Fbk deviate
PG slip error
3.
14-5
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
suitable
Return to the factory
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
suitable
Return to the factory
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
46
Fault Name
Fault
PGr1
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Pulse input error
1.
2.
Check the pulse wiring
Return to the factory
Pulse input loss
1.
2.
Check the pulse wiring
Return to the factory
ACI loss
1.
2.
Check the ACI wiring
Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
External Fault
1. Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed to
GND. Output U, V, W will be turned off.
2. Give RESET command after fault has been
cleared.
Emergency stop
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to MI6
are set to emergency stop, the AC motor drive
stops output U, V, W and the motor coasts to stop.
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
External Base Block
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active,
the AC motor drive output will be turned off.
2. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
operate the AC motor drive again.
Password is locked.
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after power
OFF to re-enter the correct password. See Pr.00-07
and 00-08.
Illegal function code
Check if the function code is correct (function code
must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
Illegal data address (00H
to 254H)
Check if the communication address is correct
Illegal data value
Check if the data value exceeds max./min. value
PG Ref error
47
Fault
PGr2
PG Ref loss
48
Fault
ACE
ACI loss
49
Fault
EF
External fault
50
Fault
EF1
Emergency stop
51
Fault
bb
Base block
52
Fault
Pcod
Password error
54
Fault
CE1
PC err command
55
Fault
CE2
PC err address
56
Fault
CE3
PC err data
14-6
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
67
Fault Name
Fault
CE4
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Data is written to read-only
Check if the communication address is correct
address
PC slave fault
58
Fault
CE10
Modbus transmission time-out
PC time out
59
Fault
CP10
Keypad transmission time-out
PU time out
60
Fault
bF
Brake resistor fault
If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad after
pressing “RESET” key, please return to the factory.
Y-connection/Δ-conn
ection switch error
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the Y-connection/Δ-connection
Check the parameters settings
When Pr.07-13 is not
set to 0 and
momentary power off
or power cut, it will
display dEb during
accel./decel. stop.
1.
2.
Set Pr.07-13 to 0
Check if input power is stable
1.
Check if motor parameter is correct (please decrease
the load if overload
Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05-27
Braking fault
61
Fault
ydc
Y-delta connect
62
Fault
dEb
Dec. Energy back
63
64
65
Over slip error
It will be displayed
when slip exceeds
Pr.05-26 setting and
time exceeds
Pr.05-27 setting.
Fault
Electric valve switch error when executing Soft Start.
(This warning is for frame E and higher frame of AC drives)
Fault
oSL
ryF
2.
MC Fault
Do not disconnect RST when drive is still operating.
Fault
Hardware error of PG Card
Check if PG Card is inserting to the right slot and parameter settings for encoder
are accurate.
PGF5
PG HW Error
14-7
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
68
Fault Name
Fault
SdRv
Fault
SdOr
SpdFbk over SPD
70
Fault
SdDe
SpdFbk deviate
73
Corrective Actions
Rotating direction is different from the commanding direction detected by the
sensorless.
Solution
SpdFbk Dir Rev
69
Fault Descriptions
Fault
S1
Verify if the parameter setting of the motor drive is correct
Increase the estimator's bandwidth and verify if parameters relating to the
sensorless are correct.
Overspeed rotation detected by the sensorless
Solution
Verify if the parameter setting of the motor drive is correct
Increase the estimator's bandwidth and verify if parameters relating to the
sensorless are correct.
Verify if the gains of the speed circuit is reasonable.
Big difference between the rotating speed and the command detected by the
sensorless
Solution
Verify if the parameter setting of the motor drive is correct
Increase the estimator's bandwidth and verify if parameters relating to the
sensorless are correct.
Verify if the gains of the speed circuit is reasonable.
Emergency stop for external safety
S1-emergy stop
79
Fault
Uoc
Phase U short circuit
U phase oc
80
Fault
Voc
Phase V short circuit
V phase oc
81
Fault
Woc
W phase short circuit
W phase oc
82
Fault
OPHL
Output phase loss (Phase U)
U phase lacked
83
Fault
OPHL
Output phase loss (Phase V)
V phase lacked
14-8
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions CH2000 Series
ID*
84
Fault Name
Fault
OPHL
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Output phase loss (Phase W)
W phase lacked
90
Fault
Fstp
Internal PLC forced to stop
Verify the setting of Pr.00-32
For ce Stop
101
Fault
CGdE
CANopen guarding error
Guarding T-out
102
Fault
CHbE
CANopen heartbeat error
Heartbeat T-out
103
Fault
CSYE
CANopen synchronous error
SYNC T-out
104
Fault
CbFE
CANopen bus off error
Can bus off
105
Fault
CIdE
CANopen index error
Can bus Index Err
106
Fault
CAdE
CANopen station address error
Can bus Add. Err
107
Fault
CFrE
CANopen memory error
Can bus off
111
Internal communication time-out
Fault
ictE
InrCom Time Out
14-9
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
Newest version is available at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
15.1 CANopen Overview
15.2 Wiring for CANopen
15.3 CANopen Communication Interface Description
15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
15.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15.3.3 By using Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode)
15.3.4 By using Delta Standard (New definition)
15.3.5 DI/DO AI AO are controlled via CANopen
15.4 CANopen Supporting Index
15.5 CANopen Fault Code
15.6 CANopen LED Function
15-1
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Built-in EMC-COP01 card is included in VFDXXXC23E/VFDXXXC43E models.
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen
protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including
real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions
(Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including
Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for
details. The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or
download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Delta CANopen supporting functions:
Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO4
SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.
SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
Time Stamp service
15-2
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.1 CANopen Overview
CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine
control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized
as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA
DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables
and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
Device Profile CiA
DSP-401
OSI Layer 7
Application
OSI Layer 2
Data Link Layer
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer
Device Profile CiA
DSP-404
Device Profile CiA
DSP-XXX
Communication Profile CiA DS-301
CAN Controller
CAN 2.0A
+ + -
ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ-45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
PIN
1
2
3
6
Signal
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_GND
CAN_GND
Description
CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
Ground / 0V /VGround / 0V /V-
15-3
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
CANopen Communication Protocol
It has services as follows:
NMT (Network Management Object)
SDO (Service Data Objects)
PDO (Process Data Object)
EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT
service. Only one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All
CANopen nodes have a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the
slave nodes. The state diagram of a node is shown as follows:
(1)
Initializing
(15)
Reset Application
(10)
(11)
(9)
(16)
Reset Communication
(14)
(2)F
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3)
(4)
(13)
(12)
Stopped AB
(8)
(6)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state
(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically
(3) (6) Start remote node
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state
(5) (8) Stop remote node
(9) (10) (11) Reset node
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically
PDO
SDO
SYNC
Time Stamp
EMCY
Boot-up
NMT
(7)
(5)
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
15-4
A: NMT
B: Node Guard
C: SDO
D: Emergency
E: PDO
F: Boot-up
Stopped
○
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
SDO (Service Data Objects)
SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server
model. One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or
download data between two nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to
transfer by segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD
in the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network
behavior. The access path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique
index in OD, and has sub-index if necessary. The request and response frame structure of
SDO communication is shown as follows:
PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the
network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message
has to be processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one
device to one another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services:
a TxPDO and an RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode.
PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for
the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the
following table:
Type Number
PDO
Cyclic
0
1-240
Acyclic
Synchronous
○
○
○
Asynchronous
RTR only
○
241-251
Reserved
252
○
○
253
○
254
○
255
○
○
Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO
transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving
SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.
Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
EMCY (Emergency Object)
When errors occurred inside the hardware, an emergency object will be triggered an emergency object
will only be sent when an error is occurred. As long as there is nothing wrong with the hardware,
there will be no emergency object to be served as a warning of an error message.
15-5
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.2 Wiring for CANopen
An external adapter card: EMC-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring to connect CANopen to VFD
C2000. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be terminated with
120Ω terminating resistors.
15-6
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.3 CANopen Communication Interface
Descriptions
15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr.09-40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode DS402
standard and Pr.09-40 set to 0 is Delta’s standard setting mode.
Actually, there are two control modes according to Delta’s standard, one is the old control mode
(Pr09-30=0).
This control mode can only control the motor drive under frequency control. Another mode is a new
standard (Pr09-30=1)
This new control mode allows the motor drive to be controlled under all sorts of mode.
Currently, C2000 support speed, torque, position and home mode.
The definition of relating control mode are:
CANopen
Control
Mode
Selection
DS402
standard
Pr. 09-40=1
Speed
Index
Description
6042-00
-----
Target
rotating
speed
(RPM)
-----
Control Mode
Torque
Position
Home
Index
Description
Index Description Index Description
6071-00 Target Torque 607A-00
(%)
6072-00
Max. Torque
Limit (%)
-----
-----
Delta Standard 2020-02 Target rotating --------(Old definition)
speed (Hz)
P09-40=1,
P09-30=0
Delta Standard 2060-03 Target rotating 2060-07 Target Torque 2060-05
(New definition)
speed (Hz)
(%)
P09-40=0,
2060-04 Torque Limit 2060-08 Speed Limit (Hz) ----P09-30=1
(%)
CANopen Control Mode
Selection
DS402 standard
Pr. 09-40=1
Delta Standard (Old definition)
P09-40=1, P09-30=0
Delta Standard (New
definition)
P09-40=0, P09-30=1
Operation Control
Index
Description
6040-00
Operation Command
--------2020-01
Operation Command
2060-01
Operation Command
-----
-----
CANopen Control Mode
Selection
Index
DS402 standard
605A-00
Pr. 09-40=1
605C-00
Delta Standard (Old definition)
----P09-40=1, P09-30=0
Delta Standard (New
----definition)
----P09-40=0, P09-30=1
Other
Description
Quick stop processing mode
Disable operation processing mode
-------------
However, you can use some index regardless DS402 or Delta’s standard.
For example:
1. Index which are defined as RO attributes.
15-7
Target
Position
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Target
Position
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
2. Index correspond to parameters such as (2000 ~200B-XX)
3. Accelerating/Decelerating Index: 604F 6050
15-8
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15.3.2.1 Related set up of ac motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below:
1.
Wiring for hardware (refer to chapter 15-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2.
Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3.
Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
4.
Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.
(Choose source of torque commend from
CANopen setting.)
5.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Choose source of position commend from CANopen
setting.)
6.
Set DS402 as control mode: Pr09-40=1
7.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0,
CANopen slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error arise (CAdE or CANopen memory error)
as station setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
8.
CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
9.
Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is
disable). If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one of the following
parameter: Pr.02.01 ~Pr.02.08 or Pr.02.26 ~ Pr.02.31. (Note: This function is available in
DS402 only.)
15.3.2.1 The status of the motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
According to the DS402 definition, the motor drive is divided into 3 blocks and 9 statuses as
described below.
3 blocks
Power Disable: That means without PWM output
Power Enable: That means with PWM output
Fault: One or more than one error has occurred.
9 statuses
Start: Power On
Not ready to switch on: The motor drive is initiating.
Switch On Disable: When the motor drive finishes the initiation, it will be at this mode.
Ready to switch on: Warming up before running.
Switch On: The motor derive has the PWM output now, but the reference commend is not
effective.
Operate Enable: Able to control normally.
Quick Stop Active: When there is a Quick Stop request, you have to stop running the motor
15-9
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
drive.
Fault Reaction Active: The motor drive detects conditions which might trigger error(s).
Fault: One or more than errors has occurred to the motor drive.
Therefore, when the motor drive is turned on and finishes the initiation, it will remain at Ready to
Switch on status.
To control the operation of the motor drive, you need to change this status to
Operate Enable status. The way to change it is to commend the control word's bit0 ~ bit3 and
bit7 of the Index 6040H and to pair with Index Status Word (Status Word 0X6041).
The control
steps and index definition are described as below:
Index 6040
15~9
8
7
6~4
Reserved
Halt
Fault Reset
Operation
3
Enable
operation
2
1
Enable
Voltage
Quick Stop
0
Switch On
Index 6041
15~14
13~12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Internal
Switch on
Target
Reserved Operation limit
Remote Reserved Warning
disabled
reached
active
Power
Disable
Start
5
4
3
Quick
stop
Voltage
enabled
Fault
2
1
Ready to
Operation
Switch on
enable
switch on
Fault Reaction Active
X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On
Fault
X0XX0000
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110
and
Disable QStop=1
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
X01X0001
0XXXX111
0XXXX110
Switch On
X01X0011
0XXX1111
0XXXX110
0XXXX111
Operation Enable
X01X0111
0XXXX01X
or
Disable QStop=0
0XXXX01X
and
Disable QStop=1
15-10
0
Fault
Power
Enable
0XXXXX0X
or
Fout=0
Quick Stop Active
X00X0111
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Set command 6040 =0xE, then set another command 6040 =0xF. Then the motor drive can be
switched to Operation Enable. The Index 605A decides the dashed line of Operation Enable when
the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. (When the setting value is 1~3, this dashed line is
active. But when the setting value of 605A is not 1~3, once he motor derive is switched to Quick Stop
Active, it will not be able to switch back to Operation Enable.)
Index
605Ah
Sub
0
Definition
Factory Setting
Quick stop option code
R/W
RW
2
Size
Unit
PDO
Map
S16
Mode
note
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down ramp
2: slow down on quick stop ramp
5 slow down on slow down ramp and
stay in QUICK STOP
6 slow down on quick stop ramp and
stay in QUICK STOP
7 slow down on the current limit and
stay in Quick stop
No
Besides, when the control section switches from Power Enable to Power Disable, use 605C to define
parking method.
Index
605Ch
Sub
0
Definition
Factory Setting
Disable operation option code
1
R/W
RW
Size
Unit
PDO
Map
S16
Mode
note
0: Disable drive function
1: Slow down with slow down ramp;
disable of the drive function
No
15-3-2-3 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard)
Control mode of C2000, supporting speed, torque, position and home control are described as
below:
Speed mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the speed control mode: Set Index6060 to 2.
2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: Set 6040=0xE, then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. To set target frequency: Set target frequency of 6042, since the operation unit of 6042 is rpm, there
is a transformation:
nf
120
p
n: rotation speed (rpm) (rounds/minute)
P: motor’s pole number (Pole)
f: rotation frequency (Hz)
For example:
Set 6042H = 1500 (rpm), if the motor drive's pole number is 4 (Pr05-04 or Pr05-16), then the
motor drive's operation frequency is 1500(120/4)=50Hz.
Besides, the 6042 is defined as a signed operation. The plus or minus sign means to rotate
clockwise or counter clockwise
4. To set acceleration and deceleration: Use 604F (Acceleration) and 6050(Deceleration).
5. Trigger an ACK signal: In the speed control mode, the bit 6~4 of Index 6040 needs to be controlled.
It is defined as below:
Speed mode
(Index 6060=2)
Bit 6
1
1
Index 6040
Bit 5
0
1
Other
15-11
Bit 4
1
1
SUM
Locked at the current signal.
Run to reach targeting signal.
Decelerate to 0Hz.
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
NOTE 01: To know the current rotation speed, read 6043. (unit: rpm)
NOTE 02: To know if the rotation speed can reach the targeting value; read bit 10 of 6041. (0: Not
reached; 1: Reached)
Torque mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the torque control mode: Set Index6060 = 4.
2. Switch the current mode to Operation Enable, set 6040 = 0xE, then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. To set targeting torque: Set 6071 as targeting torque and 6072 as the largest output torque.
Index 6040
SUM
Torque mode
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
(Index 6060=4)
X
X
X
RUN to reach the targeting torque.
15-12
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
NOTE: The standard DS402 doesn’t regulate the highest speed limit. Therefore if the motor drive
defines the control mode of DS402, the highest speed will go with the setting of Pr11-36 to
Pr11-38.
NOTE 01: To know the current torque, read 6077 (unit: 0.1%).
NOTE02: To know if reaching the targeting torque, read bit 10 of 6041. (0: Not reached; 1: Reached)
Position mode
1. Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr11-43 Max. Frequency of
Point- to-Point Position Control, Pr11-44 Accel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control and
Pr11-45 Decel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control)
2. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the position control mode: Then set Index 6060 = 1.
3. Switch the current mode to Operation Enable, set 6040 = 0xE and then set 6040 = 0xF.
4. To set targeting position: set 607A as the targeting position.
5. Trigger an ACK signal: Set 6040 = 0x0F then set 6040 = 0x1F. (Bit4 changes from 0 to 1).
15-13
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
NOTE 01: To know the current position, read 6064.
NOTE 02: To know if the position reaches the targeting position, read bit 10 of 6041. (0: reached, 1:
Not reached)
NOTE 03: To know if the position is over the limited area, read bit 11 of 6041 (0: in the limit, 1: over
the limit)
Home mode
1. Set Pr00-12 to choose a home method.
2. Set the left and right limits correspond to the position of MI terminal.
3. To switch Ac Motor Drive control mode to Home mode: Set Index 6060 = 6.
4. To switch from current mode to Operation Enable: Set 6040 = 0xE, then set 6040 = 0xF.
5. To trigger an ACK signal: Set 6040 = 0x0F, then set 6040 = 0x1F (Bit4 changes from 0 to 1 and the
motor drive will be back to home.)
Note 01: To know if the home mode is completed, read bit 12 of 6041.
(0: reached, 1: Not reached)
15.3.3 By using Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode)
15-3.3.1 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard)
If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below:
1.
Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen)
2.
Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3.
Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
15-14
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
4.
Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) as control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and
09-30 = 0.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If errors are occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as
station setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
5.
CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
15-3-3-2 By speed mode
1. Set the target frequency: Set 2020-02, the unit is Hz, with a number of 2 decimal places. For
example 1000 is 10.00.
2. Operation control: Set 2020-01 = 0002H for Running, and set 2020-01 = 0001H for Stopping.
15.3.4 By using Delta Standard (New definition)
15-3-4-1 Related set up of ac motor drive (Delta New Standard)
If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below:
1.
Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen)
2.
Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3.
Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6. (Choose source of frequency commend from
CANopen setting.)
4.
Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.
CANopen setting.)
15-15
(Choose source of torque commend from
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
5.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Choose source of position commend from CANopen
setting.)
6.
Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) as control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and
09-30 = 0.
7.
CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If errors are occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as
station setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
8.
CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
15-3-4-2 Various mode control method (Delta New Standard)
Speed Mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at the speed control mode: Set Index6060 = 2.
2. Set the target frequency: set 2060-03, unit is Hz, with a number of 2 decimal places. For example
1000 is 10.00Hz.
3. Operation control: set 2060-01 = 008H for Server on, and set 2060-01 = 0081H for Running.
Torque Mode
1. Let Ac Motor Drive be at torque control mode: set Index 6060 = 4.
2. Set target torque: set 2060-07, unit is %, a number of 1 decimal place. For example 100 is 10.0%.
3. Operation control: Set 2060-01 = 0080H for Server on, then the motor drive will start to run to
reach target torque.
15-16
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Note01 To know what the current torque is, read 2061-07 (unit is 0.1%).
Note02 To know if the torque can reach the setting value, read the bit 0 of 2061-01 (0: Not reached, 1:
Reached).
Note 03: When doing torque output and if the motor drive’s speed reaches the speed limit, the output
torque will decrease to ensure the speed is under the limit.
Position Mode
1. Set the parameter of a trapezium curve to define position control (Pr11-43 Max. Position Control
Frequency), Pr11-44 Accel. Time of Position Control, Pr11-45 Decel. Time of Position Control)
2. Let Ac motor drive be at the position control mode, set Index 6060 = 1.
3. Set 2060-01 = 0080h, then motor drive will have server on.
4. Set target position: set 2060-05 = target position.
5. Set 2060-01 =0081h to trigger the motor drive to run to the target position.
6. To move to another position, simply repeat step 3 to 5.
15-17
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
NOTE01: To know the current position, read 2061-05.
NOTE02: To know if reaching the target position, read bit 0 of 2061 (0: Not reached, 1: Reached).
Home Mode
1. Set Pr00-12 to choose how to return home.
2. Set the left and right limits correspond to the position of MI terminal.
3. To switch C2000 control mode to Home mode: Set Index 6060 = 6.
4. Set 2060-01 = 0080h, then motor drive will have server on.
5. Set the ACK signal: set 2060-01 = 0081h, then the motor drive will start to go back home.
NOTE 01: To know if returning home is completed, read bit12 of 6041 ( 0: Not reached, 1: Reached).
15-18
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15-3-5 DI/DO AI AO are controlled via CANopen
To control the DO AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow the steps below:
1. To set the DO to be controlled, define this DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set
Pr02-14 to control RY2.
2. To set the DO to be controlled, define this AO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set
Pr03-23 to control AFM2.
3. To control the mapping index of CANopen. If you want to control DO, then you will need to control
Index2026-41. If you want to control AO, then you will need to control 2026-AX. If you want to set
RY2 as ON, set the bit 1 of Index 2026-41 =1, then RY2 will output 1. If you want to control AFM2
output = 50.00%, then you will need to set Index 2026-A2 =5000, then AFM2 will output 50%.
Mapping table of CANopen DI DO AI AO:
DI:
Terminal
FWD
Related Parameters
==
R/W
RO
Mapping Index
2026-01 bit 0
REV
==
RO
2026-01 bit 1
MI 1
==
RO
2026-01 bit 2
MI 2
==
RO
2026-01 bit 3
MI 3
==
RO
2026-01 bit 4
MI 4
==
RO
2026-01 bit 5
MI 5
==
RO
2026-01 bit 6
MI 6
==
RO
2026-01 bit 7
MI 7
==
RO
2026-01 bit 8
MI 8
==
RO
2026-01 bit 9
MI 10
==
RO
2026-01 bit 10
MI 11
==
RO
2026-01 bit 11
MI 12
==
RO
2026-01 bit 12
MI 13
==
RO
2026-01 bit 13
MI 14
==
RO
2026-01 bit 14
MI 15
==
RO
2026-01 bit 15
Related Parameters
P2-13 = 50
R/W
RW
Mapping Index
2026-41 bit 0
P2-14 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 1
P2-15 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 2
MO1
P2-16 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 3
MO2
P2-17 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 4
MO3
P2-18 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 5
MO4
P2-19 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 6
DO：
Terminal
RY1
RY2
15-19
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
MO5
P2-20 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 7
MO6
P2-21 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 8
MO7
P2-22 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 9
MO8
P2-23 = 50
RW
2026-41 bit 10
Related Parameters
==
R/W
RO
Mapping Index
Value of 2026-61
ACI
==
RO
Value of 2026-62
AUI
==
RO
Value of 2026-63
Related Parameters
P3-20 = 20
R/W
RW
Mapping Index
Value of 2026-A1
P3-23 = 20
RW
Value of 2026-A2
AI：
Terminal
AVI
AO：
Terminal
AFM1
AFM2
15-20
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.4 CANopen Supporting Index
C2000 Index:
Parameter index corresponds to each other as following:
Index
sub-Index
2000H + Group
member+1
For example:
Pr.10.15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group
member
10(0 A H)
-
15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A
Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
C2000 Control Index:
Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)
Index Sub
2020H
Definition
0 Number
1 Control word
Factory
Setting
3
0
R/W
Size
R
U8
RW
15-21
U16
Note
Bit 1~0 00B:disable
01B:stop
10B:disable
11B: JOG Enable
Bit3~2 Reserved
Bit5~4 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
Bit7~6 00B: 1st step Accel. /Decel.
01B: 2nd step Accel. /Decel.
10B: 3rd step Accel. /Decel.
11B: 4th step Accel. /Decel.
Bit11~8 0000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st step speed
0010B: 2nd step speed
0011B: 3rd step speed
0100B: 4th step speed
0101B: 5th step speed
0110B: 6th step speed
0111B: 7th step speed
1000B: 8th step speed
1001B: 9th step speed
1010B: 10th step speed
1011B: 11th step speed
1100B: 12th step speed
1101B: 13th step speed
1110B: 14th step speed
1111B: 15th step speed
Bit12 1: Enable the function of
Bit6-11
Bit14~13 00B: no function
01B: Operation command by
the digital keypad
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Index Sub
Definition
Factory
Setting
R/W
Size
Note
Bit 15
2021H
Freq. command
2
(XXX.XXHz)
0
RW
U16
3 Other trigger
0
RW
U16
DH
0
0
R
R
R
U8
U16
U16
0
R
U16
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
R
U16
0
0
R
R
U16
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
0
0
R
R
R
U16
U16
U16
0 Number
1 Error code
2 AC motor drive status
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
2022H
10
0
1
Freq. command
(XXX.XXHz)
Output freq. (XXX.XXHz)
Output current (XX.XA)
DC bus voltage (XXX.XV)
Output voltage (XXX.XV)
the current segment run by
the multi-segment speed
commend
Reserved
Display counter value（c）
Display output power angle
(XX.X°)
Display output torque
(XXX.X%)
Display actual motor speed
(rpm)
Number of PG feed back
pulses (0~65535)
Number of PG2 pulse
commands (0~65535)
power output (X.XXXKWH)
Reserved
Display output current
15-22
10B: Operation command by
Pr. 00-21 setting
11B: Switch the source of
operation command
Reserved
Bit0
1: E.F. ON
Bit1
1: Reset
Bit15~2 Reserved
Bit 1~0 00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
Bit 2
1: JOG command
Bit 4~3 00B: forward running
01B: switch from reverse
running to forward running
10B: switch from forward
running to reverse running
11B: reverse running
Bit 7~5 Reserved
Bit 8
1: master frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9
1: master frequency command
controlled by analog signal
input
Bit 10 1: operation command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 15~11 Reserved
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Index Sub
Definition
2 Display counter value
Display actual output
3
frequency (XXX.XXHz)
Display DC-BUS voltage
4
(XXX.XV)
Display output voltage
5
(XXX.XV)
Display output power angle
6
(XX.X°)
7 Display output power in kW
Display actual motor speed
8
(rpm)
Display estimate output
9
torque (XXX.X%)
A Display PG feedback
Display PID feedback value
B after enabling PID function
in % (To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of AVI analog
C input terminal, 0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (To 2
Factory
Setting
0
R/W
Size
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
decimal places)
Display signal of ACI analog
input terminal,
D 4-V20mA/0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (To 2
decimal places)
Display signal of AUI analog
E input terminal, -10V~10V
corresponds to -100~100%
(To 2 decimal places)
F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
Display the IGBT
temperature of drive power
module in oC
Display the temperature of
capacitance in oC
The status of digital input
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
The status of digital output
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
Display the multi-step
speed that is executing
The corresponding CPU pin
status of digital input
The corresponding CPU pin
status of digital output
Number of actual motor
revolution (PG1 of PG
card). it will start from 9
when the actual operation
direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0.
Max. is 65535
Pulse input frequency (PG2
of PG card)
Pulse input position (PG
card PG2), maximum
setting is 65535.
Position command tracing
error
Display times of counter
overload (0.00~100.00%)
15-23
Note
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Index Sub
Factory
Setting
0
Definition
1B Display GFF in %
Display DCbus voltage
1C
ripples (Unit: Vdc)
Display PLC register D1043
1D
data
Display Pole of Permanent
1E
Magnet Motor
User page displays the
1F
value in physical measure
20 Output Value of Pr.00-05
Number of motor turns
21
when drive operates
22 Operation position of motor
23 Fan speed of the drive
Control mode of the drive 0:
24
speed mode 1: torque mode
Carrier frequency of the
25
drive
R/W
Size
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
0
0
R
R
U16
U16
0
R
U16
0
R
U16
Note
CANopen Remote IO mapping
Index
2026H
Sub
01h
02h
03h~40h
41h
42h~60h
61h
62h
63h
64h~A0h
A1h
A2h
R/W
R
R
R
RW
R
R
R
R
R
RW
RW
Definition
Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
Reserved
Each bit corresponds to the different output terminals
Reserved
AVI (%)
ACI (%)
AUI (%)
Reserved
AFM1 (%)
AFM2 (%)
Delta Standard Mode (New definition)
Index sub R/W Size
2060h 00h R
Descriptions
bit DefinitionPriority
Speed Mode
Position Mode
Home Mode
U8
01h RW U16
0
Ack
4
1
Dir
4
0:fcmd =0
Pulse 1: Position
1:fcmd = Fset(Fpid) control
0: FWD run
command
1: REV run
command
2
3
Halt
4
Hold
5
JOG
6
QStop
0: drive run till target
speed is attained
1: drive stop by
declaration setting
0: drive run till target
speed is attained
1: frequency
stop at current
frequency
0:JOG OFF
Pulse 1:JOG RUN
Quick Stop
15-24
Pulse 1: Return to
home
Torque Mode
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Index sub R/W Size
Descriptions
bit DefinitionPriority
7
Power
14~8
Cmd
SW
15
Speed Mode
Position Mode
0:Power OFF
1:Power ON
Multi-step
frequency
switching
Pulse 1: Fault code
cleared
0:Power OFF
1:Power ON
Home Mode
0:Power OFF
1:Power ON
Torque Mode
0:Power OFF
1:Power ON
Multi-step position
switching
Pulse 1: Fault
code cleared
Pulse 1: Fault code Pulse 1: Fault
cleared
code cleared
02h RW U16
Speed command
(unsigned decimal)
03h RW U16
04h RW U16
05h RW S32
06h RW
Position command
Torque command
(signed decimal)
Speed limit
(unsigned decimal)
07h RW U16
08h RW U16
01h R U16
2061h
0
Arrive
1
Dir
2
Warn
3
Error
4
5
JOG
6
QStop
7 Power On
15~8
Frequency attained Position attained
Homing complete
Torque attained
0: Motor FWD run
1: Motor REV run
Warning
Error detected
0: Motor FWD run
1: Motor REV run
Warning
Error detected
0: Motor FWD run
1: Motor REV run
Warning
Error detected
0: Motor FWD run
1: Motor REV run
Warning
Error detected
JOG
Quick stop
Switch ON
JOG
Quick stop
Switch ON
JOG
Quick stop
Switch ON
JOG
Quick stop
Switch ON
Actual output
frequency
Actual output
frequency
Actual output
frequency
Actual output
frequency
Actual position
(absolute)
Actual position
(absolute)
Actual position
(absolute)
Actual position
(absolute)
Actual torque
Actual torque
Actual torque
Actual torque
02h R
03h R U16
04h R
05h R S32
06h R
07h R S16
DS402 Standard
Index Sub
Definition
Factory
Setting
6007h
0 Abort connection option code
2
603Fh
6040h
6041h
6042h
6043h
6044h
604Fh
6050h
6051h
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Error code
Control word
Status word
vl target velocity
vl velocity demand
vl control effort
vl ramp function time
vl slow down time
vl quick stop time
0
0
0
0
0
0
10000
10000
1000
605Ah
0 Quick stop option code
2
R/W Size Unit
PDO
Mode
Map
RW S16
Yes
R0
RW
R0
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
U16
U16
U16
S16
S16
S16
U32
U32
U32
RW S16
15-25
rpm
rpm
rpm
1ms
1ms
1ms
No
Note
0: No action
2: Disable Voltage,
3: quick stop
vl
vl
vl
vl
vl
vl
Unit must be: 100ms, and
check if the setting is set to
0.
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Index Sub
605Ch
0
6060h
Definition
Disable operation option
Factory
Setting
R/W Size Unit
PDO
Mode
Map
Note
5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
0: Disable drive function
1: Slow down with slow
down ramp; disable of the
drive function
1: Profile Position Mode
2: Velocity Mode
4: Torque Profile Mode
6: Homing Mode
1
RW S16
No
0 Mode of operation
2
RW
S8
Yes
6061h
0 Mode of operation display
2
RO
S8
Yes
6064h
0 pp Position actual value
0
RO S32
Yes
pp
6071h
0 tq Target torque
0
RW S16 0.1% Yes
tq
Valid unit: 1%
6072h
0 tq Max torque
150
RW U16 0.1% No
tq
Valid unit: 1%
6075h
0 tq Motor rated current
0
RO U32 mA No
tq
6077h
0 tq torque actual value
0
RO S16 0.1% Yes
tq
6078h
0 tq current actual value
0
RO S16 0.1% Yes
tq
6079h
0 tq DC link circuit voltage
0
RO U32 mV Yes
tq
607Ah
0 pp Target position
0
RW S32
pp
code
15-26
1
Yes
Same as above
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.5 CANopen Fault Code
Display
Fault
ocA
Fault code
Description
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
0001H
Over-current during acceleration
2213 H
1
0002H
Over-current during deceleration
2213 H
1
2214H
1
2240H
1
2250H
1
2314H
1
3210H
2
3210H
2
3210H
2
3210H
2
Oc at accel
Fault
ocd
Oc at decel
Fault
ocn
0003H
Oc at normal SPD
Over-current during steady status
operation
Ground fault. When (one of) the output
terminal(s) is grounded, short circuit
Fault
GFF
0004H
Ground fault
current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for
AC motor drive protection, not for protection of the
user.
Short-circuit is detected between upper
Fault
occ
0005H
IGBT module.
Short Circuit
Fault
ocS
0006H
Oc at stop
Fault
ovA
0007H
Ov at accel
Fault
ovd
0008H
Ov at decel
Fault
ovn
0009H
Ov at normal SPD
Fault
ovS
Ov at stop
bridge and lower bridge of the
000AH
Over-current at stop. Hardware failure in
current detection
Over-current during acceleration.
Hardware failure in current detection
Over-current during deceleration.
Hardware failure in current detection.
Over-current during steady speed.
Hardware failure in current detection.
Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in
current detection
15-27
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Display
Fault
LvA
Fault code
000BH
Lv at accel
Fault
Lvd
000CH
Lv at decel
Fault
Lvn
000DH
Lv at normal SPD
Fault
LvS
000EH
Lv at stop
Fault
OrP
000FH
Description
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00
during acceleration.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00
during deceleration.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 in
constant speed.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 at
stop
Phase Loss Protection
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
3220H
2
3220H
2
3220H
2
3220H
2
3130H
2
4310H
3
4310H
3
FF00H
3
FF01H
3
FF02H
2
Phase Lacked
IGBT overheat
IGBT temperature exceeds protection
Fault
oH1
0010H
level.
1~15HP: 90℃
IGBT over heat
20~100HP: 100℃
Fault
oH2
0011H
Hear Sink oH
Heat sink overheat
Heat sink temperature exceeds 90oC
Temperature detection circuit error
Fault
tH1o
0012H
(IGBT)
IGBT NTC
Thermo 1 open
Temperature detection circuit error
Fault
tH2o
0013H
CAP NTC
Thermo 2 open
Fault
PWR
(capacity module)
0014H
Power RST off
Power RST OFF
15-28
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Display
Fault code
Description
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
2310H
1
Overload. The AC motor drive detects
Fault
oL
0015H
Inverter oL
Fault
EoL2
EoL1
excessive drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to
150% of the rated current for a maximum of 60
seconds.
0016H
Electronics thermal relay 1 protection
2310H
1
0017H
Electronics thermal relay 2 protection
2310H
1
8311H
3
8311H
3
8321H
1
5530H
5
Thermal relay 1
2
Fault
EoL2
Thermal relay 2
These two fault codes will be displayed
Fault
EoL2
ot1
001AH
Thermal
Over
torque
relay
1 2
when output current exceeds the
over-torque detection level (Pr.06.07 or
Pr.06.10) and exceeds over-torque
Fault
EoL2
ot2
001BH
set 2 or 4 in Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
Thermal
Over
torque
relay
2 2
Fault
EoL2
uC
detection (Pr.06.08 or Pr.06.11) and it is
001CH
Low current
Thermal
Under
torque
relay12
Fault
EoL2
cF1
001EH
Thermal relay
EEPROM
write2Err
Fault
EoL2
cF2
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
001FH
Internal EEPROM can not be read.
5530H
5
0021H
U-phase error
FF04H
1
0022H
V-phase error
FF05H
1
0023H
W-phase error
FF06H
1
Thermal relay
EEPROM
read2Err
Fault
EoL2
cd1
Thermal
Ias
sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
cd2
Thermal
Ibs
sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
cd3
Thermal
Ics
sensor
relay
Err 2
15-29
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
Display
Fault code
EoL2
Hd0
0024H
cc (current clamp) hardware error
FF07H
5
0025H
oc hardware error
FF08H
5
0026H
ov hardware error
FF09H
5
0027H
GFF hardware error
FF0AH
5
0028H
Auto tuning error
FF21H
1
0029H
PID loss (ACI)
FF22H
7
002AH
PG feedback error
7301H
7
002BH
PG feedback loss
7301H
7
002BH
PG feedback stall
7301H
7
002CH
PG slip error
7301H
7
0030H
ACI loss
FF25H
1
Fault
Description
Thermal
cc
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd1
Thermal
oc
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd2
Thermal
ov
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd3
Thermal
GFF
HW relay
Error 2
Fault
EoL2
AUE
Thermal
Auto
tuning
relay
Err2
Fault
EoL2
AFE
Thermal
PID
Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF1
Thermal
PG
Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF2
Thermal
PG
Fbk Loss
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
PGF3
Thermal
PG
Fbk Over
relaySPD
2
Fault
EoL2
PGF4
Thermal
PG
Fbk deviate
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
ACE
Thermal
ACI
loss relay 2
15-30
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Display
Fault code
Description
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
9000H
5
9000H
5
9000H
5
FF26H
5
External Fault
Fault
EoL2
EF
0031H
Thermal relay
External
Fault 2
When input EF (N.O.) on external
terminal is closed to GND, AC motor
drive stops output U, V, and W.
Emergency stop
When the multi-function input terminals
Fault
EoL2
EF1
0032H
MI1 to MI6 are set to emergency stop,
the AC motor drive stops output U, V, W
Thermal relay
Emergency
stop
2
and the motor coasts to stop.
External Base Block
Fault
EoL2
bb
0033H
Thermal
Base
block
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Pcod
EoL2
ccod
MI16 are set as bb and active, the AC
motor drive output will be turned off
0034H
Thermal relay
Password
Error
2
Fault
When the external input terminals MI1 to
Password will be locked if three fault
passwords are entered
0035H
Software error
6100H
5
0036H
Illegal function code
7500H
4
0037H
Illegal data address (00H to 254H)
7500H
4
0038H
Illegal data value
7500H
4
0039H
Data is written to read-only address
7500H
4
003AH
Modbus transmission timeout.
7500H
5
Thermal
SW
coderelay
Error2
Fault
EoL2
cE1
Thermal CMD
Modbus
relay err
2
Fault
cE2
Thermal ADDR
Modbus
relay 2err
Fault
cE3
Thermal DATA
Modbus
relay 2err
Fault
cE4
Thermal slave
Modbus
relay FLT
2
Fault
cE10
Thermal time
Modbus
relayout
2
15-31
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
Display
Fault code
cP10
003BH
Keypad transmission timeout.
7500H
4
003CH
Brake resistor fault
7110H
4
003DH
Motor Y-Δ switch error
3330H
2
003EH
Energy regeneration when decelerating
FF27H
2
FF28H
7
Fault
Description
Thermaltime
Keypad
relayout
2
Fault
bF
Thermalfault
Braking
relay 2
Fault
ydc
Thermalconnect
Y-delta
relay 2
Fault
dEb
Thermal
Dec.
Energy
relayback
2
Over slip error. Slip exceeds Pr.05.26
Fault
oSL
003FH
setting.
Thermal
Over
sliprelay
Error2
Fault
PGF5
limit and slip duration exceeds Pr.05.27
0041H
PG Card Error
FF29H
5
0042H
over current caused by unknown reason
2310H
1
0043H
over voltage caused by unknown reason
3210H
2
0049H
external safety emergency stop
FF2AH
5
0052H
U phase output phase loss
2331H
2
0053H
V phase output phase loss
2332H
2
Thermal
PG
HW Error
relay 2
Fault
ovU
ocU
Over volt.
Thermal
Unknow
Over
relay
Unknow
Apm
2
Fault
ovU
Thermal Over
Unknow
relay volt.
2
Fault
S1
Thermal relay
S1-Emergy
stop
2
Fault
OPHL
Thermal
U
phase lacked
relay 2
Fault
OPHL
Thermal
U
phase lacked
relay 2
15-32
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
Display
Fault code
OPHL
0054H
Fault
Description
W phase output phase loss
CANopen
fault code
CANopen
fault
register
(bit 0~7)
2333H
2
Thermal
U
phase lacked
relay 2
Fault
aocc
004FH
A phase short
FF2BH
1
0050H
B phase short
FF2CH
1
0051H
C phase short
FF2DH
1
0065H
Guarding time-out 1
8130H
4
0066H
Heartbeat time-out
8130H
4
0067H
CAN synchrony error
8700H
4
0068H
CAN bus off
8140H
4
0069H
Can index exceed
8110H
4
006AH
CAN address error
0x8100
4
006BH
CAN frame fail
0x8100
4
Thermal
A
phase short
relay 2
Fault
bocc
Thermal
B
phase short
relay 2
Fault
cocc
Thermal
C
phase short
relay 2
Fault
CGdE
Thermal relay
Guarding
T-out2
Fault
CHbE
Thermal relay
Heartbeat
T-out
2
Fault
CSyE
Thermal
SYNC
T-out
relay 2
Fault
CbFE
Thermalbus
CAN/S
relay
off 2
Fault
CIdE
Thermal relay 2
Fault
CAdE
Thermal relay 2
Fault
CFdE
Thermal relay 2
15-33
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series
15.6 CANopen LED Function
There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status
Condition
CANopen State
OFF
Initial
Pre-Operation
Blinking
Stopped
Single flash
ON
Operation
ERR LED:
LED status
Condition/ State
OFF
No Error
Single
One Message fail
flash
Double
Guarding fail or heartbeat fail
flash
Triple flash SYNC fail
ON
Bus off
15-34
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Chapter 16 PLC Function
16.1
16.2
16.3
PLC Overview
Precautions for Using PLC
Start-up
16-3-1 Connect to PC
16-3-2 I/O Device Reference Table
16-3-3 WPLSoft Installation
16-3-4 Program Input
16-3-5 Program Download
16-3-6 Program Monitor
16.4
16.5
PLC Ladder Diagram
PLC Devices
16-5-1Devices Functions
16-5-2 Special Auxiliary Relays (Special M)
16-5-3 Special Registers (Special D)
16-5-4 Communication address for PLC Devices
16.6
Commands
16-6-1 Basic Commands
16-6-2 Explanation for the Command
16-6-3 Description of the Application Commands
16-6-4 Explanation for the Application Commands
16.7
16.8
16.9
Error Code and Troubleshoot
CANopen Master Application
Descriptions of PLC Modes and Controls (Speed, Torque,
Homing and Position)
16.10 Internal Communication for Master Control
16.11 Counting Function via MI8
16-12 Remote IO Control Application of MODBUS (using Modbus)
16-1
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.1 PLC Overview
16.1.1 Introduction
The built in PLC function in C2000 allows following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and
application commands; the operation methods are the same as Delta DVPPLC series. Other than
that, CANopen master provides 8 stations for synchronous control and 126 asynchronous controls.
NOTE
In C2000, CANopen master synchronous control complies with DS402 standard and supports
homing mode, speed mode, torque mode and point to point control mode; CANopen slave supports
two control modes, speed mode and torque mode.
16.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft
WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series for WINDOWS. Besides
general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy,
multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special
functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts monitor and
set, etc.).
Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:
Item
System Requirement
Operation System
Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU
Memory
Mouse
Pentium 90 and above
16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)
Capacity: 50MB and above
CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)
Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above,
It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600.
General mouse or the device compatible with Windows
Printer
Printer with Windows driver
RS-232 port
At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC
Applicable Models
All Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series
Hard Disk
Monitor
16-2
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-2 Precautions for Using PLC Functions
1.
Default setting of PLC communication protocol is 7,N,2 ,9600, station number 2. User can
change PLC station using Pr.09-35 but station address must be different to the AC motor drive’s
station address (Pr.09-00).
2.
C2000 series offers 2 communication ports for PLC program upload and download. Refer to the
figure follows for port location. The communication protocol of Channel 1 is always
19200,8,N,2。
Channel 1
SG+ SG-
Channel 2
8
1
RS-485
3.
M odbus RS-485
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
1~2, 7, 8:Reserved
3, 6:GND
4:SG5:SG+
Host controller can read/write data from/to both the AC motor drive and the internal PLC
program by setting the drive and internal PLC program to two different station numbers. For
example, if user wants to set AC motor drive as station 1 and PLC as station 2, please write
following setting to the host controller:
When setting 01(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), the host controller can read the
Pr.04-00 from the AC motor drive.
When setting 02(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), host controller will read X0
data from the internal PLC program.
4.
The internal PLC program will stop operation when upload/download programs.
5.
When using WPR command to write parameters, parameters can be changed for a maximum of
109 times. It is crucial not to exceed this limit to prevent occurrence of serious error. Number of
calculations based on the value is changed. If the values which to be written is same as present
data, the number does not add up. If the value to be written is different, the number calculated
will be “plus-one.”
16-3
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
6.
When Pr.00-04 is set to 28, D1043 value of PLC register will be displayed on the digital keypad:
Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
Digital Keypad KPC-CE01
Display range: 0~65535
Display range: 0~9999
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
C _____
Display for values exceed 9999
7.
When PLC is in PLC Run or PLC Stop mode, Pr.00-02 (settings 9 and 10) are disabled.
8.
When Pr.00-02 is set to 6, PLC function settings will return to factory settings.
9.
When the Input Terminal X of PLC is programmed, the corresponding MI will be disabled (no
function).
10. When AC motor drive operation status is controlled by PLC function, the setting of Pr.00-21 has
no function and the drive is fully under the control of PLC function.
11. When PLC function is programmed with FREQ command, AC motor drive frequency is now
under PLC function control. The setting of Pr.00-20 and Hand ON/OFF are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive frequency.
12. When PLC is programmed with TORQ command, AC motor drive torque is now under PLC
function control. The setting of Pr.11-33 and Hand ON/OFF function are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive torque.
13. When PLC is programmed with POS command, AC motor drive position is now under PLC
function control. The setting of Pr.11-40 and Hand ON/OFF function are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive position.
14. If the Stop function of digital keypad is enabled when AC motor drive frequency is under PLC
function control, the AC motor drive will trigger FStP error and AC motor drive will stop
operation.
16-4
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.3 Start-up
16.3.1 The Steps for PLC Execution
Please operate PLC functions by following the steps indicate below:
1.
Press menu key on KPC-CC01 select 3: PLC
MENU
1.Pr Setup
2.Copy Pr
3.PLC
F 60.00Hz
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
Press
ENTER.
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
Select 3.PLC
MENU
Press ENTER
NOTE
When using KPC-CE01 series digital keypad, switch the mode to PLC2 for program
download/upload:
A. Press MODE key and select ‘PLC’.
B. Press ‘UP’ key and look for ‘PLC2’ then press ‘ENTER’.
C. If succeed, display ‘END’ for one to two seconds and return to ‘PLC2’ page.
The PLC warning that is displayed before program downloaded to C2000 can be ignored, please
continue the operation.
Disable
2.
Run PLC
i
PLC Stop
AC d i
Connection: Connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to the computer by using RS485.
RS485
C2000
3.
Run the program.
PLC
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
PLC function, select function 2 (PLC Run).
1: Disable
(PLC0)
2: PLC Run
(PLC1)
3: PLC Stop
(PLC2)
Optional accessories: Digital keypad KPC-CE01, display
PLC function as shown in the ( ).
When external input terminals (MI1~MI8) are set to PLC Mode select bit0 (51) or PLC Mode
select bit1 (52), it will force to switch to PLC mode regardless the terminal is ON or OFF.
Meanwhile, switching via keypad is disabled. Please refer to the chart below:
16-5
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
PLC Mode
PLC Mode select bit1(52)
PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Disable (PLC 0)
OFF
OFF
PLC Run (PLC 1)
OFF
ON
PLC Stop (PLC 2)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Previous state
When KPC-CE01 execute PLC function:
1.
When switching the page from PLC to PLC1, it will execute PLC. The motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
2.
When switching the page from PLC to PLC2, it will stop PLC. Again the motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
3.
The control of external terminals follows the same method.
NOTE
When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1~MI8 MI10~15, Relay1, Relay2 RY10~RY15,
MO1~MO2 MO10~MO11,) are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. Fro
example, when PLC program (PLC1 or PLC2) is activated, such as when it controls Y0, the
corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this moment, Pr.03.00
setting will be invalid since the terminal has been used by PLC. Refer to Pr.02-52, 02-53, 03-30
to check which DI DO AO are occupied by PLC.
16.3.2 I/O Device Reference Table
Input device:
Device X0
1
X1
FWD REV
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
2
MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3
MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1: I/O extension card
2: I/O extension card EMC-D611A (D1022=4)
3: I/O extension card EMC-D42A (D1022=5)
Output device:
Device Y0
1
RY
1
Y1
RY2
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y10
Y11
Y12
MO1 MO2
2
MO10 MO11
3
RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1: I/O extension card
2: I/O extension card EMC-D42A (D1022=5)
3: I/O extension card EMC-R6AA (D1022=6)
16-6
Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.3.3 WPLSoft Installation
Download PLC program toC2000: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the editor
(WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
16.3.4 Program Input
16-7
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.3.5 Program Download
Please download the program by following steps:
Step 1. Press
button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.
Step 2. After compiler is finished, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.
After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the
communication format.
16.3.6 Program Monitor
If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder
diagram will be shown as follows.
16-8
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.4 Ladder Diagram
16.4.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram
Read input state from outside
X0
Calculate the result by
X1
Start
Y0
Y0
ladder diagram
algorithm (it doesn’t
M100 X3
X10
Repeats the
Y1
sent to the outer output
:
:
point but the inner
equipment will output
execution in
cycle.
X100 M505
immediately.)
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
16.4.2 Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a
diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after
ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that
indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic
symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of
traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal
equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It
doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit
is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You should read the
corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise,
you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally
Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2
bytes can make up a word. 2 words make up double word. When using many relays to do
calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could use byte, word or double word.
Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of
counting time and times.
16-9
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these
equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC:
Internal Device
Input Relay
Function
Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch
and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to
display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or
forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.
If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t
be used with other functions.
Output Relay
Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by
input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It
uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can
be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output
relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
Internal Relay
Equipment indication: M0, M1…M799. The symbol of equipment is M and
numbering in decimal system.
Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the
pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.
When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter
should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.
Timer
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1…Y7, Y10, Y11… The symbol of equipment is
Y and numbering in octal.
The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in
PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each
auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of
input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used
unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with
output point.
Counter
Equipment indication method: X0, X1…X7, X10, X11… The symbol of
equipment is X and numbering in octal.
Equipment indication: C0, C1… C79. The symbol of equipment is C and
numbering in decimal system.
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil
is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining
desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its
regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.
Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact A is open and contact B is
close) and the timer will be set to zero.
Equipment indication: T0, T1…T159. The symbol of equipment is T and
numbering in decimal system. The different number range corresponds with
the different timing period.
16-10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Internal Device
Data register
Function
PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value
and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores
16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number
of data register to store double words.
Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D399. The symbol of equipment is D and
numbering in decimal system.
The structure of ladder diagram and information:
Ladder Diagram
Structure
Explanation
Command
Device
Normally open, contact a
LD
X, Y, M, T, C
Normally closed, contact b
LDI
X, Y, M, T, C
Serial normally open
AND
X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally open
OR
X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally closed
ORI
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch
LDP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch
LDF
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in serial
ANDP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
serial
ANDF
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in
parallel
ORP
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
parallel
ORF
X, Y, M, T, C
Block in serial
ANB
none
Block in parallel
ORB
none
16-11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Ladder Diagram
Structure
Explanation
Command
Device
Multiple output
MPS
MRD
MPP
none
Output command of coil
drive
OUT
Y, M
Basic command/
Application
command
INV
none
Basic command,
Application command
Inverse logic
16.4.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram
The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (The right power line will be
omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The
maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have
the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous
number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The
drawing is shown as follows.
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10 C0
C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
Y0
00000
Row Number
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output
handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in
ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the
right corner is the explanation order.
X0
X1
Y1
X4
Y1
M0
T0
M3
TMR
X3
M1
16-12
T0
K10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
The explanation of command order:
1
2
3
4
LD
X0
OR
M0
AND X1
LD
X3
AND M1
ORB
5
LD
Y1
AND X4
6
LD
T0
AND M3
ORB
7
ANB
8
OUT Y1
TMR T0
K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
LD command
LD command
AND Block
OR Block
The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that
command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in
the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0
X0
Time
OFF
ON
Time
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.
AND command
AND command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR command
OR command
OR command
The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
16-13
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
ANB command
5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or
network from up to down or from left to right.
6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various
outputs.
7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place
between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command
or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have
memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the
PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times
and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.
8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same
in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing
other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.
9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because
it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.
MPS
MRD
MPP
16-14
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.4.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program
Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop
switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are
several latching circuits in the following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On,
stop normally contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On
are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil
Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls
priority of stop.
X2
Y1
Y1
STOP
X1
START
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
When start normally open contact X1=On,
stop normally contact X2＝Off and Y1=On
X1
(coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid
at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it
Y1
calls priority of start.
X2
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands
The figure at the right side is latching circuit
Top priority of stop
that made up of RST and SET command.
It is top priority of stop when RST command
X1
is set behind SET command. When
executing PLC from up to down, The coil Y1
is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and
X2
X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls
priority of stop.
It is top priority of start when SET command
is set after RST command. When X1 and
X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls
Top priority of start
top priority of start.
X2
Y1
SET
Y1
RST
Y1
RST
Y1
SET
Y1
X1
16-15
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
The common control circuit
Example 4: condition control
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self
latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact
connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
X1
X3
Y1
Y1
X2
X1
X3
X4
X2
Y1
Y2
Y2
X4
Y1
Y2
Example 5: Interlock control
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start
contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other
won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2
won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram,
Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
X1
X3
Y2
Y1
Y1
X1
X3
X2
X2
X4
X4
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y1
Y2
Example 6: Sequential Control
X1
X3
Y2
Y1
Y1
X2
X4
Y1
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to
be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in
the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop
Y1 after acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute
in sequential.
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating Circuit
The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT
Y1
Y1
Y1
T
16-16
T
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close
contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the
coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1
normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF. The result of
repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off).
The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off):
X0
Y1
TMR
T0
Kn
X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT
T
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be
closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is
the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 8: Blinking Circuit
X0
T2
TMR
T1
Kn1
TMR
T2
Kn2
X0
n2 *T
T1
X0
Y1
T1
Y1
n1 * T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It
uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2.
T is the base of timer (clock period)
Example 9: Triggered Circuit
X0
M0
M0
M0
X0
Y1
M0
Y1
T
Y1
Y1
In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single
pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be
OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being
ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON
for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two
actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil
Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
16-17
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example 10: Delay Circuit
X0
TMR
T10
K1000
X0
T10
Y1
Y1
TB = 0.1 sec
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding
normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying
100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON. Please
refer to timing chart above.
Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two
timers.
No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
X0
TMR
T5
T5
K50
X0
T6
Y4
5 seconds
T5
Y4
Y4
Y0
X0
TMR
T6
K30
T6
3 seconds
Example12: Extend Timer Circuit
In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
clock period. Timer: T11, T12; Timer cycle: T.
X0
TMR
T11
Kn1
TMR
T12
Kn2
X0
n1* T
T11
T11
n2* T
T12
T12
Y1
Y1
(n1+n2)* T
16-18
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.5 PLC Devices Function
Items
Program Language
Program Capacity
Specifications
Stored program, cyclic scan
system
Batch processing (when END
instruction is executed)
Basic commands (minimum 0.24
us)
Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC
1000 STEPS
Commands
80 commands
Input/Output Contact
Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4
Control Method
I/O Processing Method
Execution Speed
Device
X
Relay bit mode
Y
M
T
C
Constant
Register WORD data
T
C
D
Item
Remarks
I/O refresh instruction is
available
Application commands (1 ~
dozens us)
30 basic commands
50 application commands
Range
X0~X17, 16 points,
octal number system
Y0~Y17, 16 points,
octal number system
M0~M799, 800 points
M1000~M1079, 80
points
Function
Correspond to external
External Input Relay
Total is
input point
32
Correspond to external
points
External Output Relay
output point
For general
Total is
Contacts can switch to
192
Auxiliary
On/Off in program
For special
points
When the timer
indicated by TMR
Total is
command attains the
16
Timer 100ms timer
T0~T159, 160 points
setting, the T contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When the counter
indicated by CNT
Total is
command attains the
16-bit count up
Counter
C0~C79, 80 points
80
setting, the C contact
for general
points
with the same number
will be On.
When timer attains, the
Present value of timer
T0~T15, 160 points
contact of timer will be
On.
When timer attains, the
C0~C79, 16-bit counter, 80
Present value of counter
contact of timer will be
points
On.
For latched
D0~D399, 400 points
Total is
D1000~D1099, 100
Data
It can be memory area
For general
1300
points
register
for storing data.
points
D2000~D2799, 800
For special
points
K
Decimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
H
Hexadecimal
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
Communication port (program read/write) RS485 (slave)
Analog input/output
Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output
Function extension module (optional)
EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMCD611A
16-19
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.5.1 Devices Functions
The Function of Input/output Contacts
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with
input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in
program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t
be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).
The Function of Output Contact Y
The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending
On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is
unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for
output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be
decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method.
X0
The output of Y0 will be decided by
Y0
1
2, i.e. decided by On/Off of
circuit ○
X10.
Y0 is repeated
X10
Y0
2
Value, Constant [K] / [H]
Constant
K
H
Decimal
Hexadecimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is
the explanation of value types.
Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary
system is in the following.
Bit
Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble
It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent
number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte
It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to represent
00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word
It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16-bit, b15~b0. It can used to represent
0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word
It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32-bit, b31~b0. It can used to represent
00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
16-20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
DW
Double Word
W1
W0
BY3
NB7
BY2
NB6
NB5
Word
BY1
NB4
NB3
BY0
NB2
NB1
Byte
NB0
Nibble
Bit
Octal Number (OCT)
The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17… (device number)
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17… (device number)
Decimal Number, DEC
The suitable time for decimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
Binary Code Decimal (BCD)
It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16-bit can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal numbers. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or
output value to 7-segment display to be display.
Hexadecimal Number (HEX)
The suitable time for hexadecimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100
in decimal number.
Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or
double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12
and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100
means 100 in hexadecimal number.
16-21
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
The Function of Auxiliary Relay
There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage
times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly.
There are two types divided by its characteristics.
: It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its
state will be Off when power on after power loss.
: Each special auxiliary relay has its special function.
1.Auxiliary relay for general
2.Auxiliary relay for special
Please don’t use undefined auxiliary relay.
The Function of Timer
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On
when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data
register D can be also used as settings.
• The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
The Features and Functions of Counter
Item
Type
Count direction
Settings
Designate for
constant
Present value
change
General
Count up
0~32,767
16-bit counters
32-bit counters
General
High speed
Count up/down
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Constant K or data register D
Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
Counter will stop when attaining
settings
Counter will keep on counting when attaining
settings
When count up attains settings, contact will be
When count attains the settings
On and latched.
Output contact value, contact will be On and
When count down attains settings, contact will
latched.
reset to Off.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will
Reset action
reset to Off.
Present register 16-bit
32-bit
After scanning, act together.
Contact action After scanning, act together.
Act immediately when count attains. It has no
relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings
and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C79:
Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32, 767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be
On immediately at the first count.
General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the
value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be
set to the same as settings.
16-22
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register
D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.
If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it
can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is
-32,768.
Example:
LD
RST
LD
CNT
LD
OUT
X0
C0
X1
C0 K5
C0
Y0
X0
X1
RST C0
CNT
C0
K5
C0
Y0
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed,
C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
Off.
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will
count up (add 1).
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0
contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0
won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0
remains K5.
X0
X1
5
4
C0
present
value
3
settings
2
1
0
0
Contacts Y0, C0
16.5.2 Special Auxiliary Relays
Special
Read(R)/
Function
M
Write(W)
M1000
Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is On when
Read only
the status is set to RUN.
M1001
Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off when running and it is Off
Read only
when the status is set to RUN.
M1002
M1003
On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the Read only
RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in
Read only
the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004
Reserved
-
M1005
Fault indication of the AC motor drives
Read only
M1006
Output frequency is 0, M1006 On
Read only
M1007
Operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: M1007 Off, REV: M1007On)
Read only
M1008
~
M1010
Reserved
M1011
10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off
Read only
M1012
100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off
Read only
M1013
1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off
Read only
M1014
1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off
Read only
-
16-23
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special
M
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Function
M1015
Frequency attained, M1015=On
Read only
M1016
Parameter read/write error, M1016=On
Read only
M1017
Succeed to write parameter, M1017 =On
Read only
M1018
Reserved
-
M1019
Reserved
-
M1020
Zero flag
Read only
M1021
Borrow flag
Read only
M1022
Carry flag
Read only
M1023
Divisor is 0
Read only
M1024
Reserved
-
M1025
RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive
Read/Write
M1026
The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON)
Read/Write
M1027
AC motor drive reset
Read/Write
M1028
Reserved
-
M1029
Reserved
-
M1030
Reserved
-
M1031
The enforced integral value of PID is D1019
Read/Write
M1032
Reserved
-
M1033
Reserved
-
M1034
Enable CANopen real time control
Read/Write
M1035
Enable internal communication control
Read/Write
M1036
~
M1037
Reserved
M1038
Start counting MI8
Read/Write
M1039
Reset MI8 counting value
Read/Write
M1040
Power On
Read/Write
M1041
Reserved
-
M1042
Quick stop
Read/Write
M1043
Reserved
-
M1044
Halt
Read/Write
M1045
~
M1047
Reserved
M1048
New position
Read/Write
M1049
Reserved
-
M1050
Absolute position/Relative position(0: Relative/1:Absolute)
Read/Write
M1051
Reserved
-
M1052
Frequency Lock
Read/Write
M1053
Reserved
-
M1054
Enforced to reset the absolute position
-
-
16-24
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special
M
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Function
M1055
Home
Read/Write
M1056
Power on ready
Read only
M1057
Reserved
-
M1058
On quick stopping
Read only
M1059
CANopen master setting complete
Read only
M1060
Initializing CANopen slave
Read only
M1061
Initialize CANopen slave failed
Read only
M1062
Reserved
-
M1063
Target torque attained
Read only
M1064
Target position attained
Read only
M1065
Reserved
Read only
M1066
Read/ Write CANopen data complete
Read only
M1067
Read/ Write CANopen data succeed
Read only
M1068
Calendar calculation error
-
M1069
Reserved
-
M1070
Homing complete
Read only
M1071
Home error
Read only
M1072
~
M1075
Reserved
-
M1076
Calendar time error or overtime updating
Read only
M1077
485 Reading & Writing done
Read only
M1078
485 Reading & Writing error
Read only
M1079
485 communication overtime
Read only
16.5.3 Special Registers
Special D
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Function
D1000
Reserved
-
D1001
PLC firmware version
Read only
D1002
Program capacity
Read only
D1003
D1004
~
D1009
D1010
Checksum
Read only
Reserved
-
Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
D1011
Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
D1012
D1013
~
D1019
D1020
Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
Read only
Reserved
-
Output frequency (0.000~600.00Hz)
Read only
16-25
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
D1021
D1022
D1023
Function
Output current (####.#A)
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Read only
The ID of the extension card:
0: no card
1: Relay Card( 6 out )
2: I/O Card ( 4 in 2 out )
3~7: Reserved
The ID of the extension card:
0: no card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Read only
Read only
D1024
~
D1026
D1027
Reserved
-
Frequency command of the PID control
Read only
D1028
The responsive value of AUI AVI (analog voltage input) (0.00~100.00%) Read only
D1029
The responsive value of AUI ACI (analog current input) (0.0~100.00%)
Read only
D1030
D1031
~
D1035
D1036
The corresponding value for AUI (-100.0~100.00%)
Read only
Reserved
-
AC motor drive error code
Read only
D1037
AC motor drive output frequency
Read only
D1038
DC Bus voltage
Read only
D1039
D1040
D1041
~
D1042
Output voltage
Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00~100.00%)
Read only
Read/Write
Reserved
-
D1043
D1044
D1045
D1046
~
D1049
D1050
D1051
~
D1052
D1053
User defined (When Pr.00.04 is set to 28, the register data will be
displayed as C xxx)
Reserved
Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00~100.00%)
Read/Write
Reserved
-
Actual mode
0: Velocity mode
1: Position mode
2: Torque mode
3: Homing mode
Read only
Reserved
-
Actual torque
Read only
D1054
Present count value of MI8(L word)
D1055
Present count value of MI8 (H word)
16-26
Read/Write
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
Function
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Read only
D1056
~
D1059
Reserved
D1060
Mode setting
0: Speed Mode
1: Position Mode
2: Torque Mode
3: Homing Mode
Read/Write
Reserved
Read/Write
Target frequency
Target frequency (operating)
Reference frequency
Target position L
Target position H
Target torque
Random value
Number of internal communication nodes
Synchronous time cycle of internal communication
Internal communication node error
Corresponding on-line bit of internal communication node
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
RW
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
D1061
~
D1069
D1100
D1101
D1102
D1103
D1104
D1105
D1106
D1107
D1108
D1109
D1110
D1111
D1112
D1113
D1114
D1115
D1116
D1117
D1118
D1119
D1120
D1121
D1122
D1123
D1124
D1125
D1126
D1127
D1128
D1129
D1130
D1131
D1132
D1133
D1134
D1135
D1136
D1137
D1138
D1139
D1140
D1141
D1142
D1143
Random value
Control command of internal communication node 0
Mode of internal communication node 0
Reference command L of internal communication node 0
Reference command H of internal communication node 0
Status of internal communication node 0
Reference status L of internal communication node 0
Reference status H of internal communication node 0
Control command of internal communication node 1
Mode of internal communication node 1
Reference command L of internal communication node 1
Reference command H of internal communication node 1
Status of internal communication node 1
Reference status L of internal communication node 1
Reference status H of internal communication node 1
Control command of internal communication node 2
Mode of internal communication node 2
Reference command L of internal communication node 2
Reference command H of internal communication node 2
16-27
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
D1144
D1145
D1146
D1147
D1148
D1149
D1150
D1151
D1152
D1153
D1154
D1155
D1156
D1157
D1158
D1159
D1160
D1161
D1162
D1163
D1164
D1165
D1166
D1167
D1168
D1169
D1170
D1171
D1172
D1173
D1174
D1175
D1176
D1177
D1178
D1179
D1180
D1181
D1182
D1183
D1184
D1185
D1186
D1187
D1188
D1189
D1190
D1191
D1192
D1193
D1194
D1195
D1196
D1197
Function
Status of internal communication node 2
Reference status L of internal communication node 2
Reference status H of internal communication node 2
Control command of internal communication node 3
Mode of internal communication node 3
Reference command L of internal communication node 3
Reference command H of internal communication node 3
Status of internal communication node 3
Reference status L of internal communication node 3
Reference status H of internal communication node 3
Control command of internal communication node 4
Mode of internal communication node 4
Reference command L of internal communication node 4
Reference command H of internal communication node 4
Status of internal communication node 4
Reference status L of internal communication node 4
Reference status H of internal communication node 4
Control command of internal communication node 5
Mode of internal communication node 5
Reference command L of internal communication node 5
Reference command H of internal communication node 5
Status of internal communication node 5
Reference status L of internal communication node 5
Reference status H of internal communication node 5
Control command of internal communication node 6
Mode of internal communication node 6
Reference command L of internal communication node 6
Reference command H of internal communication node 6
Status of internal communication node 6
Reference status L of internal communication node 6
Reference status H of internal communication node 6
Control command of internal communication node 7
Mode of internal communication node 7
Reference command L of internal communication node 7
Reference command H of internal communication node 7
Status of internal communication node 7
Reference status L of internal communication node 7
16-28
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Read only
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Read only
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
D1198
D1199
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Read only
Read only
Function
Reference status H of internal communication node 7
-
CANopen Master Special D (Special D can be written only when PLC is at STOP)
n=0~7
Special D
Power
PDO Failure Factory
R/W
Map Memor Setting
y
Function
D1075
The station which completed CANopen
initialization (bit0=Machine code0 …….)
The station which error occurs during CANopen
initialization (bit0=Machine code0 …….)
Reserved
CANopen station cut off (bit0=Machine
code0 …….)
Error code of master error
0: no error
1: slave setting error
2: synchronous cycle setting error (the setting is
too low)
Reserved
D1076
SDO fault (main index value)
NO
NO
R
D1077
SDO fault (sub-index value)
NO
NO
R
D1078
SDO fault (error code L)
NO
NO
R
D1079
SDO fault (error code H)
NO
NO
R
D1080
D1081
~
D1086
D1087
~
D1089
D1090
Reserved
-
-
-
NO
NO
-
-
NO
YES
4
RW
NO
YES
FFFFH
RW
D1092
Synchronous cycle setting
The station for initialization during initializing
process.
Delay time before initializing
NO
YES
0
RW
D1093
Break off detection time
NO
YES
1000ms
RW
D1094
D1095
~
D1096
Times of Break off detection
NO
YES
3
RW
-
-
NO
YES
1
RW
NO
YES
1
RW
NO
YES
15 sec
RW
D1070
D1071
D1072
D1073
D1074
D1091
D1097
D1098
D1099
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Type of P to P send (PDO)
Setting range: 1~240
Type of P to P received (PDO)
Setting range: 1~240
Delay time of initialization complete
Setting range: 1~60000 sec.
16-29
NO
NO
0
R
NO
NO
0
R
-
-
-
NO
NO
R
NO
NO
-
-
-
0
R
R
-
-
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
Power
PDO Failure Factory
R/W
Map Memor Setting
y
Function
Station number N of a salve station.
D2000+100*n Setting range: 0 ~127
0: CANopen function NOT available
NO
0
YES
RW
C2000 supports up to 8 CANopen protocol slaves; each slave occupies 100 of special D register
and is numbered in 1~8. There are in total of 8 stations.
Slave No.
Slave No. 1
D2000
Station number
D2001
Factory code(L)
~
~
Slave No. 2
D2099
Mapping address 4 (H)of receiving station
D2100
Station number
D2101
Factory code(L)
~
~
D2199
Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station
4
Slave No. 3
D2200
Station number
D2201
Factory code(L)
~
~
D2299
Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station
4
Slave No. 8
D2700
Station number
D2701
Factory code(L)
~
~
D2799
Mapping address 4(H)of receiving station
4
Slave No. 0~7
●: PDOTX, ▲: PDORX, □: To update by a CANFLS command
Special D
D2000+100*n
D2001+100*n
D2002+100*n
D2003+100*n
D2004+100*n
D2005+100*n
Function
Station number of slave No. n
Setting range: 0~127
0: CANopen disable
The category of slave No. n
192H: AC motor drive/ AC servo motor and drive
191H: remote I/O module
Factory code (L) of slave No. n
Factory code (H) of slave No. n
Factory product code (L) of slave No. n
Factory product code (H) of slave No. n
16-30
Pre-defined setting R/W
0
RW
0
R
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Basic definition
Pre-defined
setting
CAN
Index
1
PDO
2 3
0
6007H-0010H
●
●
● RW
0
603FH-0010H
●
●
●
D2008+100*n Control word of slave No. n
0
6040H-0010H
RW
D2009+100*n Status word of slave No. n
0
6041H-0010H
R
D2010+100*n Control mode of slave No. n
2
6060H-0008H
RW
D2011+100*n Actual mode of slave No. n
2
6061H-0008H
R
Pre-defined
Setting
CAN
Index
1
D2012+100*n Target speed of slave No. n
0
6042H-0010H
●
RW
D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave No. n
0
6043H-0010H
●
R
D2014+100*n Speed deviation of slave No. n
0
6044H-0010H
R
D2015+100*n Accel. Time of slave No. n
1000
604FH-0020H
R
D2016+100*n Decel. Time of slave No. n
1000
6050H-0020H
RW
Special D
Function
Treatment for slave No.
communication disconnect
D2007+100*n Error code of slave No. n
n
D2006+100*n
R/W
4
R
Speed Control
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
Function
PDO
2 3
R/W
4
Torque control
Slave No. 0~7
Special D
Pre-defined
CAN
Setting
Index
0
6071H-0010H
Function
D2017+100*n Target torque of slave No. n
D2018+100*n Actual torque of slave No. n
0
6077H-0010H
D2019+100*n Actual current of slave No. n
0
6078H-0010H
PDO
2 3
1
R/W
4
●
RW
R
●
R
Position control
Slave No. 0~7
D2020+100*n Target position(L) of slave No. n
Pre-defined
Setting
0
D2021+100*n Target position(H) of slave No. n
0
D2022+100*n Actual position(L) of slave No. n
0
D2023+100*n Actual position(H) of slave No. n
0
D2024+100*n Speed diagram(L) of slave No. n
10000
D2025+100*n Speed diagram (H) of slave No. n
0
Special D
Function
16-31
CAN
Index
1
PDO
2 3
607AH-0020H
●
6064H-0020H
●
6081H-0020H
4
R/W
RW
RW
R
R
RW
RW
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
20XXH address corresponds to MI MO AI AO.
Slave No. n=0~7
D2026+100*n MI status of slave No. n
Pre-defined
CAN
Setting
Index
0
2026H-0110H
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave No. n
0
2026H-4110H
●
RW
D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-6110H
●
RW
D2029+100*n AI2 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-6210H
●
RW
D2030+100*n AI3 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-6310H
●
RW
D2031+100*n AO1 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-A110H
●
RW
D2032+100*n AO2 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-A210H
●
RW
D2033+100*n AO3 status of slave No. n
0
2026H-A310H
●
RW
Special D
Function
1
PDO
2 3
●
Setting of the PDO mapping length
Special D
Pre-defined
Setting
Function
R/W
D2034+100*n Transmission setting of slave No. n
000AH
RW
D2067+100*n Receiving setting of slave No. n
0000H
RW
16.5.4 Communication Address for PLC Devices
Device
Range
Type
Address (Hex)
X
00~17 (Octal)
bit
0400~040F
Y
00~17 (Octal)
bit
0500~050F
T
00~159
bit/word
0600~069F
M
000~799
bit
0800~0B1F
M
1000~1079
bit
0BE8~0C37
C
0~79
bit/word
0E00~0E47
D
00~399
word
1000~118F
D
1000~1099
word
13E8~144B
D
2000~2799
word
17D0~1AEF
16-32
4
R/W
RW
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Function Code
Function Code
Description
Supported Devices
01
Read coil status
02
Read input status
X,Y,M,T,C
03
Read one data
T,C,D
05
Force changing one coil status
Y,M,T,C
06
Write in one data
T,C,D
0F
Force changing multiple coil status
Y,M,T,C
10
Write in multiple data
T,C,D
Y, M, T, C
Only when PLC is at Stop status, PLC data can be read/write via communication device. When PLC
is at Run status, the communication address should be the mapping address, e.g. for Pr.04-00 it
maps to 0400H.
NOTE
When PLC function is activated, C2000 can Read/Write the PLC and drive’s parameter by different
addresses (pre-defined station number for the AC motor drive is 1, for PLC station number is 2)
16-33
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.6 Commands
16.6.1 Basic Commands
Commands
Commands
LD
LDI
AND
ANI
OR
ORI
ANB
ORB
MPS
MRD
MPP
Function
Load contact A
Load contact B
Series connection with A contact
Series connection with B contact
Parallel connection with A contact
Parallel connection with B contact
Series connects the circuit block
Parallel connects the circuit block
Save the operation result
Read the operation result (the pointer is not moving)
Read the result
Operands
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
------
Output Command
Commands
OUT
SET
RST
Function
Drive coil
Action latched (ON)
Clear the contacts or the registers
Operands
Y, M
Y, M
Y, M, T, C, D
Timer and Counter
Commands
TMR
CNT
Function
Operands
T-K or T-D
C-K or C-D（16 bit）
16-bit timer
16-bit counter
Main Control Command
Commands
MC
MCR
Function
Connect the common series connection contacts
Operands
N0~N7
Disconnect the common series connection contacts
N0~N7
Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact
Commands
LDP
LDF
ANDP
ANDF
ORP
ORF
Function
Rising-edge detection operation starts
Falling-edge detection operation starts
Rising-edge detection series connection
Falling-edge detection series connection
Rising-edge detection parallel connection
Falling-edge detection parallel connection
Operands
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands
Commands
PLS
PLF
Function
Rising-edge output
Falling-edge output
Operands
Y, M
Y, M
Function
Operands
--
End Command
Commands
END
Program end
16-34
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Other Command
Commands
NOP
INV
P
Function
Operands
--P
No function
Inverse operation result
Indicator
16.6.2 Explanation for the Command
Mnemonic
LD
Operand
Function
Load A contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
L The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Example
Ladder diagram
X0
Command code
X1
LD
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Y1
Mnemonic
LDI
Operand
Operation
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Load B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Example
Ladder diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
16-35
Command code:
Operation:
LDI
X0
Load contact B of X0
AND
X1
Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
AND
Function
Series connection- A contact
Operand
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
Example
LDI
X1
Load contact B of
X1
AND
X0
Connect to contact
A of X0 in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
ANI
Operand
Function
Series connection- B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X1
X0
Y1
Mnemonic
OR
Operand
LD
X1
ANI
X0
OUT
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of
X1
Connect to contact
B of X0 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Parallel connection- A contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
16-36
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Example
Y1
LD
X0
OR
X1
OUT
Y1
X1
Mnemonic
ORI
Operand
Load contact A of
X0
Connect to contact
A of X1 in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Parallel connection- B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
ORI
X1
OUT
Y1
X0
Y1
X1
Mnemonic
ANB
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact B of
X1 in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
None
Operand
To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
ANB
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ORI
X2
X2
X3
LDI
X1
Block A
Block B
OR
X3
ANB
OUT
Mnemonic
ORB
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact B of
X2 in parallel
Load contact B of X1
Connect to contact A of
X3 in parallel
Connect circuit block in
series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
None
Operand
ORB is to perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results
and contents of the accumulative register.
16-37
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
X2
X1 Block A
Y1
LD
X0
ANI
X1
X3
LDI
X2
AND
X3
ORB
Block B
ORB
OUT
Mnemonic
MPS
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact B of
X1 in series
Load contact B of X2
Connect to contact A of
X3 in series
Connect circuit block in
parallel
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Store the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pluses 1)
Mnemonic
MRD
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesn’t move)
Mnemonic
MPP
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer
will decrease 1)
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
X0
MPS
LD
X1
AND
X1
M0
OUT
Y1
Y2
MRD
END
AND
X2
OUT
M0
Y2
Read from the stack
Drive Y2 coil
X2
MPP
Load contact A of X0
Save in stack
Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Read from the stack
(without moving
pointer)
Connect to contact A of
X2 in series
Drive M0 coil
Y1
MRD
X0
Operation:
MPS
MPP
OUT
END
16-38
End program
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
OUT
Operand
Function
Output coil
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
－
－
－
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Motion of coil contact:
OUT command
Contact
Operation
result
Example
Coil
A contact
B contact (normally closed)
(normally open)
Non-continuity
Continuity
Continuity
Non-continuity
Command code: Operation:
FALSE
Off
TRUE
On
Ladder diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
SET
Operand
LD
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Load contact B of X0
Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Latch (ON)
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
－
－
－
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will
keep “ON” whether the SET command is still driven.
You can use the RST command
to set the device to “OFF”.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
Y0
SET
Y1
Mnemonic
RST
Operand
LD
X0
AN
Y0
SET
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact B of
Y0 in series
Y1 latch (ON)
Function
Clear the contacts or the registers
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device
Status
Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
Y, M
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil
T, C
and contact will be set to “OFF.”
The
content value will be set to 0.
D
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device is unchanged.
16-39
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram
X0
RST
Y5
Mnemonic
TMR
Operand
Operation:
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
RST
Y5
Clear contact Y5
Function
16-bit timer
T-K
T0~T159, K0~K32,767
T-D
T0~T159, D0~D399
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value),
the contact will be as following
NO(Normally Open)
Open
contact
NC(Normally Closed)
collector
contact
Close
collector
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device remains
unchanged.
Example
Ladder Diagram:
Command code:
X0
TMR
T5
K1000
LD
TMR
Mnemonic
CNT
Operand
Function
Clear contact or register
C-K
C0~C79, K0~K32,767
C-D
C0~C79, D0~D399
16-40
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
X0
T5
Setting of T5 counter
K1000 is K1000.
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
When the CNT command is executed from OFFON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the
contact is as follows:
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Close) contact
collector
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting
values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
CNT
C2
K100
Mnemonic
MC/MCR
Operand
CNT
Operation
X0
Load contact A of
Setting of C2 counter is
C2 K100
K100.
Function
Master control Start/Reset
N0~N7
1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is
described as follows:
Command
Timer
Accumulative timer
Subroutine timer
Counter
Description
The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and
the contact are both turned OFF
The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
contact stay at their present condition
The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and
contact are turned OFF.
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT
All turned OFF
command
Devices driven up by the SET
Stay at present condition
and RST commands
All of them are not acted , but the nest loop
FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for
Application commands
times defined by users even though the MC-MCR
commands is OFF.
16-41
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the
main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the
MCR command.
3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program support the nest program
structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~
N7, and refer to the following:
Example
Command code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
MC
N0
X1
Y0
X2
MC
N1
X3
LD
X0
Load A contact of X0
MC
N0
LD
X1
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
Load A contact of X1
OUT
Y0
Drive Y0 coil
X2
Load A contact of X2
N1
Enable N1 common
series connection
contact
:
Y1
LD
MCR
Operation:
N1
MCR
N0
MC
MC
N0
LD
X3
Load A contact of X3
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
N1
Disable N1 common
series connection
contact
N0
Disable N0 common
series connection
contact
X10
Load A contact of X10
X10
X11
Y10
:
MCR
N0
MCR
:
MCR
:
LD
MC
LD
N0
X11
OUT
Y10
:
MCR
Mnemonic
LDP
Operand
N0
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
Load A contact of X0
Enable N0 common
series connection
contact
Load A contact of X1
Drive Y0 coil
Function
Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
16-42
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example
Remarks
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
Start X0 rising-edge
LDP
X0
X0
X1
detection
Y1
Series connection A
X1
AND
contact of X1
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Please refer to the specification of each model series for the applicable range of
operands.
If rising-edge status is ON when PLC power is off, then the rising-edge status will be
TRUE when PLC power is on.
Mnemonic
LDF
Operand
Function
Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is
used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the
acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
Mnemonic
ANDP
Operand
LDF
X0
AND
X1
OUT
Y1
Operation:
Start X0 falling-edge
detection
Series connection A
contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Rising-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ANDP
X1
OUT
16-43
Y1
Operation:
Load A contact of X0
X1 rising-edge
detection in series
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
ANDF
Operand
Function
Falling-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X1
Y1
LD
X0
ANDF
X1
OUT
Mnemonic
ORP
Operand
Y1
Operation:
Load A contact of X0
X1 falling-edge
detection in series
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Rising-edge parallel connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s
rising-edge detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
LD
X0
Y1
ORP
X1
OUT
Mnemonic
ORF
Operand
X0
X1
Y1
Operation:
Load A contact of X0
X1 rising-edge
detection in parallel
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Function
Falling-edge parallel connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge
detection.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
Y1
LD
ORF
X1
OUT
16-44
X0
X1
Y1
Operation:
Load A contact of X0
X1 falling-edge
detection in parallel
connection
Drive Y1 coil
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
PLS
Function
Rising-edge output
Operand
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
－
－
－
When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time needed for one scan cycle.
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
Example
LD
X0
PLS
M0
SET
Y0
PLS
M0
Timing diagram:
Operation:
X0
Load A contact of X0
M0
M0 rising-edge output
LD
M0
SET
Y0
Load the contact A of
M0
Y0 latched (ON)
X0
Time for one scan cycle
M0
Y0
Mnemonic
PLF
Function
Falling-edge output
Operand
X0~X17
Y0~Y17
M0~M799
T0~159
C0~C79
D0~D399
－
－
－
－
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0
will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
Example
X0
X0
Load contact A of X0
PLS
M0
PLF
M0
SET
Y0
LD
M0
M0 falling-edge output
Load contact A of M0
SET
Y0
Y0 latched (ON)
M0
Timing Diagram:
X0
M0
LD
Time for one scan cycle
Y0
16-45
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
END
Function
Program End
None
Operand
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or
command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after the
execution it will return to address 0 and scan again.
Mnemonic
NOP
Function
No action
None
Operand
NOP command does no operation in the program; the result of executing this
command will remain the logic operation. Use NOP command if user wants to delete
Example
certain command without changing the length of the program.
Command code: Operation:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
Load contact B of X0
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is
displayed.
X0
NOP
OUT
No function
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Y1
Mnemonic
INV
NOP
Function
Inverse operation result
None
Operand
The operation result (before executing INV command) will be saved inversely into
cumulative register.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
X0
Y1
X0
INV
OUT
16-46
Y1
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Operation result
inversed
Drive Y1 coil
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Mnemonic
P
Function
Indicator
P0~P255
Operand
Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0.
Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used
twice or serious error would occur.
Example
Command code:
Ladder diagram:
LD
CJ
X0
CJ
P10
X1
P10
X0
P10
Operation:
Load contact A of X0
Skip command CJ to
P10
:
Y1
Indicator P10
P10
LD
X1
Load contact A of X1
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
16.6.3 Description of the Application Commands
API
Mnemonic Codes
P
16-bit
32-bit
Command
01
CALL
-
02
06
10
SRET
FEND
CMP
-
11
Function
STEPS
16bit
32bit
CALL subroutine
3
-
DCMP
The end of subroutine
The end of main program
Compare
1
1
7
13
ZCP
DZCP
Zone compare
9
17
12
MOV
DMOV
Data Move
5
9
15
BMOV
DCMP
7
20
ADD
–
13
21
SUB
DADD
22
MUL
DSUB
23
DIV
DMUL
24
INC
DDIV
25
DEC
DINC
30
ROR
DDEC
Block move
Perform the addition of BIN
data
Perform the subtraction of
BIN data
Perform the multiplication
of BIN data
Perform the division of BIN
data
Perform the addition of 1
Perform the subtraction of
1
Rotate to the right
ROL
ZRST
DROR
Data
31
40
Processing
49
FLT
DFLT
Communication
150
MODRW
–
Floating Point
110
–
DECMP
Loop control
Transmission
Comparison
Four
Fundamental
Operations of
Arithmetic
Rotation and
Displacement
–
–
16-47
7
7
7
7
3
3
13
13
13
5
5
5
–
Rotate to the left
Zero Reset
5
5
–
-
Floating Point
5
9
MODBUS R/W
7
–
Floating Point Compare
–
13
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
Operation
111
Operation
Calendar
Gray code
Contact type
logic
operation
16-bit
–
32-bit
P
Function
Command
DEZCP
Floating Point Zone
Compare
STEPS
16bit
32bit
–
17
116
–
DRAD
Degree → Radian
–
9
117
–
DDEG
Radian → Degree
–
9
120
–
DEADD
Floating Point Addition
–
13
121
–
DESUB
Floating Point Subtraction
–
13
122
–
DEMUL
Floating Point Multiplication
–
13
123
–
DEDIV
Floating Point Division
–
13
124
–
DEXP
Float Exponent Operation
–
9
Float Natural Logarithm
–
9
125
Floating Point
Mnemonic Codes
–
DLN
Operation
127
–
DESQR
Floating Point Square Root
–
9
129
–
DINT
Float to Integer
–
9
130
–
DSIN
Sine
–
9
131
–
DCOS
Cosine
–
9
132
–
DTAN
Tangent
–
9
133
–
DASIN
Arc Sine
–
9
134
–
DACOS
Arc Cosine
–
9
135
–
DATAN
Art Tangent
–
9
136
–
DSINH
Hyperbolic Sine
–
9
137
–
DCOSH
Hyperbolic Cosine
–
9
138
–
DTANH
Hyperbolic Tangent
–
9
160
TCMP
–
Comparison of calendar
11
–
161
TZCP
9
–
162
TADD
–
Calendar data addition
7
–
163
TSUB
–
Calendar data subtraction
7
–
166
TRD
–
Read calendar data
3
–
170
GRY
DGRY
BIN→GRY code
171
GBIN
DGBIN
215
LD&
DLD&
-
5
9
216
LD|
DLD|
-
5
9
217
LD^
DLD^
-
5
9
218
AND&
DAND&
-
5
9
219
ANDl
DANDl
-
GRY code →BIN
Contact Logical Operation
LD#
Contact type logic
operation LD＃
Contact Logical Operation
LD#
Contact Logical Operation
AND#
Contact Logical Operation
5
9
data
–
Comparison of calendar
data area
16-48
AND#
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
Contact Type
Comparison
Mnemonic Codes
P
Function
16-bit
32-bit
Command
220
AND^
DAND^
-
221
OR&
DOR&
-
222
OR|
DOR|
-
223
OR^
DOR^
-
224
LD＝
DLD＝
-
AND#
Contact Logical Operation
OR＃
Contact Logical Operation
OR＃
Contact Logical Operation
OR＃
Load Compare LD※
225
LD＞
DLD＞
-
226
LD＜
DLD＜
228
LD＜＞
229
STEPS
16bit
32bit
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
5
9
Load Compare LD※
5
9
-
Load Compare LD※
5
9
DLD＜＞
-
Load Compare LD※
5
9
LD＜＝
DLD＜＝
-
Load Compare LD※
5
9
230
LD＞＝
DLD＞＝
-
Load Compare LD※
5
9
232
AND＝
DAND＝
-
AND Compare※
5
9
233
AND＞
DAND＞
-
AND Compare※
5
9
234
AND＜
DAND＜
-
AND Compare※
5
9
236
AND＜＞ DAND＜＞
-
AND Compare※
5
9
237
AND＜＝ DAND＜＝
-
AND Compare※
5
9
238
AND＞＝ DAND＞＝
-
AND Compare※
5
9
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
OR compare
5
5
5
5
5
5
9
9
9
9
9
9
Contact Logical Operation
240
241
242
244
245
246
OR＝
OR＞
OR＜
OR＜＞
OR＜＝
OR＞＝
DOR＝
DOR＞
DOR＜
DOR＜＞
DOR＜＝
DOR＞＝
-
Comparison of
275
-
FLD＝
-
-
9
floating-point
276
-
FLD＞
-
-
9
277
-
FLD＜
-
Comparison of
-
9
278
-
FLD＜＞
-
floating-point LD※
-
9
279
-
FLD＜＝
-
-
9
280
-
FLD＞＝
-
-
9
281
-
FAND＝
-
-
9
282
-
FAND＞
-
-
9
283
-
FAND＜
-
Comparison of
-
9
284
-
FAND＜＞
-
floating-point AND※
-
9
285
-
FAND＜＝
-
-
9
286
-
FAND＞＝
-
-
9
287
-
FOR＝
-
Comparison of
-
9
288
-
FOR＞
-
floating-point OR※
-
9
289
-
FOR＜
-
-
9
16-49
※
※
※
※
※
※
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
Mnemonic Codes
P
16-bit
32-bit
Command
290
-
FOR＜＞
291
-
292
Function
STEPS
16bit
32bit
-
-
9
FOR＜＝
-
-
9
-
FOR＞＝
-
-
9
139
RPR
–
Read the parameters
5
–
140
WPR
–
Write the parameters
5
–
Special
141
FPID
–
Drive PID control
9
–
command for
142
FREQ
–
Control the drive frequency
7
–
AC motor
261
CANRX
–
Read CANopen Slave data
9
-
drive
263
TORQ
–
Set target torque
5
-
264
CANTX
–
9
-
265
CANFLS
–
Write CANopen Slave data
Update the mapping
special D of CANopen
3
-
16-50
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.6.4 Explanation for the Application Commands
API
CALL
01
Bit Devices
X
Y M
Operands:
K
Call Subroutine
S
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
C
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
CALLP
D CALL
32-bit command
－
－
S: Operand S can designate P.
Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63.
Explanation
－
－
Flag signal: None
1. S: The pointer of call subroutine.
2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction.
3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer
number with no limit of times.
4. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If
entering the sixth level, the subroutine won’t be executed.)
API
Bit Devices
X
Y M
The end of the main program (First End)
－
FEND
06
K
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
C
Operands:
16-bit command (1 STEP)
－
D FEND
No operand
32-bit command
－
－
No contact to drive the instruction is required.
Flag signal: None
Explanation
1.
－
－
－
This instruction denotes the end of the main program. It has the same function
as that of END instruction when being executed by PLC.
2.
CALL must be written after FEND instruction and add SRET instruction in the
end of its subroutine. Interruption program has to be written after FEND
instruction and IRET must be added in the end of the service program.
3.
If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption
service programs between the final FEND and END instruction.
4.
After CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in
errors in the program.
16-51
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
When X1=ON,
operation
procedure
CALL
Command
Main Program
When X1=OFF,
operation
procedure
X1
CALL
P63
Main Program
Main Program
P63
CALL Sub command
program
Main Program
16-52
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
10
D
CMP
S1
S2
Compare
D
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
＊
S2
＊ ＊
D
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
C
＊
＊
Operand
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
Explanation
Example
D 16-bit command ( 7 STEPS)
CMPP
＊ CMP
＊
32bits command (13 STEPS)
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: None
1.
S1: value comparsion 1, S2: value comparison 2 , D: result comparison
2.
3.
The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and result is stored in D.
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values
are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison
will regard the value as negative binary values.
Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2
will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0,
Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.
If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series
parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
1.
2.
3.
X10
CMP
K10
D10
Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
4.
If K10 S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the
lower/upper bound.
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two
values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or
b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as
negative binary values.
Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and
M2.
When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and
M2 will be On. When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and
M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.
If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a
series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
X0
ZCP
K10
K100
C10
M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
M2
4.
If K10 =
< C10 =
< K100, M1 = On
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.
X0
X0
RST
M0
RST
M1
RST
M2
16-54
ZRST
M0
M2
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
12
D
MOV
S
Moving the data
D
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S
D
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊
C
＊
＊
Operand: None
Explanation
Example
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MOV
MOVP
D
＊
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
＊
－
－
－
Flag signal: None
－
1.
S: Source of data
2.
When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly
to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains
unchanged.
1.
When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the
value K10 will be moved to D10 data register.
When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the
present value T0 will be moved to D10 data register.
2.
D: Destination of data
X0
MOV
K10
D0
MOV
T0
D10
X1
16-55
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
BMOV
15
S
Bit Devices
X Y M K
S
D
＊
n
Operand:
Range of n ＝1~512
Explanation
Example
1
D
Block Move
n
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D 16-bit command (7 STEPS)
BMOVP
＊ BMOV
＊
32-bit command
－
－
－
Flag signal: None
1.
S: Start of source devices
be moved
D: Start of destination devices
2.
The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be
moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the
actual number of available source devices, only the devices that fall within the
valid range will be used.
~ D23.
D20
K4
D0
D1
D20
D21
D22
D23
D2
D3
2
n: Number of data to
When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20
X10
Example
－
n=4
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the
number of digits of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
M1000
D0
D20
K4
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
16-56
M8
M9
Y10
Y11
M10
M11
Y12
Y13
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two
operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the
designated device numbers.
Example
3
When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as →→
X10
BMOV D20
D19
K3
1
2
3
D20
D21
D22
D19
D20
D21
When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as →→
X11
API
20
D
ADD
S1
D
S2
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊
K3
D10
D11
D12
3
2
1
D11
D12
D13
BIN Addition
C
＊
＊
＊
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
ADD
ADDP
D
＊
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
＊
－
－
－
＊
－
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
1.
S1: Summand
2.
3.
This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
addition, e.g. 3 (-9) -6.
Flag changes in binary addition
16-bit command:
A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
4.
Example
D11
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
＊
S2
D
Operands: None
Explanation
BMOV D10
S2: Addend
D: Sum
16-bit command:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be
stored in D20.
X0
ADD
D0
16-57
D10
D20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Remarks
Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:
Zero flag
16 bit: Zero flag
-2, -1, 0
-32,768
Borrow flag
-1, 0
API
21
D
SUB
S1
Explanation
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊
1
0
1 2
Carry flag
Zero flag
2,147,483,647 0 1 2
The highest bit
of the data
= 0 (positive)
Carry flag
Subtraction
C
＊
＊
＊
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
SUB
SUBP
D
＊
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
＊
－
－
－
＊
－
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
1.
S1: Minuend
2.
3.
This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
subtraction.
Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
4.
Example
D
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
＊
S2
D
Operands: None
-1, 0
The highest bit
of the data
= 1 (negative)
S2
32,767
Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648
Borrow flag
1
The highest bit
of the data
= 0 (positive)
The highest bit
of the data
= 1 (negative)
32 bit: Zero flag
Zero flag
S2: Subtrahend
D: Remainder
In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will
be stored in D20.
X0
SUB
D0
16-58
D10
D20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
22
D
MUL
S1
S2
BIN Multiplication
D
P
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
MUL
MULP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S2
－
－
－
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
D
Operands:
Flag signal: None
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
Explanation
1.
2.
－
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplication
D: Product
This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit
and 32-bit operations.
16-bit command:
S1
S2
b15..........b0
b15..........b0
D
X
b15 is a symbol bit
+1
D
b31..........b16b15..............b0
=
b15 is a symbol bit
b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.
Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit
result, occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.
Example
The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The
higher 16-bit are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the
most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.
X0
MUL
D0
D10
MUL
D0
D10 K8M0
16-59
D20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
23
D
DIV
S1
S2
D
P
BIN Division
Bit Devices
Word Devices
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
DIV
DIVP
X Y M K
H KnX KnY KnM T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
S2
－
－
－
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
D
Flag signal: none`
Operands:
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor
D: Quotient and remainder
Explanation 1.
2.
－
This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be
careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and
32-bit operations.
16-bit instruction:
Quotient
Remainder
+1
/
=
If D is the bit device, it allocates K1~K14 to 16-bit and occupies 2 continuous sets
of quotient and remainder.
Example
When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10; the quotient will be stored in D20 and
remainder in D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative value of the
result.
X0
DIV
D0
D10
D20
DIV
D0
D10
K4Y0
16-60
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
24
D
INC
Bit Devices
X Y M K
D
Operands: none
Increment: BIN plus 1
D
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊
C
＊
D
＊
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
INC
INCP
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: none
Explanation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Example
D: Destination device
If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the
designated device D will plus “1” in every scan period whenever the
instruction is executed.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).
In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP
16-61
D0
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
25
D
DEC
Decrement: BIN minus 1
D
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
D
Operands: none
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
C
D
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
DEC
DECP
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: none
Explanation
D: Destination
1. If the command is not a pulse execution type, the content in the designated
device D will minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is
executed.
2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).
3. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation,
-2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.
Example
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.
X0
DECP
16-62
D0
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
ROR
30
D
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
Rotate to the Right
n
P
Word Devices
K
H KnX KnY KnM T
C
D
16 bit command (5 STEPS)
ROR
RORP
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
D
32-bit command
＊ ＊
n
－
－
－
－
Operands:
Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit)
1. D: Device to be rotated
n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanation
2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).
Example
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
RORP D10
K4
Rotate to the right
upper bit
lower bit
Carry
flag
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
upper bit
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
*
16-63
0
Carry
flag
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
31
ROL
D
Rotate to the Left
n
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊ ＊
＊
D
＊
n
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit)
Explanation
1.
2.
3.
Example
C
＊
D
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ROL
ROLP
32-bit command
－
－
－
Flag signal: M1022
－
Carry flag
D: Device to be rotated; n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for
n bits.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
D10
K4
Rotate to the left
upper bit
lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Carry
flag
upper bit
1
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
lower bit
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry
flag
16-64
D10
D10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
40
ZRST
D1
Zero Reset
D2
P
Bit Devices
Word Devices
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T
＊ ＊
＊
D1
＊ ＊
＊
D2
Operands:
No of D1 operand. ≦No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type
C
＊
＊
D 16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ZRSTP
＊ ZRST
＊
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
D2: End device of the range to be reset
Explanation D1: Start device of the range to be reset
When D1 > D2, only operands designated by D2 will be reset.
1. When X0 = On, auxiliary relays M300 ~ M399 will be reset to Off.
Example
2. When X1 = On, 16 counters C0 ~ C127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact
and coil being reset to Off).
3. When X10 = On, timers T0 ~ T127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil
being reset to Off).
4. When X3 = On, data registers D0 ~ D100 will be reset to 0.
X0
ZRST
M300
M399
ZRST
C0
C127
ZRST
T0
T127
ZRST
D0
D100
X1
X10
X3
Remarks
1.
Devices, e.g. bit devices Y, M, S and Word Devices T, C, D, can use RST
instruction.
2.
API 16 FMOV instruction is also to send K0 to Word Devices T, C, D or bit
registers KnY, KnM, KnS for reset.
X0
16-65
RST
M0
RST
T0
RST
Y0
FMOV
K0
D10
K5
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
49
FLT
D
Floating Point
P
Bit Devices
X
S
D
Y
＊
＊
M
＊
＊
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
Operands:
No of D1 operand. ≦No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type
DFLT
DFLTP
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
Explanation
Example
S: source device. D: Device for storing the conversion result
Change the integral number of BIN to a number with two decimal places.
1. When X11 = On, change the corresponding integral number to the floating point
notation and put them into D20 and D21.
16-66
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
MODRW
150
MODBUS R/W
P
Bit Devices
X
D1
D2
Y
M
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
Operands:
No of D1 operand. ≦No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MODRW
P
MODRW
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Flag signal:M1077 M1078 M1079
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
16-67
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Explanation
S1: Addres of the connecting device. S2: Communication function code. S3:
Address to read data. S: Register to read and write data.
Before using this command, set COM1 to be controlled by PLC(Set Pr09-31 =
-12). Then set the corresponding comunication speed and format(Set Pr09-01
and Pr09-04). S2: Communication function code. This command only supports
the function codes in the table below.
Function
Description
02
Input read
03
Read Word
06
Write a single Word.
0F
Write multiple coil
10
Write a single word
Once the command is executed, M1077, M1078 and M1079 will become zero.
Here is an example of when C2000 wants to control another motor drive and a
PLC with station number 20.
To control a slave motor drive
MODRW COMMAND
No.
1
2
3
4
Example
Read Pr01-00 ~ Pr01-03, four data
and save the read data in D0 to D3.
Read motor drive’s address from
H2100 ~ H2104, total 3 data and save
the read data in D5 ~ D7.
Write into Pr05-00 ~ Pr01-03, total 3
data, the value to write into are D10 ~
D2
Write into motor drive’s address
H2000~H2104, total 2 data, the value
to write into are D15~D16.
16-68
S1
S2
S3
S4
n
Station Function AddrLeng
Register
#
Code
ess
-th
K10
H3
H100
D0
K4
K10
H3
H2100
D5
K3
K10
H10
H500
D10
K3
K10
H10
H2000
D15
K2
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
To control the slave PLC
MODRW COMMAND
S1
S2
S3
Station Function Addcode
ress
#
No.
Example
1
Read X0~X3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in bit 0~3 of D0..
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Read Y0~Y3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in bit 0~3 of D1.
Read M0~M3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in bit 0~3 of D2..
Read T0~T3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in bit 0~3 of D3..
Read C0~C3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in bit 0~3 of D4..
Read T0~T3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in D10~D13...
Read C0~C3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in D20~D23.
Read D0~D3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and
save the data read in D30~D33.
Write into Y0~Y3 of slave PLC, total 4 data .
The values to write in are bit0~3 of D1.
S4
n
Registe
Length
r
K20
H2
H400
D0
K4
K20
H2
H500
D1
K4
K20
H2
H800
D2
K4
K20
H2
H600
D3
K4
K20
H2
HE00
D4
K4
K20
H3
H600
D10
K4
K20
H3
HE00
D20
K4
K20
H3
H1000
D30
K4
K20
HF
H500
D1
K4
K20
HF
H800
D2
K4
K20
HF
H600
D3
K4
K20
HF
HE00
D4
K4
K20
H10
H600
D10
K4
K20
H10
HE00
D20
K4
K20
H10
H1000
D30
K4
Write into M0~M3 of slave PLC, total 4
10
data . The values to write in are bit0~3 of
D2.
11
12
13
14
15
Write into T0~T3 of slave PLC, total 4 data.
The values to write in are bit0~3 of D3.
Write into C0~C3 of slave PLC, total 4 data.
The values to write in are bit0~3 of D4.
Write into T0~T3 of slave PLC, total 4 data.
The values to write in are D10~D13.
Write into C0~C3 of slave PLC, total 4 data.
The values to write in are D20~D23.
Write into D0~D3 of slave PLC, total 4 data.
The values to write in are D30~D33.
16-69
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example
As the PLC starts to run, M0 = ON will be triggered, and a MODRW command will be
executed.
If the command is correct and once a reply is sent from the slave, a ROL command will be
executed, and then M1 will be ON again.
Once a reply is sent from the salve, M50=1 will be triggered after PLC’s scanning cycle is
delayed by 10 times, then a MODRW command will be executed.
If the command is correct and once a reply is sent from the slave, a ROL command will be
executed, and then M2 will be ON again. Since M2 is repeated, so it changes K4M0 to K1,
then only M0=1, this command will repeat itself.. If more commands need to be added, simply
add blue color command and change repeat M to repeat Mn+1
16-70
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
110 D
DECMP
Floating Point Compare
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
D
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
－
－
－
32-bit command
DECMP
Operands:
D Operands occupy three continuous points.
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
Explanation
－
DECMPP
S1：Binary floating point number comparison value 1. S2：Binary floating point
number comparison value 2. D: Comparison result,.three continuous points are
occupied.
Comparison of the binary floating point number comparison value and binary
floating point number comparison value 2. Comparison result (＞, ＝, ＜）is
shown at D.
If the source operands of S1 or S2 are assigned constants K or H, a command will
change those constants to binary floating point numbers to make comparison.
Example
When assgined device is M10, then M10~M12 are automatically occupied.
When X0 = On, DCMP execute a command, One of M10 ~ M12 will be On. But
when X0 = Off, DECMP doen’t execute any command, M10 ~ M12 remains the
same status as before X0 = Off.
If you need to have results such as ≧, ≦ or ≠, make M10~ M12 paralllel
connection.
Use the RST or ZRST command to clean the results.
X0
DECMP
M10
M11
M12
D0
D100
M10
When (D1D0)>(D101D100), M10= On
When (D1D0)=(D101D100)m ,M11= On
When (D1D0)<(D101D100)\, M11 =On
16-71
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
111 D
DEZCP
Floating Point Zone Compare
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
S
D
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
D
＊
＊
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
DEZCP
Operands:
DEZCPP
Flag signal: none
DOperands occupy three continuous points
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
Explanation
S1：The lower limit of a binary floating poiont number of a zone comparison. S2：
The upper limit of a binary floating point number of a zone comparison. D:
Comparison result,.three continuous points are occupied.
S1：Binary floating point number comparison value. Compare S to the S1 binary
floating point number lower limit and to the S2 binary floating point number upper
limit. Show the comparison result at D.
If the source operands of S1 or S2 are assigned constants K or H, a command will
change those constants to binary floating point numbers to make comparison.
When the binary floaring point number lower limit S1 is bigger than the binary
floating point number upper limit S2. Then a command uses the binary floating
point number lower limit S1 as upper/lower limit to make comparison.
Example
When assgined device is M0, then M10~M12 are automatically occupied.
When X0 = On, DCMP execute a command, One of M10 ~ M12 will be On. But
when X0 = Off, DECMP doen’t execute any command, M10 ~ M12 remains the
same status as before X0 = Off.
Use the RST or ZRST command to clean the results
X0
DEZCP
M0
M1
D0
D10
D20
M0
When (D1D0) > (D21D20) , M0 = On
When (D1D0) ≤ (D21D20) ≤ (D11D10), M1= On
M2
When (D21, D20) > (D11D10), M2= On
16-72
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
RAD
116 D
Degree → Radian
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
Example
－
32-bit command
DRAD
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DRADP
S：source of the data (degree). D：result of the changes (radian).
Use the following formula to change degree to radian.
Radian＝Degree × (π/180)
When X0 = On, assign the degree of binary floating point number (D11, D10).
Once the dregree is chaned to radian, save it in the (D11, D10), the value is a
binary floating poiont number.
X0
DRAD
D0
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
D10
Degree
16-73
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
DEG
117 D
Radian → Degree
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DDEG
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
Example
－
DDEGP
S：source of the data (Radian). D：result of the changes (Degree).
Use the following formula to change radian to degree.
Degree = Radian x (180/π)
When X0 = On, assign the degree of binary floating point number (D1, D0). Once
the dregree is chaned to radian, save it in the (D11, D10), the value is a binary
X0
DDEG
D0
D10
floating point number.
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
Radian
Degree =( Radian x 180 / )
16-74
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
EADD
120 D
Floating Point Addition
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
DEADD
DEADDP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
S1：augend,
S1 S1 S2 D. The floating point value in S1 and S2 are added and the result
S2：addend,
D：sum
is stored in D. All calculation are done using binary floating poiont number.
If the source operand S1 or S2 is specified as constant K or H, the constant will
automatically be converted to binary floating point value for the addition
operation.
S1 and S2 can designate the same register. In this case, if the instruction is specified
as “continuous execution instruction” (generally DEADDP instruction) and the drive
contact is ON,the register will be added once in every scan.
Example
When X0 = On, the sum of binary floating point number (D1, D0) + binary floating
point number (D3, D2) will be saved in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD
D0
D2
D10
When X2 = On, the sum of binary floating point number
X2
DEADD
D10
K1234
16-75
D20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
121 D
ESUB
Floating Point Subtraction
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
DESUB
DESUBP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Subtraction result
S1 S2 D. The floating point value in S2 is subtracted from the floating point value
in S1 and the result is stored in D. The subtraction is conducted in binary floating point
format.
If S1 or S2 is designated as constant K or H, the instruction will convert the
constant into a binary floating point value before the operation.
S1 and S2 can designate the same register. In this case, if the instruction is
specified as “continuous execution instruction” (generally DESUBP instruction)
and the drive contact is ON, the register will be subtracted once in every scan.
Example
When X0 = ON, binary floating point value (D1, D0) minuses binary floating point
value (D3, D2) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB
D0
D2
D10
When X2 = ON, K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point value)
minuses binary floating point (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESUB
K1234
D0
16-76
D10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
122 D
EMUL
Floating Point Multiplication
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
DEMUL
DEMULP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplier D: Multiplication result
S1 xS2 D. The floating point value in S1 is multiplied with the floating point
value in S2 and the result is D. The multiplication is conducted in binary floating
point format
If S1 or S2 is designated as constant K or H, the instruction will convert the
constant into a binary floating point value before the operation
S1 and S2 can designate the same register. In this case, if the instruction is
specified as “continuous execution instruction” (generally DEMULP instruction)
and the drive contact is ON, the register will be multiplied once in every scan
Example
When X1 = ON, binary floating point (D1, D0) multiplies binary floating point
(D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).
X1
DEMUL
D0
D10
D20
When X2 = ON, K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point value)
multiplies binary floating point (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DEMUL
K1234
D0
16-77
D10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
EDIV
123 D
Floating Point Division
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command
DEDIV
DEDIVP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and Remainder
S1÷S2 D. The floating point value in S1 is divided by the floating point value in
S2 and the result is stored in D. The division is conducted in binary floating point
If S1 or S2 is designated as constant K or H, the instruction will convert the
constant into a binary floating point value before the operation.
Example
If S2 = 0, operation error will occur, the instruction will not be executed
When X1 = ON, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary
floating point (D11, D10)and the quotient and remainder is stored in (D21, D20).
X1
DEDIV
D0
D10
D20
When X2 = ON, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234
(automatically converted to binary floating point value) and the result is stored in (D11,
D10).
X2
DEDIV
D0
K1234
16-78
D10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
124 D
EXP
Float Exponent Operation
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
S
D
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DEXP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DEXPP
S: Exponent D: Operation result
The base is e = 2.71828 and exponent is S
[ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
Both positive and negative values are valid for S. Register D has to be
32-bit format. Operation is conducted in floating point value, so the value in
S needs to be converted into floating value before exponent operation.
Example
The content in D =e S ; e=2.71828 and S is the specified exponent.
When M0 = ON, convert (D1, D0) to binary floating value and save the
result in (D11, D10).
When M1= ON, perform exponent operation with (D11, D10) as the
exponent. The value is saved in register (D21, D20) in binary floating format.
16-79
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
125 D
LN
Float Natural Logarithm Operation
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
S
D
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DLN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DLNP
S: Source device D: Operation result
The base is e = 2.71828 and exponent is S
[ D +1，D ]=EXP [ S +1，S ]
Only a positive number is valid for S. Register D has to be 32-bit format.
Operation is conducted in floating point value, so the value in S needs to be
converted into floating value before exponent operation.
Example
The content in D =e S ; e=2.71828 and S is the specified data source
eD = S. The content of D = LN S, where the value in S is specified by users.
When M0 = ON, convert (D1, D0) to binary floating value and save the
result in (D11, D10).
When M1= ON, perform natural logarithm operation with (D11, D10) as the
antilogarithm. The value is saved in register (D21, D20) in binary floating
format.
16-80
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
127
D
ESQR
Floating Point Square Root
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DESQR
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
range of operands.
Flag signal: none
Explanation
－
DESQR
P
S: Source device D: Operation result
This instruction performs a square root operation on the floating point value
in S and stores the result in D. All data will be operated in binary floating
point format and the result will also be stored in floating point format.
If the source device S is specified as constant K or H, the integer value will
automatically be converted to binary floating value.
Example
When X0 = ON, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in
(D11, D10) after the operation of square root.
X0
DESQR
D0
(D1, D0)
(D11, D10)
Binary floating
point
Binary floating
point
D10
When X2 = ON, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary
floating value) is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESQR
K1234
16-81
D10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
129
INT
D
Float to Integer
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
S
D
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DINT
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DINTP
S: Source device D: Operation result
The binary floating point value in the register S is converted to BIN integer
and stored in register D. The decimal of the operation result will be left out.
Example
This instruction is the opposite of the API 49 (FLT) instruction.
When X0 = ON, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to
BIN integer and the result is stored in D10. The decimal of the result will be left
out.
When X1 = ON, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to
BIN integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of the result will
be left out.
16-82
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
130
SIN
D
Sine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
M
K
＊
S
D
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
－
D
＊
＊
－
－
32-bit command
DSIN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DSINP
S: Source device (0°≦S＜360°) D: Operation result
The value in S can be set as radian.
Radian mode. RAD = degree ×π/180.
SIN instruction performs sine operation on S and stores the result in D.
See the figure below for the relation between the radian and the operation result:
S: Radian
R: Result (SIN value)
R
1
-2
- 32
-2
-2
0
3
2
2
2
S
-1
Example
When X0 = ON, DSIN instruction conducts sine operation on binary
floating value in (D1, D0) and stores the SIN value in (D11, D10) in binary floating format.
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
RAD value(degree x / 180)
SIN value
Binary floating point
16-83
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
131
COS
D
Cosine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DCOS
DCOSP
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
S: Source device (0°≦S＜360°) D: Operation result
The value in S can be set as radian or degree by flag M1018.
M1018 = OFF, radian mode. RAD = degree ×π/180.
M1018 = ON, degree mode. Degree range: 0°≦degree＜360°.
If result to 0, M1020 = On.
COS instruction performs cos operation on S and stores the result in D
See the figure below for the relation between the radian and the operation result:
S: Radian
R: Result (COS value)
R
1
-2
- 32
-2
-2
0
2
3
2
2
S
-1
Example
When X0 = ON, DCOS instruction conducts cosine operation on binary floating
value in (D1, D0) and stores the COS value in (D11, D10) in binary floating format.
D1
D0
RAD value ( x 180)
binary floating point
D1
D 10
COS value
binary floating point
16-84
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TAN
132 D
Tangent
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DTAN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DTANP
S: Source device (0°≦S＜360°) D: Operation result
The value in S can be set as radian or degree by flag M1018.
M1018 = OFF, radian mode. RAD = degree ×π/180.
M1018 = ON, degree mode. Degree range: 0°≦degree＜360°.
When the operation result = 0, M1020 = On.
TAN instruction performs tangent operation on S and stores the result in D.
See the figure below for the relation between the radian and the operation result
R
R: Result (TAN value)
1
-2
- 32
-2
-2
0
3
2
2
2
S
-1
Example
When X0 = ON, DTAN instruction performs tangent operation on the radian value in (D1,
D0) and stores the TAN value in (D11, D10) in binary floating format
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
RAD value (degree x 180)
binary floating point
TAN value
binary floating point
16-85
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
133
ASIN
D
Arc Sine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DASIN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
S: Source device (binary floating value) D: Operation result
ASIN value = sin-1
DASINP
See the figure below for the relation between input S and the result:
R
S: Input (SIN value)
R: Result (ASIN value)
2
-1,0
0
-
Example
1,0
S
2
When X0 = ON, DASIN instruction performs arc sine operation on the binary floating
value in (D1, D0) and stores the ASIN value in (D11, D10) in binary floating format..
X0
DASIN
D0
D10
D1
D0
Binary floating point
D 11
D 10
ASIN value
binary floating point
16-86
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
134
ACOS
D
Arc Cosine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DACOS
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
range of operands.
Flag signal: none
Explanation
－
S: Source device (binary floating value) D: Operation result
ACOS value =cos-1
DACOS
P
See the figure below for the relation between the input S and the result:
R
S: Input (COS value)
R: Result (ACOS value)
2
-1,0
Example
0
1,0
S
When X0 = ON, DACOS instruction performs arc cosine operation on the binary floating
value in (D1,D0) and stores the ACOS value in (D11, D10) in binary floating format.
X0
DACOS
D0
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
D10
Binary floating point
ACOS value
16-87
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
135
ATAN
D
Art Tangent
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
32-bit command
DATAN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
S: Source device (binary floating value) D: Operation result
ATAN value = tan-1
DATANP
See the figure below for the relation between the input and the result:
R
S: Input (TAN value)
R: Result (ATAN value)
2
S
0
-2
Example
When X0 = ON, DATAN instruction performs arc tangent operation on the binary
floating value in(D1, D0) and stores the ATAN value in (D11, D10) in binary floating
format.
X0
D0
DATAN
D10
D1
D0
Binary floating point
D 11
D 10
ATAN value
binary floating point
16-88
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
136
SINH
D
Hyperbolic Sine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
Example
－
32-bit command
DSINH
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DSINHP
S: Specified source (binary floating point) D: Area where calculated result is stored
Sinh value =(es-e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
X0
DSINH
D0
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
D10
binary floating point
SINH value
binary floating point
16-89
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
COSH
137 D
Hyperbolic Cosine
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
Example
－
32-bit command
DCOSH
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DCOSHP
S: Specified source (binary floating point) D: Area where calculated result is stored
cosh value =(es+e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save
the result in (D11, D10). The
result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
X0
DCOSH
D0
D10
D1
D0
binary floating point
D 11
D 10
COSH value
binary floating point
16-90
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TANH
138 D
Hyperbolic Tangent
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
－
－
Example
－
32-bit command
DTANH
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
DTANHP
S: Specified source (binary floating point) D: Area where calculated result is stored
Tanh value =(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The
The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
X0
DTANH
D0
D10
D1
D0
binary floating point
D 11
D 10
TANH value
binary floating point
16-91
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TCMP
160
Comparison of calendar data
P
Bit Devices
X
S1
S2
S3
S
D
Y
＊
M
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
T
＊
＊
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
＊
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
TCMP
TCMPP
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
＊
Flag signal: none
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for
the range of operands.
Explanation
S1: Hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23
S2: Minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 S3:
Second of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59
S: Current time of calendar (occupies 3 continuous devices)
D: Comparison result (occupies 3 continuous devices)
The range of operand S1, S2, S3: S1=0~23, S2 =S3=K0~59
Example
S1, S2, S3 is compared to the current value of the head address S and save the
comparison result in D.
S1 is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23. S2 is the minute of
current time and the content is K0~K59. S3 is the second of current time and the
content is K0~K59
The current time of real time clock specified by S is read by using TRD
command previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the
content of S exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the
command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code
0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of real time clock in
(D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at
M10~M12. When X10 goes from On→Off, the command is not executed but the
On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept. Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and
then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.
X10
TCMP
K12
K20
M10
K45
ON when12: 20: 45
>
D20 (hr )
D21(min )
D22
ON when 12: 20: 45
=
D20
D21 (min)
D22 (sec)
ON when12: 20: 45
<
D20 (hr)
D21 ( min )
D22
M11
M12
16-92
D20
M10
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TZCP
161
Comparison of calendar data area
P
Bit Devices
X
S1
S2
S
D
Y
＊
M
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
T
＊
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
TZCP
TZCPP
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
＊
Operands:
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
range of operands.
S1: Lower limit time data S2: Upper limit time data S: Current time of calendar
Explanation
D: Comparison result (occupies 3 continuous devices)
S is compared to the time period of S1~ S2 and the comparison result is stored in
D.
S1 , S1 +1, S1 +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the
lower limit time data.
S2, S2 +1, S2 +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the
upper limit time data。
S , S +1, S +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the current
time of perpetual calendar.
The current time of real time clock specified by S is read by using TRD command
previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of S, S1, S2
exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t
be executed and M1068=On.
If S < S1, and if S < S2 , D is On. If S > S1 and if S > S2, D +2 is On. Besides these
two situations, D +1 is On.
Example
When X10= On, the TZCP command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be
On. When X10= Off, the TZCP command is not executed but the state of
M10~M12 before X10=Off is kept.
X10
TZCP
M10
M11
ON when
D0
D20
D10
M10
D0 (hr)
D1 (min)
D2 (sec)
>
D10 (hr)
D11 (min)
D12 (sec)
D0 (hr)
D1 (min)
D2 (sec)
<
=
D10 (hr)
D11 (min)
D12 (sec)
<
=
D20 (hr)
D21 (min)
D22 (sec)
D10 (hr)
D11 (min)
D12 (sec)
>
D20 (hr)
D21(min)
D22 (sec)
M12
ON when
16-93
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TADD
162
Calendar data addition
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
S1
S2
D
T
＊
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
＊
TADD
TADDP
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: M1020 (Zero flag)
range of operands.
M1022 (Carry flag)
M1068 (calendar error)
Explanation
S1: Time augend S2: Time addend D: Addition result
Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices
S1 + S2 = D. The time data in the register specified by S1 is added to the time data
in the register specified by S2 and the addition result is stored in the register
specified by D.
If the time data in S1, S2 exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this
time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On.
The value of the result shows in D is the time remaining above 24 hours.
If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
Example
When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by
D0~D2 and D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by
D20~D22.
X10
TADD
D0 8(hr )
D1
min)
D2 20(sec )
8 : 10 : 20
D0
+
D10
D20
6(hr)
D11 40( min)
D12 6(sec)
D20 14(hr )
D21 50(min)
D22 26(sec)
6 : 40 : 6
14: 50: 26
16-94
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TSUB
163
Calendar data subtraction
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
S1
S2
D
T
＊
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
＊
TSUB
TSUBP
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Operands:
Flag signal: M1020 (Zero flag)
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
M1022 (Carry flag)
range of operands.
M1068 (calendar error)
S1: Time Minuend S2: Time Subtrahend D: Subtraction result
Explanation
Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
將 S1 − S2 = D. The time data in the register specified by S2 is subtracted from the
time data in the register specified by S1 and the result is stored in the register
specified by D.
If the time data in S1, S2 exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this
time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Barrow Flag M1021=
On. The value of the result shows in D is the time remaining above 24 (twenty-four)
hour.
If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero
flag M1020= On.
Example
When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is
subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the
register specified by D20~D22.
X10
TSUB
D0
D10
D20
D0 20(
D1 20(min)
D2 5( sec)
hr)
D11
min)
D12 8(sec)
D20 5(hr)
D21 49(min)
D22 57( sec)
20: 20: 5
14: 30: 8
5: 49: 57
16-95
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TRD
166
Read calendar data
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
D
T
＊
C
＊
D
＊
TSUB
TSUBP
32-bit command
Operands:
－
－
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
range of operands.
Flag signal:
Explanation
S2: Time Addend
－
－
S1: Time Minuend
D: Addition Result
D: The device stores the current time of calendar (occupies 7 continuous devices)
A perpetual calendar clock is built in the EH/SA series PLC and this clock provide
year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data devices
stored in D1063~D1069. The function of TRD command is for program designer to
read the current time of perpetual calendar directly and store the reading data in
the 7 data registers specified by D.
Example
D1063 reads only the last two digits of a year.
When X0=On, read the current time of perpetual calendar to the specified
register D0~D6.
The content of D1064: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,…, 7 is
indicated Sunday.
X0
TRD
D0
special D
Item
content
normal D
Item
D1063
Year
00~99
D0
Year
D1064
week
1~7
D1
week
D1065
month
1~12
D2
month
D1066
day
1~31
D3
day
D1067
hour
0~23
D4
hour
D1068
minute
0~59
D5
minute
D1069
second
0~59
D6
second
16-96
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
GRY
170
BIN→GRAY Code
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
GRY
32-bit command
DGRY
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
GRYP
DGRYP
S: Source device D: Destination to store Gray code result
The BIN value in the specified device by S is converted to the GRAY CODE equivalent
and the converted result is stored in the area specified by D.
The range of S that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command：0~32,767
32-bit command：0~2,147,483,647
If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation
Error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed
Example
When X0=On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in
the D0.
16-97
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
GBIN
171
GRAY Code→BIN
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S
D
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
H
＊
KnX KnY KnM
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
GBIN
GBINP
32-bit command
DGBIN
Operands:
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
DGBINP
S: Source GRAY CODE D: Destination which stores converted BIN result
The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by S is converted to the BIN value
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by D.
This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type
encoder (it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs.
Convert the value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register.
The range of S that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command：0~32,767
32-bit command：0~2,147,483,647
If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as
“Operation Error”.
Example
When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder
connected to X0~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10.
X20
GBIN
K4X0
D10
K4X0
X17
X0
GRAY CODE 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b0
b15
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16-98
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
215~
217
D
S1
LD#
Contact Logical Operation LD#
S2
Bit Devices
Word Devices
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
LD#
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
S2
DLD#
－
－
Operands: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S1: Data source device 1
S2: Data source device 2
Explanation 1.
2.
－
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3.
Example
LD#
(#: &, |, ^) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit
32 -bit
No-continuity
API No.
Continuity condition
instruction instruction
condition
215
LD&
DLD&
S1
&
S2
0
S1
&
S2
0
216
LD|
DLD|
S1
|
S2
0
S1
|
S2
0
217
LD^
DLD^
S1
^
S2
0
S1
^
S2
0
4.
&: Logical “AND” operation
5.
|: Logical “OR” operation
6.
^: Logical “XOR” operation
1.
When the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2.
When the result of logical OR operation of D200 and D300 ≠ 0 and X1 = On,
Y11 = On will be retained.
LD &
C0
C10
LD I
D200
D300
Y10
X1
16-99
SET
Y11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
218~
220
D
S1
AND#
Contact Logical Operation AND#
S2
Bit Devices
Word Devices
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND#
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
S2
DAND#
－
－
Operands: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S2: Data source device 2
Explanation 1. S1: Data source device 1
2.
－
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3.
AND# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on series contacts.
API No.
Example
16 -bit
32 -bit
Continuity condition
instruction instruction
No-continuity
condition
218
AND&
DAND&
S1
&
S2
0
S1
&
S2
0
219
AND|
DAND|
S1
|
S2
0
S1
|
S2
0
220
AND^
DAND^
S1
^
S2
0
S1
^
S2
0
4.
&: Logical “AND” operation
5.
|: Logical “OR” operation
6.
^: Logical “XOR” operation
1. When X0 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 =
On.
2. When X1 = Off and the result of logical OR operation of D10 and D0 ≠ 0 and X1 =
On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register D200
(D201) and 32-bit register D100 (D101) ≠ 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND &
C0
C10
Y10
AND I
D10
D0
SET
DAND ^
D200
D100
M50
X1
X2
M3
16-100
Y11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
221~
223
D
S1
OR#
Contact Logical operation OR#
S2
Bit Devices
Word Devices
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
OR#
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
S2
DOR#
－
－
Operand: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S1: Data source device 1
S2: Data source device 2
Explanation 1.
2.
－
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3.
OR# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on parallel contacts.
API No.
Example
16 -bit
32 -bit
Continuity condition
instruction instruction
No-continuity
condition
221
OR&
DOR&
S1
&
S2
0
S1
&
S2
0
222
OR|
DOR|
S1
|
S2
0
S1
|
S2
0
223
OR^
DOR^
S1
^
S2
0
S1
^
S2
0
4.
&: Logical “AND” operation
5.
|: Logical “OR” operation
6.
^: Logical “XOR” operation
When X1 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2.
M60 will be On, if X2 and M30 are On with one of the following two conditions: 1.
The OR operation result of 32-bit register D10 (D11) and 32-bit register D20(D21)
does not equal to 0. 2. The XOR operation result of 32-bit counter C235 and
32bits register D200 (D201) does not equal 0.
LD=
K200
C10
LD>
D200
K-30
Y10
X1
16-101
SET
Y11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
224~
230
D
S1
LD※
Load Compare※
S2
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
LD※
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32 bits command (9 STEPS)
S2
DLD※
－
－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S2: Data source device 2
Explanation 1. S1: Data source device 1
2.
－
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API224 (LD=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
LD※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit
instruction
32 -bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
224
LD＝
DLD＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
225
LD＞
DLD＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
226
LD＜
DLD＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
228
LD＜＞
DLD＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
229
LD＜＝
DLD＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
230
LD＞＝
DLD＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
API No.
Example
1.
When the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2.
When the content in D200 > K-30 and X1 = On, Y11= On will be retained.
X1
Y0
OR &
X2
C0
C10
M30
M60
DOR I
D10
16-102
D20
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
232~
238
D
S1
AND※
AND Compare※
S2
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
S2
DAND※
－
－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
S2: Data source device 2
S1: Data source device 1
Explanation 1.
2.
－
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API232 (AND=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result
is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
AND※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is a comparison instruction is used on series
contacts
16 –bit
instruction
API No.
Example
32 –bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
232
AND＝
DAND＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
233
AND＞
DAND＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
234
AND＜
DAND＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
236
AND＜＞
DAND＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
237
AND＜＝
DAND＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
238
AND＞＝
DAND＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
1.
When X0 = On and the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2.
When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3.
When X2 = On and the content in 32-bit register D0 (D11) < 678,493 or M3 =
On, M50 = On.
X0
AND=
K200
C10
Y10
AND<>
K-10
D0
SET
X1
X2
DAND>
K678493
M3
16-103
D10
M50
Y11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
240~
246
D
S1
OR※
OR Compare※
S2
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
ZRSTP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊
S1
＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
S2
DOR※
－
－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
1.
S1: Data source device 1
2.
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API240 (OR=) for
S2: Data source device 2
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3.
OR※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is an comparison instruction used on parallel
contacts.
API No.
Example
16 -bit
instruction
32 -bit
instruction
Continuity
condition
No-continuity
condition
232
AND＝
DAND＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
233
AND＞
DAND＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
234
AND＜
DAND＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
236
AND＜＞
DAND＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
237
AND＜＝
DAND＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
238
AND＞＝
DAND＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
1.
When X1 = On and the present value of C10 = K200, Y0 = On.
2.
When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3.
M50 will be On when X2=On and the content of 32-bit register D0(D11) <678,493
or M3= On.
X0
AND=
K200
C10
Y10
AND<>
K-10
D0
SET
X1
X2
DAND>
K678493
M3
16-104
D10
M50
Y11
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
S1
FLD※
275~
Floating Point Contact Type
S2
Comparison LD※
280
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
T
＊
＊
S1
S2
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
FLD※
－
－
Operand: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
S1: Source device 1 S2: Source device 2
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take “FLD=” for example, if
the result is “=”,the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “≠”, the
continuity of the instruction is disabled.
The user can specify the floating point value directly into operands S1 and S2
(e.g. F1.2) or store the floating point value in D registers for further operation.
FLD※ instruction is used for direct connection with left hand bus bar.
API No.
32-bit instruction
Continuity condition
Discontinuity
condition
275
FLD＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
276
FLD＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
277
FLD＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
278
FLD＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
279
FLD＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
280
FLD＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
Example
When the content in D100(D101) ≤ F1.2 and X1 is ON, Y21 = ON and latched.
X1
FLD<=
D100
F1.2
SET
16-105
Y21
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
S1
FAND※
281~
Floating Point Contact Type Comparison AND※
S2
286
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
S1
S2
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
FAND※
－
－
Operand: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
－
S1: Source device 1 S2: Source device 2
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take “FAND =” for example,
if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “≠”,
the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
The user can specify the floating point value directly into operands S1 and S2
(e.g. F1.2) or store the floating point value in D registers for further operation.
FAND※ instruction is used for serial connection with contacts
API No.
32-bit instruction
Continuity condition
Discontinuity
condition
281
FAND＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
282
FAND＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
283
FAND＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
284
FAND＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
285
FAND＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
286
FAND＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
Example
When X1 is OFF and the content in D100(D101) is not equal to F1.2, Y21 = ON
and latched.
X1
FAND<>
F1.2
16-106
D0
SET
Y21
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
S1
FOR※
287~
Floating Point Contact Type
S2
Comparison OR※
292
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
S1
S2
T
＊
＊
C
＊
＊
D
＊
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
FOR※ －
－
－
Operand: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the
Flag signal: none
range of operands.
Explanation
S1: Source device 1 S2: Source device 2
This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take “FOR =” for example, if
the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “≠”, the
continuity of the instruction is disabled
The user can specify the floating point value directly into operands S1 and S2
(e.g. F1.2) or store the floating point value in D registers for further operation
FOR※ instruction is used for parallel connection with contacts.
API No.
32-bit instruction
Continuity condition
Discontinuity
condition
287
FOR＝
S1 ＝ S2
S1 ≠ S2
288
FOR＞
S1 ＞ S2
S1 ≦ S2
289
FOR＜
S1 ＜ S2
S1 ≧ S2
290
FOR＜＞
S1 ≠ S2
S1 ＝ S2
291
FOR＜＝
S1 ≦ S2
S1 ＞ S2
292
FOR＞＝
S1 ≧ S2
S1 ＜ S2
Example
When both X2 and M30 are On and the content in D100(D101) ≥ F1.234, M60 =
ON..
X2
M30
M60
FOR>=
D100
F1.234
16-107
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.6.5 Description to drive’s special commands
API
139
S1
RPR
Read the AC motor drive’s parameters
S2
P
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
S2
Operands: none
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
RPR
RPRP
C
D
＊
32-bit command
＊
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: none
Explanation
API
140
S1: Data address for reading S2: The register that saves the read data
S1
WPR
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
＊
S2
Operands: None
Explanation
Example
Write the AC motor drive’s parameters
S2
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊
＊
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
WPR
WPRP
C
D
＊
32-bit command
＊
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: none
S1: The data for writing. S2: The parameters address for the write data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
It will read the data in parameter H2100 of the C2000 and write into D0; H2101 is
read and write into D1.
When M0= ON data in D10 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000.
When M1=ON, data in H2 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000, which is to
activate the AC motor drive.
When M2=ON, data in H1 will be written into H2000 of C2000, which is to stop
the AC motor drive.
When data writing successfully, M1017 will be on.
M1000
RPR
H2100
D0
RPR
H2101
D1
WPR
D10
H2001
WPRP
H2
H2000
WPRP
H1
H2000
M0
M1
M2
M1017
Y0
END
16-108
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
141
FPID
S1
Bit Devices
X Y M K
＊
S1
＊
S2
＊
S3
＊
S4
Operands: None
Explanation
1.
S2
S3
S4
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊
＊
＊
＊
PID control for the AC motor drive
C
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
D
FPID
FPIDP
＊
＊ 32-bit command
－
－
－
＊
＊
Flag signal: None
－
S1: PID Feedback Selection(0-6 acc.to Pr.08-00), S2: Proportional Gain P, S3:
Integral Time I, S4: Derivative control D
2.
This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive
directly, including Pr.08.00 PID feedback, Pr.08.01 Proportional gain (P),
Pr.08.02 Integral time (I) and Pr.08.03 Derivative control (D)
Example
1.
Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3 =1
(unit: 0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).
2.
Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit:
0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
3.
Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital
keypad), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
4.
D1027: frequency command after PID calculation.
M0
FPID
H0
H0
H1
H1
FPID
H0
H1
H0
H0
FPID
H1
H1
H0
H0
MOV
D1027
D1
M1
M2
M1000
END
16-109
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
142
FREQ
S1
P
S2
S3
Operation control of the AC motor drive
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
FREQP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ
＊ ＊
＊
S1
32-bit command
＊ ＊
＊
S2
－
－
－
－
＊ ＊
＊
S3
Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None
S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, (Pr01-12) S3: deceleration time
Explanation 1.
(Pr01-13).
2.
This command FREQ can control frequency command, acceleration time and
deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Special register control is shown as
following:
M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. (Run is valid when Servo
On (M1040 On).)
M1026: Operation directions FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive.
M1040: controls Servo On (On)/ Servo Off (Off).
M1042: enable quick stop(ON)/ disable quick stop(Off)
M1044: enable Stop (On)/ disable stop(Off)
M1052: frequency locked (On)/ disable frequency locked(Off)
3.
S2, S3 : Acceleration and deceleration time setting. Its decimal point must
according to the Pr01-45 Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve.
For example:
When Pr01-45=0 “Unit=0.01 sec”
The S2 of below Ladder diagram is set as 50 and it means acceleration is 0.5
second.
The S3 of below Ladder diagram is set as 60 and it means deceleration is 0.6
second.
4.
WhenM11=Off, the drive frequency command will become 0Hz.
16-110
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example
1.
M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. M1026: operation direction
FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive. M1015: frequency attained.
2.
When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
3.
When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10
M11
M11
FREQP
K300
K0
K0
FREQ
K3000
K50
K60
M10
END
16-111
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
TORQ
263
S1
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
Operands: None
Explanation
1.
2.
Torque Control of AC Motor Drive
S2
P
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
＊
＊
TORQ
TORQ P
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: M1063
S1: torque command (display in signed decimal with one decimal place)
S2: speed limit
This command can control torque command and speed limit. Special register
control is shown as following:
M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). Torque output and speed limit
are defined by the setting of TORQ command when TORQ command is set
when Servo is ON.
Example
1.
M1040: control Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1063: target torque attained.
D1060: control mode setting. D1053: actual torque.
2.
When M0=Off, setting torque command of the AC motor drive to K+300(+30.0%)
and speed limit to 3000(30Hz).
3.
When M0=On, setting torque command of AC motor drive to K-300(-30.0%) and
speed limit to 3000(30Hz)。
4.
When M10=On, AC motor drive begins to execute torque command.
5.
When target torque is attained, M1063 will switch ON and flag signal will be
blinking.
16-112
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
DPOS
262
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
Point to Point Position Control of AC Motor Drive
S1
P
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
H
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
＊
－
－
－
－
32-bit command (5 steps)
DPOS
Operands: None
Explanation
D
DPOSP
Flag signal: M1064, M1070
S1: target position (signed decimal)
This DPOS command can control the motor position of AC motor drive. Special
register control is shown as following:
M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1055: searching origin point.
M1048: operate to the new position point. In the condition D1060 = 1 (control
mode is set to position mode), M1040=1 (Servo ON), and DPOS command is
given; when M1048 is set from OFF to ON the AC motor drive will operate till the
new position point.
Example
1.
M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1064: target position attained.
D1060: control mode setting. D1051(L) and D1052(H): actual position point.
2.
When X0=On, setting M1040 to ON (Servo On).
3.
When X1=On, setting DPOS position command to +300000. It will delay for 1
second then set M1048 to ON (operate to the new position). Please observe if the
D1051 value changes. When position is attained, M1064 will set to ON and Y0
will output an ON signal.
16-113
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
261
CANRX
P
S1
S2
S3
D
Read CANopen slave data
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Bit Devices
Word Devices
FREQP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ
＊ ＊
S1
32-bit command
S2
＊ ＊
－
－
－
－
S3
＊ ＊
＊ ＊ ＊
D
Flag signal: M1028
Operand: none
S1: Slave station number, S2: main index, S3: sub-index + bit length, D: save
Explanation 1.
address
2.
Command CANRX can read the corresponding slave. Index. When executing this
command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time, M1066 and M1067
are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the slave replied an
accurate response, the value will be written to the designated register and M1067
is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate response, this error
message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.
Example
M1002: touch once to activate PLC and change K4M400=K1. After the change,
different message will be displayed when M1066 is set to 1.
16-114
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
264
CANTX
Bit Devices
X Y M
S1
S2
S3
S4
Operands: None
Explanation
1.
S1
S2
S3
S4
P
K
＊
＊
＊
＊
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Write CANopen slave data
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
FREQ
FREQP
C
D
＊
＊ 32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: M1028
S1: slave station number, S2: the address to write, S3: main index, S4: sub-index+
bit length.
2.
Command CANTX can read the corresponding index of the slave. When
executing this command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time,
M1066 and M1067 are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the
slave replied an accurate response, the value will be written to the designated
register and M1067 is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate
response, this error message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.
16-115
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
CANFLS
265
Bit Devices
X Y M
K
＊
D
Operands: None
Update the mapping special D of CANopen
D
P
Word Devices
H KnX KnY KnM T
＊
C
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
FREQP
D FREQ
32-bit command
－
－
－
－
Flag signal: M1028
Explanation
1.
D: the special D for update.
2.
CANFLS can update the Special D command.
When it executes in read only
mode, it sends equivalent message as CANRX to the slave and saves the slave
response to this particular Special D. When it executes in read/write mode, it
sends equivalent message as CANTX to the slave and saves this special D
value to the corresponding slave.
3.
M1066 and M1067 are both 0. When reading is complete, M1066 will be 1 and
this value will write to the designated register if the slave replies an accurate
response. When slave replies a fault response then M1067 will be 0 and this
error message will be recorded to D1076~D1079.
API
320 D
ICOMR
D
P
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
S1
S2
S3
D
Internal Communication Reader
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
＊
H
＊
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
Operands: None
Explanation
S1
D
＊
＊
＊
＊
ICOMR
continuous
processing
ICOMRP
pulse
processing
－
－
32-bit command
－
－
Flag signal: M1077
M1078
M1079
slave station number S2 ：Device chosen (0: AC motor drive 1: Internal PLC)。
S3 : Reading address
D : Saving device
The ICOMR command can read the register of the AC motor drive and that of
internal PLC from slave station.
16-116
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
API
321 D
ICOMW
Bit Devices
X
Y
M
Word Devices
K
＊
＊
＊
＊
S1
S2
S3
D
Internal Communication Writer
D
P
H
＊
＊
＊
＊
KnX KnY KnM
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
T
C
Operands: None
S1 : Slave station number
S3 : Reading address
Explanation
D
＊
＊
＊
＊
ICOMR
ICOMRP
32-bit command
DICOMR
DICOMRP
Flag signal: M1077
M1078
M1079
S2 Device chosen (0: AC motor drive., 1: Internal PLC)
D : Saving device
The ICOMW command can write the register of the AC motor drive and that of
internal PLC from slave station.
Example
Internal
Communication
Online Node/Mapping Error
If the slave
The bit 0
of inside
slave ,
communication online
is online?
normally
open
contact
of
monitoring
operation(a
Slave of
The bit 0 slave
inside
has an error.
communication
error
Number of
communication
of the inside slave
Enable inside
communication
control
Start
running
fwd
(momentary
running)
Read the MI staus
of Bit 0 Slave
I
16-117
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.7 Error and Troubleshoot
Fault
PLiC
ID
48
Fault Descript
Internal communication signal off
PLod
50
Data write error
PLSv
51
Data write error when executing
Re-apply the power and download the
program again.
PLdA
52
Program upload error
Upload again. If error occurs continuously,
please return to the factory.
PLFn
53
PLor
54
Program capacity exceeds memory Re-apply the power and download the
program again.
capacity
PLFF
55
Command error when executing
PLSn
56
Check sum error
PLEd
57
PLCr
58
PLdF
59
PLSF
60
Command error when download
program
Corrective Action
Check if shielded wire is properly inserted
to communication port COM1.
Check if there is error in the program and
download the program again.
Check if there is error in the program and
download the program again.
Check if there is error in the program and
download the program again.
Check if there is error in the program and
download the program again.
There is no “END” command in the Check if there is error in the program and
program
download the program again.
The command MC is continuous
Check if there is error in the program and
used more than 9 times
Download program error
download the program again.
Check if there is error in the program and
download the program again.
PLC scan time over-time
Check if the program code is inaccurately
written and download the program again.
16-118
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16.8 CANopen Master Application
Simple control of multiple-axes for certain application can be done by C2000 if the device supports
CANopen protocol. One of the C2000 could acts as Master to perform simple synchronous control,
e.g. position, speed, zero return, and torque control. The setup can be done in 7 steps:
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master
1.
Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and reboot.
The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display “CAN Master”.)
2.
Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC register
and will be set to factory setting.)
3.
Turn off the power and reboot.
4.
Set PLC control to “PLC Stop mode” by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital keypad is
KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control to “PLC 2”. If the drive just came out of the factory, since
PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master
Each slave occupies 100 of Special D space and is numbered 1 to 8. There are in total of 8
stations. Please refer to 4-3 Special Register in this chapter for Special D register definition.
1.
When communication cable 485 is connected, set PLC status to “stop” by WPL soft. (If PLC
had already switched to “PLC Stop” mode then PLC status should be “stop” already.)
2.
To control the slave address and corresponding station. For example, control 2 stations of
the slave (max. 8 stations synchronous control), if the station number is 21 and 22, set
D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and
D2700 to 0. The setting can be done via PLC software editor WPL, follow the steps shown:
Open WPL Editor > communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
16-119
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
When the “Register” window appears, click “Transmit”.
When transmission window appear, select “read” and input the range D2000~D2799
then press enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be read. If communication failed,
check the communication format (pre-defined PLC station is 2, 9600, 7N2, ASCII).
Insert the slave station for control. Set D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 then set D2200,
D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and D2700 to 0.
Click “Transmit” again. When transmission window appears, input the range
D2000~D2799 and enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be write (If communication
error occur and display failed, it means PLC is not in “stop” status. The value can only
be write in “stop” status, pleas switch PLC to “stop”.)
Another method is by setting D1091. Set the corresponding bit of the excluding slave
to 0 (slave station range from No.1~8). For example, if the user wants to exclude slave
No. 2, 6 and 7, please set D1091 = 003B by following steps: WPL Editor >
communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
3.
Setup the communication setting. If following conditions apply to you then no additional
setting needs to be done:
If the only control in this application is the speed mode of AC motor drive.
(For
other control such as position and torque control, D2000~D2799 should be set. Please
refer to synchronous control on position, torque and zero return for more set up detail.
To perform synchronous control on position for the slave, please enable the
corresponding function PDO 3. (P to P function is not yet supported by C2000.)
To activate PDO 3 TX (Master sending command to Slave), please set up bit
8~11 of the PLC address D2034+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
16-120
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Bit
PDO4
PDO3
PDO2
PDO1
Torque
Position
Remote I/O
Speed
15
14 ~ 12
11
10 ~ 8
7
6~4
3
2~0
Definition En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word
“Index 6040”and CANopen target position” Index 607A”. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
To activate PDO 3 RX (Slave response with the status to Master), please set up
bit 8~11 of the PLC address D2067+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
Bit
PDO4
PDO3
PDO2
PDO1
Torque
Position
Remote I/O
Speed
15
14 ~ 12
11
10 ~ 8
7
6~4
Definition En
Number
En
Number
En
Number
3
2~0
En Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word
“Index 6041”and CANopen actual position” Index 6064”. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
In same theory, to perform torque control, please enable the mapping function
PDO4.
The speed for 1 corresponding cycle is 8ms. (When shorten the cycle time to < 8ms,
make sure the time is enough for the data to be transmitted.
User should calculate the corresponding PDO quantity before setting the cycle. The
PDO quantity should not be greater than the N. The quantity can be calculated by the
following formula.
N = (1 cycle (ms) * rate (kbs) )/250
Example: 1 cycle is 2ms, speed= 1000k, max PDO value is 2*1000/250 = 8. If user
wants to set the cycle time to 2ms, turns off 4 of the C type AC motor drive slave
stations must be turned off (since the pre-defined setting is 8 slaves, half of the
slave station would be 4). The slave station can be turned off by setting the
D2000+n*100 of the unused slaves to 0.
Number of control station ≤ 8.
Controlling 8 slave stations at once can only be done by asynchronous control where
to Read/Write the slave is done by CANRX and CANTX command. This is similar to
the Read/Write action of Modbus protocol.
The slave complies with DS402 standard.
Does not control Slave IO terminal.
If above conditions do not apply, please set up the slave corresponding addresses
manually by open WPL editor > communication> Edit Register Memory (T C D).
16-121
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed.
Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
Set up CANopen communication parameter Pr.09-37. It does not matter if the drive is
defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by Pr.09-37 in both case.
Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special “D” register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read: Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,
M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write:
Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066
=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is
completed before the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands
completed, download the program to the drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC
communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2. Please change WPL
Editor setting at Setting> Communication Setting)
16-122
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 5: Setting the Slave station number, communication speed, operation
source and command source
CANopen communication is supported by Delta C2000 series and EC series AC motor drive.
The corresponding slave and CANopen speed are shown as below:
Corresponding
Parameter of Drive
Slave address
CANopen speed
Source of operation
C2000
E-C
09-36
09-20
09-37
Definition
Disable CANopen Hardware Interface
1~127 CANopen communication address
09-21
0
1M
1
500K
2
250K
3
125K
4
100K
5
50K
3
02-01
00-20
command
Torque command
0
00-21
command
Source of frequency
Value
5
6
02-00
11-34
5
3
The only servo motor and drive that supports CANopen communication interface is A2 series.
The corresponding slave station number and communication speed are shown as below:
Corresponding
Parameter of Drive
Value
Definition
A2
Slave address
CANopen speed
Control/Command Source
03-00
bit8~11 of Pr.03-01
XRXX
01-01
1~127
address
R= 0
125K
R= 1
250K
R= 2
500K
R= 3
750K
R= 4
1M
B
16-123
CANopen communication
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 6: Hardware connection
The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
Characteristic
line impedance
Characteristic
line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function
Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CANMaster Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
Example:
C2000 AC motor drive (1 master vs. 2 slave control)
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master
Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and
reboot. The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display “CAN Master”.)
Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC
register and will be set to factory setting.)
Turn off the power and reboot.
Set PLC control to “PLC Stop mode” by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital
keypad is KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control to “PLC 2”. If the drive just came out of
the factory, since PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF
warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master
Open WPL editor
Set PLC mode to PLC Stop (PLC2) via the keypad
WPL editor read D1070~D1099 and D2000~D2799
Set D2000=10 and D2100=11
Set D2100, 2200, 2300
Download D2000~D2799 setting
2400
2500
2600
2700=0
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed
Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
16-124
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Set up CANopen communication speed to 1 M (parameter Pr.09-37= 0). It does not
matter if the drive is defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by
Pr.09-37 in both case.
Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special “D” register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read:
Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,
M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write:
Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066
=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is completed before
the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands completed, download the program to the
drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2.
Please change WPL setting at setting> communication setting)
Step 5: Set Slave station number and communication speed.
Slave No.1: Pr.09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 10)
Slave No.2: Pr. 09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 11)
Step 6: Hardware connection
The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
Characteristic
line impedance
Characteristic
line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function
Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CAN Master Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
16-125
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-9 Descriptions of PLC Control Modes
(Speed, Torque, Homing and Position Modes)
When the AC motor drive is in FOC vector control, it can perform torque mode, position mode and
speed mode. However, auto-tuning of motor must be done first for these modes to function.
There are two types of motors, Induction Motor (IM) and Permanent Magnetic Motor (PM). After
auto-tuning process, IM motor is ready for AC motor drive to control. For PM motor, user must
complete PG offset angle process after auto-tuning. Please refer to Pr.12-58 and Pr.05-00 for more
detail.
※ Set up Delta ECMA series PM motor by enter motor parameters, follow the motor parameters
shown in Delta Servo Motor Catalogue. It is not required to execute auto-tuning for using Delta
ECMA series PM motors.
Setting and Description for Other Control Modes:
Speed Control:
The corresponding registers for Speed Mode are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Settings
Special M
Descriptions
R/W
M1025
AC motor drive operation status: (0) Stop (1) Start up (must also set M1040 =1)
RW
M1026
AC motor drive operation direction: (0) FWD (1) REV
RW
M1040
Power ON
RW
M1042
Quick stop
RW
M1044
Halt
RW
M1052
Frequency lock
RW
Special M Status
Special M
Descriptions
R/W
M1015
Target frequency attained
RO
M1056
Power ON ready
RO
M1058
Quick decelerating to stop
RO
Special D Control Settings
Special D
D1060
Descriptions
Mode setting (speed mode = 0)
R/W
RW
Special D Status
Special D
D1037
Descriptions
Output frequency of AC motor drive command (0.00~600.00)
16-126
R/W
RO
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
D1050
Descriptions
R/W
Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing)
RO
Control command for Speed Mode:
S1
FREQ(P)
Target speed
S2
S3
1st step accel. time
1st step decel. time
Example of Speed Control Mode:
If the drive is in FOC control mode, please auto-tuning the motor before setting PLC control mode to
speed control.
1.
When setting D1060 = 0, AC motor drive is in speed mode (default setting).
2.
Write FREQ command to PLC program to control AC motor drive's frequency and accel./decel.
time.
3.
When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON but frequency remains 0.
4.
When setting M1025 = 1, AC motor drive begins to operate till the FREQ frequency is attained
and will accel./decel. according to the setting of FREQ.
5.
Use M1052 to lock present operation frequency.
6.
Use M1044 to halt the drive and decelerate by the deceleration setting.
7.
Use M1042 to quick stopping the drive. The drive will decelerate by its maximum deceleration
speed and it is the speed that would not trigger a fault alarm. However if loading is too large, a
fault alarm may still occur.
8.
Priority of the control command is: M1040(Power ON) > M1042(Quick Stop) >M1044(Halt)
>M1052(LOCK)
0
M1002
MOV
Position
Beginning
6
X0
14
X0
23
X1
25
X2
27
X3
29
X4
31
X5
RUN Instantly
K0
D1060
Control Setting
0: Speed
FREQ
K3500 K100 K200
FREQ
K4500
K40
K50
(M1026)
AC Driver operating direction FWD (OFF)
(M1040)
Power supply by hardware
(M1025)
AC Driver RUN(ON)STOP (OFF)
(M1044)
Pause
(M1052)
Frequency locked
(M1042)
Park instantly
33
END
9999
16-127
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Torque Control:
The corresponding registers for Torque Mode are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Setting
Special M
M1040
Description
Power ON
R/W
RW
Special M Status
Special M
Description
R/W
M1056
Power ON ready
RO
M1063
Target torque attained
RO
Special D Control Setting
Special D
D1060
Description
Mode setting (Torque mode=2)
R/W
RW
Special D Status
Special D
Description
R/W
D1050
Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing)
RO
D1053
Actual torque
RO
Control command for Torque Mode:
TORQ(P)
S1
S2
Target torque (signed decimal)
Frequency limit
Example of Torque Control Mode:
Before setting PLC program to torque control mode, maker sure the torque parameter settings of
the AC motor drive are completed.
1.
When setting D1060 = 2, AC motor drive is in torque mode.
2.
Write TORQ command to PLC program for torque and speed limit control.
3.
When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON and operate till target torque or
speed limit is attained. Actual torque value can be read in D1053.
16-128
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
0
M1002
MOV
K2
ON only for 1scan a
6
M1000
TMR
Normally open contact
D1060
Set control mode (0:V)
K30
T0
Power on delay
T0
Ready
Power on delay
13
19
X1
TORQ K100
Set Torque
X1
K1000
TORQ K-200 K1000
Set Torque
25
M0
X4
Ready
Power on
28
END
9999
16-129
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Homing/Position Control:
The corresponding registers for Homing/Position Mode are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Setting
Special M
M1040
M1048
M1055
Description
Power ON
Run till the new position is attained. For M1048 to function, also need to set
control mode to position mode (D1060=1) and set M1040 = 1.
Home action begins. For 1055 to function, also need to set control mode to
position mode (D1060=3) and set M1040=1.
R/W
RW
RW
RW
Special M Status
Special M
Description
R/W
M1064
Target position attained
RO
M1070
Homing completed
RO
M1071
Homing error
RO
Special D Control Setting
Special D
D1060
Description
Mode selection (1: Position, 3: Homing)
R/W
RW
Special D Status
Special D
Description
R/W
D1050
Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing)
RO
D1051
Actual position (Low word)
RO
D1052
Actual position (High word)
※ Read both D1051 and D1052 for actual position. The display value is in signed decimal.
Control Command for Position Mode:
DPOS(P)
S1
Target position (signed decimal)
Example of Homing and Position Mode:
Before setting PLC program to homing mode or position mode, maker sure the motor parameter
settings of the AC motor drive are completed.
1.
Set Pr.00-40 to homing mode and set up corresponding limit sensor and origin point by MI
(MI=44 is for reverse run limit, MI=45 is for forward run limit and MI=46 is for homing to origin
point). C2000 series AC motor drive only supports Z phase homing to origin point, please
choose an Encoder with Z phase.
16-130
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
2.
When setting D1060 = 3, AC motor drive is in homing mode.
3.
When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON.
4.
When setting M1055=1, AC motor drive search for origin point.
5.
When homing is complete, M1070 will be ON. Then set D1060=1 to switch control mode to
position mode. (Ensure M1040 should not be turned OFF to avoid inaccurate origin point.)
6.
Write DPOS command to PLC program for setting AC motor drive’s target position. Use
Pr.00-12 for the absolute or relative position selection.
7.
Set M1048 to Pulse ON for one time and needs to be longer than 1ms, then AC motor drive
will begin to operate till the target position is attained (only when M1040=1). Present motor
position can be read from D1051 and D1052.
Step 1 ~ 7 can be categorized into three parts, please refer to the following example:
Part I: Set control mode to Homing Mode (D1060=3) and turn AC motor drive power ON by trigger
X2.
Initial condition
0
M1002
MOV
K3
ON only for 1scan a
10
D1060
Set control mode (0:V)
SET
M100
Home mode
RST
M101
P2P mode
X2
Servo on req
Power on
Part II (Homing action): Begins homing mode by trigger X3. The drive will switch to position mode
automatically when homing is complete.
Home mode
12
M100 X3
Home Home
mode req
Home
M1070
Home
finish
16-131
RST
M100
RST
M100
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Part III (Point to Point Position Control): Switch control mode to Position Mode (D1060=1) and
motor will be running forward and reverse between the position setting(+300000 ~ -300000 ).
P2P mode
20
M101
MOV
K1
MOV
K1
D1060
Set control mode (0:V)
P2P mode
33
K4M200
+300000
M200
DPOS K300000
+300000
43
M201 M1064
Ack
49
Target Position atta
M202
M1064
Ack
65
T100
K10
TMR
T101
K10
DPOS K300000
-400000
59
TMR
Target Position atta
M200 T100
TMR
T102
K10
TMR
T103
K10
ROLP K4M200
+300000
+300000
M200 T100
K1
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
81
M202
(M1048)
Ack
M203
84
Ack
END
※ If user’s application does not require homing action, you may skip Part I and Part II and go to the
next step. In this example, turn AC motor drive power ON by trigger X2 and set M1002 to
position mode, then the PLC program will be in position mode when drive power turns ON.
16-132
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-10 Internal Communication for Master
Control
The ‘Internal Communication’ function is designed and developed for the applications where
CANopen communication is not applicable or accessible. It replaces CANopen by RS485 and
provides real-time transmission as CANopen communication. This communication protocol is
available for C2000 series and CT2000 series AC motor drives only and the way it functions is similar
to Master/Slave control. A master drive could control a maximum of 8 slaves and the master/slave
setting process is very simple.
Slave Drives Settings:
1.
Set Pr.09-31= -1~-8, the drive is able to control 8 nodes.
2.
Set Pr.00-21=1, set source of control to RS485.
3.
Select for what RS485 should control: Pr.00-21=2 (Speed command) or Pr.11-33 = 1 (Torque
command) or Pr.11-40=2 (Position command).
4.
Once completed, the slave setting is done. It is not required to turn on PLC functions.
Master Drives Settings:
1.
Set Pr.09-31= -10 and set PLC to Enable.
Connection for Hardware:
Establish Master drive and Slave drives connections by using RS485 cable. The CT2000 series AC
motor drive is designed with 2 types of RS485 ports, as shown in the figure following:
(Refer to Chapter 06 Control Terminal for more about wiring terminals)
8
1
8 1
SG+ SG-
Modbus RS-485
Remov able Terminal Bloc k
16-133
Pi n
Pi n
Pi n
Pi n
1 ~2 , 7 ~8 :R e se rve d
3 , 6 :G N D
4 :SG 5 :SG +
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-134
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
PLC Programming for Master Drive Control
1.
In PLC program, D1110 is used for assigning the slave drive user wishes to control. The range
setting for D1110 is 1~8 (if D1110 is set to 0 slave 8 is assigned).
2.
Once the Slave drive is assigned, set M1035=1 for the Master to control the Slave.
3.
Write control command to the corresponding Slave address then Master is able to control the
Slave drive.
The corresponding registers for Internal Communication are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Setting
Special M
M1035
Description
R/W
Enable internal communication control
RW
Special D Control Setting
Special D
D1110
Description
R/W
Number of internal communication nodes(1~8)
RW
Description
Special D
Definition
Control Command for
D1120 + 10*N Internal Communication
Node N
Contorl Mode for Internal
Communication Node N
Reference Command L of
Internal Communication
D1122 + 10*N
Node N
bit
Priority Speed Mode Position Mode Torque Mode Homing Mode
0
4
1
4
2
4
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
4
2
1
11~8
4
13~12
4
14
4
15
4
Command
Enable
Reverse
Command
Momentary
Stop
Frequency
Locked
JOG
Quick Stop
Servo ON
Switch
Multi-step
Speed
Switch
Deceleration
Time
Enable Bit
13 ~ 8
Clear Fault
Code
-
-
Return to
Origin Point
Switch
-
-
Momentary
Stop
-
-
-
-
-
-
Quick Stop
Servo ON
Switch
Multi-step
Speed
Quick Stop
Servo ON
Momentary
Stop
Quick Stop
Servo ON
-
-
-
-
-
R/W
RW
Enable Bit
13 ~ 8
Clear Fault
Code
-
-
Clear Fault
Code
Clear Fault
Code
0
1
2
3
RW
Speed
Command
(unsigned
decimal)
Position
Command
(signed
decimal)
Torque
Command
(signed
decimal)
-
RW
Speed Limit
-
RW
D1121 + 10*N
Reference Command H of
D1123 + 10*N Internal Communication
Node N
※ N=0~7
-
Special D Status
Special D
D1115
D1116
D1117
Description
Synchronous time cycle of internal communication(ms)
Internal communication node error (bit0= Slave 1, bit1= Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave
8)
Corresponding on-line bit of internal communication node (bit0= Slave 1, bit1=
16-135
R/W
RO
RO
RO
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Special D
Description
R/W
Description
R/W
Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave 8)
Special D
Definition
bit
Definition
bit
Definition
0
Frequency Attained
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Warning
Error
JOG
Quick Stop
SERVO ON
Position Attained
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Warning
Error
Torque Attained
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Warning
Error
Homing Completed
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Warning
Error
Quick Stop
SERVO ON
Quick Stop
SERVO ON
D1127 + 10*N
Actual Frequency
D1128 + 10*N
※ N=0~7
-
Actual Position
(signed decimal)
Quick Stop
SERVO ON
Actual Torque
(signed decimal)
-
1
2
3
5
6
7
D1126 + 10*N
-
bit
RO
RO
-
Example: The PLC programming diagram below shows how to use ‘Internal Communication’ to
control the frequency of Slave 1 and switches between 30.00Hz and 60.00 Hz.
Diagram 1: Detects Slave drive on-line status and check if error occurs. Then set internal
communication node 0 to the control command user wishes to control.
0
M1000
K1M700
MOV D1117
Node 0 online
Internal node
Line correspondence
operation Monitoring
opening Point (a)
MOV D1126
Internal node
Status of 0
MOV K4M200
Node 0 ack
K4M250
Node 0 arrive
D1120
Internal node 0
(M1035)
Enable internal communication control
16-136
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Diagram 2: When Slave 1 on-line status is detected, it will delay for 3 seconds before control
command is enabled.
17
M700
MOVP K0 D1121
Internal node control mode
Node 0 online
TMR
T0
K30
T0
Enable Control Delay
( M100 )
Enable Control
Enable Control Delay
T0
( M215 )
Reset
Enable Control Delay
33
M100
MOVP K0 D1121
Internal node control mode
Enable Control
( M207 )
Node 0 Servo On
( M200 )
Node 0 Ack
Diagram 3: Commanding Slave 1 to forward run in 30.00Hz for 1 second and reverse run in 60.00Hz
for 1 second and repeats frequency switching.
41
M300
MOV K3000 D1122
+30.00Hz
52
Reference command of Internal Node 0
M250
TMR
Node 0 arrive
M301
( M200 )
Rev
-60.00Hz
MOV
M302
K6000
D1122
Reference command of Internal Node 0
M250
64
K10
T10
TMR
Node 0 arrive
MOV
Repeat
K10
T11
K1
K1M300
+30.00Hz
M100
73
Enable control
M100
M300 T10
+30.00Hz
Enable control
M301 T11
ROLP K4M300
+30.00Hz
K1
-60.00Hz
84
END
16-137
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-11 Counting Function via MI8
The Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) can be used for single direction Pulse counting and provides
a maximum speed of 100K. To initiate MI8 for counting, simply set M1038 to ON and the count value
will be saved to D1054 and D1055 in 32bit signed decimal. When M1039 is ON, counting value will
reset to 0.
0
M1000
MOV
Operation Monitoring
Opening Point (a)
M0
13
M1
D0
MI8 current calculating value
MOV
11
D1054
D1055
D1
MI8 current calculating value
(M1038)
MI8 Start counting
(M1039)
calculated
value
RESETMI8
15
END
※ When PLC program M1038 and M1039 uses MI8 for counting function, the previous AC
motor drive setting of MI8 is disabled and have no function.
16-138
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-12 Remote IO Control Application of
MODBUS (using Modbus)
C2000 internal PLC supports reading and writing of 485, and it is realized by MODRW command. But
before programming, it is necessary to define the serial as PLC 485, which sets P09-31 = -12. After
setting, standard Function defined by 485 can be used to read or write command to other nodes.
Communication speed definition can be set in 09-01. Communication protocol can be set in P09-04, and
current PLC node definition can be set in P09-35. So far, the Functions supported by C2000 are:
Reading Coil (H1), Reading Input (0x02), Reading Register (0x03), Writing single Register (0x06), Writing
multiple Coils (0x0F) and writing multiple Register (0x10). Explanation as below:
MODRW Command
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
Cor.
Node Comm. Addr.
D
Meaning
Slave is Delta PLC
Slave is Delta Motor Drive
Length
register
K3
K3
K3
K3
H01
H02
H03
H06
H500
H400
H600
H610
D0
D10
D20
D30
K18
K10
K3
XX
Read Coil
(Bit)
Read Input
(Bit)
Read Register
(word)
Read single
H0F
H509
D40
K10
Coil
(Bit)
K3
H10
H602
D50
K4
Y21, and save to master bit 0~ bit
Does not support this Function
15 of D0 and bit 0 ~ bit 3 of D1
Read slave 3 PLC 10 bits from X0 ~
X11, and save to master bit 0~ bit 9 Does not support this Function
of D10
Read slave 3 PLC 3 words of
Read slave 3 motor drive 3
T0~T2, and save to master D20 ~
words from 06-00~06-02, and
D22
save to master D20 ~ D22
Write slave 3 PLC to T16 from
Write slave 3 motor drive to
Register (word) master D30
Read multiple
K3
Read slave 3 PLC 18 bits from Y0 ~
Write slave 3 PLC to Y11~Y12 from
master bit 0~bit 9 of D40
Read multiple Write slave 3 PLC to T2~T5 from
Register (word) master D50~D53
06-16 from master D30
Does not support this Function
Write slave 3 motor drive to
06-02 ~ 06-05 from master
D50~D53
※ XX means Disregard
When executing MODRW，the status will be shown in M1077 (485 reading and writing complete),
M1078(485 reading and writing error), and M1079 (485 reading and writing time out). The definition
of M1077 will be cleared as 0 when commanding MODRW. When feedback is complete, error, or
time out, M1099 will be set as On.
16-139
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Example program：Each function testing
The first command will be transfer timing when turning on.
0
M1002
K4M0
K1
MOV
On only for 1 scan a
When feedback is finished without error, switch to next command
6
M1077 M1078 M1079
ROLP
485 R/W 485 R/W 485 R/W
rite is co rite is fail rite is time 0
K4M0
K1
When there are Time out or feedback errors, M1077 will be ON, and after 30 times scan cycle,
commanding again
14
M1077
ADD
485 R/W rite is co
D30 K40
33
D30
K1 D30
MOV K0 D30
( M200 )
Delay cycle
M1002
( M100 )
ReqTXOnce
ON only for 1 scan a
M200
Delay cycle
36
M100
ReqTXOnce
M0
MODRW K2
H1 H500 D200
MODRW K2
HF H500 D100
MODRW K2
H2 H410 D201
MODRW K3
H3 H2100 D300
MODRW K2
H2 H410 D201
M1
M2
M3
M4
After finishing all commands, repeat again
102
M5
MOV K1 K4M0
INC
D30 K40
D1
MOV K1 K4M0
121
END
Example：
16-140
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
To control RTU-485.
Step 1：Set communication protocol, assuming communication protocol is 115200，8,N,2，RTU
C2000：PLC default node is 2 (9-35)
9-31=-12(COM1 controlled by PLC)，9-01=115.2 (communication speed is 115200)
9-04=13( protocol is 8,N,2，RTU)
RTU485：node = 8 (example)
ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 DR2 DR1 DR0 A/R
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
Communication station #:
ID0~ ID7 are defined as 2 0 , 2 1, 2 2 ...2 6 , 2 7
Communication protocol
Communication Protocol
Communicaton Speed
16-141
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 2: Setting controlled equipments. We can connect DVP16-SP(8 IN 8 OUT), DVP-04AD
(4 channels AD)、DVP02DA(2 channels DA) and DVP-08ST(8 switches) to RTU 485 sequentially.
With RTU485 definition, correspond terminals as below:
DVP-04AD(4 channels AD)、DVP02DA(2 channels DA) and
DVP-08ST(8 switches)
Module
DVP16-SP
Terminals 485 Address
X0 ~ X7
0400H ~ 0407H
Y0 ~ Y7
0500H ~ 0507H
DVP-04AD AD0 ~ AD3
1600H ~ 1603H
DA0 ~ DA1
1640H ~ 1641H
DVP02DA
DVP-08ST Switch 0 ~ 7 0408H ~ 040FH
Step 3：Physical configuration
16-142
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 4：Programming PLC
16-143
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-144
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
Step 5：Real action:
I/O testing：Toggling Switch, the corresponding reaction of M115 ~ M108 can be observed. In
addition, the signals of output can be also observed (every one second add 1) (Binary display)
This light signal increase
by 1number per second.
WPL will be modified
when pressing this Switch
AD DA testing：D200 and D201 is around 2 times of D300, and keep increasing; D202 and D203 is
around 2 times of D301, and keep decreasing.
16-145
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-146
Chapter 16 PLC Function CH2000 Series
16-147
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
Chapter 17 How to Select the Right
AC Motor Drive
17-1 Capacity formula
17-2 General Precautions
17-3 How to choose a suitable motor
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its
lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and
motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required
performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power
and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on
your requirements.
Item
Related Specification
Speed and torque
Time
Overload
characteristics
ratings
capacity
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Load type
Inertia load
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Load speed and
Constant output
torque
Decreasing torque
characteristics
Decreasing output
Constant load
Shock load
Load
Repetitive load
characteristics
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification
●
Starting
torque
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
17-1
●
●
●
●
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
17-1 Capacity Formulas
1.
When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
kN
GD 2 N
TL
1.5 the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive ( kVA)
973 cos
375 t A
2.
When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
The starting capacity=
kN
nT nsks 1 PC11 ns ks 1 1.5 the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
cos
nT
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
The starting capacity=
kN
nT nsks 1 PC11 ns ks 1 the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
cos
nT
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
nT IM 1 nnTS kS 1 1.5 the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
nT IM 1 nnTS kS 1 the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
17-2
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
2.3 When it is running continuously
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k PM
the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
cos
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k 3 VM IM 103 the _ capacity_ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k IM the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Symbol explanation
PM
: Motor shaft output for load (kW)
η
: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
cos
: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
VM
: Motor rated voltage(V)
IM
k
: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on PWM
method)
PC1
: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
kS
: Starting current/rated current of motor
nT
: Number of motors in parallel
nS
GD
: Number of simultaneously started motors
2
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
TL
: Load torque
tA
: Motor acceleration time
N
: Motor speed
17-3
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
17-2 General Precaution
Selection Note
1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or
above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power
input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor
(optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power
efficiency.
2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor
Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current 1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents).
3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the
overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. (Direct On-Line),
a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is
required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher
capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.
4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive
output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external
mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with
the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the
upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause
overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended.
3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a
length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time
with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the required time, either use
an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration
time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.
17-4
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
17-3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following
precautions:
1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may
rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external
forced motor cooling.
3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased.
4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
40% 60%
100
torque(%)
82
70
60
50
0
continuous
3 6
20
Frequency (Hz)
60
5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter
duty motor.
6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed
exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply
drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected.
8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount
equipment that runs at varying speed.
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher
frequency.
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor
needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too
high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
17-5
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCH2000 Series
2. Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between AC motor
drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements.
Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions.
4. Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be
different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed
and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
5. Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before
operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC motor drive
operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and
chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime
reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power
are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive
Motor
180
60 seconds
100
80
55
38
03 20
55
38
60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
180
150
60 seconds
torque (%)
torque (%)
100
0 3 20
60
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
140
130
60 seconds
155
torque (%)
torque (%)
180
155
140
100
85
68
45
35
60 seconds
100
80
45
35
0 3 20 50
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
03 20
50
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
17-6
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error
Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives
18-1 Maintenance and Inspections
18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem
18-3 Fiber Dust Problem
18-4 Erosion Problem
18-5 Industrial Dust Problem
18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem
18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms
and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated.
The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. The six most
recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
The AC motor drive is made up by numerous components, such as electronic components, including IC,
resistor, capacity, transistor, and cooling fan, relay, etc. These components can’t be used permanently.
They have limited-life even under normal operation. Preventive maintenance is required to operate this
AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life.
Check your AC motor drive regularly to ensure there are no abnormalities during operation and follows
the precautions:
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of
input terminal.
When the power is off after 5 minutes for ≦ 22kW models and 10 minutes for ≧
30kW models, please confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by
measuring the voltage between + and -. The voltage between + and - should be less
than 25VDC.
Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools
are allowed.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
Make sure that installation environment comply with regulations without abnormal
noise, vibration and smell.
18-1
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-1 Maintenance and Inspections
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-. The voltage between DC+ and
DC-should be less than 25VDC.
Ambient environment
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Check the ambient temperature, humidity,
Visual inspection and
vibration and see if there are any dust, gas,
measurement with equipment
oil or water drops
with standard specification
If there are any dangerous objects
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
○
Voltage
Maintenance
Check if the voltage of main circuit and
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Measure with multimeter with ○
control circuit is correct
standard specification
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Digital Keypad Display
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Is the display clear for reading
Visual inspection
Any missing characters
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
○
Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration
Visual and aural inspection
If there are any loose screws
Tighten the screws
○
If any part is deformed or damaged
Visual inspection
○
If there is any color change by overheating
Visual inspection
○
If there is any dust or dirt
Visual inspection
○
18-2
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
Main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
If there are any loose or missing screws
If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked,
damaged or with color change due to
overheating or ageing
If there is any dust or dirt
Methods and Criterion
Tighten or replace the screw
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the
○
color change of copper
plate
○
Visual inspection
Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
If the terminal or the plate is color change or
deformation due to overheat
If the insulator of wiring is damaged or color
change
If there is any damage
Methods and Criterion
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
○
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
○
DC capacity of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
If there is any leak of liquid, color change,
crack or deformation
If the safety valve is not removed? If valve is
inflated?
Methods and Criterion
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
○
○
Measure static capacity when required
Resistor of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
If there is any peculiar smell or insulator
cracks due to overheat
If there is any disconnection
If connection is damaged?
Methods and Criterion
Visual inspection, smell
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
Visual inspection
○
Measure with multimeter with
○
standard specification
18-3
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar
Visual, aural inspection and
smell
smell
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
If there are any loose screws
Visual and aural inspection
If the contact works correctly
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
○
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Tighten the screws and
If there are any loose screws and connectors
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
press the connectors firmly
in place.
If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual and smell inspection
○
If there is any crack, damage, deformation or
○
Visual inspection
corrosion
If there is any liquid is leaked or deformation in
capacity
Visual inspection
○
Cooling fan of cooling system
Maintenance
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Visual, aural inspection and
turn the fan with hand (turn
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration
off the power before
○
operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any loose screw
Tighten the screw
○
If there is any color change due to overheat
Change fan
○
18-4
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
Ventilation channel of cooling system
Maintenance
Check Items
If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air
intake or air outlet
Methods and Criterion
Visual inspection
Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
○
NOTE
Please use the neutral cloth for clean and use dust cleaner to remove dust when necessary.
18-5
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem
Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools,
punching machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause
to your drive:
1.
Electronic components that silt up with greasy oil may cause the drive to burn out or even
explode.
2.
Most greasy dirt contains corrosive substances that may damage the drive.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from dirt. Clean and remove greasy
dirt regularly to prevent damage of the drive.
18-6
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-3 Fiber Dust Problem
Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible
damages that fiber may cause to your drives:
1.
Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans will lead to poor ventilation and cause
overheating problems.
2.
Plant environments in the textile industry have higher degrees of humidity that may cause the
drive to burn out, become damaged or explode due to wet fiber dust adhering to the devices.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fiber dust. Clean and remove
fiber dust regularly to prevent damage to the drive.
18-7
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-4 Erosion Problem
Erosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the damages that
erosion may cause to your drive.
1.
Erosion of internal components may cause the drive to malfunction and possibility to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fluids. Clean the drive regularly
to prevent erosion.
18-8
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-5 Industrial Dust Problem
Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in stone processing plants, flour mills, cement
plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damage that industrial dust may cause to your
drives:
1.
Dust accumulating on electronic components may cause overheating problem and shorten the
service life of the drive.
2.
Conductive dust may damage the circuit board and may even cause the drive to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet and cover the drive with a dust cover. Clean the
cabinet and ventilation hole regularly for good ventilation.
18-9
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem
When wiring the drive, the most common problem is wrong wire installation or poor wiring. Please be
aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives:
1.
Screws are not fully fastened. Occurrence of sparks as impedance increases.
2.
If a customer has opened the drive and modified the internal circuit board, the internal
components may have been damaged.
Solution:
Ensure all screws are fastened when installing the AC motor drive. If the AC motor drive functions
abnormally, send it back to the repair station. DO NOT try to reassemble the internal components or
wire.
18-10
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives CH2000 Series
18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem
Multi-function input/output terminal errors are generally caused by over usage of terminals and not
following specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that errors on multi-function
input/output terminals may cause to your drives:
1.
Input/output circuit may burns out when the terminal usage exceeds its limit.
Solution:
Refer to the user manual for multi-function input output terminals usage and follow the specified
voltage and current. DO NOT exceed the specification limits.
18-11
Chapter 19 Application of CH2000
Crane Application
More flexible settings of crane function are added to CH2000. One of the features is that
the checking conditions of mechanical brake can be set independently (by checking
frequency or current) or relatively (by checking frequency and current). In addition, the
open and close of mechanical brake also can be set independently, which means there can
be one set of checking conditions for mechanical brake open and one set for mechanical
brake close. These two sets can be different.
Crane function
Multi-functional output (MO= 42)
Crane function combines multi-function output and time sequence setting. This function
works through checking frequency and current to trigger mechanical brake. The output
torque and mechanical braking torque can be switched smoothly via brake delay time to
reduce the instability in the operation which can increase the efficiency and ensure the
safety for crane hoist system
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Factory settings
02-32
Brake Delay Time
0.000~65.000
sec.
0.000
02-33
Output Current Level Setting
for Multi-function External
Terminals
Output frequency setting
for multi-function output
terminal
Multi-function output terminal:
Function 42: Brake Current
Checking Point
Multi-function output terminal:
Function 42: Brake Frequency
Checking Point
0~100%
0
0.00~±60.00HZ
0.00
0~100%
0
0.00~±60.00HZ
0.00
02-34
02-57
02-58
19-1
Example:
Mechanical Brake Open
When output frequency is greater than and equal to 02-34, and output current is
greater than and equal to 02-33. 02-32 (Brake delay time) will be triggered.
When output frequency attains to 07-16, it will remain at the value of 07-16 until the
time set in 07-15. In this sequence of time mechanical brake open from closing, but the
mechanical brake will not wear because the output frequency maintains in the same
level.
After 07-15, motor drive starts to accelerate to command frequency.
Mechanical Brake Close
When output frequency is less than 02-58, or output current is less than 02-57 (one of
the conditions is checked). 02-32 (Brake delay time) will start to count.
When output frequency attains down to 07-18, it will remain at the value of 07-18 until
the time set in 07-17. In this sequence of time mechanical brake close from opening,
and the slipping can be avoided because the output frequency maintains in the same
level.
After 07-15, motor drive starts to decelerate to stop.
If only frequency checking would be use, please set 1% at 02-57.
If 02-57 is set at 0, then the mechanical brake close checking conditions will depend on
02-33 and 02-58.
19-2
Appendix: AC Motor Drives
EMC Standard Installation Guide
EMC Compliance Practice
APP-I
Preface
When an AC motor drive is installed in a noisy environment, radiated and/or conducted noise via
signal and power cables can interfere with the correct functioning, cause errors or even damage to
the drive. To prevent this, some AC motor drives have an enhanced noise resistance but the
results are limited and it is not economical. Therefore, an effective method would be finding the
cause of the noise and use the right solution to achieve “no emission, no transmission and no
reception of noise”. All three solutions should be applied.
Finding the Noise
Ascertain whether the error is caused by noise.
Find the source of the noise and its transmission path.
Confirm the signal and the source of noise
Solutions
Grounding
Shielding
Filtering
APP-II
Table of Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................... I
Table of Contents................................................................................................... II
Chapter 1 Introduction............................................................................................ 1
1.1 What is EMC ............................................................................................. 1
1.2 EMC for AC Motor Drive ........................................................................... 1
Chapter 2 How to prevent EMI ............................................................................... 2
2.1 Types of EMI: common-mode and differential mode noise ....................... 2
2.2 How does EMI transmit? (Noise transmission) ......................................... 2
Chapter 3 Solution to EMI: Grounding ................................................................... 4
3.1 Protective Grounding & Functional Grounding.......................................... 4
3.2 Ground Loops ........................................................................................... 5
3.3 Earthing Systems ...................................................................................... 5
Chapter 4 Solution to EMI: Shielding ..................................................................... 9
4.1 What is Shielding? .................................................................................... 9
4.2 How to Reduce EMI by Shielding?.......................................................... 10
Chapter 5 Solution to EMI: Filter .......................................................................... 12
5.1 Filter ........................................................................................................ 12
5.2 Harmonic Interference............................................................................. 14
APP-III
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device to function properly in
electromagnetic environments. It does not emit electromagnetic noise to surrounding equipment and is
immune to interference from surrounding equipment. The goal is to achieve high immunity and low
emission; these two properties define the quality of EMC. In general, electrical devices react to high and
low frequency phenomena. High frequency phenomena are electrostatic discharge (ESD); pulse
interference; radiated electromagnetic field; and conducted high frequency electrical surge. Low
frequency phenomena refer to mains power harmonics and imbalance.
The standard emission and immunity levels for compliance depend on the installation location of the drive.
A Power Drive System (PDS) is installed in an industrial or domestic environment. A PDS in a domestic
environment must have lower emission levels and is allowed to have lower immunity levels. A PDS in an
industrial environment is allowed to have higher emission levels but must have more severe immunity
levels.
1.2 EMC for AC Motor Drive
When an AC motor drive is put into operation, harmonic signal will occur at the AC drive’s power input
and output side. It creates a certain level of electromagnetic interference to the surrounding electrical
devices and the mains power network. An AC motor dive is usually applied in industrial environments with
a strong electromagnetic interference. Under such conditions, an AC drive could disturb or be disturbed.
Delta’s AC motor drives are designed for EMC and comply with EMC standard EN61800-3 2004.
Installing the AC motor drive accurately will decrease EMI influences and ensure long term stability of the
electricity system. It is strongly suggested to follow Delta’s user manual for wiring and grounding. If any
difficulties or problems arise, please follow the instructions and measures as indicated in this EMC
Standard Installation Guide.
1
Chapter 2 How to prevent EMI
2.1 Types of EMI: Common-mode and differential-mode noise
The electromagnetic noise of an AC motor drive can be distinguished into common-mode and differentialmode noise. Differential-mode noise is caused by the stray capacitance between the conducting wires
and common-mode noise is caused by the common-mode coupling current path created by the stray
capacitance between the conducting wires and ground.
Basically, differential-mode noise has a greater impact to the AC motor drive and common-mode noise
has a greater impact to high-sensitivity electronic devices. An excessive amount of differential-mode
noise may trigger the circuit protection system of the AC motor drive. Common-mode noise affects
peripheral electronic devices via the common ground connection.
EMC problems can be more serious when the following conditions apply:
When a large horsepower AC motor drive is connected to a large horsepower motor.
The AC motor drive’s operation voltage increases.
Fast switching of the IGBTs.
When a long cable is used to connect the motor to the AC motor drive.
2.2
How does EMI transmit? (Noise transmission path)
Noise disturbs peripheral high-sensitivity electrical devices/systems via conduction and radiation, their
transmission paths are shown hereafter:
1. Noise current in the unshielded power cable is conducted to ground via stray capacitances into a
common-mode voltage. Whether or not other modules are capable to resist this common-mode noise
depends on their Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR), as shown in the following figure.
Noise
Unshielded cable
Receive
Send
Load
Cstray
Ground
2. Common-mode noise in the power cable is transmitted through the stray capacitance and coupled
into the adjacent signal cable, as shown in Figure 2. Several methods can be applied to reduce the
effect of this common-mode noise; for example, shield the power cable and/or the signal cables,
separate the power and signal cables, take the input and output side of the signal cable and twist
them together to balance out the stray capacitance, let power cables and signal cables cross at 90°,
etc.
2
Unshielded cable
Noise
Cstray
Power
supply
System
Cable
Ground
3. Common-mode noise is coupled via the power cable to other power systems then the cable of such a
power system is coupled to the transmission system, as shown in Figure 3.
Unshielded cable
Noise
Cstray
Receive
Send
Load
Ground
4. The common-mode noise of an unshielded power cable is transmitted to the ground via the stray
capacitance. Since both shielded wire and unshielded wire are connected to a common ground, other
systems can be interfered with by the common-mode noise that is transmitted from the ground back
to the system via the shield. See Figure 4.
Noise
Unshielded cable
Send
Receive
Cstray
Load
Cstray
Ground
5. When excessive pulse modulated currents pass through an un-grounded AC drive cable, it acts as an
antenna and creates radiated interference.
3
Chapter 3 Solution to EMI: Grounding
The leakage current of an electronic equipment is conducted to ground via the grounding wire and the
ground electrode. According to Ohm's law, potential differences may arise when the electrode’s ground
and the ground’s ground resistance are different.
According to Ohm's law, the earth resistance for electrode and the ground are different,
in this case potential differences may arise.
3.1 Protective Grounding & Functional Grounding
Please carefully read the following instruction if two types of grounding are applied at the same time.
Protective grounding is applied outside buildings and must have low resistance. On the other hand,
functional grounding can be applied inside buildings and must have low impedance.
The goal of EMC is to avoid any interference effects. Grounding for EMC can be distinguished by
frequency. For frequencies lower than 10kHz, a single-point ground system should be used and for
frequencies higher than 10 kHz, a multiple point ground system should be used.
Single Point Grounding: all signal grounds of all IT equipment are connected in series to form a single
reference point. This point can be grounded directly to earth; to the designated grounding point or to
the safety point that is already grounded.
Multiple Point Grounding: all signals of all IT equipment are grounded independently.
Hybrid Grounding: this type of grounding behaves differently for low and high frequencies. When two
pieces of IT equipment (A and B) are connected via a shielded cable, one end is connected directly to
ground while the other end is connected to ground via a capacitor. This type of grounding system
fulfils the criteria for high and low frequency grounding.
Floating grounding: the signals of all IT equipment are isolated from each other and are not grounded.
DC current flows evenly throughout the conductor section. But AC current flows towards the conductor’s
surface as frequency increases; this is called the “skin effect”. It causes the effective cross-section area to
be reduced with increasing frequency. Therefore it is suggested to increase the effective ground crosssection area for high frequencies by replacing pigtail grounding by braided conductors or strip conductors.
Refer to the following figure.
Pigtail
HF
1
LF-HF
2
1
Braided
strapl
3
This is why a thick short ground wire must be implemented for connecting to the common grounding path
or the ground busbar. Especially when a controller (e.g. PLC) is connected to an AC motor drive, it must
be grounded by a short and thick conducting wire. It is suggested to use a flat braided conductor (ex:
metal mesh) with a lower impedance at high frequencies.
If the grounding wire is too long, its inductance may interfere structure of the building or the control
cabinet and form mutual inductance and stray capacitance. As shown in the following figure, a long
grounding wire could become a vertical antenna and turn into a source of noise.
4
Long PE
Painted
sheet metal
HF
3.2 Ground Loops
A ground loop occurs when the pieces of equipment are connected to more than one grounding path. In
this case, the ground current may return to the grounding electrode via more than one path. There are
three methods to prevent ground loops
1. Use a common power circuit
2. Single point grounding
3. Isolate signals, e.g. by photocouplers
Good
Cable
Cable
Equipment
Equipment
Equipment
A
B
A
Accompanying cable
Equipment
B
Very good
Cable
Earth plane
Earth plane
In order to avoid “Common Mode Noise”, please use parallel wires or twisted pair wiring. Follow this rule
and also avoid long wires, it is suggested to place the two wires as close to each other as possible.
3.3 Earthing Systems
The international standard IEC60364 distinguishes three different earthing system categories, using the
two-letter codes TN, TT, IT.
The first letter indicates the type of earthing for the power supply equipment (generator or
transformer).
T: One or more points of the power supply equipment are connected directly to the same earthing
point.
I: Either no point is connected to earth (isolated) or it is connected to earth via a high impedance.
The second letter indicates the connection between earth and the power supply equipment.
T: Connected directly to earth (This earthing point is separate from other earthing points in the power
supply system.)
N: Connected to earth via the conductor that is provided by the power supply system
The third and forth letter indicate the location of the earth conductor.
S: Neutral and earth conductors are separate
C: Neutral and earth are combined into a single conductor
5
TN system
TN: The neutral point of the low voltage transformer or generator is earthed, usually the star point in a
three-phase system. The body of the electrical device is connected to earth via this earth connection at
the transformer.
protective earth (PE): The conductor that connects the exposed metallic parts of the consumer.
neutral (N): The conductor that connects to the start point in a 3-phase system or that carries the return
current in a single phase system.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
TN-S system
TN-S: PE and N are two separate conductors that are combined together only near the power source
(transformer or generator). It is the same as a three-phase 5-wire system.
TN-C system
TN-C: PE and N are two separate conductors in an electrical installation similar to a three-phase 5wire
system, but near the power side, PE and N are combined into a PEN conductor similar to a three-phase 4
wire system.
6
Generator or
transformer
L1
L2
L3
PEN
Earth
Consumer
TN-C-S system
TN-C-S: A combined earth and neutral system (PEN conductor) is used in certain systems but eventually
split up into two separate conductors PE and N. A typical application of combined PEN conductor is from
the substation to the building but within the building PEN is separated into the PE and N conductors.
Direct connection of PE and N conductors to many earthing points at different locations in the field will
reduce the risk of broken neutrals. Therefore this application is also known as protective multiple earthing
(PME) in the UK or as multiple earthed neutral (MEN )in Australia
Generator or
transformer
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Earth
Consumer
TT system
TT: The neutral point (N) of the low voltage transformer and the equipment frames (PE) are connected to
a separate earthing point. The Neutral (N) of the transformer and electrical equipment are connected.
7
IT system
IT: The neutral point of the transformer and electrical equipment are not earthed, only the equipment
frames PE are earthed.
In the IT network, the power distribution system Neutral is either not connected to earth or is earthed via a
high impedance. In such a system, an insulated monitoring device is used for impedance monitoring.
A built-in filter should be disconnected by the RFI-jumper and an external filter should not be installed
when the AC motor drive or the AC servo motor drive is connected to an IT system.
Criteria for earthing system and EMC
Safety of
Personnel
Safety of property
Availability of
energy
EMC behavior
TN-S
Good
TN-C
Good
TT
Good
Continuity of the PE
conductor must be
ensured throughout
the installation
Poor
Continuity of the PE
conductor must be
ensured throughout
the installation
Poor
RCD is mandatory
High fault current
(around 1kA)
High fault current
(around 1kA)
Medium fault current
(< a few dozen
amperes)
Good
Good
Good
Good
Excellent
Poor
(prohibited)
Good
Few equipotential
Problems:
- Need to handle
the high leaking
currents problem of
the device
- High fault current
(transient
disturbances)
- Neutral and PE are
the same
- Over-voltage risk
- Equipotential
- Circulation of
disturbance
currents in exposed
conductive parts
(high magnetic-field
radiation)
Problems:
- Need to handle the
high leaking
currents problem of
the device
- High fault currents
(transient
disturbances)
- RCD (Residualcurrent device)
IT
Good
Continuity of the PE
conductor must be
ensured throughout
the installation
Good
Low current at the
first fault (< a few
dozen mA) but high
current at the
second fault
Excellent
Poor
(should be avoided)
- Over-voltage risk
- Common–mode
filters and surge
arrestors must
handle the phase
to phase voltage.
- RCDs subject to
nuisance tripping
when commonmode capacitors
are present
- Equivalent to TN
system for second
fault
8
Chapter 4 Solution to EMI: Shielding
4.1 What is Shielding?
Electrostatic shielding is used to isolate equipment so that it will not create electromagnetic field
interference or be influenced by an external electromagnetic field. A conductive material is used for
electrostatic shielding to achieve this isolation.
A Faraday cage can be made from a mesh of metal or a conductive material.
One characteristic of metal is that it is highly conductive and not electrostatic,, which offers shielding and
prevents interference by external electrical fields. Metal with its high conductivity protects the internal
devices from high voltages—no voltage will enter the cage even when the cage is experiencing a high
current. In addition, electromagnetic fields can also pass through the Faraday cage without causing any
disturbance.
Electromagnetic shielding is applied to some electrical devices and measurement equipment for the
purpose of blocking interference. Examples of shielding include:
earth high-voltage indoor equipment using a metal frame or a high-density metal mesh
shielding a power transformer is achieved by wrapping a metal sheet between the primary and
secondary windings or by adding an enamel wire to the winding wire which is then earthed.
a shielding coating, which is made of metal mesh or conductive fibers to provide effective protection
for the workers who work in a high-voltage environment.
In the picture below, the radio appears to be not fully covered by metal but if the conductivity of the metal
is high, radio waves are completely blocked and the radio will not receive any signal.
Mobile phone connections are also established through the transmission of radio waves. This is why the
mobile phone reception is often cut off when we walk into an elevator. The metal walls of the elevator
create the same shielding effect just as if we had entered a metal cage. Another example is a microwave
oven. The microwave door may seem transparent in visible light, but the density of the metal mesh in the
microwave door blocks the electromagnetic waves. A higher density of the metal mesh offers better
shielding.
9
Electromagnetic fields
Wall of
shielded
enclosure
Greater leakage
form bigger
apertures
G=gap
( ap er tu re d im en sio n)
d=depth
( distan ce that fields
have to travel)
Shield in g ef fectiveness
( SE)in dB
80
d=18"
g=6"
60
20
0
0.05
0.2
0.5
"Waveguide below cut-off"
doesn't leak very much
(does not have to be a tube)
d=4"
g=2"
d=6"
g=6"
0.1
d
(depth)
d=6"
g=2"
d=12"
g=6"
40
g
(gap)
d=2"
g=2"
1
GHz
2
F<0.5Fcutoff SE is approximately 27d/g
5
4.2 How to reduce EMI by Shielding?
Iron and other metals are high conductivity materials that provide effective shielding at extremely low
frequencies. But conductivity will decrease as:
1. High frequency signals are applied to the conductor.
2. Equipment is located in a strong magnetic field
3. The shielding frame is forced into a specific form by machines.
It is difficult to select a suitable high-conductivity material for shielding without the help from a shielding
material supplier or a related EMI institution.
Metallic Shielding Effectiveness
Shielding Effectiveness (SE) is used to assess the applicability of the shielding shell. The formula is:
SEdB=A+R+B (Measures in dB)
where A= Absorption loss (dB)
R= Reflection loss (dB)
B= Correction factor (dB) (for multiple reflections in thin
shields)
The absorption loss refers to the amount of energy loss as the electromagnetic wave travels through the
shield. The formula is:
AdB=1.314(fσμ)1/2t
where f= frequency (MHz)
μ= permeability relative to copper
σ= conductivity relative to copper
t= thickness of the shield in centimeters
The reflection loss depends on the source of the electromagnetic wave and the distance from that source.
For a rod or straight wire antenna, the wave impedance increases as it moves closer to the source and
decreases as it moves away from the source until it reaches the plane wave impedance (377) and shows
no change. If the wave source is a small wire loop, the magnetic field is dominant and the wave
impedance decreases as it moves closer to the source and increases as it moves away from the source;
but it levels out at 377 when the distance exceeds one-sixth of the wavelength.
10
Electrical Cabinet Design
In a high frequency electric field, shielding can be achieved by painting a thin layer of conductive metal on
the enclosure or on the internal lining material. However, the coating must be thorough and all parts
should be properly covered without any seams or gaps (just like a Faraday cage). That is only the ideal.
Making a seamless shielding shell is practically impossible since the cage is composed of metal parts. In
some conditions, it is necessary to drill holes in the shielding enclosure for installation of accessories (like
optional cards and other devices).
1. If the metallic components are properly welded using sophisticated welding technology to form an
electrical cabinet, deformation during usage is unlikely to occur. But if the electrical cabinet is
assembled with screws, the protective insulating layer under the screw must be properly removed
before assembly to achieve the greatest conductivity and best shielding.
2. Drilling holes for the installation of wires in the electrical cabinet lowers the shielding effectiveness
and increases the chance of electric waves leaking through the openings and emitting interference.
We recommend that the drilled holes are as narrow as possible. When the wiring holes are not used,
properly cover the holes with metal plates or metal covers. The paint or the coating of the metal plate
and metal cover should be thoroughly removed to ensure a metal-to-metal contact or a conductive
gasket should be installed.
3. Install industrial conductive gaskets to completely seal the electrical cabinet and the cabinet door
without gaps. If conductive gaskets are too costly, please screw the cabinet door to the electrical
cabinet with a short distance between the screws.
4. Reserve a grounding terminal on the electrical cabinet door. This grounding terminal shall not be
painted. If the paint already exists, please remove the paint before grounding.
Electrical wires and cables
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) is a type of cable where two insulated copper wires are twisted together with
a metal mesh surrounding the twisted pair that forms the electromagnetic shielding and can also be used
for grounding.
The individual electrical wires and complete cable are surrounded by (synthetic) rubber that provides
insulation and also protects against damage.
There are two types of electrical cables: high voltage and low voltage. The high voltage cable differs from
the low voltage cable in that it has an additional insulation layer called the dielectric insulator within the
plastic sleeve. The dielectric insulator is the most important component in insulation. The low voltage
cable is usually only filled with a soft polymer material for keeping the internal copper wire in place.
The shield has two functions.
1. To shield the electrical wire and cable.
A. Electric currents increase as power flows through the power cable and generate an electrical field.
Such interference can be suppressed inside the cable by shielding the power cables or the electrical
wires.
B. To form a protective earthing. When the cable core is damaged, the leakage current will flow via
the shield to ground
2. To protect the cable. A power cable used for the computer control purpose generates only relatively
low amount of current inside the cable. Such power cable will not become the source of interferences
but has great possibility to be interfered by the surrounding electrical devices.
Plastic jacket
Dielectric insulator
Metallic shield
Centre core
11
Chapter 5 Solution to EMI: Filter
5.1 Filter
Electromagnetic interference is transmitted in two ways, by radiation and by conduction. The most
effective and economical method of reducing radiated interference is to use shielding and of reducing
conducted interference is to use an electromagnetic filter.
Noise interference can be divided into two categories: high frequency (150kHz~300MHz) and low
frequency (100Hz~3000Hz). High-frequency noise fades more over distance and has a shorter wavelength, while low-frequency noise fades less over distance and has a longer wave-length. Both types of
interference are transmitted through power cables and power leads, affecting the power supply side.
High-frequency interference at the power side can be eliminated or attenuated by mounting a filter. The
filter consists of coils and capacitors. Some drives do not have a built-in filter, in which case the
installation of an external option filter is required. The drawing below shows a standard filter diagram:
A filter is composed of a Differential Mode section (to eliminate noise below 150kHz) and a Common
Mode section (to eliminate noise above 150kHz). For high-frequency noise, the inductor acts as a high
impedance to form an open circuit and the capacitor acts as a low impedance to form a short circuit.
Proper design and dimensioning of inductors and capacitors give a resonant circuit to absorb harmonic
currents. Capacitor Cy is earthed to lead the harmonic currents to the ground.
External Filter
The filter and the AC drive should be installed in the control cabinet or on the mounting plate that is
earthed to ground. The motor cable must be shielded and as short as possible. Please use the filters
recommended by Delta to ensure compliance with EMC standards.
The Shielded
Chassis
IP20/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
Option Kit
Metal Conduits
EMI Filter
L1
L1'
L2
L2'
L3
L3'
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Chassis Grounding
Shielded Motor Cable
Connect to the steel
structure of the building
12
AC Motor Drives with Built-in Filter
1. Since interferences are suppressed by installing an earthed capacitor in the filter, the amount of
current to ground (leakage current) could result in electric shocks to personnel or the power system.
Please be aware of this problem.
2. Since the leakage current to ground can be high, it is crucial to implement protective earthing to
prevent electrical shocks.
Filter Installation (With and Without)
Zero Phase Reactor (Choke)
Interferences can also be suppressed by installing a zero phase reactor at the power supply side and/or
the AC Motor Drive’s output, depending on where the interference is. Since currents are large at the
power input and the AC Motor Drive’s output, please carefully select the magnetic core with suitable
current handling capability. An ideal magnetic material for large currents is compound magnetic powder. It
has a higher current handling capability and higher impedance compared to pure metallic magnetic cores.
It is therefore suitable to implement in a high frequency environment. The impedance can also be
enhanced by increasing the turn ratio.
Zero Phase Reactor Installation
There are two installation methods, depending on the size of the zero phase reactor and the motor cable
length.
1. Wind the motor cable through the middle of a zero-phase reactor 4 times. Place the reactor and the
AC Motor Drive as close to each other as possible.
Zero Phase Reactor
Power
Supply
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
MOTOR
2. Place all wires through the middle of four zero-phase reactors without winding.
Zero Phase Reactor
Power
Supply
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
MOTOR
13
Analog Input Signals
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a capacitor and
a ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
Wind the wires around the core in same direction for 3 times or more.
AVI/ACI/AUI
C
ACM
Ferrite core
5.2
Harmonic Interference
The AC motor drive’s input current is non-linear, the input rectifier generates harmonics. Harmonics must
be limited to within a certain range to avoid impact the mains power and to avoid current distortion to
ensure surrounding devices are not influenced. An AC Motor Drive with built-in DC reactor suppresses
harmonic currents (Total Harmonic Current Distortion THID) effectively and therefore reduces the
harmonic voltage peaks (Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion).
Harmonic Current at the Power Supply Side
(A) Fund amen tal Sin e Wa ve
(6 0Hz)
(A) Fund amen tal Sin e Wa ve
(6 0Hz)
(B) 3 r d Ha rmo nic
(1 80H z)
(B) 5 th Ha rmon ic
(3 00H z)
(C) H armo nica lly
Di sto rte d Wa ve
(C) H armo ni ca lly
Di sto rted Wa ve
Suppression of Harmonic Currents
When a large portion of lower order harmonic currents (5th, 7th, 11th ,etc) occur at the power input,
surrounding devices will be disturbed and the power factor will be low as a result of reactive power.
Installing a reactor at the AC Motor Drive’s input effectively suppresses lower order harmonic currents.
AC Reactor
Installed in series with the power supply and is effective in reducing low order current harmonics.
Features of an AC reactor include:
1. Reduces the harmonic currents to the AC Motor Drive and increases the impedance of the power
supply.
2. Absorbs interferences generated by surrounding devices (such as surge voltages, currents, and
mains surge voltages) and reduce their effect on the AC Motor Drive.
3. Increases the power factor.
14
DC Reactor
A DC-Reactor is installed between the rectifier and the DC-bus capacitor to suppress harmonic currents
and to achieve a higher power factor.
Current Wave Diagrams
Without Reactor
150
150
100
100
50
50
0
0
-50
-50
-100
-100
With Reactor
-150
-150
0
50
100
150
200
250 300
350
400 450
500
0
50
15
100
150
200
250 300
350
400 450
500
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : No
Author : DAVID.KANG 康湟順
Create Date : 2013:06:03 02:39:23+08:00
Modify Date : 2013:06:03 16:13:40+08:00
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Metadata Date : 2013:06:03 16:13:40+08:00
Creator Tool : Adobe Acrobat 9.2.0
Format : application/pdf
Title : CH2000使用手冊_cover_Eng
Creator : DAVID.KANG 康湟順
Document ID : uuid:1bbd682c-6ca8-4e3f-958b-93f5cf3b8d4d
Instance ID : uuid:a02a1223-c52c-4d02-89c9-7aa8f36308c9
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.2.0
Page Count : 638
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
.